Class. Book. COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT COLLEGIATE COURSE IN THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. BY JEAN GUSTAVE K E E T E L, S , PBOFESSOB OP FRENCH AND GERMAN IN THE BROOKLYN POLYTECHNIC INSTITUTE. NEW YOEK: SHELDON, BLAKEMAIsT, AKD COMPAFT, No. 115 NASSAU-STKEET. 1857. TO* 5 .*?;* Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1856, by SHELDON, BLAKEMAN, AND COMPANY, In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern District of New York. I: Valkntink, Stereotype* JOHN H. RAYMOND, LL.D., PRESIDENT OP THE BROOKLYN COLLEGIATE AND POLYTECHNIC INSTITUTE, IN WHOM ABE FOUND UNITED THE NOBLEST QUALITIES OF THE HEART, WITH A EEFINED TASTE AND EAEE LITEEAEY ATTAINMENTS, STJfs Volume IS OOEDIALLY DEDICATED AS A TEIBUTE OF EESPEOT AND BEATITUDE, BY ITS AUTHOR. PREFACE. Sevekal years ago, I undertook the task of composing a course of lessons in the French language. In the present volume, I offer the result of my labor to the public. My object has been to prepare a book that should teach the living language, and, at the same time, the principles which govern its construction. I have endeavored to be as practical as is consistent with my design, that students should, while acquiring the lan- guage, also study its grammar. Words and sentences may be learned by heart, without the aid of grammar ; but he certainly would labor under great disadvantage, who should endeavor to learn a foreign tongue, and re- main ignorant of its principles, and the technical terms by which grammar designates and explains them: he would lose the benefit of a systematic and philosophical arrangement, digested and prepared for the purpose. But were it otherwise, a course which excludes a sys- tematic training in the principles of an art it professes to teach, must fail in the important result, which is the VI PREFACE. aim alike of all branches of education, the disciplining of the mind, the developing of its inherent powers. The problem, then, which the art of teaching a lan- guage proposes is, to combine the theoretical and prac- tical, in such a manner, that principle and practice, harmoniously and skilfully interwoven, may prompt each other, and develop the language gradually before the mind of the scholar. In my attempt to solve this pro- blem, I have been careful to subordinate the theoretical to the practical, so that no fact is set forth, involving a principle which has not first been fully explained; and, on the other hand, no principle is introduced with which the scholar may not at once become practically conversant. For this purpose, each lesson is composed of four parts : First, the Subject, introducing the principles, with the facts which illustrate them; Second, a Vocabulary of words, selected so as to suit the subject of the lesson and the progress of the scholar, and arranged in such a man- ner, that the difficulty of the genders may be overcome with comparatively little labor ; Third, a French Exer- cise, often assuming the form of a conversation, in which the subject-matter of the lesson is rehearsed in various ways ; Fourth, an English Exercise, to be translated into French. (See Suggestions, p. xi.) I state with confidence, that this Course presents a more extensive view of the French language thpn anv PREFACE. vil other published in this country. The grammar part will be found more complete than it usually is, in works of this kind ; many subjects, otherwise dry and intricate, have been treated in a manner which will render them, it is believed, both intelligible and interesting to the student. The Examples ancl^ Exercises have all been framed with a view to practical usefulness: conversa- tional language and dialogues are introduced as early as the progress of the scholar admits. The distribution of the several theoretical parts, and the order in which they are arranged and treated, are the result of much study : more than six years ago, I began to investigate the road which I was to follow ; I have sounded my path step by step ; and from the first, I have not ceased reflecting on my plan, maturing and reducing it to the form best adapted to its purpose. I have not wholly relied on my own judgment and experience, but have frequently availed myself of the opinions of judicious friends ; I would acknowledge, in particular, the important service rendered me by Mr. Eobert E. Eaymond, Professor of the English Language and Literature in the Brooklyn Polytechnic Institute, in revising the English portion of the work. The present is called "A Collegiate Course in the French Language," because designed more particular- 'y for scholars who are sufficiently advanced in their Vlll PREFACE. English studies, to understand the technical language which an explanation of the principles of grammar re- quires ; but it may be used to advantage by all classes of students. It is my intention, if the present volume meets with approbation, to prepare a shorter work for juvenile pupils. Teachers and scholars, who intend to use this book, are recommended to read the Suggestions which follow. They are made after mature reflection ; and the course they indicate, will, I am confident, insure the success which I wish to all who earnestly seek a knowledge of the courteous tongue of France, the foremost exponent of modern civilization. Jean Gustave Keetels. Brooklyn, Oct. 30th, 1856. CONTENTS. I. — Preface v II. — Suggestions to Teachers and Pupils xi HI. — Introduction xiii (Treating of the Letters, Accents, &c.) IV. — Lessons — 1 to 18 1 V. — Supplement 325 VI.— Index 360 (In which all the English words, contained in the Les- sons, are arranged in alphabetical order, each with a reference to the Lesson in which it first appears.) ■7 SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS AND PUPILS. The teacher, in giving out the lesson, should read the French, and the- pupil should pronounce it after him. When the lesson is to be recited, the teacher should ask the English, and the pu- pil give the French. When the example illustrates a principle or rule, the pupil should refer to the rule, and explain how it is applied in the example. The words in the Vocabularies should be asked horizontally through, and two in succession, of the same pupil, as they are placed opposite one another. After the teacher has given the English of the first word, the pupil should be required to give the French, and also the English and French of the next, so as to associate two words in his mind together. For instance: Teacher — The brother. Pupil — Le frere ; the sister, la soeur. This will not only enable him to remember the words more easily, but as the nouns are always placed — masculine on the left, and feminine on the right — it will greatly help him in re- taining their genders. The French Exercises are in the form of conversations, gen- erally questions and answers. The teacher should pronounce the question, and the pupil, with the book shut, should imme- diately repeat and translate it into English. The teacher should then give the English of the answer, which the pupil should im- mediately translate into French. When the pupil is not suf- ficiently prepared to turn the English into French, the teacher may give the answer in the same manner as the question. In this case, the French Exercise should be recited again at the next session, and should be repeated until the pupil is able to turn readily the French into English, and the English into French. In no case should a new lesson be given out, until the pupils are perfectly able to go through with the French Exercise, in the manner prescribed. Xll SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. The English Exercise is to be translated into French, orally. It will be better not to attempt this, during the same session, and in connection with the French Exercise; but to leave it for the session succeeding the one in which the French Exercise has been successfully recited. The pupils may, if the teacher so directs (and this is the better plan), translate the English Exer- cise into French, in writing. They should, however, not omit to recite it orally, and without the help of their written version. At each session, a portion of the time should be devoted to re- viewing. The necessity of repeating former lessons cannot be too much insisted upon. He who wishes to acquire a foreign tongue, and learn to speak it, should not rest satisfied with a knowledge of the ground he has been over, but should thoroughly possess himself of it, and acquire a perfect readiness of utterance, which can only be secured by frequent repetitions. After the regular lesson has been recited, the Vocabularies of the preceding two lessons should always be reviewed, and a few new sentences construed by the pupils, at the suggestion of the teacher, in which the words of these Vocabularies are incorporated. Many abortive attempts are made to learn a foreign language, and, in very many cases, the want of success is attributable to the injudicious course of hurrying on, with but an imperfect know- ledge of what precedes. This, in the end, creates confusion and dislike ; and, finally, the pursuit is given up in despair, and is hardly ever resumed with the same spirit and confidence with which it was at first undertaken. Let it be remembered that the knowledge we seek, is not to be found merely at the end of the book ; it lies in our path — we must gather it as we go along. Let the pupil proceed in his course, steadily and perseveringly — go through with it thoroughly, and this method will teach him to read, write, and speak the French language. INTRODUCTION. § I. — Letters, — Accents, &c. (a.) The French Alphabet has twenty-five letters. Six are vowels : a, e, », o, u, y. Nineteen, consonants : b, c, d, f, g, h, j, Jc, I, m, n, p, q, r, s, 2, #, x, z. (b.) There are three accents : the aaefe ( ' ), the grave ( N ), the circumflex ( A ). (c.) The acute accent is placed over e (e). Thus accented, it has the sound of the English a ; as de, the. Kem. 1. — An initial e, forming a syllable by itself, has always the acute accent ;* as, ecu, Sieve, epee ; but not when it is pro- nounced with the following consonant ; as, ennemi, exemple. Eem. 2. — E, preceding ge, has the acute accent ; as, cortege, protege. (d.) The grave accent is used : 1st. To distinguish from one another certain words spelled alike ; as, a, to, at, from a, has ; la, there, from la, the, her ; otr, where, from ou, or ; des, as soon, from des, of the. 2d. Over e, preceding any consonant (except g, see Eem. 2), followed by e unaccented; as, eleve, premiere ; also before two consonants, when both belong to the unaccented syllable ; as, regie, espiegle. 3d. Over the e of the termination es, when the s is an essen- tial part of the word ; as, apres, excds, to distinguish it from the accidental termination es ; as, les livres, tu chantes. (e.) The circumflex accent indicates the suppression of a letter, generally s ; as, patre, etre* tete, paitre, or e ; as, eperdument. * Etke is an exception to (a), Rem. 1. XIV INTRODUCTION. (/.) The cedilla ( s ) is put under c (c) before a, o, u, to indi- cate that it has the sound of s ; as, facade, macon, recu. (g.) The diceresis or trema ( • • ) is placed over a vowel which begins a new syllable after another vowel ; as, naif, Mo'ise. (h.) The apostrophe ( ' ) indicates the suppression of a vowel before another vowel or silent h ; as, Vami, for le ami ; Vhomme, for le homme. (i.) The hyphen ( - ) is used to connect the different parts of a compound word ; as, arc-en-ciel. § II. — Vowels, — Pure or Simple Sounds, — Nasal Sounds. (a.) The vowel sounds are pure or nasal : pure, when the vowel has its proper sound, as when it is pronounced by itself; nasal, when it is pronounced in conjunction with m or n. (b.) A pure vowel sound is called a simple sound, which is long, when, in pronouncing it, the voice dwells on it, and short, when it is passed over rapidly. a is long in dme, and short in ami. e is long in des, t&te, and short in de. i is long in epitre, and short in petite. o is long in motion, and short in mode. u is long in flute, and short in culbute. (c.) There are three kinds of e's : 1st. The acute ; as in verite, donner, donnez. 2d. The grave, or long ; as in module, meme. 3d. The unaccented ; as in je, le, me, livre, homme. This last is also called mute, or silent e. (d.) Y, after a consonant, is found only in words derived from the Greek, and has the sound of i ; as, physique, style ; after a vowel, it is equivalent to double i ; as, moyen, pays, pronounced moi-ien, pai-is. (e.) Simple sounds are also produced by the combination of two or more letters. Some combinations have the sound of a simple vowel, others represent sounds different from the simple vowels. The following are the various simple sounds and their representatives : INTRODUCTION. XV A, as — cdmarade, ami, patte — pate, patre, las, tds. e, ai, er, ez — verite, gai, donnerai, donner, donnez. e, e, es, ai, ais, ei, et — des, fete, meSy aimer, mais, Seine, secret. e — -je, te, me, demande, paiement, livre. eu, eu — -feu,jeu,jeune (young), jeune (fast). I, y — midi, gite, sy metric - o, au, eau — dot, mode — dos, mot, chaud, tableau. u, eu — bu, tu, vu, eu, feus, eurent. ou — mou, cou, couteau. § III. — Nasal Sounds. (a.) There are four nasal sounds : an, in, on, un. Their representatives are : am, an, ean, em, en — vampire, dans, Jean, empereur, enfant. aim, ain, ein, im, in— f aim, pain, sein, impie, vin. om, on — ombre, onde. um, un — parfum, aucun. (b.) These combinations are nasal only, when they are final or followed by any consonant but m or n. "When they are fol- lowed by a vowel, the m or n is carried to the next syllable, and the preceding vowel has its proper sound ; as, inhumanite, inutile, unique, pronounced i-nhu-ma-nite, i-nutile, u-nique. (c.) In words having m or n doubled, the first m or n is silent ; commode, suffisamment, femme, paysanne, are pronounced co- mode, suffisa-ment, fa-me, paysa-ne. (d.) In words having mm, preceded by i, the two m's are sounded ; as, immanquable, immense, immoler, &c. ; also in Ammon, Emmanuel, ammoniac, commotion, commuer, and de- rivatives. (e.) Emmener, emmaillotter, are pronounced en-mener, en~ maillotter. (/.) Envirer, enorgueillir, ennui, and derivatives, are pro- nounced an-nivrer, an-norguillir, an-nui. (g.) Solennel, hennir, indemniser, and derivatives, are pro- nounced sola-nel, ha-nir, inda-niser. XVI INTRODUCTION. (A.) In annales, annexes, inne, innover, the two n's are sounded. (i.) In some words, derived from foreign languages, em and en are pronounced erne, £ne ; as, Jerusalem, hymen, amen, Eden, &c. § IV. — Diphthongs. (a.) A diphthong is a syllable composed of two simple vowel sounds, which are both sounded. (b.) The accented e and a vowel sound do not constitute a diphthong, but form two syllables ; as, fie-au, obe-ir : see also § I., on the use of the diwresis. (c.) The vowel sounds, i, o, ou, u, followed by other vowel sounds, form diphthongs ; as, with i — di-amant, bi-ais, mi-en, piti-e, bi-ire, fi-ole, reli-ure, li-eu, li-on, chi-ourme, o — mo-elle, fo-i, so-in. ou — ou-est, fou-et, lou-ai, ou-i, Rou-en, ou-ate. u — equ-ateur, ecu-elle, lu~i,ju-in, § V. — Remarks on the Vowels. A is silent in aout, aoriste, Sadne, taon. Ai has the sound of mute e mfaisant, and of a in douairidre. Ais has the sound of e in je sais, tu sais, il sait (I know, &c). The mute e in monosyllables is sounded ; at the end of poly- syllables and after a vowel, it is silent; as in lame, paiemenL Between two consonants, it serves to form the syllable ; as, de- mander, samedi, pronounced d'mander, sam'di. I is silent in oignon, moignon, poignard, poignee. is silent in faon, Laon, paon. Oi is pronounced like £ in roide. U, followed by a vowel, is generally silent after g and q ; as, prodigue, guide, qui, que, quand ; but 'it is sounded in the com- pounda of aigu ; as, aigue, aiguille, aiguiser, and in arguer, cigue, sanguinaire ; also in the Latin words equestre, equitation, liquifier, &C. TJ is sounded like ou in aquatiquc, equuleur, quadrature, &c. INTRODUCTION. XV11 § VI. — Consonants at the Beginning- and in the Middle of a Word. Most consonants, when they begin a syllable, are sounded as in English. Exceptions. (a.) C and g before e, i, y, have the hissing sound, the former of c in citron, the latter of s in pleasure ; as, celeste, citron, cygne — general, gilet, gymnase. (b.) C and g before a, o, u, have the palatal sound of Tc, and of g in gate ; as, canal, colon, curieux — galant, gobelet, gutteral. Rem. 1. — When c and g are to retain then soft sounds before a, o, u, the c takes the cedilla, and between g and a, o, u, a mute e is inserted ; as, facade, macon, recu — manger, George, gageure. Rem. 2. — and g before u, followed by e or i, are slightly liquid ; as, ecneil, cuiller — gue, Guillaume. Rem. 3. — C has the sound of g in second, secretaire, and de- rivatives, sounded segond, &c. Ch is pronounced as sh in most French words ; as, charme, chose, &c. ; it is pronounced as k in some Greek and Hebrew words ; as, Christ, Archange, chaos, anachronisme, chorus, echo, orchestre, Cham, Antiochus, archontes, eucharistie, chrysalide, chr^tien, Chaldee, Michel-Ange, Chalcedoine, scholie, Cherso- nise, &c. Gn has a liquid sound, as in the word mignonette ; as, agneau, besogiie, montagne, incognito, &c. ; exceptions are : stagnant, regnicole, agnat, magnat, diagnostic, inexpugnable, ignicoU, agnus, enigme, &c, which are pronounced stag-nant, &c. H is mute or aspirate. It is aspirated in the following words and their derivatives : Hableur, hache, hagard, haie, haillons, haine, hair, haire, holer, halle, hallebarde, halte, hamac, hanche, hanneton, hanter, harangue, haras, harasser, harceler, hardes, hardi, hareng, hargneux, haricot, haridelle, harnais, harpe, harpie, harpon, hasard, hater, hausser, haut, hautbois, havre-sac, hennir, heraut, herisser, hHre, heurter, hibou, hideux, hierarchie, homard, honte, horde, hotte, houblon, XVI11 INTRODUCTION. houille, houlette, houppe, houppelande, huppe, hure, hurler, hussar d. L, preceded by i (il), not initial, is liquid, like ill in brilliant ; as, ceil, peril, soleil, bataille, paille, fille, &c. Exceptions : fil, mil, mille, ville, pupille, codicile, &c. Q is always followed by u ; qu is sounded like Jc ; as, quality For exceptions, see § V., letter u. B. The two r's are sounded in erreur, horreur, terreur, &c, and in the future and conditional of the verbs acquerir, courir, mourir ; as, facquerrai, je courrai, je mourrai, &c. S has two sounds. Its proper sound is the hissing sound of s in serf; its accidental sound, that of z, as 5 in muse. S, between two vowels, has the sound of z ; as, rose, maison, voisin. /S, beginning a word, always retains its proper sound, though in compounds, a word ending with a vowel may be prefixed to it ; as in vraisemblahle (yrai-semblable). Ss, between two vowels, has always the hissing sound of s ; as, poisson, croissant. Sch is sounded like sh ; as, schisme. T is sounded like c, in the combinations tial, tiel, tion, final or in the middle of a word; as, partial, essentiel, nation; except when it is preceded by s or x ; as in question, mixtion. T has always the sound of c in words ending, in English, in cy ; as, aristocratie, diplomatie ; in names of countries ; as, Dal- matie, Egyptien, and in some other words in which it has also the soft sound in English ; as, patient, initier, &c. Th is sounded like t ; as, the, theologie, lithographie. X initial is sounded like gz ; as, Xavier, Xenophon ; also in ex initial, when followed by a vowel ; as, examen, exemple. X is sounded like Jcs, in Alexandre, maxime, Aix-la-chapelle. X is sounded like double s, in soixante, six, dix, Bruxelles, Auxonne, Aix-en- Provence. X is sounded like z, in deuxieme, sixieme, dixieme, dix-huit, &c. INTRODUCTION. XIX § VII. — Final Consonants. A final consonant is generally silent. Exceptions. Final b is sounded in radoub, rhomb. Final c is sounded, except in cotignac, estomac, lacs, broc, eric, marc, pore, tabac, and after the nasal sounds, as blanc, banc, franc, " d, " " t ; as, quand il. " /, " " v ; as, neuf heures. " g, u " k ; as, rang eleve. u 8 or s, " " z ; as, Us ont deux enfants* FRENCH COURSE. 1. PREMIERE LEgOK 1 , The French language has only two genders : the mascu- line, for the names of males, and the feminine, for the names of females. Words, having no relation to one sex or the other, have the masculine or feminine gender assigned them by custom. Thus, livre, book, and fruit, fruit, are masculine ; and lecon, lesson, and pom?ne, apple, feminine. 2. The article and adjective agree in gender and number with the noun. The article the is le for the masculine, and la for the fem- inine ; as, Masculine. Feminine. The book Le livre. The lesson. La lecon. The fruit Le fruit. The apple. La pomme. The glass. Le verre. The cup. La tasse. 3* Adjectives, not ending in e mute (Introd. § 2, c), add e for the feminine ; as, Smally little. Petit The small glass. he petit verre. The small cup. La petite tasse. First. Premier. The first book. Le premier livre. The first lesson, ha, premiere lecon (Intr., § 1, d), 2 PREMIERE LE£0N. 4« I. Have (1st pers. sing.). Je. Ai. Eemark 1. — Monosyllables ending in e mute, drop this vowel before another vowel or silent h (Intr., § VI. h), and take an apostrophe in its place : as, I have. J'ai. You. Have (2d pers.). You have. Vous. Avez. Vous avez. Rem. 2. — When the pronoun subject stands after the verb, it is joined to it by a hyphen ; as, Have I ? Have you? Have you the glass ? Yes, sir. No, sir. Yes, sir ; I have the glass. No, sir ; I have the cup. Ai-je? Avez- vous ? Avez-vous le verre ? Oui, monsieur. Non f monsieur, Oui, monsieur; j'ai le verre. Non, monsieur ; j'ai la tasse. VOCABULAIRE 1. (The left-hand side in the Vocabularies is reserved for masculine, and the right for feminine nouns. See Suggestions, p. xi.) The book. Le livre. The lesson. La lecon. The bread ; the loaf. Le pain. The meat. La viande. The fruit. Le fruit. The apple. La pomme. The glass. Le verre. The cup. La tasse. Small, little. Petit. Large, tall, great. Grand. First, Premier. Last. Dernier. I. Je. You. Vous. Have (1st pers. sing.). Ai. Have (2d pers. plur.). Avez. Yes. Oui. No. Non. Sir. Monsieur. Madam, Mrs. Madame. EXERCICE 1. 1. Avez-vous le pain ? 2. Oui, monsieur; j'ai le pain. 3. Avez- vous la viande ? 4. J'ai la viande. 5. Avez-vous le livre ? 6. J'ai le livre. 7. Avez-vous le premier livre ? 8. J'ai le premier livre. SEC0NDE LE^OK. 3 9. Avez-vous la premiere lecon? 10. J'ai la premiere lecon. 11. Avez-vous le dernier fruit? 12. J'ai le dernier fruit. 13. Avez-vous la derniere pomme? 14. J'ai la derniere pomme. 15. Avez-vous le verre? 16. J'ai le verre. 17. Avez-vous la tasse? 18. J'ailatasse. 19. Avez-vous le petit verre ? 20. J'ai le petit verre. 21. Avez-vous la petite tasse? 22. J'ai la petite tasse. 23. Avez-vous le grand verre ? 24. J'ai le grand verre. 25. Avez-vous la grande tasse ? 26. ISTon, madame ; j'ai la petite tasse. 27. Ai-je la premiere lecon? 28. Oui, monsieur; vous avez la premiere lecon. Theme 1. 1. I have the glass. 2. Have you the cup? 3. Yes, sir; I have the cup. 4. Have you the meat? 5. No, sir; I have the bread. 6. Have you the lesson? 7. I have the first lesson. 8. Have you the last fruit ? 9. I have the last apple. 10. Have I the small glass? 11. No, sir; you have the large glass. 12. Have you the small cup ? 13. No, madam ; I have the large cup. 2, DEUXIEME LEQON. 5 o The determinative adjectives, possessive, demonstrative, indefinite and numeral, agree, in gender and number, with the noun which they precede. My (possessive adjective). Mon, fern. ma. My book. My lesson. Mon livre. Ma lecon. Your (possessive adj.). Yotre (for both genders). Your book. Your lesson. Votre livre. Votre lecon. "What, which (indefinite adj.). Quel, fern, quelle. What or which glass ? Which cup ? Quel verre ? Quelle tasse ? My money. Mon argent (masc). Your coat. Yotre habit (masc). Which plate ? Quelle assiette ? (fern.). 4 DEUXIEME LEgON. 6, (a.) The article, in the singular, drops the vowel (a 01 e) before another vowel or silent h ; as, The money. L'argent. The coat. L'habit. The plate. L'assiette. (b.) Instead of ma, mon is used before a vowel or silent h ; as, My plate. Mon assiette. 7» Not Ne. . . .pas. Rem. — In a negative sentence, the particle ne always precedes the verb, and pas, or some other negative word, is placed after the verb. I have not. You have not. Have I not ? Have you not ? Have you not my pretty plate ? Je n'ai pas. (See 4, Rem. 1.) Yous n'avez pas. N'ai-je pas? N'avez- vous pas ? N'avez-vous pas ma jolie assiette ? VOCABULAIRE 2. The lead-pencil. Le crayon. The pen ; the feather. La plume. The paper. Le papier. The letter. La lettre. The coat. L'habit. The dress ; the gown. La robe. The money; the silver. L'argent. The coin; the change. La monnaie The dish. Le plat. The plate. L'assiette. My. What, which. Pretty. Mon, ma. Quel, quelle. Joli. Your. Votre. Not. Nc.pas. Ugly. Vilain. EXERCICE 2. 1. Avez-vous votre crayon? 2. Oui, monsieur; j'ai mon cra- yon. 3. Avez-vous votre plume ? 4. J'ai ma plume. 5. Quel livre avez-vous ? 6. J'ai votre livre. 7. Quel papier avez-vous ? 8. J'ai mon vilain papier. 9. Quelle lettre ai-je? 10. Vous avez ma lettre. 11. Avez-vous l'argent? 12. J'ai l'argent. TROISIEME LECON. 5 13. Ai-je ma monnaie? 14. Vous avez votre monnaie. 15. Avez-vous l'habit ? 16. Je n'ai pas l'habit. — 17. Quel habit ai- je? 18. Yous avez lejoli habit. 19. Avez-vous 1' a ssiette? 20. Je n'ai pas l'assiette. 21. Ai-je niou assiette? 22. Yous n'avez pas votre assiette. 23. Quelle assiette ai-je? 24. Yous avez rna jolie assiette. 25. Quelle robe ai-je? 26. Yous avez ma vilaine robe. 27. Avez-vous mon joli plat? 28. Non, madame ; je n'ai pas votre joli plat. Theme 2. 1. I have your lead-pencil. 2. Have you my pen ? 3. I have not your pen. 4. Which paper have you ? 5.1 have my pretty paper. 6. Have I my letter? 7. You have not your letter, 8. Have I the money? 9. You have the money. 10. Have I the coat? 11. You have the ugly coat. 12. What dress have you? 13. I have the pretty dress. 14. Have you not your change? 15. Yes, sir; I have my change. 16. Have you not my plate ? 17. No, madam ; I have my pretty dish. 3. TROISIEME LEgOK 8. What? (pronoun). Que? "What have you? Qu'avez-vous ? (4, Kem. 1. What have I? Qu'ai-je? What have I not? Que n'ai-j e pas? Who ? Whom ? Qui? Has. A. Who has my pen? Qui a ma plume ? The man has your pen. L'homme a votre plume. He. She. II. Elle. He has. She has. Ha. Elle a. He has not. She has not. H n'a pas. Elle n'a pas. TROISIEME LEgON. Eem. — In interrogative sentences, the letter t, between two hyphens (-£-), is inserted, for euphony, between the verb and the pronoun of the third person singular, in those tenses in which the third person ends with a vowel. Has he ? Has she ? A-t-il ? A-t-elle ? Has he not ? Has she not ? ]^'a-t-il pas ? K'a-t-elle pas ? What has he ? What has she ? Qu'a-t-il ? Qu'a-t-elle ? 10i His, her (possessive adj.). His brother, her brother. His sister, her sister. And. Also, too. He has his knife and his fork. Has he also his plate ? Son, fern. sa. (5.) Son frere. Sa soeur. Et. Aussi. II a son couteau et sa fourchette. A-t-il aussi son assiette. (6, b.) 11* This, that (demons, adj.). Ce, cet, fern, cette. (5.) Ce is used before a masculine noun beginning with a conso- nant ; cet, before a masculine noun beginning with a vowel or silent h. This gentleman, that gentleman. This man, that man. This lady, that lady. What has that man ? . Ce monsieur. Cet homme. Cette dame. Qu'a cet homme ? 12. The article and determinative adjectives must be repeated before each noun, and also before each adjective with which a noun is understood ; as, Le couteau et la fourchette. Quel couteau et quelle fourchette? Ce couteau et cette fourchette. Son chapeau et sa cravate. The knife and fork. Which knife and fork? This knife and fork. His hat and cravat. The first and second lessons. j La premiere et la seconde lecon. (La premiere lecon et la seconde. Hem. — The adjective is frequently used without the noun, to avoid repetition. The word one, following the adjective, is not expressed. TROISIEME LEgON. Which knife? Which fork? The small one. The large one. Quel couteau ? Quelle fourchette ? Le petit. La grande. VOCABULAIRE 3. That gentleman. Ce monsieur. That man. Cet homme. His (her ;) brother. Son frere. My hat, my bonnet. Mon chapeau. Your knife. Yotre couteau. That lady. Cette dame. That woman or wife. Cette femme. His (her) sister. Sa soeur. My cravat. Ma cravate. Your fork. Votre fourchette. Who? whom? Qui? What? Que? He, she. 11, elle. Has. A. This, that. Ce, cet> cette. His, her. Son, sa. And. Et. Also, too. AussL EXERCICE 3. 1. Qu'avez-vous ? 2. J'ai mon chapeau. 3. Qu'ai-je? 4. Vous avez votre couteau. 5. Que n'ai-je pas? 6. Vous n'avez pas votre fourchette. 7. Qui a mon chapeau ? 8. L'homme a votre chapeau. 9. A-t-il le couteau? 10. H a le couteau et le chapeau. 11. A-t-il aussi la cravate? 12. Non, M.; il n'a pas la cravate. 13. Qui a la cravate? 14. La femme a la cravate. 15. A-t-elle ma fourchette? 16. Elle a votre fourchette et votre cravate aussi. 17. Qu'a-t-il? 18. II a son chapeau. 19. Qu' a-t-elle? 20. Elle a son couteau et sa fourchette. 21. Qu'a ce monsieur? 22. II a sa monnaie. 23. Qu'a cette dame? 24. Elle a sa robe. 25. Qu'a votre frere ? 26. H a son livre et son crayon. 27. Qu'a votre soeur? 28. Elle a son verre. 29. A-t-elle son assiette ? 30. Elle a son assiette et sa fourchette aussi. 31. Quel plat avez-vous ? 32. J'ai le grand. 33. Quia le petit? 34. Ma soeur a le petit. 35. A-t-elle la petite tasse? 36. Oui, madame ; elle a la petite et la grande aussi. Theme 3. 1. What knife have you? 2. I have my pretty knife. 3. What have you? 4. I have my hat and cravat. 5. WTiat 8 QUATRIEME LECON. have I ? 6. You have your knife and fork, 7. What have I not ? 8. You have not your pen and paper. 9. Who has my hat? 10. That gentleman has your hat. 11. Who has your cravat? 12. That lady has my cravat. 13. What has that man? 14. He has his knife and fork. 15. What knife and fork has he? 16. He has the small knife and (the small)* fork. 17. Who has the letter? 18. His brother has the letter and the money also. 19. What has that woman ? 20. She has her bonnet. 21. Has she also the fruit? 22. No, sir; her sister has the fruit. 23. Have you the large cup ? 24. Yes, madam ; I have the large and the small one also. 4. QUATEIEME LE£OK 13. In an interrogative sentence, the noun subject is placed before the verb, and a personal pronoun, agreeing with the sub- ject in gender and number, after it ; as, Has the man? (The man has he?) IShomme a-t-il? Has the boy his fork ? Le gargon a-t-il sa fourchette ? Has the girl her bonnet ? La fille a-t-elle son chapeau ? Rem. — When the sentence begins with an interrogative pro- noun or adverb, the noun subject may either precede or follow the verb. What has the boy? Wa le gargon? or J (he gargon qu a-t-il ? 14 • Mine, my own (poss. pron.). Le mien, fern, la mienne. Yours, your own (poss. pro?i.). Le v6tre, fern, la y6tre. His, hers (poss. pron.). Le sien, fern, la sienne. Which one (absolute pronoun). Lequel, fern, laquelle. * Words in parentheses, not printed in italics, must be expressed in French, though they may be omitted in English. Words in parentheses, printed in italics, are not to be expressed in French, but may be used in English. QUATRIEME LEgON. Rem. — Pronouns agree in gender and number with the noun which they represent. "Which knife has the servant ? "Which one has he ? He has mine, yours, his (hers). "Which fork has he ? "Which (which one) has he ? Mine, yours, his (hers). Or. Neither > nor. Yours or mine. Neither yours nor mine. He has neither yours nor mine. Quel couteau le domestique a-t-il ? Lequel a-t-il? II a le mien, le v6tre, le sien. Quelle fourchette a-t-il? Laquelle a-t-il? La mienne, la votre, la sienne. Ou. Ni. .(w)* (See % Rem.) La y6tre ou la mienne. NI* la votre ni la mienne. II n'a ni la votre ni la mienne. 15, Adjectives ending in e mute are the same for both gen- ders; as, The young man. The young girL The honest boy. The honest girl. he jeune homme. La jeune fille. Uhonnete garcon. Uhonnete fille. VOCABULAIRE 4. The father. The son. The nephew. The boy ; the waiter, The servant. The horse. Le pere. Le fils. Le neveu. Le garcon. Le domestique. Le cheval. The mother. The daughter ; The niece. the girl. La mere, La fille. La niece. m , ., , f La servante. The maid-servant. \ T , ( La domestique. The saddle. La selle. Young. "Which one. Mine. Or. Jeune. Lequel, laquelle. Le mien, la mienne. Ou. Honest. Yours. His, hers. Neither, .nor. HonnSte. Le votre, la votre. Le sien, la sienne. Ke. .ni. .ni. EXERCICE 4. 1. L'homme a-t-il votre cheval ? 2. Non, M. ; il a le votre. 3. Quel cheval son fils a-t-il? 4. II a le sien. 5. Lequel * When the verb is not expressed, ne is not used. (7, Rem.) 1* 10 QUATRIEME LE£ON. avez-vous ? 6. J'ai le mien. 7. Qui a votre selle, le pere ou le fils? 8. Le pere a la rnienne. 9. Quelle selle le fils a-t-il? 10. II a la sienne. 11. Laquelle avez-vous ? 12. J'ai la votre. 13. La fille a-t-elle votre robe? 14. Non, madame; elle a la sienne. 15. Qui a la votre? 16. Ma mere a la mienne. 17. Quel chapeau ce jeune homme a-t-il? 18. II a le sien. 19. Qu'a votre neveu? 20. II a sa plume. 21. Yotre niece qu'a- t-elle ? 22. Elle a son crayon. 23. Ce garcon a-t-il votre cou- teau ou le mien ? 24. II n'a ni le votre ni le mien ; il a le sien. 25. Cette jeune fille a-t-elle votre tasse ou la mienne? 26. Elle n'a ni la votre ni la mienne ; elle a la sienne. 27. Qu'a cet honnete garcon? 28. II a sa pomme. 29. Qui a la lettre? 30. Le domestique a la lettre. 31. La servante qu'a-t-elle? 32. Elle a le pain. 33. A-t-elle aussi la viande? 34. Elle a la viande aussi. 35. A-t-elle le plat ou le verre? 36. Elle n'a ni le plat ni le verre. Theme 4. 1. Has your father your horse? 2. He has not mine, he has his own. 3. Which horse has your brother ? 4. He has yours. 5. Which one has your servant? 6. He has mine. 7. Has your nephew my saddle ? 8. He has not yours, he has his own. 9. Which one have you? 10. I have mine. 11. What has that honest man ? 12. He has his money. 13. What has his son ? 14. His son has his book. 15. Has your niece the letter ? 16. No, sir; her mother has the letter. 17. Who has the fruit? 18. This young girl has the fruit. 19. Has the maid- servant the dish or the cup ? 20. She has neither the dish nor the cup. 21. Has the boy your coat or mine? 22. He has neither yours nor mine. 23. Which one has he ? 24. He has his own. 25. Has your brother my cravat or yours? 26. He has neither yours nor mine. 27. Which one has he? 28. He has his own. CINQUIEME LEgON. 11 5. CINQUIEME LEQON. Plural of Nouns, Adjectives, etc. 16. The plural of nouns, adjectives, and most pronouns, formed by adding s to the singular ; as, verre, plural verves. is The (plural). (2.) Les (for both genders). My tt (5.) Mrs Your it (5.) Vos His, her tt (10.) Ses These, those it (10.) Ces What, which 11 (5.) Quels, fern, quelles. "Which, which ones tt (14.) Lesquels, fern, lesquelles. Mine tt (14.) Les miens, fern, les miennes. Yours tt (14.) Les .votkes (for both genders). His, hers it (14.) Les siens, fern, les siennes. The glasses. The cups. My small glasses. Your large cups. His pencils and pens. These (those) pencils and pens. Which pencils ? Which ? Mine. Yours. His, hers. Which pens ? Which ones ? Mine. Yours. His, hers. Les verres. Les tasses. Mes petits verres. Yos grandes tasses. Ses crayons et ses plumes. Ces crayons et ces plumes. Quels crayons ? Lesquels? Les miens. Les v6tres. Les siens. Quelles plumes ? Lesquelles ? Les miennes. Les v6tres. Les siennes. 17. (a.) Nouns ending in the singular in s, #, or 0, remain unchanged in the plural ; as, The son, the sons. The nut, the nuts. The nose, the noses. The bad pencil. The bad pencils. The bad nuts. Le jils, les fils. La noix, les noix. Le nezy les nez. Le mauvais crayon. Les mauvais crayons. Les mauvaises noix. (b.) Nouns in au and eu add x in the plural ; as, The knife, the knives. Le couteau, les couteaux. The nephew, the nephews. Le neveu, les neveux. 12 CINQUIEME le^ox, (c.) Nouns in at change al into aux in the plural ; as, The horse, the horses. Le ckeval, les chevaux. The general, the generals. Le general, les generaux. (d.) "Words of more than one syllable ending in nt, may either retain or drop the t in the plural ; as, The child, the children. JJenfant f les en/ants, or enfans. VoCABULAIKE 5. The wood, the forest. Le bois. The nut. La noix. The nail. Le clou. The pin. L'epingle. The thread. Lefil. The needle. L'aiguille. The salt. Le sel. The salt-cellar. La saliere. The pepper. Le poivre. The mustard. La moutarde. The child. L'enfant. The nursery-maid. La bonne. Bad. Mauvais. Wicked, bad, worthless. Mechant. EXERCICE 5. 1. Avez-vous les tasses? 2. Non, M.; j'ai les verres. 3. Avez-vous mes verres? 4. Je n'ai pas vos verres. 5. Quels verres avez-vous ? 6. J'ai les petits verres. 7. Qui a les grands ? 8. Ma niece a les grands. 9. Lesquels a-t-elle? 10. Elle a les siens. 11. Avez-vous les votres ou les miens? 12. J'ai les miens. 13. Quelles tasses avez-vous ? 14. J'ai les petites. 15. Qui a les grandes? 16. Mon neveu a les grandes. 17. Les- quelles a-t-il les votres ou les miennes? 18. II n'a ni les votres ni les miennes, il a les siennes. 19. Qu'a l'enfant? 20. II a le bois et la noix. 21. Qui a les petits clous et les petites epingles ? 22. Le domestique a les clous, et la bonne a les epingles. 23. La fille a-t-elle Paiguille ? 24. Elle a Faiguille, et elle a le fil aussi. 25. Qu'a la servante? 26. Elle a la jolie saliere. 27. N'a-t-elle pas aussi le sel? 28. Elle a le sel aussi. 29. Qui a le poivre? 30. Le domestique a le poivre, et il a la moutarde aussi. 31. Qu'a ce mechant garcon? 32. II a les mauvaises noix. 33. Qu'a cette mechante servante? 34. Elle a ses mau- SIXIEME LECON. 13 vais couteaux. 35. Qui a les chevaux ? 36. Le domestique a les chevaux. 37. A-t-il les chapeaux ? 38. II n'a pas les chapeaux ? Theme 5. 1. What has the servant? 2. He has the wood and the nail, 3. Has your sister the thread? 4. She has the thread, and she has the needle also. 5. Y\Tiat has the waiter? 6. He has the pepper, and he has also the mustard. 7. "Who has the salt- cellar ? 8. The girl has the salt-cellar, and she has the salt also. 9. Has the child the pin? 10. Xo, sir; he has the nails. 11. Who has the children? 12. The nursery-maid has the chil- dren. 13. Has the servant the plates ? 14. Xo, sir ; he has the dishes ? 15. Has he my dishes ? 16. He has not yours, he has mine. 17. Which dishes has he? 18. He has the small ones. 19. Which ones have you? 20. I have the large ones. 21. Has the girl my plates or yours? 22. She has neither yours nor mine. 23. WTrich ones has she? 24. She has her own. 25. What has that wicked boy? 26. He has his bad knives and his bad nuts. — 27. His father has the horses of (de) those generals. 6. SIXIEME LEfOX. 18, Thou. Thou hast. Hast thou? Tu. Tu as. As-tu? Thy (possessive adj.). Ton, ta, tes. Thtxe ( possessive pron.). Le tiex, les tiexs, fern, la tiexxe ; LES TIEXXES. Thou hast thy book, thy pen, thy Tu as ton liyre, ta plume, tes cray- pencils. ons. Thou hast thine. Tu as le tien, la tienne, les tiens. Rem. — The second person singular is much used between pa- rents and children, and among intimate friends, 14 SIXIEME LE£ON. 19. We. We have. Have we? Nous. Nous avons. Avons-nous? Our (possessive adj.). Notre, nos. Ours (possessive pron.). Le n6tre, la n6tre; plur. for both, les notres. We have our carriage, our horses. Nous avons notre voiture, nos che- vaux. Have we not ours ? N'avons-nous pas la ndtre ? les no- tres ? 20. They. They have. Their (possessive adj.). Theirs (possessive pron.). Have those men their money? Have those women theirs ? Have your nephews their books or ours ? They have theirs. Ils, fern, elles. lis ont. Elles ont. Leur, leurs. Le leur, la leur ; plur. for both, LES LEURS. Ces hommes ont-ils leur argent ? Ces femmes ont-elles le leur ? Vos neveux ont-ils leurs livres ou les n6tres? Ils ont les leurs. 21. Present Tense of Avoir, to have. I have, thou hast, he has. We have, you have, they have. J'ai, tu as, il a. Nous avons, vous avez, ils ont. 22. Good. The good thread. The good needle. The good nails. The good pins. Big, coarse, large. The coarse thread. The coarse needle. The big stick. The big canes. The large egg. The large oxen. The large paper. Th e coarse paper. Bon, fern, bonne. Le bon fil. La bonne aiguille. Les bons clous. Les bonnes epingles. Gros, fern, grosse. Le gros fil. La grosse aiguilles. Le gros baton. Les grosses Cannes. Le gros oeuf. Les gros boeufs. Le grand papier. Le gros papier. VOCABULAIRE 6. My uncle. My cousin. The coachman. Mon oncle. Mon cousin. Le cocher. My aunt. My cousin (fern). The carriage, vehicle. Ma tante. Ma cousine La voiture. SIXIEME LEgON. 15 The whip. Le fouet. The bridle. La bride. The stick. Le baton. The cane. La canne. The countryman. Le paysan. The countrywoman. La paysanne. The vegetable. Le legume. The potato. La pomme de terre. The egg. L'ceuf. The salad. La salade. The ox, the beef. Le bceuf. The cow. La vache. Good. Bon, bonne. Big, coarse, large. Gros, grosse. Thou. Tu. Hast. As. Thy. Ton, ta, tes. T , . ( Le tien, les tiens. ( La tienne, les tiennes. We. Nous. Have (1st pers. pi.). Avons. Our. Notre, nos. Ours. Le n6tre, la n6tre, les n6tres. They. Us, elles. Have (3c? pers. pi). Ont. Their. Leur, leurs. Theirs. Le leur, la leur, les leurs. ExERCICE 6. 1. Avons-nous notre argent? 2. Nous avons notre argent et nos lettres. 3. Quel fouet avons-nous ? 4. Nous avons le' notre. 5. Avons-nous notre bon fouet? 6. Nous avons notre bon fouet et notre bonne bride. 7. Le cocher a-t-il nos chevaux? 8. II a les notres. 9. Vos neveux ont-iis leur voiture ou la vo= tre? 10. Hs ont la leur. 11. Qu'a votre garcon ? 12. H a son gros baton. 13. Yotre tante qu'a-t-elle? 14. Elle a le gros fil. 15. Vos cousins qu'ont-ils? 16. lis ont leurs grosses Cannes. 17. Qu'ont nos cousines? 18. Elles ont leurs crayons et leur papier. 19. Qu'a ce paysan? 20. II a son bceuf. 21. Qu'a cette paysanne? 22. Elle a sa vache. 23. Qui a l'ceuf et la sa- lade? 24. Votre cousin a l'ceuf, et votre cousine a la salade. 25. Qu' avons-nous ? 26. Nous avons notre bon bceuf et nos bonnes pommes de terre. 27. Ces paysans qu'ont-ils ? 28. lis ont leur voiture et leurs bceufs. 29. Qu'ont ces jeunes paysan- nes? 30. Elles ont leurs ceufs et leurs legumes. — 31. Mon cou- sin, as-tu ta canne? 32. J'ai la tienne. 33. Quels livres as-tu? 34. J'ai tes livres. 35. Qui a les tiens? 36. Mes soeurs ont les miens. 16 SEPTIEME LEgON. Theme 6. 1. Have we our carriage ? 2. We have ours. 3. What has our coachman? 4. He has his good whip. 5. Has he our horses ? 6. He has ours. 7. Which bridle has our uncle ? 8. He has his good bridle and his big stick. 9. Have my nephews our good pencils? 10. No, sir; they have their pencils and pa- per. 11. Who has our canes? 12. Your cousins have yours. 13. Which canes have we? 14. We have their big canes. 15. What has your aunt? 16. She has the coarse thread and needles. 17. Have our cousins (fiem.) their carriage or ours? 18. They have theirs. 19. Has the countryman his ox? 20. He has his ox and his cow. 21. What have we? 22. We have our good beef. 23. Who has the egg and the salad ? 24. Your cousin has the egg, and I have the salad. 25. What has that countrywoman? 26. She has her eggs and vegetables. 27. Have those countrymen their oxen? 28. Their sons have their oxen. 29. We have their good potatoes, and they have our good money. 7. SEPTIEME LECON. 23. There are four classes or conjugations of verbs, distin- guished by their infinitive-endings. The verbs of the first conjugation end in er ; as, To ask or ask for, to inquire for. Demander, (root demand, ending er.) To wish for, to desire. Desirer, ( " desir, " er.) To look for, to seek. Chercher, ( " cherch, " er.) To find. Trouver, ( " trouv, " er.) 24. The terminations for the indicative present, are : e, es, e, onSj ez, ent. To form the present tense, add these terminations to the root of the verl >- SEPTIEME LEC.ON. Indicative Present of Demander, 17 Sing, je demande, I ask or ask for, tu demandes, thou askest, il demande, he asks. Pltir. nous demandons, we ask, vous demandez, you ask, Us demandenty they ask. 25. Demander, desirer, chercher, trouver, are transitive verbs. Transitive verbs require no preposition before trie noun which is the direct object of their action. I ask for the bread. He wishes for the fruit. She is looking for the book. Je demande le pain. II desire le fruit. Elle cherche le livre. 26. In French, the present tense has only one form. The English compound forms, I am asking, I do ask, are expressed simply hjje demande. We are looking for our books. Nous cherchons nos livres. We do not find our pens. Nous ne trouyons pas nos plumes. This gentleman is inquiring for the Ce monsieur demande le domesti- servant. que. 27. Indicative Present of Demander — Interrogative Form. Sing, demande-je ? do I ask ? demande s-tu ? dost thou ask ? demande-t-il $ does he ask? Plxjr. demandons-nous ? do we ask ? demandez-vous ? do you ask ? demandent-ils ? do they ask ? 28 • Something, any thing. Nothing ', not any thing. Does your sister ask for any thing ? She does not (ask for any thing). Do you find any thing ? No, nothing. What are you looking for ? Whom do you seek ? For whom do you inquire ? What does that lady wish for ? Quelque chose, (masc. noun.) JVe. . . .rien, " " Votre soeur demande-t-elle quelque chose ? Elle ne demande rien. Trouvez-vons quelque chose ? Non, rien. (See note, p. 9.) Que cherchez-vous ? Qui cherchez-vous? Qui demandez- yous ? Que desire cette dame? 18 The butter. The milk. The vinegar. The coffee. The tea. My friend. SEPTIEME LE£ON. VOCABULAIRE 7. Le beurre. Le lait. Le vinaigre. Le cafe. Le the. Mon ami. The oil. The cream. The cruet. The coffee-pot. The teapot. L'huile. La creme. La burette. La cafetiere. La theiere. My friend, (fern.) Mon amie. • Demander. To ask, to ask for. To inquire for. To look for, to seek. Chercher. Something. ) Any thing. ) Quelque chose. To wish for, to desire. Desirer. To find. Trouver. Nothing, not any thing. Rien (ne). ExERClCE 7. 1. Deinandez-vous quelque chose ? 2. Je demande la burette. 3. Que desirez-vous ? 4. Je desire le vinaigre et Thuile. 5. Cherchez-vous le sel ? 6. Je cherche le sel, le poivre et la mou- tarde. 7. Que trouvez-vous ? 8. Je ne trouve rien. 9. Qui demande le beurre ? 10. Ce monsieur demande le beurre et le lait. 11. Qui desire les legumes? 12. Mon ami desire les le- gumes et le boeuf. 13. La fille ne trouve-t-elle pas la cafetiere ? 14. Elle ne cherche pas la cafetiere, elle cherche la theiere. 15. Qui demande le domestique? 16. Mon pere demande le domestique. 17. Que demande cette dame ? 18. Elle demande le cafe et la creme. 19. Que desire votre ami? 20. II desire les ceufs. 21. Votre soeur cherche-t-elle son amie? 22. Non, M. ; elle cherche ma mere. 23. Votre cousin demande-t-il le the? 24. II demande le the et le lait. 25. Que demandons- nous? 26. Nous ne demandons rien. 27. Desirez-vous quelque chose? 28. Nous desirons le fruit. 29. Cherchons-nous nos crayons? 30. Nous cherchons les notres, et ils cherchent les leurs. 31. Que demandent ces hommes? 32. Ils demandent leur argent. 33. Qui ces messieurs demandent-ils ? 34. Ils de- mandent le cocher. HTTITI&ME LEgON. 19 Theme 7. 1. What do you ask for? 2. I ask for the butter. 3. Do you wish for any thing ? 4. I do not wish for any thing. 5. My friend wishes for the vinegar and the oil. 6. Are you look- ing for your hat ? 7.1 am looking for my hat and cane. 8. Do you not find your cane ? 9.1 find neither my cane nor my hat. 10. Does that lady ask for the milk? 11. She asks for the milk and the tea. 12. Who wishes for the coffee ? 13. My friend wishes for the coffee and the cream. 14. Does your mo- ther ask for any thing ? 15. She asks for the teapot, and the girl is looking for the coffee-pot. 16. For whom do you inquire ? 17. We inquire for our friends. 18. Does your cousin find the pens? 19. He finds his, we find ours, and they find theirs. 20. Are you looking for something? 21. We are not looking- for any thing. 22. What do those children wish for ? 23. They wish for that fruit. 24. Whom are those gentlemen (messieurs) seeking ? 25. They are seeking their friends. 8. HUITIEME LEgOK 29. Ci or la is affixed, with a hyphen, to the noun following ce, cet, cette, ces, in order to express relation of place, as this and that do in English. Ci points out the nearer, and la the more distant object; as, This fruit. That fruit. Ce fruit-a. Ce fruit-Jo. This carriage. That carriage. Cette voiture-a. Cette voiture-Za. These gloves. Those gloves. Ces gants-d. Ces gants-£«. 30. This one, this, (de?n. pron.) Celui-ci, fern, celle-ct. These, (demonstrative pron.) Ceux-ci, fern, celles-ct. That one, that, " Celui-la, fern, celle-la. Those, Ceux-la, fern, celles-la, 20 HUITIEME LE£ON. 31 • To buy. Do you buy this or that vest ? I buy this one. Does your brother buy this or that watch ? He buys that one. Do your sisters buy these or those gloves ? They buy neither these nor those. To love) to like; to be fond of. We love our friends ; do you love yours ? Acheter. (70, a.) Achetez-vous ce gilet-ci ou celui-ld ? Machete celui-ci. (Intr. § I, d.) Votre frere achete-t-il cette mon- tre-ci ou celle-la ? II achete celle-la. Vos soeurs achetent-elles ces gants- ci ou ceux-la ? Elles n'achetent ni ceux-ci ni ceux- la. Aimer. Nous aimons nos amis ; aimez-vous les v6tres % 32 • But (conjunction). I have the thread, but not the J'ai le fil, mais je n'ai pas l'aiguille. needle. I buy the cloth, but not the silk. But, only, nothing but (adverb). Do you buy nothing but the cloth \ I buy nothing but the cloth ? Have you but that cane ? I have only this one. J'achete le drap, mais pas la soie. Ne. . . .que. N'achetez-vous que le drap ? Je n'achete que le drap. N'avez-vous que cette canne-la ? Je n'ai que celle-ci. VOCABULAIRE 8. The vest. Le gilet. The glove. Le gant. The cloth. Le drap. The satin. Le satin. The shoe. Le Soulier. The wine. Le via The frock-coat. The watch. The stuff. The silk. The boot. The beer. La redingote. La montre. L'etoffe. La soie. La botte. La biere. Best. This one. These. To buy. But, (conjunc.) Meilleur. Celui-ci, celle-ci. Ceux-ci, celles-ci. Acheter. Mais. Excellent. Excellent. That one. Celui-la, celle-la. Those. Ceux-la, celles-la. To love, to like. Aimer. But, only, nothing ) „ but, (adverb.) ) .que. HUITIEME LEC/ON. 21 EXERCICE 8. 1. Qu'achetez-vous ? 2. J'achete ce gilet. 3. Achetez-vous ce gilet-ci ou celui-la? 4. J'achete celui-la. 5. Yotre frero achete-t-il cette redingote-ci ou celle-la ? 6. H n'achete ni celle- ci ni celle-la. 7. Qu'achete-t-il? 8. II achete le gros drap. 9. Yotre soeur achete-t-elle le satin et la soie? 10. Elle achete la soie, mais pas le satin. 11. Votre cousin qu'achete-t-il? 12. II achete ces gants. 13. Lesquels desire-t-il, ceux-ci ou ceux-la ? 14. II desire ceux-la. 15. Yos neveux achetent-ils les bottes ou les souliers? 16. lis achetent les bottes. 17. Lesquelles achetent-ils, celles-ci ou celles-la? 18. Us n'achetent ni celles-ci ni celles-la. 19. Qu' achete votre cousine? (13, Eem.) 20. Elle achete cette grosse etoffe. 21. Achetons-nous lemeilleur satin? 22. ISTous achetons le meilleur. 23. Ces messieurs ont-ils les meilleurs gants ? 24. Us ont les meilleurs. 25. Qui a la meil- leur e montre ? 26. Mon oncle a la meilleure. 27. Achete-t-il quelque chose? 28. II achete cet excellent vin. 29. Achete- t-il aussi l'excellente biere ? 30. II achete le vin, mais pas la biere. 31. N'achete-t-il que le vin ? 32. II n'achete que le vin. 33. Aimez-vous votre oncle? 34. J'aime mon oncle et ma tante. 35. Qui aimez-vous ? 36. Nous aimons nos amis. 37. Cherchez-vous votre canne ou la mienne? 38. Je cherche la votre et la mienne, mais je ne trouve que la mienne. 39. ISPavez- vous que cette canne-la ? 40. Je n'ai que celle-ci. Theme 8. 1. What do you buy? 2. I buy thisyest and that frock-coat. 3. Does your brother buy this or that cloth ? 4. He buys the best cloth. 5. Does your sister buy this or that silk ? 6. She buys this. 7. Does she also buy the satin ? 8. She buys the silk, but not the satin. 9. Does she not buy this good stuff? 10. ~No, sir; she buys nothing but the silk. 11. Do you buy these or those gloves? 12. We buy neither these nor those. 13. Do you buy those coarse shoes? 14. We do not buy the shoes, we buy the coarse boots. 15. Do your cousins buy the wine? 16. They buy the fruit, but not the wine. 17. Do they not buy 22 NEUVIEME LEgON. that excellent wine? 18. No, sir; they buy nothing but the fruit. 19. Do you buy any thing? 20. I buy nothing, but my friend buys that watch. 21. Whom do you love? 22. I love my friends; do you not love yours? 23. We k>ve ours, and they love theirs. 24. Do you like that beer? 25. I neither like the beer nor the wine. 26. Have you your best gloves? 27. I have only these. 9. NEUVIEME LEQON. Personal Pronouns as Direct Objects — 3d Pers. 33 • The personal pronouns of the third person, when they are the direct objects of the verb, are : Him, it. Le ){le and la elide the vowel before Her, it. La ) another vowel or silent h.) Them. Les, (for both genders.) These pronouns are placed before the verb ; as, Are you looking for your brother ? Cherchez-vous votre frere ? I am* (looking for him). Je le cherche. Do you not find the spoon ? Ne trouvez-vous pas la cuiller ? I do not. * Je ne la trouve pas. Have you it ? Have you it not ? L'avez-vous. Ne l'avez-vous pas. I have it. I have it not. Je l'ai. Je ne l'ai-je pas. Have I it ? Have I it not ? L'ai-je ? Ne l'ai-je pas ? Who has it ? Qui Fa ? That man has it. Cet homme Pa, Has he it ? Has he it not ? L'a-t-il ? Ne l'a-t-il pas ? He has it. He has it not. II l'a. II ne l'a pas. Have we it ? L'avons-nous ? Have these children it ? Ces enfants l'ont-ils ? He is looking for his gloves ; have II cherche ses gants ; les avez-vous ? you them ? I have them not. Je ne les ai pas. We have them not. Nous ne les avons pas. Those men have them. Ces hommes les ont. * In French, it is necessary to complete the sentence. NEUVIEME LEgON. 23 34 1 The article is used before nouns taken in a general sense ; as, Do you like fruit $ Are you fond of fruit ? Much, very much. I like it much. I am very fond of it. How. 1 Aimez-vous le fruit ? Beaucoup* (. Je l'aime beaucoup. Comment Eem. — Instead of saying " how do you like .... F 9 the French say " how do you find .... P How do you like the coffee ? I like it very well. How do like you those preserves ? I like them very much. To cut, to cut off. To cut up, to carve. I cut the bread and the meat. "Who cuts up the chicken ? My brother does. Comment trouvez-vous le cafe ? Je le trouve bon. Comment trouvez-vous ces confi- tures ? Je les trouve excellentes. Couper. Decouper. Je coupe le pain et la viande. Qui decoupe le poulet ? Mon frere le decoupe. VOCABULAIRE 9. My neighbor. Mon voisin. The goblet, the mug. Le gobelet. The sugar. Le sucre. The chicken. The cake. To cut, to cut off. Him, it ; her, it. Much, very much. Le poulet. Le gateau. Couper. Le; la. Beaucoup. My neighbor, {fern.) Ma voisine. The spoon. La cuiller. The preserve or } La confiture or preserves. ) les confitures. The poultry, fowl. La volaille. The flour, the meal. La farine. To cut up, to carve. Them. How. Decouper. Les. Comment. Exercice 9. 1. Qui demande le domestique? 2. Mon pere le demande. 3. Qui cherche le voisin? 4. Mon ami le cherche. 5. Que * Beaucoup is never strengthened by another adverb. 24 NEUVIEME LEgON. cherchez-vous ? 6. Je eherche nia canne. 7. La trouvez-vous ? 8. Je ne la trouve pas. 9. Qui nos voisins cherchent-ils ? 10. lis cherchent leurs fils. 11. Les trouvent-ils ? 12. lis ne les trouvent pas. 13. Cherchez-vous votre gobelet? 14. Je le cherche. 15. L'avez-vous? 16. Je Fai. 17. Avez-vous ma cuiller? 18. Je ne l'ai pas. 19. Votre voisine Pa-t-elle ? 20. Elle ne l'a pas. 21. Quil'a? 22. Mon voisin l'a. 23. Qu'ai- je? 24. Vous avez sa cuiller. 25. L'ai-je? 26. Yous l'avez. 27. Avons-nous nos gobelets? 28. Nous ne les avons pas. 29. Qui les a? 30. Ces homines les ont. 31. Aimez-vous le sucre ? 32. Je ne l'aime pas beaucoup. 33. Votre soeur aime- t-elle les confitures ? 34. Elle les aime beaucoup. 35. Aimez- vous la volaille ? 36. Nous Faimons beaucoup. 37. Comment trouvez-vous ce poulet? 38. Je le trouve bon. 39. Comment votre voisine trouve-t-elle ces confitures? 40. Elle les trouve excellentes. 41. Comment trouvez-vous la farine? 42. Je la trouve bonne. 43. Coupez-vous le gateau? 44. Je coupe le gateau, et mon frere decoupe le poulet. Theme 9. 1. Do you look for your neighbor? 2. I do (look for him). 3. Do you find him ? 4. I do not. 5. Who is inquiring for my sister ? 6. My neighbor (fern.) is inquiring for her. 7. Do you find your goblet? 8. I do not. 9. Have you it? 10. I have it not. 11. Have you your spoon? 12. I have it. 13. Has your sister your watch ? 14. She has it not. 15. Who has it? 16. My cousin has it. 17. Have we the preserves? 18. We have them not. 19. Who has them? 20. Our neighbors have them, and they have the sugar also. 21. Do you buy the flour ? 22. I do not ; I buy the cake. 23. Are you fond of cake ? 24. Yes, I am. 25. Do you cut it? 26. Yes, I do. 27. How do you like that cake? 28. I like it very well. 29. Do you cut up the fowl? 30. My uncle does. 31. Do you like poultry? 32. I am very fond of it. 33. How do you like that chicken? 34. I like it very much. 35. I like these preserves very much. (Place the adverb immediately after the verb.) DIXIEME LEpON, 25 35. I am, thou art, he is. We are, you are, they are. 10. DIXIEME LEgOK Present Tense of the verb Etre, to be. Je suis, tu e$, il est. Nous sommes, vous etes, ih sont. 36. Where. Here. There. Where are you \ I am here. Where is your brother ? He is there. On, upon. Under. In. Where is your pen ? It lies (is) on the table. Where are your books f They are under the sofa. Where are you ? We are in the yard. Ou. IcL La. Ou etes-vous ? Je suis ici. Ou est votre frere % II est la. Sur. Sous. Dans. Ou est votre plume ? Elle est sur la table. Ou sont vos livres ? lis sont sous le canape. Ou etes-vous ? Nous sommes dans la cour. 37« Handsome, beautiful, fine. New. Old. Beau, bel, fern, belle. Nouveau, nouvel, fern, nouvelle Vieux, vieil, fern, vieille. Beau, nouveau, vieux, are used before masculine nouns begin- ning with a consonant ; bel, nouvel, and either vieux or vieil, be- fore masculine nouns beginning with a vowel or silent b. The beautiful horse, The beautiful horses. The handsome man. The handsome men. The handsome woman. The handsome women. The new horse. The new friend. The old coat. The new servant. The old servant. Le beau cheval. Les beaux chevaux. Le bet homme. Les beaux hommes. La belle femme. Les belles femmes. Le nouveau cheval. Le nouvel ami Le vieux or vieil habit. La nouvelle servante. La vieille servante. Very. That young lady is very amiable. Fruit is very scarce. Flour is very dear. Tres. Cette demoiselle est tres-aimable. Le fruit est tres-rare. La farine est tr&a-chere. 26 dixieme LE90X. VOCABULAIRE 10. The garden. Le jar din. The yard. La coor. The bookseller. Le libraire. The young lady. La demoiselle, The general. Le general. The war. La guerre. The broth. Le bouillon. The soup. La soupe. The chocolate. Le chocolat. The water. L'eau. The sofa. ( Le canape^ or \ le sofa. The table. La table. Where. Ou. In. Dans. Here. Ici. There. La. On, upon. Sur. Under. Sous. Handsome, fine. Beau y bel, belle. Amiable. Aimable. j Nouveau, nou- ( vel, nouvelle. Old. j Vieux, vieily \ vieille. r^lew. Rare, scarce. Rare. Dear. Cher. Very. Tres. Very much. Beaucoup. Exercice 10. 1. Ou etes-vous? 2. Je snis ici. 3. Ou est votre soeur? 4. Elle est la. 5. Ou est votre frere % 6. II est dans le jardin. 7. Ou sommes-nous ? 8. Nous sommes dans la com*. 9. Mes en- fants, ou etes-vous ? 10. Nous sommes ici, sur le canape. 11. Ou sont mes gants? 12. Vos gants sont la, sous le sofa. 13. Comment trouvez-vous ce bouillon? 14. Je le trouve excellent. 15. Comment votre tante trouve-t-elle notre soupe ? 16. Elle la trouve tres-bonne. 17. Aimez-vous le chocolat? 18. Je ne l'aime pas beaucoup. 19. Aimez-vous cette petite demoiselle? 20. Nous Paimons beaucoup, elle est tres-aimable. 21. Le vieux general aime-t-il la guerre? 22. II aime beaucoup la guerre. 23. Votre nouveau cheval est-il beau? 24. II est jeune et beau. 25. Votre nouvel ami est-il ici? 26. Non, M. ; il n'est pas ici. 27. Achetez-vous ce beau gilet? 28. J'achete le beau gilet, le bel habit et la belle redingote. 29. Ou sont vos vieux habits? 30. Les domestiques les ont. 31. Comment trouvez-vous nos nouveaux chevaux ? 32. Je les trouve beaux. 33. Ces vieUles dames achetent-elles quel que chose? 34. Elles achetent ces belles robes. 35. Ou est l'eau ? 36. L'eau est sur la table. ?". ONZIEME LECON. Le libraire est-il ici ? 38. Non, M. ; il n'est pas ici. est-il clier ? 40. II est tres-rare et tres-cher. 21 39. Le fruit Theme 10. 1. Are you in the garden? 2. No, I am in the yard. 3. Where is the bookseller ? 4. He is there. 5. Are you not our friends? 6. We are your friends, but we are not theirs. 7. Where are your -papers ? 8. They are on the sofa, under rny hat. 9. How do you like your broth ? 10. I like it very well. 11. Are you fond of soup ? 12. I am very fond of it. 13. How does this young lady like the chocolate ? 14. She likes it very much. 15. Our new horse is young and beautiful. 16. The old general is very fond of war. 17. His new horses are neither very large [grand) nor very young, but they are beautiful. 18. My new friend has a handsome coat. 19. My old clothes lie (are) on the sofa. 20. My new neighbor (fern.) is very pretty and very amiable. 21. The old lady buys that handsome coffee-pot, 22. Where is the tea? 23. It* is in the teapot. 24. Where is the water? 25. It* stands (is) on the table. 26. Oranges (orange, fern.) are very dear. 27. They are very scarce at present (a present). 38. 11. ONZIEME LEgOK Numeral AnjECTivES.f One, also a or an. Un, fern. une. First, Premier. Two. Deux. Second. Second or Deuxieme. Three. Trois. Third. Troisieme. Four. Quatre. Fourth. Quatrieme. Five. Cinq. Fifth. Cinquieme. Six. Six. Sixth. Sixieme. Seven. Sept. Seventh. Septierne. Eight. Huit. Eighth. Huitienie. Nine. Neuf. Ninth. Neuvieme. Ten. Dix. Tenth. Dixieme. Eleven. Onze. Eleventh. Onzieme. Twelve. Douze. Twelfth. Douzieme. * It is masculine or feminine, according to the gender of the noun which it rep- resents. (14, Rem.) t For Lists of numeral adjectives, see p. 331. 28 ONZIEME LECON. 39 • Of, fkom. A glass of water. A cup of coffee. A piece of bread. A piece of ten cents, a ten-cent piece. Have you the eighth lesson ? No, sir ; we have the eleventh. Same. Other. Has your sister the same lesson. She has not the same. The book is in the other room. De. Un verre d'eau. Une tasse de cafe. Un morceau de pain. Une piece de dix sous. Avez-vous la* huitieme lecon ? Non, M. ; nous avons la* onzieme. Meme. Autre. Votre sceur a-t-elle la meme lecon? Elle n'a pas la meme. Le livre est dans l'autre chambre. Ni Vun ni Vautre, &c. C Hun et V autre, fern. Vune et V autre. 40 • The one and the other, both. < Les uns et les autres, fern, les unes ( et les autres. Neither the one nor the other. Neither. Have you the first or the second Avez-vous le premier ou le second book ? livre ? I have both. J'ai l'un et l'autre. I have neither. Je n'ai ni l'un ni l'autre. Rem. — Instead of saying " the first two" the French say " the two first" To, at L At present. A present. EXERCICE 12. 1. Ou est le de d'argent de votre sceur? 2. II est dans la cbambre de ma mere. 3. Avez-vc-us le cbeval du voisin I 4, D0UZIEME LEgONa 33 J'ai le cheval du general. 5. Quelle selle avez-vous ? 6. J'ai la selle du fils de votre voisin. 7. Ou sont les bas des enfants ? 8. lis sont sur ce banc de pierre. 9. Parlez-vous de la couturiere ? 10. Je parle de la fille du tailleur. 11. Qui parle de la voisine ? 12. Nous parlons de l'amie de la voisine. 13. Ces messieurs parlent-ils de la menie demoiselle ? 14. lis parlent d'une autre. 15. Votre tante achete-t-elle une paire de souliers de cuir? 16. Elle achete une paire de souliers d'etoffe et deux paires de bas de laine. 17. Achetez-vous ces gants de fil ou ces gants de co- ton ? 18. Je n'achete ni les uns ni les autres ; j'achete une paire de gants de peau. 19. Qui achete l'habit de drap du tailleur? 20. Mon ami l'achete. 21. La couturiere coupe-t-elle votre robe de satin? 22. Elle la coupe a present. 23. Ou sont nos belles carafes de cristal? 24. Elles sont sur cette table de marbre. 25. Donnez-vous ce beau flacon a votre cousine ? 26. Je le donne a ma chere petite niece. 27. Votre pere que donne-t-il a ce pau- vre garcon ? 28. II donne une piece de monnaie au pauvre gar- con. 29. Votre soeur donne-t-elle sa vieille robe a la servante ? 30. Elle la donne a la soeur du pauvre garcon. 31. Donnez-vous vos vieux habits aux pauvres? 32. Nous les donnons aux pau- vres. 33. Vos amis donnent-ils beaucoup aux pauvres ? 34. lis donnent beaucoup aux pauvres. 35. Ou est la clef de votre montre? 36. Je l'ai dans ma poche. 37. Que demande ce monsieur? 38. II demande une bouteille de vin. 39. Parlez- vous de Charles ou de son frere ? 40. Je parle de Fun et de 1' autre. 41. Parlez-vous a Charles ou a Henri? 42. Je ne parle ni a Tun ni a 1 'autre, je parle a mon cher petit cousin. Theme 12. 1. Have } t ou your brother's key ? 2. I have it not, it is in the other room on the mantel-piece. 3. Who has the booksell- er's letter ? 4. I have it in my pocket. 5. Where are the chil- dren's stockings ? 6. They are on that wooden bench. 7. Have you the seamstress's thimble ? 8. I have my sister's silver thim- ble. 9. Do you speak of the tailor? 10. I speak of the book- seller. 11. The general's son speaks of your brother's friend. 2* 34 TREIZrEME LE£ON. 12. We speak of the neighbor's daughters. 13. They do not speak of the same ladies. 14. Where is your silver knife? 15. It is on that stone bench. 16. Do you buy a pair of woollen stockings? 17. I buy two pairs of woollen stockings and one pair of leather gloves. 18. Does your sister buy a pair of leather shoes? 19. She buys a pair of cloth shoes. 20. I buy a cloth coat and a cotton vest. 21. My dear friend, do you give that pretty flagon to that boy ? 22. I give it to my neighbor's dear little daughter. 23. Does your father give anything to the poor boy? 24. He gives a piece of money to the poor boy's mother. 25. Do you give much to the poor? 26. We do. 27. Do you speak to Mary (Marie) or to her sister ? 28. I speak to both. 29. Do you ask for a bottle of wine? 30. I ask for a glass of water. 31. The water is in that crystal decanter. 32. Flour and meat are very dear [fern, pi.) at present. 46. 13. TREIZIEME LEgOK That, the one (of\ {demons, pron.) Those, the ones (of), " " My hat and my brother's, (and thai of my brother.) Our carriage and the general's. Your stockings and the children's. Celxji, fern, celle (de). Ceux, fern, celles (de). Mon chape au et celui de monfrere. Notre voiture et celle du general, Vos bas et ceux des enfants. The silver pencil-case. The gold one. The gold spoon. The pewter one. The copper nails. The iron ones. The gold pens. The steel ones. 47« Of which one. Of which ones. Of mine. Of yours. Le porte-crayon d'argent. Celui d'or. La cuiller d'or. Celle oVetain. Les clous de cuivre. Ceux defer. Les plumes d'or. Celles d'acier. Duquel, fern, de laquelle. Desquels, fern, desquelles. ( Du mieo, fern, de la mienne. { Des miens, fern, des miennes. Du v6tre, de la v6tre, des ydtree. TREIZIEME LEC0N, 35 To which one. To which ones. To mine. To yours. Auquel, fern, a laquelle. Auxquels, fem. auxquelles. j An mien, fern, a la mienne. ( Aux miens, fern, aux miennes. Au votre, a la vdtre, aux votres. 48 . Of whom ? To whom ? Of whom do you speak ? To whom do you speak ? What ? preceded by a preposition, is expressed by quoi. Of what do you speak ? De quoi parlez-vous ? De qui ? A qui ? De qui parlez-vous ? A qui parlez-vous ? Of which horse do you speak ? Of which one do you speak ? I speak of my neighbor's. I speak of yours, of his. Of which carriage does he speak ? He speaks of the general's. Of which one does he speak ? He speaks of yours, of his. To which young man do you give that book? To which one do you give it ? Do you give it to my cousin or to yours ? To which lady do you speak ? To which one do you speak ? Do you speak to his sister or to mine? De quel cheval parlez-vous ? Duquel parlez-vous ? Je parle de celui de mon voisin. Je parle du votre, du sien. De quelle voiture parle-t-il ? II parle de celle du general. De laquelle parle-t-il? H parle de la votre, de la sienne. A. quel jeune homme donnez-vous ce livre ? Auquel le donnez-vous ? Le donnez-vous a mon cousin ou au votre ? A quelle demoiselle parlez-vous ? A laquelle parlez-vous? Parlez-vous a sa sceur ou a la mienne ? VoCABULAIRE 13. The names of metals, and of most trees and woods, are of the masculine gender ; as, The beautiful gold. The good steel. That copper. That mahogany. Le bel or. The beautiful silver. Le bel argent* Le bon acier. The iron. Le fer. Ce cuivre. That pewter. Get etain. Cet acajou. The oak. Le chene. To break. Casser. To pick up. Ramasser. 36 TREIZIEME LE£03T. EXERCICE 13. 1. Ayez-vous votre porte-crayon d'argent? 2. J'ai celui de mon ami. 3. Quelle canne avez-vous ? 4. J'ai celle du voisin. 5. Quels gants ramassez-vous ? 6. Je ramasse ceux de ma soeur. 7. Avez-vous mes clefs ? 8. J'ai celles de mon frere. 9. Cher- chez-vous le de de cuivre? 10. Je cherche celui d'argent. 11. Cassez-vous ma plume d'or? 12. Je casse celle d'acier. 13. Achetez-vous les clous de cuivre? 14. J'achete ceux de fer. 15. Les domestiques cassent-ils les plats d'etain ? 16. Us cassent ceux de verre. 17. Quelles cuillers votre tante achete-t-elle ? 18. Elle achete celles d'argent. 19. Achete-t-elle la table d'aca- jou ou celle de marbre? 20. Elle achete celle d'acajou. 21. Avez-vous une table d'acajou dans votre chambre ? 22. J'ai une table de bois de chene dans ma chambre. 23. Achetez-vous les bas de fil ou ceux de laine ? 24. Nous achetons ceux de laine. 25. Parlez-vous de votre voisin ou du mien? 26. Je parle du votre. 27. Duquel parlez-vous, du petit ou du gros? 28. Je parle du gros. 29. De qui parle-t-il? 30. II parle de la voisine. 31. Parle-t-il de la sienne ou de la mienne? 32. II parle de la sienne. 33. Ce monsieur que remasse-t-il du plancher ? 34. II ramasse une piece de dix sous. 35. A qui la donne-t-il ? 36. II la donne au garcoii. 37. Auquel la donne-t-il? 38. II la donne a celui-la. 39. De quoi parlez-vous? 40. Je parle du cheval du voisin. 41. Duquel votre frere parle-t-il? 42. II parle de celui du general. 43. Parlez-vous du meme cheval? 44. ISTon, M. ; nous paiions du n6tre. 45. Duquel parlent-ils ? 46. lis parlent du leur. 47. De quelle voiture parlent-ils ? 48. lis parlent de la leur. Theme 13. 1. Have you my pencil-case? 2. I have Henry's. 3. Has your cousin your key ? 4. He has his sister's. 5. What sticks do you cut ? 6. I cut my brother's. 7. Has the seamstress your cravats or your father's ? 8. She has my father's. 9. Do you break my gold pen? 10. I break the steel one. 11. Does the tailor's wife buy the silver dish ? 12. She buys the pewter one. QUATORZIEME LEgO^. 37 13. Do you buy the iron nails? 14. We buy the copper ones. 15. Does she buy the mahogany table? 16. She buys the oak one. 17. Do you speak of your nephew or of mine? 18. I speak of yours. 19. Of which one do you speak? 20. I speak of (du) little Henry. 21. Of whom does your sister speak? 22. She speaks of the seamstress. 23. Of which one does she speak ? 24. She speaks of ours. 25. Do you speak of your friends or of his? 26. I speak of mine and of his also. 27. Does that man pick up your gloves ? 28. He picks up that lady's. 29. What do you pick up? 30. I pick up a piece of money. 31. To whom do you give it? 32. I give it to a poor boy. 33. To which one do you give it? 34. I give it to that one. 35. To which one of your nieces do you give that fine apple? 36. I give it to (a la) little Mary {Marie). 37. Of what do you speak ? 38. I speak of the general's horses. 39. Of which ones do you speak ? 40. I speak of the old general's. 14. QUATORZIEME LEgON. 49. When two nouns, without a conjunction between them, follow a verb, one is an indirect object ; as, / lend your brother a book, which is : I lend a book to your brother. Je prete un livre & votre frere. Some French verbs differ in their government from the corre- sponding English verbs. The words Somebody. Quelqu'un, abb. qqn. Something. Quelque chose, " qq. ch. placed after the verb, as, To lend somebody something. Preter quelque chose a quelqu!un. will indicate, which is the direct, and which the indirect object, and the preposition by means of which the latter is governed. To ask somebody for something. Demander quelque chose d quelqu'un. To think of somebody, of something. Penser a quelqiCun, a quelque chose. 38 QUATORZIEME LE£ON. Rem. — As a general rule, the noun which is the direct object stands before the noun which is the indirect object ; as, I give the servant something. Je donne quelque chose au domes- tique. 5©# Nobody, no one. Personne, with ne before the verb. Are you looking for anybody ? Cherchez-vous quelqu'un ? I am not. Je ne eherche personne. Do you speak of any one ? Parlez-vous de quelqu'un ? I speak of no one. Je ne parle de personne. Do you speak to any one ? Parlez-vous a quelqu'un ? I do not. Je ne parle a personne. Does any one speak of this man ? Quelqu'un parle-t-il de cet homme ? Nobody speaks of this man. Personne ne parle de cet homme. Rem. 1. — Quelqu'un and quelque chose are not used in a neg- ative sense. I do not ask any one for it. Je ne le demande a personne. I do not wish for any thing. Je ne desire rien. Rem. 2. — They may be used with ne and pas in an interroga- tive sentence ; as, Is he not speaking to somebody ? Ne parle-t-il pas a quelqu'un ? Are you not looking for something ? Ne cherchez-vous pas quelque chose ? Rem. 3. — Que, quelque chose and rien require de before the adjective; as, "What have you beautiful ? Qu'avez-vous de beau ? Something pretty. Quelque chose de joli. Nothing new. Rien de nouveau. 51 # Adverbs, generally, are placed after the verb which they modify; as, The general often speaks to my bro- Le general parle souvent a mon ther. frere. I always give something to the ser- Je donne toujour s quelque chose au vant. domestique. He seldom thinks of his friends. II pense rarement a ses amis. QUATORZIEME LEgON. 52 • Whose ? when it means to whom belongs, is expressed by a qui ; as, Whose book is that ? It is my brother's. Whose horses are those ? Of what are you thinking ? A qui est ce livrei II est a r mo7i fr ere. A qui sont ces chevaux ? A quoi pensez-vous ? (48.) VOCABULAIRE 14.- — Masculine Nouns. The minister. Le ministre. The doctor. Le docteur. The physician. Le medecin. The apothecary. L'apothicaire. The baker. Le boulanger. The miller. Le meunier. The carpenter. Le charpentier. The joiner. Le menuisier. The hatter. Le chapelier. The shoemaker. Le cordonnier. The blacksmith. Le forgeron. The mason. Le macon. Somebody. Quelqu'un. Nobody. Personne (ne). To lend. Preter. To think. Penser. Sometimes. Quelquefois. Seldom. Rarement. Often. Sou vent. Always. Toujours. Whose ? (to whom belo7igs.) [ A qui. To-day. Aujourd'hui. EXERCICE 14. 1. Cherchez-vous quelqu'un? 2. Je cherche quelqu'un. 3. Qui cherchez-vous ? 4. Je cherche le medecin. 5. Ce mechant homme aime-t-il quelqu'un? 6. II n'airue personne. 7. Quel- qu'un l'aime-t-il ? 8. Personne ne l'aime, 9. Parlez-Yous de quelqu'un? 10. Je parle du docteur. 11. De qui votre frere parle-t-il? 12. II parle du vieux ministre. 13. Qui parle de l'apothicaire? 14. Personne ne parle de l'apothicaire. 15. Le boulanger qu'achete-t-il ? 16. II achete la farine du meunier. 17. Qui achete le bois et le fer du charpentier? 18. Le menui- sier achete le bois, et le forgeron achete le fer. 19. Qu'achete le cordonnier ? 20. II achete ces morceaux d'etofFe du tailleur. 21. Le chapelier n'achete-t-il pas quelque chose? 22. II achete une piece de soie. 23. Parlez-Yous quelquefois a mon Yoisin? 24. Je parle sou vent a votre voisin. 25. Demandez-vous quel- que chose au boulanger ? 26. Je ne demande rien au boulan- 40 quatorzieme LEgoisr. ger. 27. Pr6tez-vous vos livres a quelqu'un? 28. Je les pr£te quelquefois a mes amis. 29. A qui pre tons-nous notre argent? 30. Nous ne le pretons a personne. 31. Le menuisier prete-t-il son chevai au ministre? 32. II le prete au medecin. 33. Pen- sez-vous a quelqu'un? 34. Je pense toujours a quelqu'un. 35. A qui pensez-vous toujours? 36. Je pense toujours a ma mere. 37. A quoi ce jeune homme pense-t-il? 38. II ne pense a rien. 39. Ces vilains hommes pensent-ils souvent aux pauvres? 40. lis pensent rarement aux pauvres. 41. Avez-vous quelque chose de nouveau aujourd'hui ? 42. Je n'ai rien de nouveau. 43. Qu'achetez-vous de joli? 44. Je n'achete rien de joli. 45. A qui est ce rnouchoir ? 46. II est a ma soeur. 47. A qui sont ces vieux gants ? 48. lis sont a ma tante. Theme 14. 1. Do you love anybody? 2. I love somebody. 3. Does anybody love the wicked? (les mechants.) 4. Nobody loves them, and they love nobody. 5. Do you speak of somebody ? 6. I speak of the minister's son. 7. Who speaks of the physi- cian? 8. Nobody speaks of the physician, but we speak of the apothecary. 9. Do you lend your money to the doctor? 10. I do not lend it to any one. 11. Does the miller lend his horse to the baker? 12. He lends it to the carpenter. 13. Does the joiner lend the blacksmith a table? 14. He lends the mason a bench. 15. Do the hatters lend their hats to the shoemakers? 16. They lend them to nobody. 17. Do you sometimes think of your mother? 18. I always think of my father and mother. 19. Of whom does this boy think? 20. He thinks of nobody. 21. Of what does this young lady think ? 22. She thinks of her lessons. 23. Does that ugly man often think of his poor neigh- bors? 24. He seldom thinks of the poor. 25. Of what does he think? 26. He thinks of his money. 27. Any thing new. to-day? 28. No, nothing. 29. What have you new? 30. I have nothing new. 31. My brother has something pretty. 32. Whose pencil-cases (porte-crayons) are those? 33. The gold one is my cousin's, and the silver one is my sister's. QUIXZIEME LECON. 41 15. QUESTZIEME LEgON. Personal Pronouns as Indirect Objects — 3d Pers. 53. The pronouns of the third person, representing the indi- rect object of the verb (43), are : TO HTM, TO HER. To THEM. Do yon speak to him ? to her ? I do not. "What do you give to my aunt ? I give her this nosegay. "What do you ask my uncle for ? I ask him for the papers. Do you lend any thing to my cous- ins? I lend them this book. f {before the verb.) Lui, Leur, Lui parlez-vous ? Je ne lui parle pas. Que donnez-vous a ma tante? Je lui donne ce bouquet. Que demandez-vous a mon oncle ? Je lui demande les papiers. Pretez-vous quelque chose a mes cousines ? Je leur prete ce livre. 54 • Him or it to him, to them. Her or it to him, to them. Them to him, to them. Do you give it to her ? I do not. Do you not ask him for them ? I do. Do you not lend it to them ? I do not. Le lui. Le leur. La lui. La leur. Les lui. Les leur, Le lui donnez-vous. Je ne le lui donne pas. !N"e les lui demandez-vous pas? Je les lui demande. ]STe le leur pretez-vous pas ? Je ne le leur prete pas. 55 • There, to it, at it, in it, here. Y, {before the verb.) Y refers to a place which has been previously mentioned. Is your brother in his room ? He is there. He is not. To send. Whom do you send to market i I send the servant (there). Do you send* him there now ? Votre frere est-il dans sa chambre ? II y est. II n'y eet pas. Envoy er. (70, e.) Qui envoy ez-vous an marche ? J'y envoie le domestique. L'y envoy ez-vous a present? * In English, it would be more correct to use the future tense in this and similar sentences; as, will you send, &c. ; in French, either the future or the present is equal- ly correct 42 QUINZIEME LEgON. I send him there forthwith. Do you send that letter to the mer- chant ? We do. To carry \ to take; to wear. Where do you carry that box ? I carry it to the garret. Do you take the barrel there? He wears a cloth coat. Je l'y envoie tout de suite. Envoy ez-vous cette lettre au mar- ch and? Nous la lui envoyons. Porter. Oil portez-vous cette caisse? Je la porte au grenier. Y portez-vous le baril ? II porte un habit de drap. 56. All y every j whole. Does he carry all the wine to the cellar? Does he send all the merchandise to the store ? He does. All men, every man. All women, every woman. A whole piece of cloth. Half. Demi, when it precedes the noun, remains invariable ; after the noun, it agrees with it in gender only. Half a piece. Une demi-piece. Two pieces and a half. Deux pieces et demie. Tout, fern, toute, plur. tous, toutes. Porte-t-il tout le vin a la cave ? Envoie-t-il toute la marchandise au magasin ? II l'y envoie toute. Tous les hommes. Toutes les femmes. Toute une piece de drap. Demi. VOCABULAIRE 15. The market. Le marche. The street. La rue. The merchant. Le marchand. The merchandise. La marchandise. The store. Le magasin. The house. La maison. The garret. !• Le grenier. The cellar. La cave. The granary. The garden. Le jar din. The kitchen. La cuisine. The barrel. Le baril. The case, the box. La caisse. The nosegay. Le bouquet. The flower. La fleur. To carry, to take. To wear. To him, to her. To them. • Porter. Lui. Leur. To send. There, To Envoyer. ;re - . . . It. it, at it, in it. ) QUINZIEME LEC/ON. 4*3 All, every, whole. j JJj£ ^^ Half. Demi. Forthwith ) Tout de snite< Instantl I l'instant Immediately. ) J ExERCICE 15. 1. De quoi parlez-vous au charpentier? 2. Je lui parle de la maison de mon oncle. 3. Dans quelle rue est cette maison ? 4. Elle est dans cette rue-ci. 5. Qui parle a votre frere? 6. Son medecin lui parle. 7. Parlez-vous quelquefois a vos voisins ? 8. Nous leur parlons sou vent. 9. Que donnez-vous a ma tante ? 10. Je lui donne ce beau bouquet. 11. Donnez-vous ces belles fleurs a vos cousines? 12. Je leur donne ces fleurs et tout ce fruit. 13. Que demandez-vous a mon frere? 14. Je lui de- mande mes gants. 15. Donnez-vous votre montre a votre cou- sin? 16. Je ne la lui donne pas; je la lui prSte. 17. Pretez- vous vos livres a vos amis? 18. Je les leur prete quelquefois. 19. Ou sont tous nos amis? 20. lis sont tons dans le jardin. 21. Toutes les demoiselles y sont elles ? 22. Elles y sont toutes. 23. Madame votre mere y est-elle aussi ? 24. Elle n'y est pas. 25. Ou envoyez-vous le domestique? 26. Je l'envoie au maga- sin. 27. Envoyez-vous quelqu'un aumarche? 28. J'y envoie la servante. 29. L'y envoyez-vous tout de suite? 30. Je l'y envoie a l'instant. 31. Envoyons-nous la lettre au marchand? 32. JSous la lui envoyons aujourd'hui. 33. Ou envoient-ils leurs marcliandises ? 34. lis les envoient toutes au magasin. 35. Portent-ils ce baril au grenier ? 36. Us l'y portent. 37. Ypor- tent-ils toutes ces caisses? 38. lis ne les y portent pas; ils les portent toutes a la cave. 39. Ou le boulanger porte-t-il son pain? 40. II le porte a la cuisine. 41. Qui est dans la cui- sine? 42. La iille y est, je pense. 43. Achetez-vous toute une piece de drap ? 44. J'achete une derni-^iece de drap et deux pieces et demie de cette etoffe. 45. Portez-vous l'habit de votre frere ? 46. Non, monsieur ; je porte le mien. 44 seizieme le£0n. Theme 15. 1. What do you give to your cousin? 2. I give her this nosegay. 3. Of what do you speak to the mason ? 4. I speak to him about (de) our old house. 5. Does your uncle lend his carriage to his neighbors ? 6. He does sometimes. 7. Do they ask him for it ? 8. They do very often. 9. Does your sister give all that fruit to your little niece? 10. She does not. 11. Do you give all those flowers to your cousins? 12. I do (give them all to them). 13. Is your sister in the garden? 14. She is. 15. Are all our friends there? 16. They are. 1*7. Where do you send the servant? 18. I send him to the garret. 19. Will you send (do you send) the girl to market forthwith ? 20. I (shall) send her there instantly. 21. Where does the mer- chant send his merchandise ? 22. He sends it to the store. 23. In which street is his store ? 24. It is in this street. 25. Do you send all that money to the tailor? 26. We do. 27. Are you taking the letter to the minister? 28. I am. 29. Are you taking the boxes to the cellar? 30. We are. 31* Is he carrying the whole barrel of flour to the kitchen ? 32. He is. 33. Do you wear that old hat? 34. I wear it some- times. 35. We have half a piece of satin, and two pieces and .. half of silk. 16. SEIZIEME LEgON. Personal Pronouns — 1st and 2d Persons — Direct and Indirect Objects. 57i For the first and second persons, there is but one form of personal pronouns to represent the direct and indirect objects of the verb. Me, to me. Us, to us. Me. Nous. Thee, to thee. You, to you. Te. Vous. SEIZIEME LE^ON. 45 To take, to lead. Where dost thou take me ? I take thee to the store. Do you take me there ? We do. Who is asking for me ? Do you ask me for any thing ? I ask you for the book. What do you give us ? Mener. (10, b.) Ou me menes-tu? Je te mene au magasin. M'y menez-vous? Nous vous y menons. Qui me demande ? Me demandez-vous quelque chose ? Je vous demande le livre. Que nous donnez-vous ? 58. to us, " to us, to thee, " to thee, to you, " to you, Does he give you the book ? He lends it to me ; he does not give it to me. Does he not lend it to us ? Dost thou give me thy pen ? I lend it to thee ; I do not give it to thee. em to me. Me le, me la, me les. " to us. Nous le, nous la, nous les. " to thee. Tele, te la, te les. " to you. Vous le, vous la, vous les. 59 • To look at somebody. Do you look at anybody ? I do not. Who looks at me ? Nobody does. To listen to somebody. Do you listen to that man ? I do, when he speaks to me. To call. Do you call me ? I do not. Those men call us. Vous donne-t-il le livre ? II me le prete ; il ne me le donne pas. Ne nous le prete-t-il pas ? Me donnes-tu ta plume ? Je te la prete; je ne te la donne pas. Regarder qqn. Regardez-vous quelqu'un ? Je ne regarde personne. Qui me regarde ? Personne ne vous regarde. Ecouter qqn. Ecoutez-vous cet homme ? Je l'ecoute quand il me parle Appeler. (70, a.) M'appelez-vous ? Je ne vous appelle pas. Ces hommes nous appellent bOt The day. Every day. The morning, in the morning. TJie evening, in the evening. Le jour. Tous les jours. Le matin. Le soir. 46 SEIZIEME LEgON. I take (carry) the bridle*to the stable and (lead) the horse to the brook. He takes his sheep- to the stable in the evening. Do you like mutton ? A veal cutlet. A mutton chop. To buy something from somebody. Do you buy the cheese from her ? Je porte la bride a l'ecurie et je mene le cheval au ruisseau. II mene ses moutons a l'etable 1« soir. Aimez-vous le mouton ? Une cotelette de veau. Une cotelette de mouton. Acheter quel que chose A or de qqn. Lui achetez-vous le fromage ? VOCABULAIRE 16. The brook. The cook. The shepherd. The sheep ; mutton. The calf; veal. The cheese. Le ruisseau. Le cuisinier. Le berger. Le mouton. Le veau. Le fromage. The office; the bureau. Le bureau. The flock. Le troupeau. The river. The cook, (fern.) The shepherdess. The sheep ; the ewe. The cutlet ; the chop. The omelet. The stable, (for > horses.) ) The stable, (for ) cattle) ) La riviere. La cuisiniere. La bergere. La brebis. La c6telette. L'omelette. L'ecurie. L'etable. To take, to lead, ) , , #f __ 7 x to drive. '[Mener. (*<>,&.) To call. When. Me, to me. Thee, to thee. Appeler. (70, a.) Quand. Me. Te. To look at. To listen to. In the morning. Us, to us. You, to you. Regarder. Ecouter. Le matin. Nous. Vous. EXERCICE 16. 1. Ou me menez-vous ? 2. Je vous rnene au bureau de mon oncle. 3. Y portez-vous cet argent? 4. Je Ty porte. 5. Que me demandez-vous \ 6. Je vous demande mon chapeau. 7. Ou le marchand vous mene-t-il? 8. II me mene au marche. 9. Vous y mene-t-il souvent? 10. II m'y mene tous les jours. 11. Que vous donne-t-il ? 12. II me donne quelque chose de bon. 13. Ou le berger mene-t-il son troupeau de moutons? 14. II le mene a. la riviere. 15. Quand la bergere mene-t-elle ses brebis au ruisseau? 16. Elle les y mene le matin et le soir. 17. SEIZIEME LEgOtf. 41 Quand ces paysans menent-ils leurs veaux al'etable? 18. lis les y menent le soir. 19. Menez-vous les chevaux a l'ecurie? 20. Nous les y menons. 21. Airuez-vous le veau ? 22. J'aime le veau, mais je n'airne pas le mouton. 23. Le cuisinier vous donne-t-il cette cotelette de veau? 24. H me la donne. 25. La cuisiniere nous donne-t-elle cette omelette ? 26. Elle nous la donne. 27. La bergere vous donne-t-elle son fromage? 28. Elle ne me le donne pas, je le lui achete. 29. Me donnez-vous ces ceufs? 30. Nous vous les donnons. 31. Kegardez-vous cette dame? 32. Je ne la regarde pas. 33. Nous regarde-t-elle ? 34. Elle ne nous regarde pas. 35. Ecoutez-vous ce monsieur? 36. Je l'ecoute. 37. M' ecoutez-vous ? 38. Nous vous ecoutons. 39. Qui appelez-vous ? 40. J'appelle le menuisier. 41. Qui m'appelle? 42. Ces bergers vous appellent. 43. Ces enfants nous ecoutent-ils quand nous les appelons? 44. Us ne nous ecoutent pas toujours. Theme 16. 1. When does he take you to the office? 2. He takes me there in the morning. 3. What does he ask you for ? 4. He does not ask me for any thing. 5. Do you take us to the store ? 6. We do. 7. They take the horses to the stable and (carry) the barrels to the garret. 8. When does the shepherd drive his flock to the river ? 9. He drives it there in the evening. 10. Does the shepherdess take her sheep to the brook? 11. She takes them there every day. 12. Where does he take the calf? 13. He takes it to the stable. 14. What does the cook give you? 15. He gives me a veal cutlet. 16. Will you have a mutton chop? 17. No, I thank you ; I do not like mutton. 18. Do you give me that omelet? 19. I do. 20. Does the coun- trywoman give you those eggs? 21. She does not give them to us; we buy them from her. 22. Who gives you that large piece of cheese? 23. The cook (fern.) does. 24. Do you look at those ladies? 25. I do not. 26. Do they look at us? 27. They do not. 28. To whom do you listen ? 29. I listen to that gentleman. 30. Do you listen to me ? 31. We listen to you 48 DIX-SEPTIEME LECW. when you speak to us. 32. Do you call anybody? 33. I call the cook. 34. Does anybody call me ? 35. Nobody calls you. 36. The masons call us ; we do not call them. 37. He wears his best coat every day. 17. DIX-SEPTIEME LEgON. 61* (a.) Adjectives ending in x, change x into se for the fem- inine; as, A happy man Un homme heureux* A happy woman. Une femme heureuse.* (p.) Those ending in/, change /into ve ; as, An attentive boy. Un garcon attentif. An attentive girl. Une fille attentive. (c.) Most adjectives ending in el, eil, ien, on and et, with a few others, double the final consonant before the e mute of the femi- nine; as, An Italian air. Un air italien. Italian music. La musique italienne. A dumb man. Un homme muet. A dumb woman. Une femme muette. (d.) An adjective or pronoun which refers to nouns of differ- ent genders, must be in the plural masculine ; as, The man and woman are active. L'homme et la femme sont actifs. Both are industrious. L'un et V autre sont industrieux. 62. So, referring to a preceding adjective or sentence, is ex- pressed by le, which is invariable. So is often understood in English, but in French, its equivalent le must be expressed. Are you contented, my daughter ? Etes-vous contente, ma fille ? I am (so). She is not. Je le suis. Elle ne /'est pas. * For the place of the adjective, see 65. DIX-SEPTIEME LECt)N. 49 Why. Because. Pourquoi. Parte que. Why is she not contented ? Pourquoi n'est-elle pas contente ? Because she is sick. Parce qu'elle est malade. Madam, are you sick I Madame, etes-vous malade ? I am. Je le suis. When the reference is to a noun, the pronoun agrees with it ; as, Are you the sick person ? Etes-vous la malade I I am {the person), Je la suis. 63. A noun used adjectively,* is not preceded by any deter- minative word ; as, Are you a Frenchman \ Etes-vous francais ? What is that man? Qu'est cet horn me 8 He is a physician. II est medecin. 64 • The sick person. The blind man. The rich man. The poor man. The Frenchman. The French language. Do you speak French ? That Frenchman speaks Italian well. That Frenchwoman sings badly. Le malade, la malade. L'aveugle. Le riche. Le pauvre, Le Francais. Le francais. Parlez-vous francais ? (or) le /ran* gais ?\ Ce Francais parle bien l'italien, Cette Frangaise chante mal VOCABULAIRE 17. The Frenchman. The Italian. The musician. The air. Pleasure. Labor, Le Fran gais. L'ltalien. Le musicien. L'air. Le plaisir. Le travail, pi, Iestravaux4 The Frenchwoman. La Francaise. The Italian woman. L'ltalienne. The musician, (fern.) Lamusicienne. The music. La musique. Dancing. La danse. Stud}\ L'etude. * A noun is used adjectively when it serves to qualify or explain a preceding noun, as in the examples. But a noun in the predicate is not used adjectively, when it is itself qualified by an adjective; as, H est tin avocat celebre, he is a celebrated lawyer. t With the verb parler, the article may be omitted before the Dames of languages. Parler frangais or le francais, to speak French, to know French ; parler frangais or Compter. To have a wish, ; >• Avoir envie. To intend. Avoir l'intention. mind, a desire. To be obliged, must. Devoir. To go to. Aller trouver. To go for. Aller chercher. To send for. Envoy er chercher. Alone. Seul. Together. Ensemble. Next. Prochain. Last. Pass6, dernier. Now. Maintenant. Forthwith. Immediately. >• Sur le champ. Presently. Tout-a-Pheure. By and by. Tant6t. Soon, very soon. Bient6t. To-morrow. Demain. Exercice 24. 1. Allez-vous travailler? 2. Je vais etudier ma lecon. 3. Ne voulez-vous pas aller an marche ? 4. J'aime mieux rester ici. 5. Quand comptez-vous aller a, Boston ? 6. Je compte y aller la semaine prochaine. '7. Comptez-vous avoir de l'argent bientot? 8. Je compte en avoir demain. 9. Avez-vons envie d' aller au bureau avec moi? 10. Je n'ai pas le temps; je dois aller trouver ma sceur; elle a besoin de me parler. 11. Qu' allez- vous chercher ? 12. Je vais chercher la lettre pour vous la mon- trer. 13. Le commis doit-il aller a la douane ce matin ? 14. II doit y aller tantot. 15. Quand va-t-il chercher de l'argent? 16. II va en chercher tout-a-1'heure. 17. Votre pere est-il deja au bureau? 18. II doit y 6tre maintenant. 19. Qu'envoyez- vous chercher? 20. Nous envoyons chercher un boisseau de pommes de terre, une demi-mesure de peches et deux livres et demie de sucre. 21. Voulez-vous rester ici? 22. Je n'ai pas envie de rester ici seul. 23. Voulons-nous aller ensemble au VINGT-QUATRIEME LEQX)N, *79 • Ailleurs. c Du tout. Everywhere else. Partout ailleurs. At all, not at all. •J Pas du tout. ( Point du tout. Exercice 26. 1. Voyez-vous mon frere quelque part? 2. Je le vois au coin de la rue. 3. Vient-il par ici ? 4. Non, M. ; il entre dans la rne 5. Yoyez-vons venir le medecin ? 6. Nous le voyons venir. 7. Vient-il voir quelqu'un ici ? 8. II vient voir ma mere, qui est malade. 9. Savez-vous ou est ma sceur ; je la cherche partout? 10. Je ne sais pas ou elle est. 11. Sait-elle que nous allonsaubal? 12. Ellelesait; elle y va aussi. 13. Savez-vous vos lecons par cceur? 14. Nous les savons par cceur. 15. Voulez-vous me faire un plaisir ? 16. Volontiers, si je puis. 17. Voulez-vous rester avec moi ce matin? 18. Je ne puis, je dois aller chez mon oncle. 19. Puis-je y aller avec vous ? 20. Vous pouvez y aller avec moi, si vous voulez. 21. Voulons-nous y ai- VINGT-SIXIEME LE£ON. 87 ler a present? 22. Nous ne pouvons pas, car je dois d'abord faire mon devoir. 23. Faites-vous ce que vous voulez? 24. Je ne fais pas ce que je veux. 25. Qui peut faire ce qu'il veut dans ce pays-ci ? 26. Personne ne peut faire ce qu'il veut, ni ici ni ailleurs. 27. Savez-vous ce que fait votre frere?* 28. Je ne sais pas ce qu'il fait. 29. Ces hommes savent-ils ce qu'ils font? 30. lis ne savent pas ce qu'ils font. 31. Que dites-vous? 32. Je dis qu'il fait mauvais temps. 33. Que dit ce monsieur ? 34. II dit qu'il n'a pas d'argent ici, mais qu'il en a ailleurs. 35. Fai- tes-vous ce que vous dites ? 36. Nous faisons ce que nous disons. 37. Ces messieurs disent-ils ce qu'ils font? 38. Us ne disent pas ce qu'ils font. 39. Pourquoi regardez-vous par la fen&tre ? 40. Je regarde pour voir passer le monde qui sort de l'eglise. 41. Marchez-vous lentement quand il fait froid ? 42. Nous marchons vite quand il fait froid. 43. D'ou apportez-vous cette eau? 44. Je l'apporte de la fontaine, qui est au milieu de la place. 45. Laissez-vous cette console au milieu de la chambre ? 46. Non, M. ; nous la placons sous ce miroir. 47. Pouvez-vous placer ces caisses dans votre magasin ? 48. Nous ne pouvons pas ; nous n'y avons plus de place du tout. Theme 26. 1. Do you see the fountain which is in the middle of the square ? 2. We see it in the looking-glass. 3. I see our cousins at the corner of the street, but I do not know whether they see me or not. 4. Henry sees me ; he is coming this way. 5. Does your father know that I am here ? 6. He knows it ; he ivill be here in an instant (il va venir a V instant). 7. Can your cousins (fern.) dance ? 8. They can dance and sing ; but why do you wish to know that ? 9. I wish to ask them if they will dance with me. 10. Do you go out this afternoon? 11. I am going to see a friend of mine (un de mes amis). 12. Can I go with you? 13. You may go with me, if you like. 14. "Which way are we to go? 15. Can we pass through Henry-street? 16. * In a relative sentence, the pronoun que being the only object of the verb, the noun subject is more elegantly placed after the verb than before it. 88 VINGT-SEPTIIIME LE£0N. We can pass that way. 17. You walk very slowly. 18. My dear friend, it is too warm to walk fast. 19. Will you do me a favor? 20. Willingly, if I can. 21. Will you go to the bank for me? 22. I will (Je mux bien). 23. Can they not give me the money to-day ? 24. It is too late ; but if you want money, I can lend you some. 25. What are you doing ? 26. I am doing my task. 27. What are your neighbors doing ? 28. They are making music. 29. What do you say ? 30. I do not say any thing at all. 31. We do what we say; do you tell all you do? 32. Nobody tells all he does. 33. Where can I find your uncle ; I am looking for him everywhere ? 34. He will be (il va venir) here presently ; he must be here precisely at three o'clock (a t?'ois heures precises). 35. Can you not place this pier- table somewhere else ? 36. No, sir ; everywhere else it is in our way (elle nous gene). 37. Who tells you so (cela)1 38. 7" ((Test moi qui) say* so. 39. And I (Et moi je) tell you that I will not have it here ; you may place it anywhere else (partout ailleurs), but not here. 27. VINGT-SEPTlfiME LEgON. 101. (a.) To BE ACQUAINTED WITH. ) ~ x J m \ Connaitre. %rr. TO KNOW. J I know. We know. Je connais. Nous connaissons, (b.) TO CONDUCT. CONDUIRE. irr. I conduct. We conduct. Je conduis. Nous conduisons. (c.) To extinguish. £teindre. irr. I extinguish. We extinguish. J'eteins. Nous eteignons. (d.) To put, to put on. Mettre. irr. I put. We put. Je mets. Nous mettons. (e.) To take. Prendre, irr. I take. We take. Je prends. Nous prenons. They take. Us prennent. * The verb agrees, in number and person, with the antecedent of the relatiye pro- noun. VINGT-SEPTIEME LECON. 89 102« Do you know that French- Connaissez-vous ce Francais ? man? Do you know French ? He takes his mother to church. He takes the horse to the stable. To take off, to take away. Do you take off your gloves ? ISo, I put them on. Do you put those papers on the table ? I am going to take them away. I am going to take them to the other room. "Wiry do you not take your own book? Do you take music lessons ? To learn. "We learn the ancient and modern languages. They learn their lessons by heart. Savez-vous le francais ? II conduit sa mere a l'eglise. II niene le cheval a Tecurie. Oter. Otez-vous vos gants ? Is on, je les mets. Mettez-vous ces papiers sur la ta- ble? Je vais les en oter. Je yais les porter dans l'autre chambre. Pourquoi ne prenez-vous pas votre liyre? Prenez-vous des lecons de musique f Apprendre. irr. (101, e.) ftbus apprenons les langues ancien- nes et les modernes. (12.) lis apprennent leurs legons par cceur. 103« Before, {priority.) Before, [position.) Before noon. Before evening. I will put your cloak before the fire. Before, {followed by a verb.) Do you extinguish the candle be- fore you light the gas ? I light the gas before I extinguish the candle. After. Behind. After rain comes sunshine. I put your umbrella behind the door. Avant. Devant. Avant midi. Avant le soir. Je vais mettre votre manteau de- vant le feu. Avant de, {with the verb in the in- finitive.)* Eteignez-vous la chandelle avant d'allumer le gaz ? J'allume le gaz avant d'eteindre la chandelle. Apres. D err iere. Apres la pluie vient le beau temps, Je mets votre parapluie derriere la porte. * It is to be observed that the verb that precedes and the one that follows oefore, must both have the same subject, as in the examples that follow. "When each verb has a different subject, the construction here indicated cannot be followed, See (254). 90 VINGT-SEPTIEME LECON. 104# The article is used before the epithets and titles com- monly applied to proper names ; as, Captain George. Doctor Francis. Where are you taking little John ? Le capitaine George. Le docteur Francois. Ou conduisez-vous le petit Jean ? We say : prendre du cafe, du the ; and prendre le cafe, le the ; the former, to distinguish one beverage from another ; the latter, when we mention it as an habitual or daily thing ; as, Do you take coffee or tea ? Prenez-vous du cafe ou du the ? We take coffee after dinner. Nous prenons le cafe apres diner. VOCABULAIRE 27. The fire, a fire. A candlestick. The gas. The burner. Le feu, du feu. A light. Un chandelier. A candle. Le gaz. A lamp. Le bee. A match. A button ; a knob. Un bouton. To be acquainted ) ConnaUre with, to know. ) To extinguish. £teindre. To put, to put on. Mettre. To take. Prendre. Before, {priority) Avant, avant de. After. Apres. Ancient. Ancien. Brown. Brun. One-eyed. Borgne.* A buckle. To conduct. De la lumiere. Une chandelle. Une lampe. Une allumette. Une boucle. Conduire. To light, to kindle. Allumer. j-Oter. To take away. To learn. Before, {position.) Behind. Modern. Gray. Lame. Apprendre. Devant. Derriere. Moderne. Gris. Boiteux* Exercice 27. 1. Connaissez-vous le docteur Francois ? 2. Je leconnais/or£ (very) bien, il est de nos amis. 3. Sait-il la langue de ce pays-ci ? 4. Oui, M. ; il sait l'anglais. 5. Votre sceur connait-elle la dame dont nous parlons ? 6. Je ne sais pas si elle la connait, mais mes * Borgne and ooltewx are also used as substantives : le borgne, the one-eyed man. VINGT-SEPTIEME LE£0N. 91 cousines la connaissent. 7. Ou conduisez-vous le petit Jean? 8. Je le conduis chez lui. 9. Qui conduit l'aveugle ? 10. Les borgnes conduisent les aveugles. 11. Conduisons-nous ce boi- teux chez lui? 12. Nous l'y conduisons. 13. A quelle heure eteignez-vous le gaz dans votre chambre? 14. Je l'eteins toujours avant minuit. 15. Qui eteint les feux chez vous? 16. Les domestiques les eteignent. 17. Eteignons-nous la lampe avant d'allurner le gaz? 18. Nous allumons le gaz avant d'e- teindre la lampe. 19. Le domestique va-t-il faire du feu? 20. II va nous apporter de la lumiere avant de faire du feu. 21. Ou mettez-vous vos chandelles ? 22. Je les mets dans l'armoire, et les allumettes sont dans le tiroir. 23. Ou met-il le chandelier? 24. H le met toujours devant la porte. 25. Ou les enfants met- tent-ils leurs parapluies ? 26. lis les mettent derriere la porte, dans le coin. 27. Quels habits mettez-vous aujourd'hui? 28. Nous mettons nos habits bruns et nos gilets gris. 29. Pourquoi otez-vous votre chapeau ? 30. Je Tote pour y mettre ce ruban vert avec cette boucle d' argent. 31. Le tailleur va-t-il oter ces boutons d'acier de votre habit bleu ? 32. II va les en oter, et y mettre des boutons de soie. 33. Prenez-vous du cafe le matin ? 34. Je prends du cafe le matin et du the le soir. 35. Prenez- vous le cafe apres diner? 36. Nous prenons toujours le cafe apres diner. 37. Ces enfants prennent-ils Fair assez souvent? 38. lis prennent Pair tous les matins et tous les soirs. 39. Qu'ap- prenez-vous ? 40. J'apprends les langues anciennes et les mo- derues. 41. Apprenez-vous vos lecons par coeur? 42. Nous les apprenons par coeur. 43. Qu'allez-vous faire a present? 44. Je vais prendre votre redingote grise, la mettre devant le feu, ensuite eteindre ce bee de gaz, fermer la porte a clef, et con- duire ces enfants chez eux. Theme 27. 1. Do you know that lame man ? 2. I know him; he is a Frenchman? 3. Does he know English ? 4. I do not know. 5. Are you acquainted with Captain Leblanc ? 6. We are not well acquainted with him (beaucoup), but my uncle knows him 92 VINGT-HUITIEME LE^ON. very well. 1. Where are you taking little Henry? 8. I am taking him home. 9. We conduct our friends everywhere. 10. The one-eyed man conducts the lame man, and the lame conduct the blind. 11. Do you extinguish the gas before midnight? 12. We always extinguish it before midnight. 13. If I want a light after midnight, I light a candle or a lamp. 14. Before I extin- guish the gas, I always put a candle and matches on the table before my bed. 15. Why does he extinguish that burner? 16. He is going to light this one. 17. Is he going to make a fire in this room? 18. He must go for wood before he can make a fire. 19. Where do you put your umbrellas? 20. We put them behind the door. 21. My mother puts on her gray cloak, and my sisters put on their brown silk dresses. 22. They extin- guish the light before they go out. 23. They put the candle- stick behind the door. 24. The servant takes off his coat before he makes the fire. 25. Why do you take the buckle from your hat? 26. I take it off to put a new ribbon on it. 27. The tai- lor is going to take those silk buttons from my green coat, to put silver buttons on it. 28. Why do you put those papers on the table ? 29. I am going to take them away immediately. 30. Will you take this book to the other room ? 31. Why do you not take your own book; it lies before you on the table. 32. I take coffee in the morning. 33. We take tea at six o'clock. 34. This youth (jeune homme) learns his lessons by heart. 35. These youths (Jeunes gens) learn the ancient and modern lan- guages (12). 28. VINGT-HUITIEME LEgON. 105. To READ. Lire. irr. I read. We read. Je lis. Nous lisons. To WRITE. Ecrire. irr. I write. We write. J'ecris. Nous ecrivons. To DRINK. Boire. irr. I drink. We drink. Je bois. Nous buvons. They drink. lis boivent. I VINGT-HUITIEME LE£ON. 93 To BELIEVE. I believe. They believe. "We believe. Cboiee. irr. Je crois. lis croient. Nous croyons. 106# Do you read the paper before you go out ? Do children write before they read ? What do you drink at dinner ? Do you believe that man ? Do you think that you can do that ? I believe I can do it. I believe I can. I believe not. Lisez-vous la feuille avant de sor- tir. Les enfants ecrivent-ils avant de lire? Que buvez-vous a diner ? Croyez-vous cet homme ? Croy ez-vous pouvoir /aire cela ? Je crois pouvoir le faire. Je crois que oui. Je crois que non. 107 1 One, they, people, we. On, (indef, pron., Bdpers. sing.) It is said. It is believed. On dit. On croit. What is the news ? (What do they Que dit-on de nouveau ? say new?) Do people believe that? Croit-on cela? Rem. 1. — After et, si, ou, id, qui, que, V is generally used be- fore on, for euphony ; as, It is said and believed. On dit et Ton croit. Rem. 2. — On is repeated before each verb that refers to the same subject ; as, People do not do what they like. On ne fait pas ce que Ton veut. 108 • To answer a person, a note. Do you answer him who speaks to you? I do. Do you answer the physician*s note ? I do. To wait for, to expect. Are they waiting for you at home ? We expect company to night. To hear ; to understand. I hear a noise. Repondre a qqn., a un billet Repondez-vous a celui qui vous parle ? Je lui reponds. Eepondez-vous au billet du m6de- cin? J'y reponds. Attendre. Vous attend-on chez vous ? Nous attendons du monde ce soir. Entendre. J'entends du bruit, 94 vingt-huitiIjme LEgoiv T . Do you not hear that somebody is calling you ? • To comprehend, to understand. Do you understand all you read ? N'entendez-vous pas qu'on vous appelle ? Comprendre. irr. (101, e.) Comprenez-vous tout ce que vous lisez ? 109» To hear news. To hear a thing. To hear of. To hear from. Will you try (taste) that syrup ? How does that syrup taste ? It tastes good. It tastes bitter. Apprendre des nouvelles. Entendre dire une chose. Entendre parler de. Recevoir des nouvelles de. Voulez-vous gouter ce sirop ? Quel gout ce sirop a-t-il ? II a bon gout* II a un gotit amer.* VOCABULAIRE 28. The journal The note. The ticket. Le journal. X Le billet. The newspaper. The intelligence. The news. La feuille. >• La nouvelle. The noise. The rumor. y Le bruit. The news. Les nouvelles. The lemon. Cider. Le citron. Du cidre. The orange. Lemonade. L'orange. De la limonade. Syrup. Biscuit. Du sirop. Le biscuit. Liquor. Cinnamon. De la liqueur. La cannelle. To read. Lire. To write. Ecrire. To drink. Boire. To believe. Croire. To answer. To hear. To understand. Kepondre. >■ Entendre. To wait ; to expect. Attendre. To comprehend. ) p , To understand. ) To taste, to try. Sweet. Gouter. Doux,/ an adj. or adv.) ) * See note, page 102. t Bien, as an adverb of quantity, is the only one that does not require the suppression of the article before a partitive noun. (76, Exo. 8d.) Bien des choses, or leaucoup de chose&, many things. VlKGT-HUIT'lflME LE£OK. Exercice 28. 1. Quel journal lisez-vous? 2. Je lis la feuille d'aujourd'hui, 3. Qu'ecrivez-vous ? 4. J'ecris un billet a ma tante. 5. Votre tante vous ecrit-elle sou vent ? 6. Ma tante et ma cousine nous ecrivent tres-souvent. 7. Lisez-vous les journaux avant d'ecrire vos billets ? 8. Non, M. ; nous ecrivons nos billets avant de lire les journaux. 9. Quelle est cette liqueur que vous buvez? 10, Je bois du cidre doux. 11. Votre frere boit-il du vin ? 12. Non, M. ; nous ne buvons jamais de vin, ni lui ni moi. 13. Les en- fants boivent-ils de la limonade? 14. lis boivent de l'eau avec du sirop ; nous n'avons pas de citron pour faire de la limonade. 15. Voulez-vous des oranges aigres ou des oranges douces? 16, J'aime bien mieux les oranges douces. 17. Mettez-vous votre chapeau pour sortir? 18. Oui, M. ; je vais au marche pour ap- prendre les nouvelles. 19. Que dit-on au marche? 20. On y dit bien des choses. 21. Croyez-vous tout ce que vous entendez dire au marche? 22. Je ne crois pas tout ce qu'on y dit. 23. Ces demoiselles croient-elles savoir cela mieux que nous ? 24. Non, M. ; nous ne croyons pas cela. 25. Repondez-vous a celui qui vous parle ? 26. Je lui reponds, mais il ne m'entend pas. 27. N'entendez-vous pas ce qu'on vous dit? 28. Je l'entends tres-bien, mais je n'ai pas le temps d'y repondre. 29. Recevez- vous sou vent des nouvelles de votre frere ? 30. Nous recevons souvent de ses nouvelles ; nous attendons des nouvelles de lui par le steamer. 31. Entend-on encore parler de cette musicien- ne ? 32. On n'entend plus parler d'elle. 33. Savez-vous qu'on vous attend chez vous? 34. Je sais qu'on m'y attend. 35. En- tendez-vous le bruit qu'on fait dans la rue ? 36. J'entends qu'on y fait du bruit. 37. Comprenez-vous ce que vous lisez? 38. Nous ne comprenons pas tout ce que nous lisons. 39. Voulez- vous gouter ce biscuit ? 40. Je veux bien le gouter ; il a bon gout, mais je le trouve bien dur. 41. Comment trouvez-vous cette cannelle ? 42. Je trouve qu'elle a un gout un peu amer. 43. Allez-vous essayer votre habit neuf ? 44. Je n'ai pas le temps de l'essayer a present. 45. Que dites-vous du drap ; il est beau et fin ; n'est-ce pas ? 46. Pas trop ; je le trouve assez commun. v6 vingt-huitieme le90n, Theme 28. 1. I read the paper before I breakfast. 2. My father reads the journals after supper (apres souper). 3. You read too fast ; I cannot understand you. 4. Do we not read slowly enough ? 5. What are you writing ? 6. I am writing a note to my uncle. 7. He writes to us, and we write to him, very often. 8. Can those children read and write ? 9. They read and write every day. 10. What are you drinking? 11. I am drinking sour ci- der, and he drinks lemonade. 12. We like sweet liquor better than sour, but we drink what we have. 13. The children drink water with syrup. 14. We cannot make lemonade, for we have no lemons ; but we have some sweet oranges, which are very good; will you taste some? 15. This orange tastes bitter; I do not like it. 16. We go every day to the exchange to hear the news. 17. Do you believe what they say there ? 18. I be- lieve only a part of it ; one hears many things which he cannot believe. 19. Why do you not answer this man? 20. I cannot answer him, for he does not understand French, and I do not know English. 21. Will you hand (passer) me the doctor's note; I will (vais) answer it before I go out. 22. I have no time to wait for you ; they are waiting for me at home. 23. I hear a noise in the street ; do you hear it ? 24. OA, yes ( Certainement) ; one always hears noise in this street. 25. We expect news from home by the steamer. 26. We hear from home very often. 27. Where is Mr. B. . . . now ? 28. I do not know ; one does not hear of him now (ne. . . .plus). 29. I do not comprehend how they make this ; do you know it ? 30. One sees and hears many things in this world which one does not comprehend. 31. Will you taste these biscuits? 32. They are rather hard, but they taste good ; they taste of cinnamon. 33. Will you try on this frock-coat ? 34. I do not want to try it on ; I do not like that cloth, it is too common ; I prefer fine cloth. V VINGT-NEUVI&ME LE$ON. 9? 29. VINGT-NEUVIEME LEgON, Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs, llOt Adjectives and adverbs are compared by means of ad- verbs; as, Tall, taller, the tallest. Slowly, more slowly, the most slow- ly. Studious, less studious, the hast stu- dious. You are taller than I. He is taller than any of us. The richest man in the city. Grand, plus grand, le plus grand. Lentement, plus lentement } le plus lentement. Studieux, moins studieux, le moins studieux. Vous etes plus grand que moL II est le plus grand de nous tous. L'homme le plus riche de la ville. 111. As, so AS. The one is as skilful as the other. Charles is not so studious as his brother. He writes as well a3 his brother. Quite as welL As MUCH, SO MUCH OT MANY. . . .AS. "We have as many vessels as the English. We have not so many as they. We have just as many. Aussi QUE. L'un est aussi habile que l'autre. Charles n'est pas aussi (or pas «i)* studieux que son frere. H ecrit aussi bien que son frere. Tout aussi bien. AUTANT QUE. Nous avons autant de vaisseaux que les Anglais. Nous n'en avons pas autant (or pas tant)* qu'eux. Nous en avons tout autant. Rem. — The preposition de, which precedes the noun after au- tant, plus, moins, must be repeated before the noun that follows que, when it is the object of the comparison; as, Autant de sucre que de cafe. Plus de l'un que de l'autre. Moins de celui-ci que de celui-la. As much sugar as coffee. More of the one than of the other. Less of the latter than of the former. 112. The following adjectives and adverbs are irregularly compared : * In a negative sentence, si may be used for aussi ,* and tant t for autant. 6 98 VINGT-NEUVIEME LE£OK. Good, better, the best. Little, less, the least. Small, smaller, the smallest. Bad, worse, the worst. Well y better, the best. Much, more, the most. Badly, worse, the worst. Little, less, the least. Bon, meilleur, le meilleuf. Petit, moindre, le moindre. Mauvais, pire, le pire. Bien, mieux, le mieux. Beaucoup, plus, le plus. Mai, pis, le pis. Peu, moins, le moins. Rem, — Petit, small, applied to size; mauvais, bad, speaking of the quality of a thing ; and mal, badly, when it means the manner how, are regularly compared _; plus petit 7 plus mauvais f plus mal, &c. 113* To return, to come back. To return, to go back. I go to town by water and return by the railroad. I come by water and return by the railroad. To doubt To think, {to judge.) Do you doubt that ? I do not. What do you think of that business ? I do not know what I am to think of it. He does not think of that. Mevenir. (96, e.) Retourner. Je vais a la ville par eau, et j'eo reviens par le chemin de fer. Je viens par eau et je retourne par le chemin de fer. Douter (de). Penser, (trans.) Doutez-vous de cela ? Je n'en doute pas. Que pensez-vous de cette affaire % Je ne sais ee que je dois en penser. \ II ne pense pas a cela. \ H n'y pense pas. 1 1 4 • An affair, matter, business. How does that matter stand ? We do business with your uncle. How is business ? Trade is dull. He sells for cash, on credit. He sells cheap, dear. To run into debt. To give credit. Tine affaire. Pes affaires. Comment va cette affaire ? Nous faisons des affaires avec votre oncle. Comment vont les affaires ? Le commerce va mal II vend comptant, a credit. II vend a bon niarche, cher. Faire des dettes. Faire credit VINGT-NEUYlllME LEC0X, 99 Heaven. The sky. The shore. The border. A ship. A vessel. A string. The wind. The way, road. The return. The bargain. Commerce. The credit. The Englishman, - Le ciel. ■ Le bord. Un vaisseau * Un navire. , Un batiment. Un cordon. Le vent. Le chemin. Le retour. Le marche. Le commerce. Le credit. L'Anglais. VOCABULAIRE 29. The earth. Land, ground. The sea. To return. To come back To doubt. As, so. As. For cash. Cheap. On land. Long. y Revenir. Douter (de). Aussi, (adv.) Que, (conj.) ( Comptant, or \ Argent comptant. A bon marche. A terre. Long, fern, longue. The navy. A sail. A rope. The steam. The road. The arrival. An affair. Business. The debt, England. - La terre. La mer. La marine, f Une voile. Une corde. La vapeur. La route. L'arrivee. Une affaire. Les affaires. La dette. L'Angleterre. To return. To go back. To think, (to judge.) Penser, (trans.) As much or many So much or many. Quite, just. Tout. On credit. A credit. [• Retourner. • Autant. Narrow; tight, fitroit. Dear, (adv.) On board. Short. Wide, broad. Cher. A bord. Court. Large. Exercice 29. 1. Le cordon que vous avez, est-il plus long que celui-ci? 2. Non, M. ; il est plus court que celui-la. 3. Laquelle de ces deux cordes est la plus lougue ? 4. La plus grosse est la plus longue. 5. Votre chambre est-elle aussi large que celle-ci ? 6. Elle est tout aussi large, mais moins longue que celle-ci. 7. Parlez-vous * Un xaisseau de guerre, a man of war ; un b&timent marchand, a merchantman ; un xaisseau or b&timent a vapeur, a steamer; un b&timent d voiles, a sailing vessel. t Un qfficier de la marine, a naval officer. 100 VINGT-NEUVIEME LE£ON. anglais aussi souvent que francais? 8. Je parle anglais plus sou vent que francais. 9. Yotre commis sait-il l'anglais aussi bien que le francais ? 10. II le sait tout aussi bien. 11. Les Anglais ont-ils autant de vaisseaux que nous? 12. Es n'en ont pas autant que nous. 13. Avons-nous autant de batiments a vapeur qu'eux ? 14. Nous en avons tout autant. 15. Cet An- glais vend-il autant de ruban que de velours ? 16. II vend moins de celui-ci que de celui-la. 17. Eetournez-vous chez vous par ce chemin etroit? 18. Oui, M.; il est moins large et moins bon, mais plus court que l'autre, qui passe par le village. 19. Eevenez-vous de la campagne par eau ? 20. Nous en revenons toujours par le chemin de fer. 21. Ces marcbands retournent- ils dans leur pays par terre? 22. Non, M. ; ils y retournent par mer. 23. Comment va 1' affaire dont il parle ? 24. Je crois que cette affaire va mal. 25. Comment vont les affaires? 26. Les affaires vont assez bien. 27. Achete-t-on a bon march e quand on achete comptant ? 28. Oui, M. ; et Ton achete cber quand on achete a credit. 29. Votre frere va-t-il bientot revenir d'Angle- terre ? 30. Nous attendons son retour par le premier steamer. 31. Connaissez-vous cet ofBcier de la marine? 32. Je le con- nais fort bien {very well) ; il nous apporte la nouvelle de l'arrivee d'un vaisseau de guerre. 33. Que pense monsieur votre pere des nouvelles que nous apprenons ? 34. II pense que ces nou- velles ne sont pas favorables au commerce. 35. Doutez-vous de cela? 36. Je n'en doute pas. 37. Le capitaine du navire est-il a bord? 38. Non, M. ; il est a terre. 39. Ou ce batiment a voiles va-t-il ? 40. II va en Angleterre ; il a le vent favorable. Theme 29. 1. Who is richer than our neighbor? 2. No one, I think; for they say that he is (c?est) the richest man in the city. 3. These roads lead both (tous les deux) to the village where we live ; the narrower is the shorter, but the broader is the better of the two. 4. That steamship is longer and broader than the sail- ing vessels which we see here. 5. Have you a rope as long as this string? 6. I have one just as long. 7. Do you know that VINGT-NEUVIEME LEgON. 101 sea-captain (capitaine de navire) ? 8. We know him very well ; we do business with him ; he is a Frenchman. 9. Does he un- derstand English? 10. He speaks English as well as you or (as) I. 11. Have we as many vessels as the English? 12. We have quite as many, but we have not so many men of war as they (have). 13. Do we sell as much cotton as wool? 14. We sell less of the latter than of the former. 15. Does your brother return from the country by the steamboat (bateau a vapeur). 16. He and my father always return together by the railroad. 17. Are you going to answer this note? 18. I am to wait for the return of my father, before I can answer it. 19. When will (allez) you return to the country ? 20. I intend to return on (a) the arrival of the vessel which we are expecting. 21. My bro- ther returns to New Orleans (a la Nouvelle Orleans) by land ; he never travels by sea.* 22. How is business ? 23. Not very good ; the late news (les dernier es nouvelles) is not favorable to (au) commerce. 24. Do you give credit to that naval officer ? 25. No, sir ; we are not willing to sell to him on credit ; for he runs into debt everywhere. 26. People sell cheap when they sell for cash, and they sell dear if they sell on credit. 27. Is the captain of the vessel on land? 28. No, sir; he is on board with all his people (son monde) ; the wind is favorable ; he is going to sail (mettre a la voile) this morning for England (69). 29. Do you doubt it? 30. We do not doubt it. 31. What do you think of this world? 32. I think that this world is not large enough for the wicked. 33. Does not heaven restore (rendre) to us all that we give to the poor ? 34. Heaven restores to man, all that man gives to the earth. 35. I need not try those boots ; they are too tight for me ; they are smaller than the others. 36. The captain says that these biscuits are worse and harder than those he has on board. * Voyager tur mer. 102 TRENTIEME LE£ON. 30. TRENTIEME LEgON. 115# The following are idioms, in which to be is rendered by avoir, and the English adjective expressed by a noun, before which the article is omitted.'* To be warm, cold, hungry, thirsty, Avoir chaud, froid, faim, soif, som- slecpy, afraid, ashamed, right, meil, peur, honte, raison, tort. wrong. What is the matter with you ? ) ^ , 9 . 7 ^ > Quavez-vous? What ails you ? J Nothing is the matter with me. Je n'ai rien. Are you cold ? I am warm. Avez-vous froid ? J'ai chaud. He is neither hungry nor thirsty. II n'a ni faim ni soif. I am very sleepy. J'ai bienj- sommeil. The children are afraid of the dog. Les enfants ont peur du chien. He is ashamed of his poverty. II a honte de sa pauvrete. Is he not wrong to be ashamed of it ? N'a-t-il pas tort d'en avoir honte ? Am I not right in saying that? N'ai-je pas raison de dire cela? 116. In speaking of the parts of the body, the verb avoir is used, with the person as its subject, and with the part mentioned, preceded by the article, as its object ; the adjective is placed af- ter the noun ; as, His hair is black. II a les cheveux noirs. Her eyes are blue and her mouth Elle a les yeux bleus et la bouche is small. petite. She has beautiful blue eyes. Elle a de beaux yeux bleus. (a.) In speaking of a part of the body with reference to several persons, the noun expressing the part is in the singular, if the part is singular in the individual ; as, Those children's faces are long. Ces enfants ont la figure longue. * In some phrases, principally with the verbs avoir and faire, the verb and the noun are closely joined together, expressing but one idea, equivalent to a verb ; as, avoir envie ; avoir oesoin ; faire credit, &c. It is the 6ame when an adjective pre- cedes the noun ; as, ilfait beau temps ; le gdteau a bon gout. But when the noun is followed by an adjective, the emphasis is on the noun, which must then be preceded by the numeral un ; as, il fait un temps superbe ; il a une faim devorante, he has a ravenous appetite. t Before a noun, Men is used, and not tres. TRENTIEME LE£0N. 103 117* With the expression avoir mal, to have a pain or a sore, the preposition a is used before the part affected ; as My right eye is sore. j I have a pain in my right eye. j What is the matter with jour right hand? It is sore. Tai mal a Tceil droit. Qu'avez-vous a la main droite ? He has a headache, the headache. She has the toothache. I have a sore throat. His left arm is sore. My hands are cold. J'y ai mal. II a mal a la tete, or le mal de tete. Elle a mal aux dents, le mal de dents. J'ai mal a la gorge, le mal de gorge. II a mal an bras gauche. Pai froid aux mains. 118i To hurt, to pain somebody. You touch my arm ; you hurt me. His left hand pains him. To do good to somebody. To hurt, to harm somebody. To injure somebody. Do you do good to those that hurt you? I return good for evil. This news injures trade. Faire mal a qqn. Yous me touchcz au bras ; vous me faites mal. La main gauche lui fait mal Faire du bien a qqn. Faire du mal a qqn. Faire du tort a qqn. Faites- yous du bien a ceux qui vous font du mal ? Jo rends le bien pour le maL Ces nouvelles font du tort au com- YOCABULAIRE 30. Cold. Le froid. Hunger. La faim. Heat. Le chaud. Thirst. La soif. Sleep. Le sommeil. Fear. La peur. Wrong. Le tort. Shame. La honte. Good Le bien. Reason ; right. La raison. Evil. Le mal. Poverty. , La pauvrete". The face. Le visage. The face ; the shape. La figure. A hair. The hair. Un cheveu. Les cheveux. The head. La tete. The eye, the eyes. L'ceil, les yeux. The tooth. La dent. The forehead. Le front. The mouth. La bouche. The arm. Le bras. The throat. La gorge. The finger. Le doigt The hand. La main. 204 treisttiEme LEgom To tura Tourner. To touch. Tbueber. Rigbt. Droit. Left. Gauche, Square. Carre. Round. Rond. So much, (fl> mch ) Tant> g {{n ^ m & } gi an extent.) y Certainly. Certainement. On the contrary. Au contraire, Exercice 80. I. Qu r avez-vous ? 2. J'ai bien froid. & Votre frere qu'a-t-il ? 4. H a ehaud. 5. Ces enfants ont-ils faim ©u soif ? 6. lis n'ont m faim ni soif, mais ils out bien soxnmeil ? 7. Qui a peur de mon cbien I 8. Le petit Henri en a peur. 9. Cet bornme a-t-il honte de sa pauvrete ? 10. Je crois qu'il en a honte. 11. N*a- t-il pas tort d'en avoir bonte? 12. Oui, M. ; il a tort. 13> N'ai-je pas raison de dire cela? 14. Certainement, vous avez raison de le dire. 15. Votre frere a-t-il les cheveux noirs? 16. Non, M. ; il a les cheveux bruns et les yeux bleus. 17. Cet enfant n'a-t-il pas la tete carree? 18. II a la tete carree et le front large. 19. C'ette petite fille n'a-t-elle pas la peau blan- che ? 20. Elle a la peau blanche, la figure ronde et la bouche petite. 21. Pourquoi tournez-vous la tete? 22. Je tourne la tete pour voir qui est derriere moi. 23. Me touch ez-vous au bras? 24. Je ne vous touche pas. 25. Avez-vous mal au bras droit? 26. J'y ai mal. 27. Fermez-vous Foeil gauche parce que vous y avez mal? 28. Je n'ai pas mal a l'oeil gauche, j'ai mal a l'oeil droit. 29. Yotre sceur a-t-elle mal aux dents 2 30. Non, M. ; elle a mal a la tete. 31. Qui a le mal de gorge ehez vous ? 32. Personne n'a le mal de gorge chez nous. 33. Qu'avez-vous a la main droite ? 34. J'y ai mal. 35. Si je vous y touche, cela vous fait-il? 36. Oui, cela me fait mal. 37. Les doigts vous font-ils mal? 38. Ils me font tant mal que je ne peux pas tenir la plume. 39. Faites-vous du mal a ceux qui vous font du bien ? 40. Au contraire, je fais du bien a ceux qui me font du mal ; je rends toujours le bien pour le maL 41. Le mauvais temps fait-il du tort au commerce ? 42. Oui, M. ; il y fait du tort. 43. Pourquoi ecrivez-vous si mal ? 44. J'ecris si mal parce que j'ai froid aux mains. 45, Que buvez-vous quand TRENTIEME LEC/ON. 105 vous avez soif? 46. Quand j'ai soif, je bois de 1'eau; et quand j'ai bien faim, je mange ce que j'ai. Theme 30. 1. Are you cold ? 2. I am not cold, I am hungry and thirsty, 3. Is your brother sleepy ? 4. He is not sleepy, but be is very warm. 5. What is the matter with little Henry? 6. He is afraid of your dog. 7. You are wrong to be afraid of the dog ; he does not hurt anybody. 8. Are those men ashamed of their poverty ? 9. They are not (ashamed of it) ; and they are right. 10. Am I not right in saying that your uncle's hair is black? 11. You are wrong in saying that, for his hair is gray. 12. Those children's heads are large and square. 13. My nephew has a round face and a narrow forehead. 14. That young lady has beautiful blue eyes and fine teeth. 15. Her mouth is small and her hands are very white. 16. "What is the matter with your left eye ? 17. I have a pain in it. 18. My right hand is sore also. 19. I cannot put on my gloves, my fingers pain me so much. 20. Those men ton their heads to see who is making so much noise behind them. 21. "Why does your brother write so badly? 22. His hands are very cold. 23. Does anybody touch my arm? 24. I touch your arm; does that hurt you? 25. Yes, sir; I have a sore arm. 26. Do you hurt anybody? 27. I hurt no- body ; on the contrary, I do good to those that hurt me ; am I not right? 28. Certainly; the good man (Vhomme de bien) al- ways returns good for evil. 29. What is the matter with you? 30. I have a headache. 31. Has your sister the toothache? 32. No, sir; she has a sore throat. 33. Does not this rain injure trade? 34. Certainly. 35. Are you sleepy? 36. I am very- sleepy, but it is already late. 37. Good evening {Bon soir). 38. Good night {Bonne nuit). 50 106 TRENTE ET UNI&ME LE£ON e 31. TRENTE ET UNIEME LEgOK 1 1 9 • TO TAKE PLACE. Avoir lieu. When is the concert to take place ? Quand le concert doit-il avoir lieu ? Does it take place to-day. It takes place this afternoon ? Instead of. Do you play instead of studying ? I study instead of playing. A-t-il lieu aujourd'hui ? II a lieu cette apres-midi. Au lieu de. Jouez-vous au lieu d'etudier ? J'etudie au lieu de jouer. 120. To BE THERE. There is, there are. Is there ? are there ? Is there anybody in the parlor ? There is nobody. Are there any more pencils in that drawer ? There are only a few left. What is the matter yonder ? What is in that barrel ? I do not know what is in it ? Y AVOIR. H y a. Y a-t-il f Y a-t-il quelqu'un dans le salon ? II n'y a personne. Y a-t-il encore des crayons dans ce tiroir ? II n'y en a plus guere. Qu'y a-t-il la-bas? Qu'y a-t-il dans ce baril ? Je ne sais pas ce qu'il y a dedans. 121 1 Several. My sister has several fans. She has several. Borne, a few. Are there a few pencils in that drawer ? There are. Are there a few ripe pears in your garden ? There are. Will you have a few of these pears ? Plusieurs, (an invariable indefinite adjective and pronoun.) Ma sceur a plusieurs eventails. Elle en a plusieurs. fQuELQUE, quelques, (indef adj.) ? Quelques-uns, fern, quelques-unes, [ (indefinite pronoun.) Y a-t-il quelques crayons dans ce tiroir ? II y en a quelques-uns. Y a-t-il quelques poires mures dans votre jar din ? II y en a quelques-unes. Voulez-vous quelques-unes de ces poires? TRENTE ET UNIEME LE£ON. 101 122* Like, as. Have you a ring like this one ? I have one similar to that one. I have one just like it. You come late, as usual. You arrive later than usual. Comme. Avez-vous une bague comme celle- ci? J'en ai une pareille a celle-la. J'en ai une toute* pareille. Vous arrivez tard, comme a Pordi- naire. Vous arrivez plus tard qu'a l'ordi- naire. Rem. — Comme is not used after a comparative adverb. His hair is gray like mine. H a les cheveux gris comme moi His hair is as gray as mine. H a les cheveux aussi gris que moi. As early. D' aussi bonne heure. Earlier. De meilleure heure. Cheaper. A meilleur marche. 123 • Neither article nor preposition is used with n% en and sans (without), before a noun taken in the partitive or indefinite sense ; as, He has neither money nor friends. Our coffee is in store. There is coffee in the store. Do you go out without an umbrella ? Without speaking. Without saying any thing. To speak loud. To speak low, in a low voice. II n'a ni argent ni amis. Notre cafe est en magasin. II y a du cafe dans le magasin. Sortez vous sans parapluie \ Sans parler. Sans rien dire. Parler haut, a haute voix. Parler bas, a voix basse. The parlor. The arm-chair. The auction. A picture, a painting. A parasol. VOCABULAIRE 31. Le salon. Le fauteuil. L'encan. Un tableau. Un parasol. The dining-room. Lasalleamanger. } La commode. drawers. The sale. A print. A ringer-ring. La vente. Une estampe. Une bague. * The adverb tout, before an adjective that qualifies a feminine noun, agrees with it in gender and number, but only when the adjective begins with a consonant 108 TRENTE ET UNIEME LECWe A fan. Un eventail. An opera-glass. Une lorgnette The complexion. Le teint. The voice. La voix. The nose. Le nez. The lip. La levre. To take place. Avoir lieu. To be there, Y avoir. To arrive. Arriver. To play. Jouer. Several. Plusieurs. Some. C Quelque, (adj.) \ Quelques-uns, (pro.) A few. Similar, like. Pareil,lle. (61, e.) Rosy. Vermeil, lie. (61, c.) High; loud. Haut. Low. Bas, sse. (61, c.) Usual. Ordinaire. Usually. Ordinairement. Entirely. y Tout-a-fait. Like, as. Comme. Quite, just. Instead of. Au lieu de. Without. Sans, (prep.) In it, within, (adv.) Dedans. There below Yonder. ' j-La-bas. EXERCICE 31. 1. Quand la vente doit-elle avoir lieu? 2. Elle doit avoir lieu aujourd'hui. 3. Le concert doit-il avoir lieu cette apres- midi? 4. II a lieu ce matin. 5. Allez-vous au concert? 6, Je vais a la vente de tableaux au lieu dialler au concert. 1. Doit-il y avoir beaucoup de rnonde au concert ? 8. II doit y en avoir beaucoup. 9. Y a-t-il du monde dans le salon? 10. II y a plusieurs dames et plusieurs de vos amis. 11. Y a-t-il plus d'un fauteuil dans la salle a manger? 12. II y en a plusieurs. 13. Yos soeurs choisissent-elles quelques eventails? 14. Elles en choisissent quelques-uns. 15. Prenez-vous quelques-unes de cesestampes? 16. Nous en prenons quelques-unes. 1*7. Qu'y a-t-il dans cette commode ? 1 8. Je ne sais pas ce qu'il y a de- dans. 19. Votre soeur a-t-elle un parasol comme celui-ci? 20. Elle en a un tout pareil a celui-la. 21. A-t-elle une bague pa- reille a celle-ci ? 22. Elle en a une toute pareille. 23. Votre lorgnette est-elle comme celle-ci ? 24. Elle est tout-a-fait comme celle-la. 25. Revenez-vous du bureau d'aussi bonne heure que moi? 26. Pen reviens ordinairement de meilleure heure que vous. 21. N'arrivez-vous pas plus tard qu'a Fordinaire? 28. Je vous demande pardon ; nous arrivons a Pheure ordinaire. 29. TRENTE ET UNIEME LEC0N. 109 Prenez-vous le cafe apres diner, comme a l'ordinaire ? 30. Oui, toujours, comme a l'ordinaire. 31. Ces Anglais vendent-ils a meilleur marche que nos amis? 32. lis vendent, an contraire, pins cher. 33. Avez-vons dn vin en baril? 34. Nous n'en avons plus, ni en baril ni en bouteilles. 35. Y a-t-il du feu et de la lumiere dans la chambre de votre frere ? 36. II n'y a ni feu ni lumiere dans sa chambre. 37. Sort-il sans parapluie? 38. H sort sans parapluie et sans manteau. 39. Les enfants de la campagne n'ont-ils pas les levres vermeilles? 40. Oui, M. ; generalement.* 41. Votre cousin a-t-il le front bas? 42. Non, M. ; il a le front haut, le nez long et le teint vermeil. 43. Ne pouvez-vous pas etudier votre lecon sans parler si haut ? 44. Je ne l'apprends pas aussi vite quand je l'etudie a voix basse. Theme 31. 1. There is an auction sale (a Vencan) in this street; have you a mind to go to it ? 2. When is it to take place ? 3. It is to take place this morning ; they are going to begin forthwith. 4. There are several prints which I have a wish to buy. 5. The concert takes place this morning, but I go to the sale of pictures instead of going to the concert. 6. Is there any one in the dining-room ? *J. There is no one in the dining-room, but there are several la- dies in the parlor. 8. Do your sisters take a few of these fans ? 9. No, sir; they have several already. 10. Have you a few more parasols like this one? 11. We have a few more of them. 12. What is in that chest of drawers? 13. There is nothing m it. 14. Have you more than one arm-chair like this one? 15. We have several just like it. 16. My sister's opera-glass is just like that one. 17. Has she a ring like this one? 18. She has one similar to it. 19. Does your brother return from the office as early as you? 20. He usually returns earlier than I. 21. We arrive in good time, as usual. 22. We come at the usual hour. 23. There are not so many people here as usual. (122, Rem.) 24. Do you come without a cloak and without an um- * Generalement and ordinairement must not be used the one for the other ; the latter means most frequently, the former, extensively, in general. 110 TRENTE-DEUXIEME LEgOST. brella? 25. I bring neither cloak nor umbrella. 26. Are you not cold? 27. I am neither cold nor warm, but I am hungry and thirsty. 28. Have you any cider in barrels? 29. We have some in bottles. 30. What is the matter with your brother? 31. He is very sleepy. 32. Is he not ashamed? 33. Are you not wrong to play instead of studying ? 34. Am I not right to buy of (chez) those merchants ? they sell cheaper than others (les autres). 35. Do you always speak loud when you study your lessons ? 36. I usually read in a low voice, but sometimes I read loud without thinking of it. 37. What is the matter yonder? 38. Nothing at all ; a little boy who is afraid of a dog. 39. My uncle has a rosy complexion, a high forehead and a long nose. 40. Those little girls have fresh complexions {le teint frais) and rosy lips. 32. TRENTE-DEUXIEME LE£ON. 124 • The demonstrative pronoun ce is used as the subject of the verb etre : 1st. In questions and answers, when it signifies that person or that thing ; as, Is that your brother ? It is he. Est-ce votre frere ? C'est lui. Are those your parents ? They are. Sont-ce vos parents ? Ce sont eux. Who is that ? Qui est-ce ? She is a relation of mine. C'est une de mes parentes. Is that your book ? It is. Est-ce la votre livre ? Ce Test. 2d. With reference to an antecedent noun, when Hre is fol- lowed by a substantive, or word preceded by the article or a de- terminative adjective ; as, I admire your aunt, she is a very J'admire votre tante, c'est une fem- amiable lady. me bien aimable. Take this book, it is the best. Prenez ce livre, c'est le meilleur. That is not your book, it is mine. Ce n'est pas votre livre, c'est le mien. TRENTE-DEUXIEME LEC0N. Ill 3d. With reference to a preceding sentence ; as, Is it true ? It is. Est-ce vrai ? C'est vrai. That is it, is it not so ? C'est cela, n'est-ce pas? Is not that beautiful ? N'est-ce pas que c'est beau ? 125# Est-ce que, placed before the subject of the verb, forms an interrogative sentence ; as, Est-ce que je dis cela ? Do I say that? This interrogative form is generally used when the verb is in the indicative present. Do I speak well ? Est-ce que je parle bien ? (parle-je bien ?) Do I not see that ? Est-ce que je ne vois pas cela ? What do I see ? Qu'est-ce que je vois ? "Whom do I see ? Qui est-ce que je vois ? The first person of the indicative present, when it is a mono- syllable or ends in ge, admits of no other interrogative form than the above, with est-ce que. Do I sell too dear ? Est-ce que je vends trop cher ? Do I hurt you ? Est-ce que je vous fais mal. What do I eat J Qu'est-ce que je mange. The verbs alter, avoir, devoir, dire, etre, pouvoir, savoir, voir, may be construed either way : est-ce que je dois, or dois-je? Imperative — Second Person. 126. (a.) In the second person plural of the imperative, the form of the verb is the same as in the second person plural of the indicative present. The subject is omitted ; and the objective pronouns, when the sentence is affirmative, are placed, with a hyphen, after the verb, in the same order as in English. Moi and toi are used instead of me and te. Come here. Go there. Venez ici. Allez-y. Hand me the bread. Passez-moi le pain. Hand it to me. Give it to him. Passez-le-moi. Donnez-le-lui. Give him some. Donnez-lui-en. I 112 TRENTE-DEUXIEME LE^ON. Rem. — Moi and toi elide the vowels oi before en. Give me some. Donnez m'en. (p.) When the sentence is negative, the pronouns stand before the verb, as in the indicative. Do not tell me of it. Ne me le dites pas. Do not speak of it to me. Ne m'en parlez pas. 127« Here is. There is. Here is your cane. Here it is. There is some money. There is some. Voici.* Voila.* Voici votre canne. La voici Voila de l'argent. En voila. VOCABULAIRE 32. The husband. ■] The relative. The parents. The grandfather. The father-in-law. The brother-in-law. The son-in-law. \ The grandson. Wit ; the mind. Le mari. L'epoux. Le parent. Les parents. Le grand-pere. Le beau-pere. Le beau-frere. Le gendre. Le beau-fils. Le petit-fils. L'esprit. The wife. The relative. The family. The grandmother. The mother-in-law. The sister-in-law. The daughter-in- law. The grand-daughter. Modesty. La femme. L'epouse. La parente ; La famille. La grand'mere. La belle-mere. La belle-soeiar. La belle-fille. La petite-fille. La modestie. To feel ; to smelL Sentir, irr. (95,6.) To perceive. To hand. Witty. False. Counterfeit. To the right. On the right. Straight. Straight on. { Passer. Spirituel. Faux. Fausse, {fern) [• A droite. I Tout droit. To dare. Modest. True. To the left. Here is. There is. Apercevoir. Oser. Modeste. Vrai. A gauche. Voici. Voila. * Voici and voild are used to point out objects that are in sight; literally: see here see there. TRESTE-DEUXIEME LE£ON. 113 Exercice 32. 1. Quiest-ce? 2. C'est le beau-frere de mon cousin. 3. Est-ce le frere de son epouse? 4. Kon, M. ; c'est le mari'de sa belle- sceur. 5. Qui est la dame a laquelle il donne lebras? 6. C'est sa belle-mere. 7. Est-ee la son beau-pere qui leur parte ? 8. C'est lui. 9. Qui est cette dame si modeste et si jolie ? 10. C'est une de nos parentes. 11. Est-elle aussi spirituelle qu'elle est jolie? 12. C'est une femme tres-spirituelle et tres-aimable. 13. N'aimez-vous pas les femmes qui ont de I'esprit? 14. J'aime encore mieux celles qui ont de la bonte et de la modestie. 15, Apercevez-vous quelque part les petits-fils du ministre? 16. Je les apercois a droite de la fontaine ; les voila qui parlent au gen- dre du medecin. 17. Est-ce la mon manteau que vous avez? 18. Xon, M. ; c'est le mien ; voila le votre sur le sofa. 19. Sen- tez-vous le vent qui vient par cette croisee ? 20. Je ne sens pas de vent. 21. Est-ce que j'ose vous demander ce que vous faites la ? 22. Oui, M. ; venez voir ce que je fais. 23. Est-ce que je crois tout ce qu'on me dit? 24. J'ose dire que non. 25. Qu'est- ce que je sens ? 26. Vous sentez les fleurs qui sont sur la che- minee. 27. Qui est-ce que j'apercois venir au coin de la place? 28. Vous apercevez venir mon grand-pere et ma grand'mere. 29. Qui est-ce que j'entends cbanter? 30. Vous entendez chan- ter la petite-fille du general. 31. Passez-moi cet eventail, s'il vous plait. 32. Oui, M. ; avec plaisir ; le voici. 33. Montrez- moi la bague que vous avez. 34. Volontiers ; la voila ; mais ne la cassez pas. 35. Voulez-vous porter cette lorgnette a ma soeur? 36. Donnez-la-moi ; je vais la lui porter. 37. Quelles belles fleurs ! donnez-m'en quelques-unes. 38. Les voila ; prenez- les toutes; je yous les donne. 39. Ne me donnez pas de fausse monnaie. 40. Ce billet n'est pas faux ; tenez* prenez-le ; je sais qu'il est bon. 41. Est-ce vrai? 42. C'est vrai, sans badiner {without joking). 43. Allez-vous a droite ou a gauche a pre- sent ? 44. Je vais tout droit chez moi. * Tenez, the imperative of tenir, is used to attract attention, here^ see here, 114 trente-deuxieme le£0n. Theme 32. 1. Who is that gentleman to the right of your mother-in-law ? 2. He is my brother-in-law. 3. He is the husband of my wife's sister. 4. Who is the lady who is dancing with the general's son-in-law ? 5. She is a relation of mine. 6. She is a hand- some woman ; is she as witty as she is pretty f 7. She is more modest than witty. 8. Goodness of (du) heart and modesty are far (bien) more estimable than wit; are they not? 9. That is very true. 10. Are those the general's grand-daughters? 11. They are ; his daughter-in-law is in Paris with her parents. 12. Do those children feel the cold as much as we (do) ? 13. I dare say (that) they feel it less than we. 14. Do I read too fast? 15. Do I write as well as you? 16. What do I smell? 17. Whom do I see ? 18. Do I know those ladies ? 19. You know some of them. 20. Is that you, my cousin? 21. It is I, who come to ask you if you will go to the concert with us ? 22. How can I go with you ? 23. Must I not stay at home ? 24. Whom do I hear ? 25. It is my grandfather ! and you too, my grand- mother! 26. It is a fine day that brings us so many good friends! 27. Who is he? 28. He is a Frenchman who gives lessons (des lecons) in our family. 29. Light the gas, and ex- tinguish that lamp. 30. Hand me the newspaper, if you please. 31. Here it is.- 32. Walk this way (Passez par ici). 33. Walk in to the left. 34. This bill is a counterfeit, I believe. 35. Do not take it, if you think so ; here is another. 36. Is there any more cream? 37. Give me a little of it. 38. That is enough, I thank you. 39. May (dare) I ask you where Doctor B. . . . lives ? 40. He lives at the corner of the square ; go straight on ; it is the last house in (de) the street, on the right. 41. There is the doctor coming ( Voila le docteur qui vient). trente-troisi£me LEQON. 115 33. TRENTE-TROISIEME LEQOK 128. The verbs that govern the infinitive directly (91), may be arranged in four classes ; as, (a.) Verbs expressing motion from one place to another ; as, alter, venir, &c. (b.) The verbs aimer mieux, compter, croire, desire?*, devoir, oser, pouvoir, preferer, savoir, vouloir, and a few others. (c.) Verbs expressing perceptions by the senses ; as, voir, aper- cevoir, regarder, entendre, ecouter, sentir. (d.) Verbs expressing our agency in the performance of the action expressed by the second verb ; as, envoyer, /aire, laisser, mener. Rem. 1.- — With regard to the verbs of the first two classes (a and b), the objective pronouns are placed between them and the following infinitive ;* as, I come to tell you. I dare do it. Je viens vous dire. J'ose le faire. Rem. 2. — With regard to the verbs of the last two classes (c and d), the object, if a noun, is placed after the second verb, and if a pronoun, before the first ; as, I see your sister coming. Je vois venir voire soeur. I see her coming. Je la vois venir. 129« To wish to say, to mean. Vouloir dire. What does that mean? ( Que vent dire oda I ( Qu est-ce que ceJa veut dire ? To have made. To have mended. Faire faire. Faire raccom?noder. To have washed. To have dried. Faire laver. Faire sicker. Are you having a coat made ? Faites-vous faire un habit ? I am. J'en fais faire un. Are you having your linen mend- Faites-vous raccommoder votre lin- ed? ge? I will have it washed before I have Je le fais laver avant de le faire it mended, (see Rote, p, 41.) raccommoder. . * We may say : Je le vats chercher, orje vais le chercher ; the latter construction Is in accordance with the above rule, and is preferable, 116 TRENTE-TROISltlME LE£ON. Dry my cloak. Make the children come in. Do not let them go out. Faites secher mon manteau. Faites entrer les enfants. "Ne les laissez pas sortir. 130i Verbs that require a before the infinitive, express ten- dency to, continued or progressive action. The following are some of them : aimer, apprendre, avoir, chercher, commencer, donner, montrer, mettre, penser, rester, &c. I like to work. He learns to read and write. We have much to do. We seek to know the truth. We begin to understand you. What do you give us to drink ? He shows (teaches) me how to do it. I put your cloak to dry. He thinks of going to France. Stay and take dinner with us. J'aime a travailler. H apprend a lire et a Scrire. Nous avons beaucoup a faire. Nous cherchons a savoir la verite*. ISTous commencons a vous compren- dre.* Que nous donnez-vous a boire? H me montre a le faire. Je mets votre manteau a secher. II pense a aller en France. Restez a diner avec nous. 131 Verbs that require de before the infinitive, express result, consequence, a turning away from, or cessation of action; as, ces- ser, choisir, dire, essay er, flnir, &c* It stops raining. Tell him to come. Try to do that. To have just. I have just seen him. He has just passed. We have just been told so. H cesse de pleuvoir. Dites-lui de venir. Essay ez de faire cela. Venir de. Je viens de le voir. II vient de passer. On vient de nous le dire. * Some verbs require sometimes d, and sometimes de, according to the sense in which they are used. Commencer k parler, to begin to speak, to learn it ; commencer de parler, to begin speaking. Essay er takes « when it expresses repeated and pro- gressive efforts; as, 11 essaie k executer ce morceau sur le piano. Demander takes de when it is accompanied by an indirect object, and d when it is not; as, Je vous de- mande de le faire ; je demande k vous parler. t See also, p. 353. TRENTE-TROISIEME LE£ON. 117 The sense. The word. The master. The scholar. VOCABULAIRE 33. Le sens. The truth. Le mot. Le maitre. L'ecolier. The linen, (wear- ) Lelin ing apparel.) ) y Le coffre. ing apparel.) The chest. The trunk. La verite. The phrase. ) -r ^rase The sentence. J The school. L'ecole. The scholar,(/em.) L'ecoliere. The linen, (cloth.) La toile. The trunk. La malle. To mean. To wash. To dry. To cease. To leave off. To forget. To advise. Youloir dire. To have made. Faire faire. Laver. To mend. Raccommoder. m ° . ^ ., . ., t Faire secher. lo have dried. ) To avoid. Uviter, (A, ISO.) To shun. ) Oublier, (de, 130.) To neglect. Negliger, (de, 130.) ( Conseiller,* (de, Tq haye .^ Venir ^ ( loO.) Secher, (18, b.) I Cesser, (de, 130.) Exercice 33. 1. Faites-vous faire une malle comme eelle-ci? 2. J'en fais faire une pareille a celle-la. 3. Votre frere fait-il faire un man- teau de toile jaune? 4. II a en vie d'en faire faire un de toile grise, pour la route. 5. Faites-vous raccommoder votre linge ? 6. Je le fais laver avant de le faire raccommoder. 7. Ne faites- vous pas secher ce coffre avant de le remplir ? 8. Je vais le mettre a l'air pour le faire secher avant d'y mettre le linge. 9. Savez-vous ce que le maitre veut dire? 10. Je ne sais pas ce qu'il veut dire. 11. Savez-vous ce qu'il vient de dire? 12. II vient de dire qu'il ne peut pas laisser sortir les ecoliers a tous moments. 13. Aimez-vous a voir tout le monde heureux? 14. Oui; j'aime a voir tout le monde heureux. 15. Cet ecolier n'a- t-il rien a faire ? 16. II a beaucoup a faire, mais il n'aime pas a. travailler. 17. Cette ecoliere a-t-elle quelque chose a dire ? 18. * Conseiller d qqn. de faire vm.e chose. 118 TRENTE-TROISIEME LECOT. Elle n'a rien a dire. 19. Apprenez-vous a chanter? 20. Nous apprenons a danser et a chanter. 21. Qui vous montre a dan- ger? 22. Un maitre franc ais me montre a danser. 23. Votre maitre de francais vous donne-t-il beaucoup a faire ? 24. II nous donne plus de trente (thirty) mots a apprendre par cceur tous les jours. 25. Commencez-vous a parler francais? 26. Je com- mence a le comprendre. 27. Que cherchez-vous a savoir? 28. Je cherche a savoir le sens de cette phrase. 29. Que veut dire cette phrase ? 30. Je ne sais pas ce qu'elle veut dire. 31. Pen- sez-vous a aller a la campagne ? 32. Je pense a y aller bientot. 33. Voulez-vous dire au domestique d'apporter du bois ? 34. II vient d'en apporter. 35. Allez-vous essay er de faire le feu? 36. Je n'ai pas envie de le faire. 37. A quelle heure ces ouvriers cessent-ils de travailler ? 38. lis cessent de travailler a six heures du soir. 39. Que me conseillez-vous de faire? 40. Je vous conseille de dire la verite. 41. Evitez-vous de parler a cet hom- me ? 42. J'evite de lui parler, parce que je ne l'aime pas. 43. Oubliez-vous quelquefois d'etudier vos lecons? 44. Nous ne l'oublions jamais, mais nous negligeons quelquefois de les etudier quand nous avons beaucoup a faire. Theme 33. 1. Is your brother having a leather trunk made? 2. He is having one made like mine. 3. Will you have that linen coat washed ? 4. I intend to have it mended before I have it washed. 5. Dry my linen before the fire, and put that chest to dry in the air. 6. I do not know which chest you mean ; there are two. 7. I mean the one you have just brought. 8. There it is ; open it, and see what is in it. 9. Have these scholars nothing to do ? 10. They have a great deal to do. 11. They play instead of studying ; what does that mean ? 12. They do not like to study. 13. Their French teacher (maitre de francais) gives them a great many words to learn by heart every day. 14. A French master (maitre francais) teaches (montrer) them to write. 15. Do you know the sense of this sentence? 16. I do not know what that sentence means. 17. Does your father think of send- TRENTE-QUATRIEME LECOJS T . 119 ing you to school in France? 18. He wants to send me to Paris to learn to speak French, but I do not like to go there. 19. Tell your brother to come. 20. I have just told him, 21. Do not try to put out the fire. 22. Let it be as it is (comme cela) ; I will (Je vais) tell the servant to put it out. 23. Do you never cease working? 24. I have much to do ? and I like to work. 25. What do you advise my brother-in- law to do? 26. I advise him to speak the truth, and that is what I advise everybody to do. 27. We avoid going there, be- cause we do not like the company that frequent that place. 28. Do you forget to answer that note ? 29. I have just answered it. 30. We never neglect to do our duties, but we sometimes forget. 31. Your father-in-law has just arrived from Paris. 32. We have just seen him pass. 33. I have just heard your sister-in- law sing ; she is in the parlor. 34. Your father-in-law is there too ; I have just heard him speak. 34. TRENTE-QUATRIEME LEgON. Reflective Verbs. 132. Reflective verbs are always attended by an objective pronoun (called the reflective pronoun) of the same person and number as the subject ; as, I wash myself. We wash ourselves. Je me lave. Nous nous lavons. Do you wash yourself? Vbus lavez-vous ? One's self, himself, herself, itself, Se. themselves. To warm one's self. Se chauffer. To burn one's self. Se bruler. Will you not warm yourself ? Ne voulez-vous pas vous chauffer ? I have no time to warm myself. Je n'ai pas le temps de me chauffer. She has no time to warm herself. Elle n'a pas le temps de se chauffer. One has not always time to warm On n'a pas toujours le temps de se himself. chauffer. In the imperative mood, the reflective pronoun is retained ; as 7 Warm yourself. Chauffez-vous. Do not burn yourself. Ne vous brulez pas. (126, a & 6.) 120 TRENTE-QUATRIEME LE£0N. 133t When an operation is performed upon a person, the part affected by the action of the verb is the direct, and the person, the indirect object ; as, She washes the child's hands. Elle lave les mains a, l'enfant She washes them, Elle les lui lave. (a.) When an agent performs an act upon a part of himself the part acted upon is the direct, and the reflective pronoun the indirect object ; as, I wash my hands. Je me lave les mains. He burns his fingers. H se brule les doigts. Formation of the Past Participle. 134. The past participle of regular verbs is formed from the infinitive, as follows : In the 1st conj. change er into e ; as, aimer, p. p. aime. " 2d " ir " i; " finir, " fmL " 3d " evoir " u; " recevoir, " recu. " 4th " re " u; " vendre, " vendu. 135. Past participles, when used as adjectives, are subject to the same rules of agreement ; as, To tear. A torn coat. DecJiirer. Un habit dechirL To spoil. A spoiled dress. Gater. Une robe gdtee. To arrange. To derange. Arranger. Deranger. Those things are not well arranged. Ces choses-la ne sont pas bien ar- ranges. My watch is out of order ; the glass Ma montre est derangee ; le verre en is broken. est casse. The work is done ; the bottles are L'ouvrage est fini ; les bouteilles filled. sont remplies. 136. Pronouns, used as subjects or objects, are generally re- peated with each verb ; as, I love and esteem them. Je les aime et je les estime. He goes and comes. II va et il vient, or il va et vient. TRENTE-QUATRIEME LE£GN. 121 (a.) The adjective which precedes the noun, when qualifying two or more nouns connected by a conjunction, must be repeated before each of them ; the adjective which follows the noun, is only used once, and pkced after the last noun. Good bread and butter. De ben pam et de bon beurre. Fresh bread and butter. Du pain et du beurre frais.* 137* Adverbs of manner ^re generally formed from adjectives, by the addition of the syllable menL When the adjective ends with a vowel, merit is added to the masculine, when it ends with a consonant, to the feminine, termination of the adjective ; as, True — truly. Vrai — vr&iment Sincere — sincerely. Sincere — sincerement. Frank— fr Le caraetere. The character. The reputation. > La reputation. The nail, (fingei nail.) " 1 L'ongle. The ear. L'oreille. The foot Le pied The shoulder. L'epauk. To warm. Chauffer. To b*arn. Bruler. To tear. Dechirer. To spoil. Gater. To soil. Salir. To hate. Hair.f To arrange. To set in order. > Arranger. To derange. To disturb. > D6 ranger. Frank. j Franc. \ Franche, (fem.) Sincere. Sincere. Fresh, cocL j Frais. < Fraiche, (fem.) Dry. 5 Sec. t Seche, (fem.) Wet. Mouille. Damp. Humide. Clean. Propre. Dirty. Sale. Truly. Vraiment Indeed. En verite. Frankly. Franchement. Sincerely. Sincerement. * When the adjective is thus placed after two nouns of different genders, the mascu- line noun should be named last, so that a masculine adjective may not be closely fol- lowing a feminine noun ; as, wne cravate et un ohapeau Uancs; not, un • Un coup.* Le tapis. ' The comedy. The play. The spectacles. The snuff-box. >• La coraedie. Les lunettes. La tabatiere. Once, twice, &e. Wf. M t s > deux ( fois, &c. The oil-cloth. La toile ciree. To strike, to knock. Frapper.f During, for. Pendant. Yesterday. Hier. Yesterday morn- ( Hier matin, or ing. / Hier au matin. To ring, to strike. Sonner.J Long, a long time. Longtemps. Day before yes- ) Avant . hier _ terday. ) ( Hier soir, or (Hie terday. Last night. Hier au soir. Exercice 35. 1. Avez-vous apporte votre livre ? 2. Je l'ai apporte. 3. Vo- ire soeur a-t-elle dechire sa robe ? 4. Elle ne Fa pas dechiree ; elle l'a brulee. 5. A-t-on lave la toile ciree ? 6. On Fa lavee bier. 7. Avez-vous dejeune tard ce matin ? 8. Ce matin, nous avons dejeune de bonne beure. 9. Avez-vous trouve votre ta- batiere? 10. Je l'ai trouvee dans la poche de mon habit brun. 11. L' avez-vous remplie de tabac frais? 12. Je Ten ai remplie. 13. Avez-vous fini d'ecrire? 14. Je n'ai pas encore fini. 15. Qu'avez-vous choisi ? 16. J'ai choisi les beaux tapis que je vous ai montres. 17. Quand avez-vous recu la lettre de votre oncle? 18. Je l'ai recue hier matin. 19. Y avez-vous deja repondu? 20. J'y ai repondu tout de suite. 21. Avez-vous deja. envoye les rubans a votre soeur? 22. Je ne les lui ai pas encore envoy es. 23. Avez-vous jamais vendu du cafe a ces etrangers? 24. Nous leur en avons vendu plusieurs fois. 25. Avez-vous etudie long- * Coup is used in a great many phrases : Coup d'etat, a stroke of policy ; Coup de vent, a gust of wind; Coup de soleil, a stroke of the sun; Coup de main, de pied % de couteau, u had to do? 28. My brother-in-law was here, and I wa& obliged* to go out with him, 29. Have you had the scissors? 30. I have not; there they are, on the table. 31. Who has had my spectacles? 32. The children have had them. 3&. When did the concert take- place ? 34. It took place the day before yesterday. 36. Were you there S 36. I was there with my sister ; Miss L . . . . sang very well indeed. 37. There were a great many people. 38. Was your sister ever at the play ? 3$. She wa& at the French play last week, for the first time. 40. We go three or four times a year to the play. m. TRENTE-SIXIEME LEgOK Past Participles m Irregular Verbs. 142, To hold, p. p. held. Tenir, p. p. tenu, To feel ; to smelly felt, smelted, Sentir, senti. To open, opened. Ouvrir,, omerL To do ; to make r done, made. Faire, fait. To say ; to tell, said, told. Dire, dit. To write. written. Ecrire-, ecrit. To conduct,. conducted. Conduire y sonduiL To extinguish, extinguished Eteindre,, eteint. To put, put. Mettre, mis* To take, taken. Prendre, pris. To rain, rained. Pleuvoir, flu. To be aMev been able. Pouvoir, fU. To know, known. Savoir, su. To see, seen. Yoir r 0W. To be willing, been willing. Youloir, voulw. To know, . I known. with, ) Connaitre> eonnu. To- be acquainted To read, read. lire. lu. To drink, drank. Boire, bu. To believe, believed. Croire, eru. * Dm, the past participle of devoir t has the circumflex acceM over the u f hut d'm^ the feminise, has not TRENTE-SIXIEME LEgON, 120 143# Who told you that? My brother told me of it. Did you tell it to your father ? I did not tell him of it. Where did you put my slate ? On it, upon it. Under it. Did you put it under the bench or upon it? I put it under it. Where did you take that napkin from ? I took it out of your room. Did it rain much last night ? Qui vous a dit cela ? Mon frere me Va dit. L'ayez-vous dit a votre pere ? Je ne le lui ai pas dit. Ou avez-vous mis mon ardoise ? Dessus, (adv.) Dessous, (adv.) L'avez-vous raise sous le banc ou dessus ? Je l'ai mise dessous. Ou avez-vous pris cette serviette ? Je l'ai prise dans votre chambre. A-t-il plu beaucoup la nuit passee ? 144 9 To do with, (to dispose of.) What have you done with my pen- knife? I have returned it to you. What have you done with that apron ? I have wiped the slate with it. Clean that slate. Did you wet the sponge ? Have you had the floor swept ? Has the furniture been dusted ? Have they been able to take that ink-spot out of the carpet ? They could not take it out. Wipe that child's hands. Wipe your hands with this napkin. One cannot go out without getting one's feet wet. Faire de. Qu'avez-vous fait de mon canif ? Je vous l'ai rendu. Qu'avez-vous fait avec ce tablier ? J'ai essuye l'ardoise avec. Nettoyez cette ardoise. Avez-vous mouille 1'eponge? Avez-vous fait balayer le plancher ? A-t-on ote la poussiere des meubles ? A-t-on pu oter cette tache d'encre du tapis ? On n'a pas pu l'en oter. Essuyez les mains a cet enfant. Essuyez-vous les mains a cette ser- viette. On ne peut sortir sans se mouiller les pieds. VOCABULAIRE 36. The speech. The discourse. A copy-book. A penknife. An apron. A towel. - Le discours, Un cahier. Un canif. Un tablier. TJn essuie-mains. 6* The word. Speech. A composition. A slate. A sponge. A napkin. !• La parole. Une composition, Une ardoise. Une eponge. Une serviette, 130 TRENTE-SIXIEME LEgON. Apieceoffurniture.IJn meuble. A spot. line tache. Furniture. Des nieubles. Snuffers. Des niouchettes. The broom. Le balaie. The dust. La poussiere. To sweep. Balayer. (70, e) To clean. Nettoyer, (70, e.) To wet Mouiller. To wipe. To wipe off. I Essuyer. (TO, e.) To get wet. Se mouiller. To wipe (one's self). 1 S'essuyer. To dispose of. Faire de. To dust. Oter la poussiere. On it, upon it Dessus, (adv.) Under it. Dessous, (adv.) Exercice 36. 1. Qui a ouvert la porte ? 2. La fille l'a ouverte. 3. M'avez- vous dit que ce ruousieur n'a pas tenu sa parole ? 4. Je vous ai dit cela, et c'est vrai. 5. Qui l'a dit a votre beau-frere ? 6. Je ne sais pas qui le lui a dit. 7. Vous l'a-t-il dit ? 8. II ue me l'a pas dit; je l'ai su avaut lui. 9. Avez-vous ecrit votre compo- sition francaise? 10. Je l'ai ecrite ce matin. 11. Ou avez-vous conduit ces dames? 12. Je les ai conduites chez elles. 13. Avez-vous eteint la chandelle ? 14. Je l'ai eteinte avant de sor- tir. 15. Avez-vous mis les mouchettes sur la table ou dessous ? 16. Je les ai mises dessus. 17. Avez-vous mis mon ardoise sous le banc ou dessus? 18. Je l'ai mise dessous, et j'ai mis votre cahier dessus. 19. Ou avez-vous pris cette eponge? 20. Je l'ai prise dans votre chambre. 21. L' avez-vous mouillee ? 22. Je l'ai mouillee pour nettoyer 1' ardoise. 23. Qu'avez-vous fait de mon canif ? 24. Je ne sais pas ce que j'en ai fais. 25. Quand avez-vous vu votre belle-soeur? 26. Je l'ai vue ce matin. 27. Pourquoi ne l'avez-vous pas amenee ? 28. Elle n'a pas voulu venir. 29. Avez-vous connu celui qui a tenu ce magasin? 30. Je ne l'ai pas connu. 31. Avez-vous lu ces discours? 32. Je les ai lus. 33. Votre grand-pere a-t-il cru ces nouvelles? 34. Tl ne les a pas crues. 35. Avez-vous appris votre lecon ? 36. Je ne l'ai pas apprise, parce que je ne l'ai pas comprise. 37. Avez-vous fait balayer votre chambre ? 38. On la balaie tous les jours. 39. A-t-on ote la poussiere des meubles? 40. On va le TRENTE-SIXIEME LEC0N. 131 faire tout-a-Pheure. 41. A-t-on pu oter la taclie d'encre du ta- pis ? 42. On n'a pas pu Ten oter. 43. Qu'a-t-on fait du balai? 44. On l'a mis a sa place. 45. A-t-on apporte un essuie-naains propre ? 46. llya des essuie-mains dans cette arnioire. 47. Donnez-in'en un pour rn'essuyer les mains. 48. Essuyez-vous les mains a cette serviette ; la voici. 49. A-t-il piu beaucoup pendant la nuit? 50. II a plu toute la nuit; on ne peut aller dans les rues sans se mouiller les pieds. Theme 36. 1. Why have they opened the window ? 2. They have opened it because they are going to clean the room. 3. They sweep the floor before they dust the furniture. 4. Why did your friend not keep his word ? 5. He has not been able to keep it. 6. Who told you that \ 1. He did. 8. Did you tell your father of it? 9. *I did not; he knew it before I did. 10. Have you done your task (devoir) ? 11. I have written my com- position, but I have not learned my lesson ; I could not under- stand it. 12. What have you done with the lamp? 13. I ex- tinguished it, and put it on the mantel-piece. 14. Did you put my copy-book under the table ? 15. I did not put it under it; I put it upon it. 16. Where did you take that slate from ? 17. I took it out of my sister's room. 18. Did you wet the sponge ? 19. I wet it, and washed the slate with it (avec). 20. I wiped it with this dirty apron. 21. My sister wanted to remove {oter) the spots from this piece of furniture, but she could not do it. 22. When did you see your grandmother? 23. I saw her not long ago (il rfy a pas longtemps) ; I conducted her to my uncle's. 24. Have you known Mr. S...., who is now in Paris? 25. Have you read Mr. Webster's speeches? 26. I have read them, but I wish to read them once more (une seconde fois). 27. Did your father hear the news? 28. He heard it, but he did not believe it. 29. Did you drink all the lemonade ? 30. We drank only a part of it. 31. Have you had your room swept ? 32. The girl has taken the broom to do it. 33. Take a towel, and wipe that child's hands. 34. Wipe your hands with this napkin. 132 TRENTE-SEPTI^ME LECON. 35. What have you done with my penknife ? 36. Here it is, 37. It rained much during the night, but the wind has already dried up the streets. 38. Have you had the snuffers cleaned? 39. I have had my linen washed and mended. 37. TEENTE-SEPTlfiME LEgOKT. 145. The compound tenses of the intransitive verbs alter, ar- river, entrer, rentrer, r ester, retourner, venir, revenir, sortir, partir (to start), tomber (to fall), and of a few others, are formed with the auxiliary fore. (a.) The past participle, construed with Ure, agrees, in gender and number, with the subject ; as, I have gone, or I went. Je suis alle, fem. allee. He has arrived She has entered. II est arrive. Elle est entree. "We remained. Nous sommes restes, fem. restees. You eame. Vous etes venu, venus ; venue, ve- nues. They have gone out They started. lis sont sortis. Elles sont parties. 146» (a.) Sortir and some other verbs are sometimes construed with etre, and sometimes with avoir. With etre, to express state or situation ; with avoir, to express action ; as, I went out this morning. J'ai sorti* ce matin. My sister-in-law has gone out. Ma belle-sceur est sortie. They have passed ; they passed by Elles sont passees ; elles ont pass6 here. par ici. (6.) Instead of the past indefinite of aller, the past indefinite of etre is used, when the past tense of to go has the meaning of have been ; as, I went to the theatre last night. J'ai 6te au theatre hier au soir. We went to Boston last week. Nous avons 6te a Boston la semaine passee. * The auxiliary avoir is always used in the past tense of sortir when it means to have been out. TRENTE-SEPTIEME LE£ON. 133 147. The compound tenses of all reflective verbs are formed with etre. (a.) The past participle of reflective verbs agrees, like the past participle of transitive verbs, with the direct object, when pre- ceded by it ; as, I burned myself. Je me suis brule, fem. brulee. She washed herself Elle s'est lavee. She washed her hands. Elle s'est lave les mains. She washed and wiped them. Elle se les est lavees et essuyees. In the above examples, the past participles and their direct objects are in italics. 148. (a.) How long. How long did he live there ? He lived there about two years. (b.) How long. 7lll f until ; as far as. How long did you remain there ? We staid there till Monday. (c.) Until what time ? Till eleven o'clock. (d.) How far. As far as his house. As far as the end of the road. As far as France. Combien de temps. Combien de temps a-t-il demeure la? II y a demeure environ deux ans. Jusqu'a quand. Jusque. Jusqu'a quand etes-vous restes la ? Nous y sommes restes jusqu'a lundL JusqxCd quelle heure? Jusqu'a onze heures. cou. Jusque chez lui. Jusqu'au bout du chemin. Jusqu'en France. 149. The names of the days of the week are of the masculine gender. They are : Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednes- day, Thursday, Friday, Saturday. On Tuesday. Tuesdays. Every Tuesday. Dimanche, lundi, mardi, mercredi, jeudi, vendredi, saraedi. Mardi. Le mardi. Tous les mardis. He leaves on Thursday for Europe. II part jeudi pour l'Europe. An American. A European. Un Am^ricain. Un Europeen. VOCABULAIRE 37. America. Europe. L'Amerique, L'Europe. 134 TRENTE-SEPTlfiME LE^ON. A German. Un Allemand. The end, (the ex- ) T , , tr erne point.) ) To recognize. •] To pity. J To undertake. •] To leave. ( To set out. ( To beg, to praj. To leave, to quit, ) (trans.) ) About. Till, until; as far as. How long. (147, b.) Germany. L'Allemagne. The end,(^*efer (J'ai?ne mieux) a slice of roast beef. 27. Do you like it well done or rare ? 28. I like it better rare. 29. Will you have fat or lean? 30. Give me a little of both, if you please. 31. We have breakfasted on salt fish ; I have been thirsty all the morn- ing. 32. Why does that Indian woman follow us with her cages? 33. She wishes to sell us a bird. 34. Is that bird alive or dead? 35. Follow me to the hotel; I wish to buy a nest of little birds, to make a present of to my cousin ; it is her birth- day to-day [c'est aujourdliui sa fete). 41. QUARANTE ET UNIEME LE^ON. 162» Many verbs are reflective in French, which are not so in English. In English, there are often two verbs to express the same idea ; the one expressing it transitively, and the other in- 150 QUARANTE ET UNIEME LE^OST. transitively. The latter is generally rendered, in French, by the reflective form of the transitive verb ; as, Coucker, (trans, and intrans.) To lay ; also, to lie, to sleep. To lie down, to go to bed. To raise, to lift up. To rise. To deceive, to cheat. To be 7nistaken. I slept in the next room. Did you go to bed early ? "We rose at sunrise. The sun rises, sets. He has deceived me. I am mistaken, I am wrong. He has made a mistake. I have taken the wrong road. Se coucher, aller se coucher. Lever. /Se lever. Tromper. Se tromper. J'ai couche dans la chambre a c6te. Yous etes vous couche de bonne heure ? JSTous nous sommes leves au lever du soleil. Le soleil se leve, se couche. II m'a trompe. Je me trompe. II s'est trompe. Je me suis trompe de chemin. 163# A transitive verb, used intransitively, with an inanimate object for its subject, is rendered by the reflective form of the transitive verb ; as, Glass breaks easily. Le verre se casse facilement. That door does not open. Cette porte ne louvre pas. So are passive verbs, when they are used in a manner analo- gous to the preceding ; as, La farine se vend six dollars le baril. Ce tableau se voit de loin, j Comment cela s'est-il fait ? \ Comment a-t-on fait cela ? Cela s'est fait ainsi, comme cela. Flour is sold at six dollars a barrel, That picture is seen at a distance. How was that done ? That was done thus, like that. In what manner. In this manner. There is no means of doing it other- wise. Finally, peace has been made. De quelle maniere. De cette maniere. II n'y a pas moyen de le faire au- trement. Enfin, la paix s'est faite, or est faite. 164* A few verbs are idiomatically reflective ; as, To do, to be. Se porter. How do you do ? Comment vous portez-vous? QUARANTE ET UNIEME LE£ON. 151 I am well; and how are you ? Is all your family in good health * How are they all at home ? Everybody is well. Do you enjoy good health! Je me porte bien ; et vous-meme ? Toute votre famille se porte-t-elle bien? Comment se porte-t-on chez vous I Tout le monde se porte bien. Jouissez-vous d'une bonne sante ? 165t Each, every, Each one, every one. Each maa Each woman. Every time I go there. Every one is liable to be mistaken. Each one of these ladies is hand- some. What ? (subject of a verb.) What astonishes you ? What is that? Chaque, (adj.) Chacun, (pron.) Chaque homme. Chaque femme. Chaque fois que fj vais. Chacun est sujet a se tromper. Chacune de ces dames est belle. Qu'est-ce qui? Qu'est-ce qui vous etonne ? QiCest-ce que Jest? VOCABULAIRE 41. The sun. The treasure. The body. The advantage. Happiness. Misfortune. The means. The expedient. Le soleiL Le tresor. Le corps. L'avantage. Le bonheur. Le malheur. (■ Le moyen. The mooiL La lune. Health. La sante. The soul ; the mind. L'ame. Peace. The law. Misery. The manner. The way. La paix. La loi. La misere. - La maniere. To lie, to sleep. ) To raise, to lift up. Lever. To deceive, to cheat. Tromper. To enjoy. Jouir (de). To astonish. Etonner. To cause. Causer. Finally, at last. Enfin. Like that ; so so. Comrae cela. Different. Different. Subject to, liable to. Sujet, tte a. Each, every. Chaque. • Se eoucher. To lie down. To go to bed. To rise. Se lever. To be mistaken. Se tromper. ' >- (of health.) Se porter. To be astonished. S'etonner (de). To cause, ) t , *., , « «. Tom a ke,r ( * e/ ^ m/)ralre - Thus, so. Ainsi. However. Pourtant. Otherwise. Autrement Ready. Pret (a). Each one, every one. Chacun. 152 QUARANTE ET UNIEME LEgOlST, ExERCICE 41. 1. Dans quelle chambre avez-vous couche? 2. J'ai couche- dans la chambre a cote de la votre. 3". A quelle heure vous etes-vous couche 2 4. Je rne suis couche a dix heures. 5. Vos amis se sont-ils couches apres vous ? 6. lis sont alies se coucher au coucher du soleil. 7. Yous levez-vous de bonne heure ? 8, Je me leve ordinairement au lever du soleil. 9. A quelle heure le soleil se leve-t-il a present? 10. II se leve a six heures. 11, Vous a-t-on jamais trompe ? 12. On m'a trompe il n'y a pas longtemps, dans ce magasin-la. 13. !Ne vous trcmpez-vous pas de maison? 14. Je ne me trompe pas de maison; j'y ai ete plusieurs fois. 15. Ne se trompe-t-on pas souvent dans ce mon- de-ci? 16. Tres-souvent ; chacun est sujet a. se tromper. 17. Ce fromage se coupe-t-il facilement ? 1 8. II ne se coupe pas fa- cilement; il est bien dur. 19. De quelle maniere cela se fait-il? 20. Cela se fait de cette maniere-ci. 21. Montrez-moi comment cela s'est fait. 22. Yoici comment cela s'est fait. 23. Cela s'est-il fait comme cela ? 24. C'est ainsi que cela s'est fait. 25, JSPy a-t-il pas moyen de le faire autrement \ 26. II n'y a pas moyen de le faire autrement. 27. Comment se porte-t-on chez vous? 28. Tout le monde se porte bien ; je vous remercie. 29. Jouissez-vous d'une bonne sante ? 30. Qui, M. ; ma sante est bonne. 31.. Comment se porte M. votre beau-pere? 32. II se porte comme cela ; il ne jouit pas d'une bonne sante. 33. Quels sont les deux plus grands tresors sur la terre ? 34. O'est la sante du corps et la paix de l'ame. 35. N'est-ce pas un bonheur (que) de vivre en paix avec tout le monde? 36. C'est un grand bon- heur de vivre en paix et sous de bonnes lois. 37. Chaque hom- me jouit-il de ces avantages? 38. Non ? M. ; ce sont des avan- tages dont peu d'hommes jouissent. 39. Chacun ne vit-il pas a sa maniere ? 40. Oui, M. ; sans cesser pourtant d'etre sujet aux lois. 41. N'est-ce pas que ces dames sont toutes belles ? 42, Oui, M. ; mais chacune d'elles est belle d'une maniere differente* 43. Votre sceur ainee est-elle sujette au mal de dents ? 44. Non ? M. ; c'est ma soeur Marie qui y est sujette. 45. Etes-vous enfin pret a sortir? 46. Je le suis, mais ma soeur n'est pas encoro QUARAXTE ET UNIEME LECON. 153 prete a venir. 47. Qu'est-ce qui vous fait regarder de ce cote- la ? 48. Je rn'etonne de voir autant de monde dans cette rue-ci. 49. Qu'est-ce qui vous etonne en cela ? 50. C'est qu'il y a or- dinairement fort peu de monde ici. 51. Qu'est-ce qui a cause les malheurs de ces pays ? 52. C'est la guerre qui a cause toute cette misere. Theme 41. 1. Where did you sleep last night? 2. I slept in the next room, but I did not sleep well. 3. I went to bed at sunset (au coucher du soleil) ; and when I go to bed too early, I cannot sleep. 4. Go to bed, if you are sleepy. 5. Did you rise early this morning ? 6. We rose before sunrise. 7. The sun rises at five, at present, and sets at seven. 8. Last night, the moon rose at eight o'clock. 9. Rise, it is late. 10. You wish to deceive me; the sun has not yet risen. 11. You are mistaken; the sun is up long since; look through the window. 12. What causes you to say so ? it is the moon. 13. The clerk has made a mis- take ; he has put in the bill (le memoire) an article that I have not had. 14. Last night, I mistook the house ; I rung at the next door (a cbte). 15. Do not open that window; it does not shut easily. 16. Ripe fruit soon spoils (vite), 17. How is this city called in French? 18. How is this word written? 19. How is that done? 20. It is done in this manner. 21. In what man- ner have you done that ? 22. This is the way (in which) I did it. 23. Is that the way (comme cela) (that) you did it? 24. It is thus I did it, and there is no means of doing it otherwise. 25. How have you been since I saw you? (151, Rem.) 26. I have enjoyed good health. 27. How is your uncle ? 28. He is not well ; he does not enjoy good health in summer. 29. Health of body and peace of mind are the two greatest treasures on earth. 30. Those are advantages which (dont) every man does not enjoy. 31. Every time I go to see your friend, he inquires after you (il me demande de vos nouvelles). 32. Every one lives in (a) his own way, but we must all be subject to the same laws ; otherwise (sans cela) there is neither peace nor happiness in this world. 7* 154 quarante-deuxi^me LEgON. 83. All these ladies are beautiful, but each one of them is so (62) in a different manner. 34. Is your sister ready to come ? 35. Is she subject to toothache? 36. "What astonishes you? 37. I am astonished to see so much misery. 38. What causes those misfortunes? 39. The war has caused them, but finally peace has been made. 40. The advantages of peace are already felt (sefont deja sentir) throughout (dans tout) the country. 42. QUARANTE-DEUXIEME LE£OK Future Tense. 166a The future tense of all French verbs ends in rai, ras, ra % ronSj reZj ront. Avoir, irr. J'aurai, Tu auras, II aura, Nous aurons, Vbus aurez, lis auront, Etre. irr. Je serai, Tu seras, 11 sera, Nous serons, Yous serez, Us seront, Aller. irr. J'irai, £ Tu iras, » II ira, <£ Nous irons, ~° Vous irez, % lis iront, Envoyer. irr. J'enverrai, Tu enverras, R enverra, Nous enverrons, Vous enverrez, Us enverront, $ 167 * The future of all regular, and most irregular, verbs, is formed by adding the person-endings ai, as, a, ons, ez, ont, to the infinitive. In the third conjugation, the final syllable voir is contracted into vr. In the fourth, the final e is dropped. To speak. I shall or will speak. Parler. Je parlerai, tu parleras. To finish. I shall or will finish. Finir. Jefinirai, tu flniras. To receive, I shall or will receive. Recevoir. Je recevrai, tu recevras. To sell. I shall or will sell, tember, October, November, De- tobre, novembre, decembre. cember. 172. To dress. To dress one's self. To undress. To undress one's self. Who dresses those children ? I shall not dress before five o'clock. Your sisters have dressed already. Then I shall go and dress also. Go then immediately, you will keep them waiting. To keep a person waiting. To please one. I go there to please my sisters. To continue ; to proceed. I shall remain here as long as the cold continues. Proceed, pray. To last, to wear. That cloth will wear well. Habiller. S'habiller. Deshabiller. Se deshabiller. Qui habille ces enfants? Je ne m'habillerai pas avant cin^ heures. Vos sceurs se sont deja habillees. Alors j'irai m'habiller aussi. Allez done tout de suite, vous let ferez attendre. Faire attendre qqn. Faire plaisir a qqn. J'y vais pour faire plaisir a mea sceurs. Continuer. Je resterai ici tant que le continuera. Continuez, je vous en prie. Durer. Ce drap durera longtemps. froid An empire. The emperor. A republican. A kingdom. The king. VOCABULAIRE 43. Russia. Un empire. L'empereur. Un republicain, Un royaume. Le roi. The empress. A republic. Prussia. The queen. La Russie. L'imperatrice. Une republique. La Prusse. La reine. QUARANTE-TROISIEME LE£ON. 162 The power. The people. The soldier. To dress. To continue. To proceed. To oppress. To please. Russian. Then, {at that time^ in that case.) Well! That is to say. Le pouvoir. Le peuple. Le soldat. The will. The nation. The army. j Habiller. ( S'habiller. >• Continuer. Opprimer. Faire plaisir. Russe. y Alors. Eh bien ! C'est-a-dire. To undress. La volonte. La nation. L'armee. Deshabiller. Se deshabiller. To last ; to wear. Durer. To suffer. To endure. To lose. Prussian. Then, {conj.) Well and good. As long as. ) Souffrir (de). irr. ) (95, a.) Perdre. Prussien, nne. Done. A la bonne heum Tant que. Exercice 43. 1. Viendrez-vous me voir ce soir? 2. Je ne pourrai; nous aurons du monde. 3. Quand reviendrez-vous ici ? 4. Je revien- drai le dix juillet. 5. Quand saurez-vous si votre frere viendra? 6. Je le saurai quand je recevrai sa lettre. 7. Et s'il ne vient pas, que ferez-vous alors ? 8. Alors j'irai le voir le premier juin. 9. Quel jour du mois est-ce aujourd'hui ? 10. C'est aujourd'hui le vingt-cinq mai. 11. Vous irez done le voir la semaine pro- chaine? 12. C'est-a-dire, s'il ne vient pas. 13. Quand verrai-je votre cousine ? 14. Vous la verrez quand vous viendrez chez nous. 15. Je ne sais si je viendrai demain ou non. 16. Enfin, vous ferez comme vous voudrez. 17. Que ferez-vous si vous perdez votre argent? 18. Eh bien! je ferai ce que je pourrai. 19. Les rois feront-ils du bien aux republicains ? 20. lis leur feront du mal, s'ils en ont le pouvoir. 21. Jusqu'a quand les empereurs et les rois continueront-ils d'opprimer les peuples ? 22. Us continueront tant que les peuples souffriront d'etre opprimes. 23. Ces royaumes dureront-ils toujours? 24. lis ne dureront pas toujours; ils seront un jour convertis {converted) en republic ques. 25. La republique de mil huit cent quarante-huit n'a= t-elle pas cesse le deux decembre mil huit cent cinquante-deux ? 162 QUARANTE-TROISIEME LECON. 26. Elle a cesse alors pour faire place a l'empire. 27. Les reines et les hnperatrices ne souffrent-elles pas comme le commun du peuple ? 28. Elles souffrent comme nous, et comme nous elles mourront quand leur temps sera venu. 29. Les Eusses sont-ils bons soldats ? 30. lis sont bons soldats, vifs et braves, mais tres- paresseux (lazy). 31. Le roi de Prusse a-t-il une grande armee? 32. L'armee prussienne est tres-considerable, mais les Prussiens ne servent pas volontiers. 33. Avez-vous perdu quelque chose? 34. JNon, M. ; je n'ai rien perdu. 35. Allez-vous vous habiller a present? 36. Je vais ni'habiller pour aller au concert. 37. Yous aimez a aller aux bals et aux concerts ; n'est-ce pas ? 38. Pas trop ; j'y vais pour faire plaisir a mes soeurs. 39. Allez done vite vous habiller ; vous ferez attendre vos soeurs. 40. Je ne les ferai pas attendre longtemps ; je m'habillerai bien vite. Theme 43. 1. Will you run, if it rains? 2. I shall not, for the rain will not continue long. 3. "Will your brother come soon ? 4. He will come as soon as he can. 5. Will you know to-morrow, whether he will come this week ? 6. I shall know it when I hear from him. 7. What will you do, if he does not write to you? 8. Then I shall go to town on the first of March. 9. What day of the month is it to-day ? 10. It is, to-day, the twen- ty-sixth of February. 11. Will your cousin go with you ? 12. He may (come with me), if he chooses (si cela lui fait plaisir). 13. You may do as you like, but I shall not leave as long as this cold continues. 14. We shall see how the weather will be, next week. 15. Will you not lose your umbrella ? 16. I will take good care not (de ne pas) to lose it; I have lost several. 17. What shall we do, if our trunks are lost? 18. Well, I do not know what we shall do then. 19. Those shoes have been very good ; I wore them (Us w)ont dure) six months. 20. That coat will not last long, if you wear (mettre or porter) it every day. 21. When will you begin to dress ? 22. I shall dress as soon as I have warmed myself. 23. Will you please your sisters, if you keep them waiting ? 24. I shall not keep them waiting long, QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LE^ON. 163 for I shall soon have dressed. 25. Those children will undress as soon as they have eaten their supper. 26. Will that old Mng continue to oppress his people as long as he lives? 27. He will, as long as he has the power to do so (en). 28. The var between (entre) Russia, on the one side (dfun cote), and France aid England, on the other, lasted for two years ; and how much lave not those nations suffered during that time! 29. How bng, nations of the earth, will you be subject to the will of a ring or queen ! 30. Kings and emperors will die, and kingdoms and empires will not last forever (toujours). 31. The king of Prussia has a large army, and the Prussians are good soldiers ; that is to say, in (en) times of peace. 32. There are, in our re- jublic, Russians, Prussians, Germans, Italians, French, English, 6c. ; they are all republicans, and live together under the same laws. 44. QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LEgOK 173« To be necessary ; must. Falloir, (an irr. imp. v.) ip.ip.faUu. H is necessary. It was necessary. Ilfaut. II afallu. I; will be necessary. II faudra. Vhat must one do to be respected ? Que faut-il faire pour 6 tre respecte ? Rem. — The subject of the verb must, becomes the indirect ob- ject of the verb falloir. Vhat must I do ? Que me faut-il faire ? Vhere must lie go ? Ou lui faut-il aller ? Ye were obliged to wait. II nous a fallu attendre. Tuey will have to study more. II leur faudra etudier davantage. Vhat do you want? Que vous faut-il? I must have money. II me faut de l'argent. l\hat does your brother want ? Que faut-il a votre frere ? 174 • To be worth, been worth. Valoir. p. p. valu. I im worth. We are worth. Je vaux. Nous valons. I shall be worth. Je vaudrai. 164 QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LE£0N. How much is that worth ? That is not worth much. How much are those pictures worth ? That house may be worth about twenty thousand francs. That man is worth a hundred thou- sand dollars. To be better. His brother is not better than he. It is better. It will be better to stay here than to go out. Combien cela vaut il ? Cela ne vaut pas grand'chose. Combien valent ces tableaux ? Cette maison peut valoir une vinj- taine de mille francs. * Cet homme est riche de cent mile Valoir mieux. Son frere ne vaut pas mieux que lu. II vaut mieux. (imp.) II vaudra mieux rester ici que ce sortir. Rem. — Than, before the infinitive, is expressed by que de. I like better to go out than to stay J'aime mieux sortir que de resttr here. ici. To be worth while to. Valoir la peine de. Is it worth while to send to market Vaut-il la peine d'envoyer au ma*- for that ? che pour cela ? It is not worth while. Cela n'en vaut pas la peine. 175. To behave. To conduct one's self. Those children behaved well. He does not conduct himself well. To flatter one's self. To deserve. He flatters himself that he is loved. He is flattered, but he is not loved. He deserves to be punished by the master. Se comporter. Se conduire. Ces enfants se sont bien comportts. II ne se conduit pas comme il faut. Se fatter (de). Meriter (de). II se flatte d'etre aime. On le flatte, mais on ne Vaime pas.\ II merite d'etre puni par le maitre. Rem. — By, before the agent of a passive verb, is rendered ly de, when the verb expresses an affection of the heart or soul ; as, If you conduct yourselves well, you will be loved and respected by everybody. Si vous vous comportez bien, vois serez aimes et respect&s de toit le monde. * The termination aine, added to a cardinal number, dix, douze, vingt, t rente, &c, forms a collective noun {feminine gender) of about as many units. t The passive voice of the verb is much less used in French than in English. The genius of the French language generally prefers the reflective form of the verb, or ihd active voice with the pronoun on for subject. QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LE£ON. VOCABULAIRE 44. The price. Merit. Respect. Contempt. The good-for-noth- ing fellow. Le prix. Le merite. Le respect. Le mepris. !• Le vaurien. The pain. The trouble. Esteem. Conduct Ignorance. Idleness. 165 -La peine. L'estime. La conduite. L'ignorance. L'oisivete. To be necessary. Falloir. To be worth. Valoir. To behave. Se comporter. To conduct one's self. Se conduire. To deserve. Merit er. To respect. Respecter. To flatter. Flatter. To despise. Mepriser. To reward. Recompenses To punish. Punir. Properly. Comme il faut. More. Davantage.* Still, quiet. Tranquille. Diligent. Diligent. Idle. Oisif. Lazy. Paresseux.f Proud. Fier. Ignorant. Ignorant.f Impolite. Impoli. Disobliging. Desobligeant. Exactly. Au juste. At most. { Auplus. I Tout au plus. Exercice 44. 1. Que faut-il dire au domestique ? 2. II faut lui dire de venir ici. 3. Lui faut-il aller quelque part? 4. II lui faut aller cher- cher de l'eau. 5. Que vous a-t-il fallu faire pour apprendre l'an- glais? 6. II m'a fallu travailler beaucoup. 7. Que faudra-t-il dire a ces hommes, s'ils vienueut ? 8. II faudra leur dire de re- venir demain. 9. Cornbien d' argent faut-il a votre frere ? 10. II ne lui faut qu'un dollar. 1 1 . Ne lui faut-il pas davantage ? 12. Non, M. ; c'est tout ce qu'il lui faut. 13. Que vous faut-il ? 14. II me faut des bas. 15. Quel est le prix de ces bas-ci? 16. Ceux-la valent six schellings la paire. IV. Cornbien cette mon- tre peut-elle valoir? 18. Je ne puis vous le dire au juste; une trentaine de dollars, tout au plus. 19. Comment ce jeune hom- * Davantage cannot precede a depending noun or word, but is preferable to plus at the end of a sentence. t Le paresseitx^ the idler ; IHgnorant, the ignorant person. 166 QUARANTE-QUATRIEME LECON. me se conduit-il ? 20. II ne se conduit pas toujours comme il faut. 21. Son frere vaut-il mieux que lui? 22. L'un ne vaut guere mieux que 1' autre. 23. Yaudra-t-il mieux sortir que de rester ici? 24. II vaudra mieux rester ici que de sortir. 25. Cela vaut-il la peine d'en parler? 26. Cela n'en vaut pas la peine. 27. Vaudra-t-il la peine d'envoyer au marche pour une livre de beurre ? 28. II ne vaudra pas la peine d'y envoy er pour si peu de chose. 29. Que faut-il faire pour etre respecte et ai- me ? 30. Pour etr,e respecte, il faut bien se conduire ; et pour etre aime, il faut 6tre poli et obligeant. 31. Le paresseux me- rite-t-il d'etre recompense ? 32. II merite, au contraire, d'etre puni. 33. Qui a ete recompense par le maitre ? 34. Ceux qui se sont bien comport es et qui ont bien su leurs lecons. 35. Qui sera respecte et aime de tout le monde? 36. Ceux qui se con- duiront bien. 37. Ce monsieur se flatte-t-il d'avoir des amis? 38. Oui, M. ; mais il se trompe : on le flatte, mais on ne l'aime pas; au contraire, on le meprise. 39. Pourquoi est-il meprise? 40. Parce qu'il est ignorant, fier, impoli et desobligeant : le res- pect est du au merite, et le mepris a l'ignorance. 41. Qu'est-ce qui nous gagne l'estime des gens de bien [good people) ? 42. Une bonne conduite et de belles manieres. Theme 44. 1. Is it necessary to tell the servant to go to market? 2. He must go there ; we want vegetables and eggs. 3. What must I do ? 4. You must stay still, and pay attention to what I tell you. 5. Were you obliged to wait? 6. I was obliged to wait a long time. 7. Will it be necessary to pay that man when he has done ? 8. You must ask him first what he wants for his trouble. 9. Do you want gloves? 10. I want some, and I want also a handkerchief. 11. Has your brother what he wants ? 12. He has all he wants. 13. Is this fan worth five dollars? 14. It is worth more. 15. It is worth two dollars, at most. 16. What is the price of these gloves ? 17. They are worth a dollar a pair. 18. How much may that house be worth? 19. I can- not tell you exactly ; about twenty thousand dollars. 20. The QTJARANTE-CINQUIEME LEC/0N. 167 gentleman who has just bought it, is worth a hundred thousand dollars. 21. Is this boy better than his brother? 22. The one is no better than the other. 23. They are good-for-nothing fel- lows, who like to be idle better than to work. 24. Will it be better to go to market than to stay at home ? 25. It will be better to remain here, for it is not worth while to go to market when one does not wish to buy any thing. 26. Is it worth while to speak about that to your father? 27. ISTo, sir ; it is not worth while. 28. What must one do to gain the esteem of hon- est people (des gens de Men) ? 29. One must behave properly, for a good conduct and pleasing manners (de belles manieres) easily gain for us the esteem and respect of well-bred people (des gens comme il faui). 30. Shun idleness ; the idler is despised by everybody. 31. Those that behave well, and study their les- sons properly, will be rewarded by the master. 32. Those that neglect their duties, deserve to be punished. 33. Conduct your- selves well, and avoid those that flatter you, for people (on) usual- ly flatter those whom they wish to lose. 34. He who flatters himself that he has friends, is often mistaken. 35. Ignorant men are often proud, impolite and disobliging; but men of (d'un) true merit are seldom so. 45. QUAEANTE-CINQUIEME LEgOK 17o« To walk, to take a walk. Se promener. To take a ride. Se promener a cheval. To take an airing in a carriage. Se promener en voiture. Do you often take a walk ? Vous promenez-vous souvent ? I take a ride every morning. Je me promene a cheval tous les matins. My sister has taken an airing. Ma sceur s'est promenee en voiture. To amuse one's self, to enjoy one's self. S'amuscr (a). Do you enjoy yourselves? Yous amusez-vous? Every one amuses himself as well Chacun s'amnse de son mieux. as he can. We enjoyed ourselves in the coun- Nous nous sommes amuses a la cam- try, pagne. 168 ^UARANTE-CINQUIEME LE£ON. To want amusement. To be weary (mentally). My brother does not enjoy himself here. I find no amusement anywhere. We were tired of being in the country. (. Sennuyer. Mon frere s'ennuie ici. Je m'ennuie partout. Nous nous sommes ennuyes a la campagne. 177» To spend one's time in. How do you spend your time ? In the evening I pass the time in playing on the flute. Eem. — Jouer takes de before fore the names of games. To play the violin, upon the violin. To play at cards. To play the piano, upon the piano. To play on the harp, on the guitar. What instrument do you play ? j Passer le temps a. \ S'amuser a. A quoi passez-vous le temps ? Le soir, je m'amuse a jouer de la flute. a musical instrument, and^ a be- Jouer du violon. Jouer aux cartes. Jouer du piano, toucher le piano. Pincer la harpe, la guitare. De quel instrument jouez-vous? 178. To take a turn. To take a turn in the garden. To ask a question. I shall ask you questions. Each one will answer them in his turn. You will answer when it comes to your turn. ( Faire un tour. (Faire un tour de promenade. Faire un tour de jar din. Faire une question. Je vous ferai des questions. Chacun y repondra a son tour. Vous repondrez quand votre tour viendra. 179# To keep a thing secret. You will do well to keep that se- cret. You had better. Instead of keeping that flute, you had better sell it. Bather. Sooner. Rather than sell it, I will break it. Do that, as soon as you can. Garder le secret d'une chose. Vous ferez bien d'en garder le se- cret. Vous ferez bien, vous ferez mieux. Au lieu de garder cette flute, vous ferez mieux de la vendre. Plutot. Plus tot. Plutdt que de la vendre, je la cas- serai. Faites cela, le plus t6t que vous pourrez. '•^UARANTE-CINQUlJlME LEpON, 16' VoCARtlOJrRE 45, The turn. Le tour. The walk. La promenad< The secret. Le secret. The question. La question. The violin. Le violon. The bass-viol. La basse. The piano. Le piano. The harp. La harpe. The instrument. L'instrument, The flute. La flute. The play.; theg&rae. Le jeu. The £ard, La carde. To walk. Se promeuer. To spend (the trme^ . Passer. To amuse. Amuser. To weary. Ennuyer. To enjoy one's sel£ S 5 amuser. To want amusement. S'ennuyer. -To play. Joaer. To touch ; to play. Toucher. To pinch ; to play. Pincer. To keep. harder. Rather. Flutot Sooner. Plus tot In the best way I t> q ^„ • '_ J > De son mienz, one Can. $ Admirably, A ravir. Exercice 45. 1. Vous promenez-vous souvent? 2. Je me promene tous les jours. 3. Vous 6ies-vous promene ce matin t 4. Je me suis promene a cheval. 5. Vous promenerez-vous a cheval demain matin? 6. J'irai me promener aussitot que je me serai leve. 7. Voulez-vous faire un tour de jardin a present ? 8. Je vous re- mercie; je suis encore fatigue de la promenade de ee matin. 9, Ou est votre ami! 10. II est alle faire un tour de promenade* 11. Vous amusez-vous a la campagne ? 12. Nous nous y aniu- sons tres-bien. 13. Vous etes-vous amuses a la foire (fair) ? 14. Nous nous y sommes ennuyes, 15. Votre cousin s'est-il ennuye au concert? 16. II s'y est ennuye ; il s'ennuie partout. 17. A quoi passez-vous le temps ? 18. Le matin, nous allons nous pro- mener a cheval ; et l'apres-midi, nous passons le temps a lire. 19. A quoi vous amusez-vous le soir? 20. Le soir, nous nous amusons a faire de la musique. 21. De quel instrument jouez- vous ? 22. Je joue du. violon, «t mon frere joue de la basse. 23, Jouez-vous quelquefois aux cartes ? 24. Nous n'aimons pas le jeu de cartes. 25. Votre cousine touche-t-elle le piano? 26. Elle touche le piano, et pince la harpe a ravir. 27. Get enfanfc 8 1*70 QUARANTE-CINQUlfrME LECJOSr, vous ennuie-t-il par ses questions? 28. Au contraire, il nous amuse. 29. Repondez-vous aux questions que le maitre vous fait? 30. Nous y repondons, chacun a. son tour. 31. Repon- drez-vous aux questions que je vous ferai? 32. J y y repondrai quand mon tour viendra. 33. Garderez-vous le secret de ce que je vous dirai ? 34. Pen garderai le secret, je vous le promets. 35. £Te ferons-nous pas bien de garder le secret de ce que nous avons appris? 36. Je crois que nou&ferons bien d 7 en garder le secret. 37. Au lieu de garder ce chien de chasse, ne ferez-vous pas mieux de le vendre? 38, Plutdt que de le vendre, je le donnerai a mon cousin. 39. Ferai-je mieux de garder cet habit que de le rendre au tailleur ? 40. Au lieu de le garder, je vous? conseille de le lui rendre le plus tot que vous pourrez. Theme 45. I. Do you take a walk in the morning? 2. I take a turn in the garden every morning before breakfast. 3* My sister takes an airing every day, and I usually accompany her on horseback. 4. Shall we take a turn now ? 5. I took a walk this morning. 6. We shall take a ride to-morrow morning, if you like. 7. Do you enjoy yourself in the country ? 8. I enjoy myself very well here. 9. When I want amusement, I play on the flute, or I go walking on the banks (les lords) of the river. 10. My cousin is tired of being here; he wants to go back to town. 11. Did the ladies enjoy themselves at the fair (foire) ? 12. They were tired of being there. 13. How do you spend your time? 14. We spend the morning in running in the woods. 15. In the even- ing, we pass the time in making music ; my brother plays on the violin, and I play on the base-viol. 1ft. How do your sisters spend their time? 17. They pass the time in reading and play- ing on the piano. 18. Does your niece play on any (quelque) musical instrument (de musique)% 19. She plays on the harp, and sings admirably. 20. Do you like to play cards? 21. No r sir ; I do not like card-playing (lejeu de cartes). 22. If that child wearies you by his questions, you had better not answer him. 23. He asks me questions that amuse me. 24. I am going to QUARANTE-SIXIEME LEC0N. 171 ask you questions ; you will answer them, each one in his turn. 25. When it comes to my turn, I shall answer them as well as I can. 26. I will tell you something, if you promise me to keep it secret. 21. I promise to keep secret any thing you may tell me, you may rely upon it. 28. I will die rather than to tell another's secrets (dhcn autre). 29. Had I not better give back this instrument than to keep it ? 30. Certainly : do so, the sooner the better (que vous pourrez). 46. QUARANTE-SIXIEME LEgON. 180» To SIT DOWN. I sit down. We sit dowa Where did you sit down ? My sister sat down upon the sofa. I shall sit down by her side. Pray, be seated. To sit, to be sitting. My mother sits by the window. To GO AWAY. I go away. We go away. Did you go away ? I went away. We went away. I shall go away. S'asseoir. irr. p. p. assis. Je m'assieds. Nous nous asseyons. Ou vous etes-vous assis ? Ma soeur s'est assise sur le sofa. Je rrfassierai a cote d'elle. f Asseyez-vous, je vous en prie. < Donnez-vous la peine de vous as- ( seoir. Etre assis. Ma mere est assise a la fenetre. S'en aller. Je m'en vais. Nous nous en allons. Vous en etes-vous alle? Je m'en suis alle. Nous nous en sommes alles. Je m'en irai. 181. To go up, to ascend, to climb. We go or come down. He went up stairs. He came down stairs. Monter. Descendre. II a monte" l'escalier. II a descendu l'escalier. Rem. — When the verbs monter and descendre are used intrans- itively, they take sometimes the auxiliary etre y and sometimes the auxiliary avoir. (146.) 112 QUARANTE-SIXIEME LECON. He has gone up to his room. She has come down. He ascended during three hours. To ride, or to get on horseback. To ride. I ride on horseback every day. I ride to the village on horseback. To get into the carriage. To alight from a carriage. To dismount. To go or to come up the river. II est monte a sa chambre. Elle est descendue. II a monte pendant trois heures. Monter a cheval. Aller a cheval. Je monte a cheval tous les jours. Je vais au village a cheval. Monter en voiture. Descendre de voiture. Descendre de cheval. Remonter la riviere. 182. To make haste. Make haste to finish your work. Will he never make haste ? To hurry ; to urge. To hurry, to hasten. To be in a hurry. They hurry him to start. He is not in a hurry to pay. I am in a hurry to get home. Hasten to follow me. He is wrong not to hurry. Be depecher (de). Depechez-vous de finir votre travail. Ne se depechera-t-il jamais? Presser (de). Se presser (de). Se hdter (de). Etre press e. On le presse de partir. II ne se presse pas de payer. Je suis presse d'arriver chez moi. Hatez-vous de me suivre. II a tort de ne pas se presser.* Rem. — After apres, the English present or compound partici- ple must be rendered by the past tense of the infinitive ; as, He burned the letter after reading II a brule la lettre apres Favoir it. lue. After warming himself, he went Apres s'etre chauffe, il sen est away. alle. VOCABULAIRE 46. The top. Le haut. The mountain. The lower part, the foot. Le bas. The hill. The bottom. Le fond. The valley. The turf. Le gazon. The grass. The well. Le puits. The spring. The stairs. L'escalier. The cottage. The seat. Le siege. The shade. La montagne. La colline. La vallee. L'herbe. La source. La chaumiere. L'ombre. * "When the verb is in the infinitive, pae or jm in t i.s boiler placed before than after it. QUARANTE-SIXIEME LE^ON. 1*73 To sit down. S'asseoir. To go away. S'en aller. To be sitting. Etre assis. To be in a hurry. Etre presse. To hurry; to urge. Presser (de). To hurry. Se presser (de). To make haste. Se depecher (de). To hasten. Se hater (de). To mount. l Monter . To go down. ) Descendre . To climb. ) To come down. ) To go or come ) Remonter . To refuse. I Refuser (de). up again. ) To decline. ) Up stairs, above. En haut. Down stairs, below. En bas. Exercice 46. 1. Prenez un siege et asseyez-vous pres du feu. 2. Merci; je n'ai pas froid; je m'assierai ici. 3. Ou cet enfant s'assied-il? 4. II s'assied a cote de sa mere. 5. Vous &tes-vous assis sur l'herbe ? 6. Nous nous sommes assis sur le gazon. 7. Ou nous assierons-nous? 8. Nous nous assierons ici a l'ombre. 9. Ou votre sceur est-elle assise ? 10. Ma mere et ma sceur sont assises devant la porte de la chaumiere. 11. JSTe voulez-vous pas vous asseoir? 12. Je n'ai pas le temps de m'asseoir; je dois m'en aller. 13. Vous en allez-vous deja? 14. Je m'en vais; je suis presse d'arriver chez moi. 15. Votre frere s'en va-t-il aussi? 16. Nous nous en allons ensemble. 17. Votre voisin s'en est-il deja alle ? 18. Mon voisin et ma voisine s'en sont alles ; tout le monde s'en va. 19. Alors je m'en irai aussi. 20. Nous nous en irons ensemble. 21. Aimez-vous a monter a cheval? 22. Oui, M. ; je monte a cheval tous les jours. 23. De quel cote allez-vous vous promener ? 24. Je me promene souvent dans le fond de cette vallee, et je monte et descends ces collines. 25. Avez-vous jamais monte cette montagne? 26. Je l'ai montee l'autre jour jusqu'au haut. 27. Votre sceur est-elle montee a sa chambre? 28. Elle a monte l'escalier, il n'y a pas dix minutes. 29. Votre mere est-elle encore en haut ? 30. Elle est descendue; je crois qu'elle est en bas dans la cuisine. 31. Le macon est-il descendu dans le puits? 32. II est deja remonte. 33. Pour- quoi etes-vous descendu de cheval ? 34. Je suis descendu pour boire ; il y a une belle source ici au bas de la montagne. 35. Depechez-vous de remonter, je vous en prie. 36. Je me dep6- 174 QUARANTE-SIXIEME LE£0N. cherai; mais continuez votre chemin, je vous suivrai. 37. Votre cousin a-t-il refuse de vous rendre ce service? 38. II n'a pas re- fuse, mais il ne se presse pas de le faire. 39. N'ai-je pas eu rai- son de ne pas compter sur lui ? 40. Vous avez eu raison, et j'ai eu tort de ne pas vous croire. 41. Qu'avez-vous fait de la lettre apres l'avoir lue ? 42. Apres l'avoir lue, j'y ai repondu, et en- suite je l'ai brulee. 43. Qu' a-t-il fait apres s'etre habille ? 44. II est venu se chauffer ; et apres s'etre chaufTe, il est sorti. Theme 46. 1. "Where do you sit down? 2. I sit down on the turf in (a) the shade of these trees. 3. Sit down on the grass beside me. 4. We have no time to sit down ; we are in a hurry to get home. 5. Give a seat to (that) gentleman. 6. Pray, be seated. 7. Where has your sister sat down ? 8. She has sat down by (a) the door of the cottage. 9. WTiy do you rise? 10. I rise be- cause I wish to go away. 11. Do you go away already? 12. I go away because I do not enjoy myself here. 13. If you go away, I shall go away with you. 14. Have the ladies gone away? 15. No, sir; they are sitting behind the cottage. 16. Our cottage stands at the foot of the mountain. 17. When we are sitting before our door, we hear the murmur (le bruit) of a spring of pure water (pure), that comes out of the rocks (des ro- chers). 18. Do you often ride on horseback ? 19. Yes; almost every day. I usually ride (se promener) as far as yonder hills (que vous voyez la-bas), and (I) return through the bottom of the vale. 20. Where are the men that came down the river this morning? 21. They are on the top of the mountain. 22. Has the mason gone down into the well? 23. He has come up again. 24. Has your sister come down stairs? 25. She has gone up to her room to dress. 26. Pray, tell her to make haste. 27. Is your mother down stairs? 28. No, sir; she is up stairs. 29. Will your brother make haste to finish his work? 30. He is wrong not to hurry; he will keep us waiting. 31. If you hurry him, he will refuse to go with us. 32. You are wrong not to come with us. 33. I will follow you. 34. Hasten then QUARANTE-SEPTIEME LEQW. 175 to follow us. 35. We are ready to start; will you get into the carriage? 36. Why do you dismount? 37. I have forgotten something. 38. The ladies will alight at the corner of the square. 39. After having finished his work, he went to dress himself. 40. After dressing, he sat down by the (au coin du) fire and fell asleep (et s'est endormi). 47. QUABANTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. 183t Verbs expressing the state of the weather or atmosphere, are impersonal ; as, To snow. It snows. Neiger, 11 neige. TohaiL It hails. Greler. 11 grele. To freeze. It freezes. Geler. 11 gele. To thaw. It thaws. Degeler. 11 degele. To thunder. It thunders. Tonner. 11 tonne. Eem. — All verbs that are essentially impersonal, take the aux- iliary avoir in the compound tenses ; as, It has snowed, hailed, son. Laisser tombed. Avez-vous laisse tomber quelque chose £ ParaUre, {l&l, a.) p. p. parui La lune a pam. Oouvrir, ($5, a.) p.p. convert. Les rues sont eouvertes de glace^ II fait glissant. 186. The past participle of impersonal verbs is invariable.. The rain which has fallen. Lea pluies qu'il y a eu... So is tbe past participle of th@ verb fawe, when it precedes the infinitive. The shoes which I have had made. To hurt one's self. They hurt themselves* Les souliers que y&ifait faire. $e faire mat. Us se sont fait raaL VOCABULAIRE 47. The cloud. Le nuage,- The shower. i L'ondee~ \ L'averse. The storm. L'orage., The thunder. Le tonnerre; The lightning. l ISMair. The thunderbolt. £ La foudres. The flash. The lightning. The clap of thun- der. } Lecoupdeton- ) nerre. The haiL La grele-. The fog. Le brouillard. The mud. La boue. The sleigh. Le traineauf The snow. La neige; * Luire i's conjugated like conduire, except the past participle. t Aller en Zraineau r se promener en tratneau T to go sleigh-ddim*,. QCARA^^E-SEPTI£lIE LEfOS. 17? To snow. Neiger. To freeze. Geler. To thunder. Tonner. To roar; to scold. Gronder. To appear. Paraitre. To falL Tomber. Clear, light. Clair. Cloudy, overcast. Couvert, Very hard, (of rain.) A verse. Agreeable, pleasant Agreable. To hail. To thaw. To lightea To shine. To cover. To let fall, to drop. Dark. Slippery. Hard ; very much. Disagreeable. ) Unpleasant. ) Greler. Degeler. Faire des eclairs. Luire. Couvrir. Laisser tomber. Obscur. Glissant. Fort, Desagreable, Exercice 47. 1. Neige-t-il ce matin ? 2. Non, M. ; il grele. 3. A-t-il gele la nuit passee ? 4. II a gele pendant la nuit, mais il degele a present. 5. Est-ce un conp de tonnerre que j'entends ? 6. Oui, M. ; le tonnerre gronde et il pleut a verse. 7. A-t-il plu ici hier ? 8. Hier, il a fait beau temps ici. 9. Fait-il deja jour? 10. Le jour commence a. paraitre. 11. Fait-il du brouillard ce matin? 12. Non, M. : il fait clair, il a gele. 13. Fait-il du soleil ? 14. E ne fait pas de soleil; le temps est couvert. 15. Quel temps a-t-il fait pendant la nuit? 16. II a fait de Forage; et quel orage! 17. A-t-il fait des eclairs? 18, II a fait des eclairs et du tonnerre toute la nuit, 19. Fait-il du vent? 20. II fait grand vent ce matin. 21. Fait-il de la poussiere? 22. H ne fait pas de poussiere; il fait de la boue. 23. Fera-t-il clair de lune ce soir ? 24. II fera clair de lune ; la lune se levera a huit heures. 25. Est-ce que la lune a deja para 2 26. Oui, M.; mais elle est derriere un nuage a present. 27. Xe fait-il pas obscur ? 28. II fait obscur a present, mais il fera clair quand la lune pa- raitra. 29. Ne fait-il pas agreable ici au clair de la lune ? 30. II fait trop frais {too chilly) ; je vais rentier. 31. Est-il tonibe de la neige la nuit passee \ 32. II a neige et gele; il fait un temps tres-desagreable ce matin. 33. Fait-il bon marcher? 34. II fait glissant; les rues sont couvertes de glace. 35. Etes-vous tombe? 36. Je suis tonibe au coin de la rue. 37. Vous etes- vous fait mal? 38. Je me suis fait mal au bras, mais ce n'est pas grand'chose. 39. N'ainiez-vous pas a voir les rues couvertes 8* 178 QUARANTE-SEPTllJME LEgON. de neige ? 40. Oui, M. ; nous irons nous promener en tralneau. 41. Ne faudra-t-il pas faire couvrir nos plantes ? 42. Nous les avons deja fait couvrir. 43. Avez-vous laisse toruber quelque chose. 44. J'ai laisse tomber mon gant. 45. Votre cousin est- il tombe ? 46. II est tombe sur la glace, mais il ne s'est pas fait mal. Theme 47. 1. Does it freeze ? 2. It froze this morning, but I believe it thaws now. 3. Does the sun shine? 4. The sun does not shine. 5. Is it foggy ? 6. It is not foggy, it is cloudy. 7. Is it windy ? 8. It is very [grand) windy and very (beaucoup) dusty. 9. Did it snow last night? 10. It hailed and snowed all night, and it snows yet. 11. Is it bad walking? 12. It is very bad walking; the side-walks (les trottoirs) are covered with snow. 13. I like to see the snow, for I like sleigh-riding (aller en trai- neau), especially in the evening, when the moon shines. 14. We shall take a drive (se promener en traineau) to-night, when the moon has risen. 15. We must make haste to finish our business before evening. 16. Have you been out this morning? It is very slippery; I fell at the corner of the street. 17. Did you hurt yourself? 18. I did not hurt myself, but I lost my penknife ; I dropped it, and (I) could not find (retrouver) it in the snow. 19. Did you hear that clap of thunder? 20. It lightens at every instant ; the thunder does not cease roaring, and it rains very hard. 21. What a shower ! what a storm ! 22/ Did it lighten during the night? 23. It did (Oui, M)\ the thunder roared all night ; the storm ceased when daylight began to appear. 24. It is said that the lightning has struck a house. 25. Where is the moon? 26. It is behind a cloud ; it will appear presently. 27. What a beautiful moonlight ! 28. Is it not pleasant here in the light of the moon? 29. Yes, but it is rather chilly in (a) the air ; I am going into the house. 30. Have you had your plants covered? 31. We have none that (en) are worth the trouble. 32. What is the matter with those children ? 33. They fell on the ice, but they did not hurt them- QTJARANTE-HUITIEME LE£0Sr. 179 selves. 34. Is it good travelling now? 35. No, sir; it is mud- dy everywhere ; the rain (pi.) we have had lately, has spoiled the roads. 48. QUARANTJ^HUITTEME LEgON. 187» To happen. A great misfortune has happened. What has happened to y our friend ? He has met with a great misfor- tune. It happened at the depot of the railroad. To suit. Does that cloth suit you ? Those gloves did not suit my sister. Does it suit you to do that! It does not suit me. Arriver, IL est arrive un grand malheur. Qu'est-il arrive a votre ami ? II lui est arrive un grand malheur. Cela est arrive au depot du chemin de fer. Oonvenir. Ce drap vous convient-il ? Ces gants n'ont pas convenu a ma soeur. Vous convient-il de faire cela? Cela ne me convient pas. Rem. — It is expressed by cela, when it refers to a preceding sentence, and by il, when it has no antecedent ; the verb being then used impersonally. To become. Seoir. {irr. defective verb.) That becomes you wonderfully Cela vous sied a merveille. well. Light colors do not become my sis- Les couleurs claires ne sieent pas a. ter. ma soeur. It does not become you to do that. II ne vous sied pas de faire cela. 188» To jit, to sit well. That coat fits you. How does that hat fit my brother ? It fits him very well. Those boots do not fit me. To squeeze ; to press. To be too tight ; to hurt. They pinch my feet. Alter bien. Cet habit vous va bien. Comment ce chapeau va-t-il a mon frere? II lui va tres-bien. Ces bottes ne me vont pas biea Serrer. Gener. Elles me serrent les pieds. 180 QUARANTE-HUITlfMB LEgOX This coat hurts me tinder the arm. I see what is the matter with it. To fail ; to miss; to he wanting. Bo not fail to come, I shall not fail. I missed the train; Cet habit me gene sons le hnss* Je vois ce qui y manque. Manquer (de). Ne manquez pas de venir, Je n'y manqiserai pas. J'ai manque le convoi. 189. To PLEASEr To have pleased. I please* We please. Are you pleased with this book 1 I am much pleased with it. It does not please me to see him here. You are pleased to say so. (Yon joke.) What is your pleasure? What do you say ? Do as you please. To delight in } to he pleased, to like. How are you pleased here ? I am very well pleased here. My sister does not like to be here, Plaire a gqn. irr. Avoir plu. Je plais. Nous plaisons* Ce livre vous plait-iL II me plait beaueoup. II ne me plait pas de le voir ieL Cela vous plait a dire. Que vous plait-il ? Plait-ill Faites comme il vous plairav Be plaire (a). Comment vous plaisez-vous ici Je m'y plais beaucoup. Ma soeur ne se plait pas ick YOCAMJLAIRE 48". The climate. Le clsmat. The color. La couleuT; The charm. The attraction. i Le charme. The beauty. La beaute. The perfume. The fragrance. y Le parfum. The odor, the smell. L'odeur. The singing. Le chant. Nature. La nature. The partner. L'associe\ Society. La societe. The hair-dresser. Le coiffeur. « The head-dress. La coiffure. To happen. To become. To press, to squeeze. To hurt. To please. Wonderfully well. Arriver. Seoir. Serrer. Gener. Plaire. A merveille. To suit ; to become. Convenir. Dark, deep, (of colors.) Fonce. To fit. To fail ; to miss. To be pleased. Charming. Light. Aller bien. Manquer (de). Se plaire. Charmant. Clair. QtTARANTE-HUITIEME LE£ON. 181 Exekcice 48. 1. Est-il arrive quelque chose a votre ami? 2. H lid est ar- rive un malheur. 3. Que lui est-il arrive ? 4. II est tombe de cheval, et s'est casse le bras. 5. Quand cela est-il arrive ? 6. Cela est arrive ce matin. 7. Ce cheval convient-il a votre asso- cie ? 8. II ne lui convient pas ; il est trop jeune. 9. Ces rubans ont-ils couvenu a vos sceurs? 10. Non, M. ; ils ne leur ont pas convenu; cette couleur ne leur plait pas. 11. Leur conviendra- t-il d'attendre quelques jours ; nous en aurons d'autres dans le courant (in the course) de la semaine? 12. Cela ne leur con- viendra pas; il leur en faut aujourd r hui. 13. Cette coiffure convient-elle a ma tante? 14. Cela lui sied a merveille ; c'est charmant. 15. Ces couleurs foncees me conviennent-elles? 16. Les couleurs foncees ne vous sieent guere. 17. Avez-vous es- say e votre gilet ? 18. Je l'ai essaye ; il me va bien. 19. Inha- bit va-t-il bien a votre frere ? 20. II vous le dira ; le voici. 21. Votre habit vous va-t-il bien, monsieur ? 22. Pas tout-a-fait ; il me gene un peu sous le bras. 23. Tenez, il me serre trop ici; le voyez-vous? 24. Je vois bien ce qui y manque. 25. Je ne sais pas trop si je le garderai ou non. 26. Comme il vous plaira; s'il ne vous convient pas, je vous en ferai un autre. 27. Com- ment votre coiffure vous plait-elle, madame? 28. Elle me plait assez bien. 29. Le coiffeur est-il parti ? 30. H vient de s'en aller. 31. Sied-il a votre frere de s'amuser avec des riens, au lieu de faire son ouvrage? 32. En verite, cela ne lui sied guere. 33. Plaira-t-il a votre pere de le voir s'amuser comme cela? 34. Cela ne lui plaira guere. 35. Vous plaisez-vous dans ce pays-ci? 36. Je m'y plais assez bien. -37. Le climat vous convient-il? 38. II ne me convient pas beaucoup. 39. Aimez-vous le parfum de ces fleurs ? 40. Oui, M. ; c'est une odeur qui me plait beau- coup. 41. Comment vous plaisez-vous a la campagnc ? 42. Je m'y plais beaucoup; la campagne a toujours eu des charmes pour moi ; j'admire les beautes de la nature. 43. Avez-vous ici tout ce qu'il vous faut ? 44. Oui, M. ; il ne nous manque rien ici que la societe de nos amis. 182 QTTARANTE-HUITIEME LEgON". Theme 48. 1. "What has happened to you? 2. Nothing has happened to me. 3. Has anything happened to your friend? 4. He has met with a great misfortune. 5. Where did it happen ? 6. It happened at the depot of the railroad. 7. Does this coat suit you? 8. It does not. 9. Does that color not please you? 10. The color pleases me well enough, but the coat does not fit me. 11. Does it hurt you ? 12. It does not hurt me ; it is too wide. 13. Will it suit you to wait a few days, and we will make you one that will fit you well. 14. It will not suit me ; I want a coat before evening. 15. Did those shoes suit your brother? 16. They do not fit him; they pinch his feet. 17. Look how the hair-dresser has arranged my hair ; does it become me ? 18. It becomes you wonderfully well ; that style (cette coiffure) pleases me very much ; it is truly charming. 19. How do you like this ribbon ? 20. That color is too dark ; dark colors do not become you. 21. Does your coat fit you? 22. It pinches me under the arm. 23. I see what is the matter with it. 24. Does it please your father to see you idle ? 25. It does not please him ; he always says : " It does not [point) become a young man to trifle away his time''' (perdre son temps a des bagatelles). 26. Does your sister like the climate of this country? 27. Yes, sir; she is very much pleased here. 28. How do you like to be in the country? 29. I like very much to be here. 30. What pleases you so much here? 31. There are a thousand things here that please me : the beauty of this valley, the fragrance of the flowers, the singing of the birds, the society of my neighbors, in fine (enfin), the pleasures of a quiet life in the midst of the charms of nature. 32. You are not going to leave? 33. Yes, sir ; if I do not leave now, I shall miss the four o'clock train (le convoi de quatre heures). QUARANTE-NEUVIEME LECOT. 183 49. QUARANTE-NEUVIEME LEQON. 190. (a.) The preposition de precedes the infinitive, after ad- jectives expressive of our feelings, and generally, after those that are followed in English by of from, or with ; as, I am glad to hear it. Je suis bien aise de l'apprendre. I am sorry to hear it. Je suis fache de l'apprendre. I am sorry for it. J'en suis fache. I am sure of finding him. Je suis sur de le trouver. (6.) Many adjectives when construed with Hre, take de before the infinitive when etre is used as an impersonal, and a when it is used as a personal, verb ; as, It is difficult to please everybody. II est difficile de contenter tout le monde. That gentleman is hard to please. Ce monsieur est difficile a contenter. (c.) The preposition d precedes the infinitive, used in a passive sense ; as, It is a thing to be desired. C'est une chose a desirer. House for sale, to let. Maison a vendre, a louer. 191 • To be sorry for, or angry Mr e fache de qq. ch. about something. To be angry with somebody. Etre fache contre qqn. What are you vexed about ? De quoi etes-vous fache ? I am vexed that I did not go there. Je suis fache de n'avoir pas 6t6 la. Are you angry with me ? Etes-vous fache contre moi ? To make angry. To get angry. Fdcher. Sefacher (de). To offend. To take offence at. Offenser. S'offenser (de). Do not get angry. Ne vous fachez pas. I did not mean to offend you. Je n'ai pas voulu vous offenser. He took offence at that. II s'est offense de cela. 192» To change. Changer. The weather is going to change. Le temps va changer. To change ; to exchange for. Changer pour ou contre. Change this bill for gold. Changez ce billet pour de Tor. 184 quarante-neuvieme LEgou. Will you exchange your horse for Voulez-vous changer votre cheval mine. contre le mien. To change, (to leave one thing for Changer de. another.) To change one's coat, one's linen." Changer d'habit, de linge. To change houses. Changer de maison. To change or alter one's mind. Changer d'avis. 193« To shave. Raser. Se raser. To get shaved. Sefaire raser. To have one's hair cut. Se faire couper les cheveux. Have you had your hair cut ? Vous etes-vous fait couper les che- veux? I have. Je me les suis fait couper. He lives out of town. H demeure hors de la ville. It is pleasant out of doors. 11 fait bon dehors. He arrived towards evening. 11 est arrive vers le soir. He behaved well towards me. 11 s'est bien comporte envers moi. He stays here against his will. ' 11 reste ici contre son gre. The moon turns round the earth. La lune tourne autour de la terre. VOCABULAIRE 49. The opinion. > Uavis The advice. ) The opinion. L'opinion. The grocer. L'epicier. The shop. La boutique. The barber. Le barbier. The beard. La barbe. To satisfy* To please. To make angry. To offend. To change. To shave. Difficult. Sorry. Vexed; angry. Out of. y Contenter. Facher. Offenser. Changer. Raser. Difficile. Fache (de). Fache (contre). Hors de. To take recreation. Se recreer. Towards, (physi- > y cally.) \ VerS ' Against. Contre. To my (his) liking. A mon (son) gre\ To get angry. To take offence. To let ; to rent. To get shaved. Necessary. Glad, very glad. ] Without. ) Out of doors. ) Towards, (moral- ) ly.) J Round, around. Against my liking. Se facher (de). S'offenser (de). Louer. Se raser. Necessaire. Aise, bien aise. Charme. Dehors, (adv.) Envers. Autour de. Contre mon gre. quarante-neuvieme le£0n. 185 Exercice 49. 1. N'est-il pas difficile de contenter tout le monde? 2. C'est une chose tres-difficile a faire. 3. N'est-il pas neeessaire de se recreer aussi bien que de travailler ? 4. L'un et Pautre sont ne- cessaires a la saute. 5. Y a-t-il des chainbres a louer ici ? 6. Xon, M. ; elles sout toutes louees. 7. Etes-vous fache d'appren- dre cela? 8. J'en suis bien fache. 9. Etes-vous bieu aise de voir vos amis? 10. Je suis bieu aise de les voir. 11. Votre soeur sera-t-elle couteute d'appreudre que votre cousine va venir ? 12. Elle sera charrnee de Papprendre. 13. Ce monsieur est-il fache contre vous ? 14. S'il est fache contre moi^ je n ? en sais pas la raison. 15. Je crois qu'il s'est fache de ce que vous avez dit? 16. Je ue l'ai pas dit dans Pintention de Poffenser. 17, Cette dame s'est-elle offensee de cela? 18. H parait qu'elle s'^en est offensee. 19. N'etes-vous pas fache de Pavoir offensee? 20. J'en suis tres-fache. 21. Avez-vous ete dehors ce matin ? 22. J'ai ete chez Pepicier pour faire changer mon billet. 23. Que pensez-vous du temps? 24. Le temps va changer; le vent a tourne vers le nord. 25. Votre associe a-t-il change de maison? 26. II en a change ; il demeure a present hors de la ville. 27. Voulez-vous changer votre tableau contre mes gravures? 28. jSTon, M. ; j'aime mieux garder mon tableau. 29. Alors vous avez change d'avis, car vous in'avez offert de le faire hier? 30. Oui, j'ai change d'avis. 31. Voulez-vous changer de place avec moi? 32. Je veux bien, si cela vous fait plaisir. 33. Que pen- sez-vous de la conduite de ce jeune homme? 34. J*ai bonne opinion de lui; il se comporte bien en vers tout le monde. 35. Vous etes-vous rase ? 36. Je vais me raser tout-a-Pheure. 37. Ch anger ez-vous de gilet avant de sortir? 38. J'en changerai quand je me serai rase. 39. Ou vous etes-vous fait raser ? 40. Je me suis fait raser a la boutique du barbier. 41. Le barbier vous a-t-il rase a votre gre ? 42. Non, M. ; il m'a laisse plus de barbe d'un cote que de Pautre. 43. En combien de jours la lune tourne- t-elle autour de la terre ? 44. Vous me faites la une ques- tion a laquelle il n'est pas difficile de repondre ; mais comme la lune est couchee, et que j'ai bien envie de dormir, j'irai me coucher aussi, 186 QUARANTE-NEUVIEME LE^ON. Theme 49. 1. I am very glad to see you. 2. I am sorry to hear that you are going to leave. 3. It is truly impossible to satisfy every- body. 4. My aunt is very hard to please. 5. She gets angry at a trifle (d'un rien). 6. She appears not to understand that it is necessary to take recreation as well as to work. 7. Is that gentleman angry with you? 8. I believe he took offence at what I said. 9. I am sorry to have offended him. 10. He is a worthy man, who is very polite' towards everybody. 11. He appears to be easily offended (de peu de chose). 12. Is there a house to let in this street? 13. There are two for sale, but there is none to let. 14. What are you vexed about? 15. I am angry with my tailor, because he did not bring me my coat. 16. How is the weather out of doors? 17. It is unpleasant, but the wind has turned towards the north (le nord) ; I believe the weather is going to change. 18. I am glad of it. 19. Has the grocer changed the bill? 20. Yes, sir; and here is the change. 21. Will you exchange your saddle for mine? 22. No, sir ; mine is better than yours. 23. That is your opinion. 24. And yours, too, since (puisque) you wish (en) to exchange with me. 25. Are you going to move (change houses) on the first of May ? 26. Yes, we have taken (louer) sl house out of town ? 27. You have lived here a long time. 28. Yes; my mother likes to be in this house ; it is against her will that we leave it. 29. Is Mr. B.... going to change stores with you? 30. No, sir; he has changed his mind. 31. Are you going to change boots? 32. Yes; but I am going to shave first. 33. Have you been at the barber's shop ? 34. I have had my hair cut. 35. Did he cut it to your liking? 36. He cut it too short (court, adv.) CINQUANTIEME LE£ON. 187 50. CINQUAISTTIEME LEQON. 194* To become. To have become. What has become of that man ? I do not know what has become of him. What will become of yon ? What has become of those children ? To turn, to become. ) To happen, to take place. ) The eldest has turned lawyer. To succeed, to attain; to reach. Do you succeed in learning French ? I shall, by dint of studying. I have succeeded in it. Your letter reached me the day before I got back. To succeed. To have succeeded. Do you succeed in doing that? That did not succeed with him. The undertaking failed for want of money. Devenir. Etre devenu. Qu'est devemi cet homme? Je ne sais pas ce qu'il est devenu. Que deviendrez-vous ? Que sont devenus ces enfants ? Se /aire. L'aine s'est fait avocat. Parvenir a. Eire parvenu. Parvenez-vous a apprendre le fran- cais? J'y parviendrai a force d'etudier. J'y suis parvenu. Votre lettre m'est parvenue la veille de mon retour. Reussir (a). Avoir reussi. Reussissez-vous a faire cela? Cela ne lui a pas reussi. L'entreprise a manque faute d'ar- gent. 19«J* To agree. To have agreed. Do you agree to that ? I do. What have you agreed upon ? We have agreed about the price. To agree, to adjust a difference. To come to an agreement. Have you agreed with Mr. L ? We cannot come to an agreement. To consent. To have consented. Does he consent to do thai ? He consented to it cheerfully. Convenir (de). Etre convenu. Convenez-vous de cela? J'en conviens. De quoi etes-vous convenus ? Nous sommes convenus du prix. S'accorder. Tomber d* accord. Vous 6tes-vous accorde avec M. L....? Nous ne pouvons pas tomber d'ac- cord. Consentir (a). Avoir consenti. Consent-il a faire cela ? H y a consenti de bon cceur. 188 CINQUANTIEME LE£ON. 196i To undo. Undo this knot. This knot comes loose. To get rid of; to part with. To get rid of. Have you got rid of your damaged goods ? He does not intend to part with his horse. Can you not get rid of that man ? In spite of The marriage will take place in spite of him. From what is said. As it appears. The day before I started. The day after I arrived. What is your name ? Defaire. Defaites ce noeud. Ce noeud se defait. Se defaire (de). Se debarrasser (de). Vous etes-vous defait de vos mar- chandises avariees ? II n'a pas l'intention de se defaire de son cheval. Ne pouvez-vous pas vous debarras- ser de cet homme ? Malgre. Le mariage se fera Emigre" lui. A ce qu'on dit. A ce qui par ait. La veille de mon depart. Le lendemain de mon arrived. Comment vous appelez-vous? The name. The project. The marriage. The knot. VOCABULAIRE 50. Le nom. Le projet. Le mariage. Le noeud. The next day. Le lendemain. i La renommee. The fame. The name. The undertaking. L'entreprise. The widow. La veuve. The girdle. The belt. (• La ceinture. The day before. ) LaveiUe The eve. ) To become. Devenir. To succeed. To reach. To agree. To agree, to adjust ) s>accorder _ a diiierence. ) To undo. To turn. "\ To become. To happen. To take place. J [ Parvenir (a). To succeed. Convenir (de). To consent. To come to an i agreement. Defaire. To part with ' ' To get rid of. ! Se faire. Reussir (a). Consentir (a, de). Tomber d'aceord Se defaire. CINQUANTIISME LEgON. 189 To get rid of. Useful. Damaged. Cheerfully. By dint of. Se debarrasser. Utile. Avarie. De bon coeur. A force de. To hope. Useless. Married. In spite of. For want of. Esperer.* Inutile. Marie. Malgre. Faute de. Exercice 50. 1. Qu'est devenu votre ami, le peintre? 2. Je ne sais pas ce qu'il est devenu. 3. Que deviendra ce jeune homme s'il n'etu- die pas? 4. Je ne sais pas ce qu'il deviendra. 5. Que sont devenus les fils de votre voisin ? 6. L'aine s'est fait avocat, et l'autre etudie la medecine. 7. Parviendrons-nous jamais a sa- voir le latin? 8. Vous y parviendrez a force d'etudier. 9. Etes-vous parvenu a vous defaire de vos marchandises avariees ? 10. J'y suis parvenu. 11. Quand ma lettre vous est-elle par- venue ? 12. Elle m'est parvenue la veille de mon depart. 13. Quand votre associe est-il parti? 14. II est parti le lendemain de mon arrivee. 15. L'entreprise a-t-elle reussi? 16. Elle a manque faute d'argent. 17. Ce projet reussira-t-il a votre frere ? 18. II faut l'esperer. 19. Convenez-vous de ce que je vous ai dit? 20. Oui, M. ; j'en conviens. 21. Etes-vous convenus du prix ? 22. Nous en sommes convenus. 23. Vous etes-vous ac- corde avec votre cousin ? 24. Je me suis accorde avec lui. 25. Consent-il a faire ce que vous m'avez dit? 26. II y consent de bon coeur. 27. La belle veuve consent-elle a changer de nom? 28. Elle a consenti a devenir Madame B . . . . 29. Le pere a-t-il consenti aumariage? 30. II n'y consentira jamais, a ce qu'on dit. 31. Le mariage se fera-t-il? 32. II se fera malgre lui, a ce qui parait. 33. Pouvez-vous defaire ce nceud ? 34. Je ne sais pas, ce noeud ne se defait pas facilement. 35. Avez-vous l'intention de vous defaire de vos chevaux? 36. Je m'en suis deja defait. 37. Votre cousine ne peut-elle pas se debarasser de * The verbs esperer \ promettre and compter, carry with them an idea of futurity ; they should, therefore, not be followed by a verb in a present or past tense. I hope you are well, must not be translated by, fespere que vous vous portez Men. "We may say: J'aime a croire, je me plais d croire, or je me Jlatte que vous vous portez Men^ meaning : / like to think that, &c. It is also correct to say : Vous vous portez oien^ j espere. In which case a verb is understood after j'espere; as, j'espere Vappmedre. 190 CINQUANTIEME LECW. ce monsieur? 38. Elle se debarrassera bientot de lui. 39. Est- il marie? 40. ISTon, M. ; il est encore gar qon. 41. Est-il inutile, de savoir danser ? 42. Au contraire, c'est une chose tres-utile & savoir. 43. N'est-ce pas un grand avantage de jouir d'une bonne reputation? 44. Certainement ; Bonne renommee vaut mieux que ceinture doree* (A good name is better than wealth). Theme 50. 1. What has become of our friend, the jeweller? 2. He started for Europe the day before you arrived. 3. What will become of you, if you do not change your conduct ? 4. What has become of your nephews ? 5. The eldest has turned sol- dier, and the two others are at school. 6. Do you succeed in loosing that knot ? 7. I believe I shall, by dint of patience. 8. It is very difficult to undo. 9. Did you succeed in getting rid of your old carriage ? 10. I did; I sold it to my neighbor. 11. I sent you a letter the day after you started ; did it reach you ? 12. It reached me the day before I returned. 13. Did your friend succeed in his enterprise? 14. No, sir; all his projects have failed for want of money. 15. Will that undertaking suc- ceed with your brother? 16. I hope so. 17. What have you agreed upon? 18. We have agreed to wait. 19. Have you agreed about the price? 20. We have. 21. Has your uncle agreed with Mr. B. . . . ? 22. They have come to an agreement. 23. Mr. B. . . . consents to take the store at the price agreed upon (convenu). 24. Has your cousin consented to accompany you ? 25. He has, cheerfully. 26. Will Mr. S consent to the marriage of his son ? 27. It appears not (que non). 28. He will never consent to it, from what I hear. 29. The mar- riage will take place in spite of him. 30. Marriages that are made against the will of the parents, are seldom happy. 31. Does your father-in-law intend to part with his carriage? 32. He spoke about it, but he will not do it, for my mother-in-law will not consent to it. 33. Can you not get rid of that man ? * Bore, gilt. CINQUANTE ET UNIEME LEC^ON. 191 34. I do not wish to offend him ; he will soon go away. 35. I have got rid of my damaged sugar, and I am glad of it. 36. Is your aunt married? Si. She is a widow. 38. Is it useless to study Latin? 39. On the contrary, it is very useful, but it is a difficult language to learn. 40. "What is your friend's name 2 41. His name is James (Jacques). 51. CINQUANTE ET UNIEME LEgON. Imperfect Tense. — Indicative. 197 • The imperfect is formed by changing ons, of the first person plural of the indicative present, into ais, ais, ait, ions, iez, aient. Thus : Allons. Finissons. ,h Recevons. h-i Vendons. ^ ^ i— * J'allais, m Jefinissais, g Je recevais, g Je vendais, ^ Tu allais, $ Tufinissais, g> Tu recevais, g Tu vendais^ S 11 allait, (n llfnissait, s; 11 recevait, ® Ilvendait, © Nous allions, §• Nous fnissions, g* Nous recevions, §■ iVbws vendions, & Vous alliez, ^ Vous fnissiez, ^ Fbws receviez, ^ Vous vendiez, ~ q lis allaient, §T lis faiissaient, p 7• Cueillir, irr. Se battre. Pleurer. Mordre. Faire des emplettes» CINQUANTE-DEUXIEME LEfON. 19? To do one's best, i Faire tout son ^^ Oo0ter ( possible. Possible. Possible. Impossible. Impossible. Wise. Sage. Learned. Savant. Exercice 52. 1. Est-il possible de faire des progres dans les sciences sans etudier ? 2. II est impossible de faire des progres sans se don- ner de la peine. 3. Que deviendrez-vous si vous n'acquerez point les connaissances necessaires pour gagner votre vie ? 4. Je ferai tout mon possible pour les acquerir. 5. La science s'ac- quiert-elle sans travailler ? 6. La science ne s'acquiert qu'a force de travail. 7. Les talents ne valent-ils pas mieux que les ri- chesses ? 8. Oui, M. ; les talents valent bien mieux que les ri- chesses, 9. Les biens de cette vie valent-ils la peine et les soucis (cares) qu'ils nous coutent? 10. lis ne les valent point, puis qu'ils ne nous rendent pas meilleurs. 11. La richesse nous rend- elle heureux? 12. Elle ne nous rend ni heureux ni sages. 13. Pourquoi cueillez-vous ces fleurs? 14. Je les cueille pour en faire des bouquets. 15. N'en avez-vous pas cueilli assez ? 16. J'en cueillerai encore quelques-unes. IV. Pourquoi battez-vous votre chien? 18. Je le bats parce qu'il aboyait. 19. Mord-il? 20. Non, M. ; chien qui aboie ne rnord pas. 21. N'a-t-il pas mordu ce petit qui pleure ? 22. II a aboye apres lui, mais il ne l'a pas mordu. 23. Qu'y avait-il la-bas? 24. II y avait des garcons qui se battaient. 25. Biez-vous de cela? 26. Je n'en ris pas. 27. De quoi riiez-vous? 28. Nous riions du raarche que je viens de faire. 29. Avez-vous fait des emplettes ? 30. J'ai fait emplette de quelques articles de toilette. 31. Montrez- moi les articles que vous venez d'acheter. 32. Les voici : un lavabo d'acajou, une cuvette de porcelaine, un peigne d'ecaille et une brosse pour les cheveux. 33. Combien tout cela vous coute- t-il ? 34. Cela me coute vingt dollars, argent comptant; pas davantage. 35. Avec de l'argent comptant on achete a bon marche. 36. Voila pourquoi je n'achete jamais a credit. 37. Avez-vous beaucoup de savon? 38. J'en ai plus qu'il ne m'en 198 CINQUANTE-DEUXIEME LE^ON. faut. 39. Fait-il aussi froid aujourd'hui qu'il a fait hier? 40. II fait moins froid aujourd'hui qu'il n'a fait hier. 41. Ce mon- sieur-la est-il aussi savant qu'il le parait ? 42. II est plus savant qu'il ne le parait. 43. Ce jeune homme ne lit-il, ni n'ecrit-il ? 44. II ne lit, ni n'ecrit, ni n'etudie ; il est la a ne rien faire. Theme 52. 1. It is possible to acquire wealth without much trouble (sans se donner beaucoup de peine), 2. But it is impossible to make much (grands) progress in the sciences, and to become learned, without much labor (sans travailler beaucoup). 3. Many men spend their lives (116, a) in acquiring wealth, and die without having enjoyed it. 4. The wealth (Les biens) those men have acquired, will not make them happy, because they do not possess (have) the knowledge (pi.) necessary to make life useful and agreeable. 5. I will do my best to succeed in my studies, and to become (pour me rendre) useful in the world. 6. What were you doing when I called you ? 7. I was gathering flowers. 8. Here are the flowers I have gathered. 9. We shall ga'ther flow- ers together, when we have finished our task. 10. Why were those children weeping? 11. They were afraid of the dog; he was barking. 12. Does he bite? 13. He never bit anybody; he only barks. 14. I have beaten him, and I shall beat him again (encore), if he does not stop doing it. 15. What were you laughing at? 16. We were laughing at what your brother was telling us. 17. We have laughed at it, and you will laugh at it too. 18. He has purchased several things this morning. 19. What has he purchased ? 20. A toilet-table, two brushes, a tor- toise-shell comb, and several other articles. 21. What do those things cost him ? 22. The whole (Le tout) together costs him only twenty-five dollars. 23. That is not much for so many articles, but it is still too dear, when one does not want them. 24. That is the reason why I say (that) one is wrong to buy a thing which one does not need. 25. I wish to wash my hands ; have you any soap? 26. There is some on the wash-stand, beside the wash-basin. 27. Do you spend more money than you earn? CINQUANTE-TROISIEME LEgON* 199 28, I spend less money than I earn. 29. My friend, the painter, has more talent than people think. 30. He is not less wise than he appears. 31. You speak differently now from what you did when you came here. 32. America is quite different now from what it was twenty-five years ago. 33. Does your brother laugh or weep ? 34. He neither laughs nor weeps ; he is doing noth- ing at all. 35. Is he right to do nothing? 36. He is wrong, and you are wrong too in not studying your lesson. 53. CINQUANTE-TROISIEME LEQOK Pluperfect Tense. 202# The pluperfect is the compound tense that corresponds with the imperfect ; as, I had spoken, (fee. I had come, (fee. I had dressed, (fee. I had just dined. ■ I had just done. I thought you had started. J'avais parle, S instruire. lo miorm. ) mind. > To name ; to appoint. Konimer. To be appointed. Etre nomme. No, no one. Aucun. ISTo, no one. Eul, nulle. Such. Tel, telle; si. Others. Autrui. Perfect. Parfait. Perfectly. Parfaitement. Directly. Directement. Absolutely, Absolument. Exercice 53. 1. Aviez-vous ecrit a M. B. . . ., quand je vous ai envoy e* ce billet? 2. Oui, M. ; et je venais de recevoir sa reponse quand votre billet m'est parvenu. 3. Le medecin avait-il dine quand vous y etes alle ? 4. II en venait. 5. Etiez-vous sorti quand le commis est venu ? 6. J'etais alle chez mon voisin. *7. Je le croyais parti pour Boston ; n'y est-il pas alle ? 8. II n'etait pas parti alors, mais il devait partir dans le courant de la journee. 9. Vous etiez-vous endormi quand je suis entre? 10. Oui, M. ; je m'etais assis au coin du feu, et je m'etais endormi. 11. Yous ai-je eveille ? 12. Je n'en suis pas fache ; il etait temps de m'e- veiller. 13. Ces enfants dorment-ils ? 14. lis se sont endormis ; il faudra les eveiller dans une heure. 15. Vous etes-vous eveille de bonne heure ce matin ? 16. Non, M. ; le soleil s'etait deja leve quand je me suis eveille. 17. Votre frere s'appliquait-il a. Petude lorsqu'il etait a l'ecole? 18. II s'y appliquait avec ar- deur; il a toujours aime a s'instruire. 19. Yous attendiez-vous a le voir nommer secretaire d'ambassade ? 20. Je m'y attendais, parce qu'on lui avait promis cette charge. 21. A qui s'etait-il adresse pour Pavoir? 22. II s'etait adresse directement au Pre- sident. 23. S'est-il applique a Petude des langues modernes? 24. II s'est applique a l'etude de la langue francaise pendant plusieurs annees, et je crois qu'il en a une connaissance parfaite. 25. J'espere qu'il nous ecrira souvent quand il sera a Paris. 26. II a promis de nous instruire de tout ce qui s'y passera. 27. Est- il necessaire de savoir le francais pour &tre nomme secretaire de legation ? 28. On m'a dit qu'il est absolument necessaire de le savoir. 29. Yotre mere doit avoir ete contente d'apprendre 9* 202 CINQUANTE-TROISlfcME LE£ON. cette nouvelle. 30. Elle l'a apprise avec plaisir, mais nulle chose ne peut lui faire oublier la perte de ma sceur, qui est morte si re- cemment. 31. Nul n'est parfaitement heureux ici-bas, mais le sage se contente de son sort tel qu'il est. 32. Nul n'est sage alors, puisque nul n'est content de sa fortune. 33. Mais vous croyez qu'il y a des gens qui sont contents de leur esprit, n'est-ce pas ? 34. Je crois que le monde est rempli de telles gens. 35. Quel conseil donnerez-vous aux gens qui depensent plus qu'ils ne gagnent ? 36. Je leur donnerai le conseil de mesurer leurs de- penses a leurs revenus, sans cela ils seront obliges de vivre aux depens d'autrui. 37. Ne connaissez-vous aucune de ces person- nes? 38. Je n'en connais aucune. Theme 53. 1. Had your brother paid the tailor when you saw him? 2. He had not ; he had not money enough to pay his expenses {sing.) at the hotel. 3. He expected every day (de jour en jour) to receive his income, (pi.) 4. He had written to his agent (homme d'affaires), but (he) had received no answer when I left. 5. Had you taken supper when I arrived ? 6. We had just fin- ished. 7. Are the children in bed (couches) ? 8. They are ( Oui, M.) ; I was in their room to see if they were still awake (eveilles), but they had fallen asleep. 9. I did not wake them, for they were very tired when they went to bed. 10. Did you rise early? 11. I rose as soon I awoke ; the sun had just risen. 12. Charles had risen before I (rose). 13. He always awakes early. 14. When he is up (leve), he wakes up the whole house. 15. The son of Mr, B. . . . has been appointed secretary of lega- tion at Paris. 16. He is a young man of talent ; when he was at school, he applied himself zealously (avec zele) to study. 17. No other scholar (Sieve) showed such earnest application to labor (ardeur pour le travail). 18. No one else (autre) showed such a great desire (desir) to improve his mind. 19. Have you any (quelque) knowledge of the French language ? 20. I have not (no knowledge of it), and I am sorry for it. 21. I applied for* * To apply for, demander. CINQUANTE-QUATRIEME LE£0N. 203 the office (la charge) of secretary of legation at Rome, and (I) was told that a (la) knowledge of the French language is abso- lutely necessary in order to be appointed to that office. 22. To whom did you apply ? 23. I applied directly to the President, 24. We have applied to our friends to know the news, and they will inform us with pleasure of every thing that is going on. 25. There are people who always speak of the business of others, and neglect their own. 26. Such people deserve our contempt. 27. Those old people are very unfortunate ; the conduct of their children has caused the loss of their fortune. 28. They are obliged, in their old age, to live at the expense of others. 29. Learn to be satisfied with your lot, such as it is ; no one is per- fectly happy, for perfect happiness does not exist on earth. 30. Take that letter yourself (yous-meme) to that lady ; you will be pleased to make her acquaintance (sa connaissance) ; she is such a charming person. 31. You give me (un) good advice ; I shall follow it 54. CINQUANTE-QUATRIEME LEgON. Conditional Mood. 205. The conditional has two tenses : the present and the past. (a.) The conditional Resent is obtained by adding the termi- nations of the imperfect, ais, ais, aitj ions, iez, aient, to the root of the future. Thus : tPlRAI. Je finirai. w Je recevrai. £ Je vendrai. JHrais, t-H Je finirais, g* Je recevrais, § Je vendrais, £ Tu irais, g* Tu finirais, ~ Tu recevrais, £ Tu vendrais, © II irait, E U Jinirait, p> II recevrait, % 11 vendrait, £ Nous irions, ^ Nous Jinir ions, g- Nous recevrions, §• Nous vendrions, g Vous iriezy -° Vous Jlniriez, ^ Vous recevriez f ® Vous vendriez, & lis iraient, §f Us finiraient, p lis recevraient, p lis vendraient, © (b.) The past is formed of the present of the auxiliary and the past participle of the verb. 204 cxkquante-qttatriSme LugoN, I should have had, &e, J'aurais eu, &c. I should have come, I irr. (101, c.) l K } \ irr. (101, c.) SPermettre (de). irr. (101, (1) To prevent. To hinder. I Empecher (de). 206 To keep from. To be (in a place). Se trouver. To try. To endeavor. To assure. Undoubtedly. In time. Innocent. CINQUANTE-QUATRIEME LE£ON. S'empecher (de). To enrich one's self. S'enrichir. Torepairtogo(to) Serendre a place). ) To employ. Employer (a). I Tacher (de). Assurer. Sans doute. A temps. Innocent. To have occasion. Avoir lieu (de). Perhaps. Peut-etre. In preference, rather. De preference. Guilty, culpable. Coupable (de). Exercice 54. 1. Acheteriez-vous quelques-uns de ces tableaux, si vous aviez de l'argent? 2. J'en acheterais peut-etre deux ou trois. 3. Les- quels choisiriez-vous ? 4. Je choisirais ces deux-la. 5. Si j'en- voyais cette lettre a votre cousin, la recevrait-il a temps ? 6. Si vous la lui envoyiez ce matin, il la recevrait ce soir. 7. La lui enverriez-vous si vous etiez a ma place ? 8. Oui, si j'etais a votre place, je la lui enverrais. 9. Prendriez-vous une tasse de cafe, s'il y en avait? 10. Je prendrais de preference une tasse de chocolat. 11. Ces dames voudraient-elles accepter quelque chose? 12. Je crois qu'elles accepteraient avec plaisir une glace a la vanille. 13. JSPaurions-nous pas du plaisir, si nous faisions un voyage ensemble ? 14. Je crois bien que nous aurions du plaisir. 15. Ne ferions-nous pas un voyage, si nous en avions les moyens? 16. Je serais bien aise d'en faire un, si j'en avais les moyens. 17. N'en aurions-nous pas eu les moyens, si notre affaire avait reussi ? 18. Si nous avions reussi dans notre projet, je vous assure que nous en aurions bien eu les moyens. 19. Au- rions-nous lieu de nous plaindre de notre voisin, s'il s'etait trouve au rendez-vous ? 20. Nous n' aurions pas lieu de nous plaindre de lui, s'il s'y etait rendu a. l'heure convenue. 21. Y aurait-il lieu de craindre les hommes, s'ils craignaient Dieu ? 22. II n'y aurait pas lieu alors de les craindre. 23. Si vous aviez l'occasion de faire le tour de 1' Europe, la manqueriez-vous volontiers ? 24. Si j'avais cette occasion-la, je vous assure que je n'aimerais pas a la manquer. 25. Ces hommes n'emploieraient-ils pas tous les moyens possibles pour s'enrichir ? 26. Je crois qu'ils s'enrichi- CINQUANTE-QUATRIEME LE£ON. 207 raient volontiers aux depens de l'honneur et de leur conscience. 27. Leur permettriez-vous de s'enrichir a vos depens, si vous pouviez les en empecher? 28. Je tacherais bien de les en em- pecher, je vous assure. 29. Auriez-vous permis cela, si vous aviez pu l'empecher? 30. Je l'aurais ernpeche, si j'avais pu. 31. Votre frere viendrait-il, si les circonstances le iui permettaient ? 32. II viendrait, sans doute, si rien ne l'en empechait. 33. Se serait-il rendu au lieu convenu, si les circonstances le lui avaient permis ? 34. II s'y serait rendu, si cela lui avait ete possible. 35. Je voudrais bien savoir ce qui Pa ernpeche de venir? 36. Je voudrais bien le voir; il pourrait nous le dire. 37. Kiez-vous ou pleurez-vous des vices et des folies de ce monde ? 38. Je n'en ris ni n'en pleure, mais je ne saurais m'empecher de mepriser ceux qui courent a leur perte par le chemin des plaisirs. 39. N'admirez-vous point cette sage Providence qui garde l'innocent et perd le coupable? 40. Sans doute, je 1' admire, et je ne sau- rais m' empecher de radmirer. Theme 54. 1. Would you write to Henry, if you were in (a) my place ? 2. If I were in your place, I should. 3. If I sent him a letter this morning, would it reach him in time ? 4. He would receive it to-morrow morning, and (he would) have time to write before the departure of the steamer. 5. If you had money, would you employ it in buying books ? 6. I should spend (employ) it in making a tour through the United States (le tour des Etats- TJnis). 7. I should like to travel, but I cannot afford it. 8. I should have had the means, if I had succeeded in my underta- king. 9. If you had an (T) opportunity of seeing Rome, would you go? 10. I should be very sorry to miss the opportunity of seeing that city. 11. Should we be happier, if we had money? 12. We should perhaps be neither happier nor wiser. 13. W 7 ould you not like to be rich ? 14. Oh, yes (Sans doute) ; but I would not be willing to do any thing against my (V) honor to enrich myself. 15. If those men wanted to enrich themselves at our expense, should we not try to prevent their doing so (les 208 CINQUANTE-CINQUlfiME LE£ON. en)% 16. We should, undoubtedly. 17. Would those ladies accept a cup of coffee? 18. They would rather take a cup of tea. 1 9. Should we have complained of our friends, if they had been in time at the place of meeting? 20. We should have had no reason to complain of them. 21. Would they not have gone thither, if circumstances had allowed them? 22. They would, undoubtedly, if nothing had prevented them. 23. Would you fear men, if they feared God ? 24. There is no reason to fear him who fears the Lord (le Seigneur). 25. I wonder why your brother did not keep his word ? 26. I assure you that he would not have failed in it, if he could have done otherwise. 27. I should like to see him ; he would tell us the reason why (en). 28. I cannot help laughing when I see the follies of youth. 29. And I cannot help weeping, when I see innocent youth run to ruin (a sa perte) by the road of vice, (pi.) 55. CINQUANTE-CINQUIEME LEQON. 209. Ought* and might\ are sometimes to be rendered by the conditional of devoir and pouvoir ; as, He ought to do it. II devrait le faire. You ought to have told him of it. Vous auriez du le lui dire. He might perhaps do it. II pourrait bien le faire. He might have heard it. II aurait pu l'apprendre. 210« To give notice of. Avertir qqn. de qq. ch. To inform, to advise, to apprise of. j Informer (instruire) qqn. de qq. ch. To acquaint with. \Apprendre qq. ch. a qqn. Give him notice of the arrival of Avertissez-le de l'arrivee du bati- the vessel. ment. * Ought represents sometimes the present, and sometimes the imperfect; as, She acts as she ought, Elle fait ce qu'elle doit faire. She always behaved as she ought, Elle s'est toujours comportee comme elle devait. t The note on could, on p. 204, applies equally to might. CINQUANTE-CINQUIEME LE£OX. 209 Inform him of what is going on. I will tell you what has happened. To teach a person. To teach a person something. To teach a person how to do some- thing. He teaches the governor's children. He teaches them the languages. He teaches them to play on the flute. Informez-le de ce qui se passe. Je vous apprendrai ce qui est arrive. Enseigner qqn. (instruire qqn.) (Enseiqner ) ■, » \A PP rendre\ qq ' Ch ' aqqn ' \ Enseigner ). dfaire qq . cK (Apprendre) ** J H enseigne les enfants du gouver- neur. j II leur enseigne les langues. \ II leur donne des logons de langues, II leur apprend a jouer de la flute, 21 1 • To inquire about a person. To occupy one's self with. To take notice of, to observe. To rejoice at. To use, to make use of. To do without. Did you inquire about him ? Did you occupy yourself with that business ? Did you observe that ? Do you rejoice at his success ? Do you use that book ? What did you use to do that with ? Can you do without coffee ? I can do very well without it. I can do very well without him. S'informer de qqn. ISoccuper de. S'apercevoir de. Se rejouir de. Se servir de. Se passer de. Vous etes-vous informe de lui? Yous etes-vous occupe de cette af- faire ? Yous etes-vous apercu de cela ? Yous rejouissez-vous de son succes? Yous servez-vous de ce livre ? De quoi vous etes-vous servi pour faire cela? Pouvez-vous vous passer de cafe ? Je pui3 tres-bien m'en passer. Je me passerai bien de lui 212. To make use of to use. Do you use rice ? "We use a great deal of it To put back ; to put off. Put back that book in its place. / am in the habit of putting every thing in its place. Can you put that off till to-mor- row? Faire usage de. Faites-vous usage de riz ? Nous en faisons grand usage. Remettre. Remettez ce livre a sa place. J'ai V habitude de remettre chaque chose a sa place. Pouvez-vous remettre cela a de- main? 210 CINQUANTE-CINQUIEME LEQW. VOCABULAIRE 55. The use ; usage. The success. The motive. The tool. The rice. The honey. To give notice. To inform. To acquaint with. To inquire about. To take notice of. To perceive. To use. To make use of. To make use of. To use. L'usage. Le succes. Le motif. L'outil. Le riz. Le miel. ( Avertir. •J Informer. ( Apprendre. The habit. The error. The indifference. The hatchet. The axe. The nutmeg. The cinnamon. To teach. To instruct. To show how. To occupy one's self with. S'informer (de). J- S'apercevoir(de). To rejoice at. y Se servir de. To do without. iFaire usage de. To P ut back f s To put off. L'habitude. L'erreur. L'indifference. • La hache. La muscade. La cannelle. C Enseigner. •j Instruire. \ Apprendre. y S'occuper (de). Se rejouir (de). Se passer (de). I Remettre. Exercice 55. 1. Avez-vous averti ce monsieur de votre intention de partir? 2. Je Ten ai averti ce matin. 3. 1ST' auriez- vous pas du Ten aver- tir plus tot ? 4. Je Fen aurais averti plus tot, si je l'avais vu. 5. Votre pere est-il informe des choses qui se sont passe es ? 6. Je ne pense pas ; mais je lui apprendrai tout ce qui s'est passe quand je le verrai. 7. Yous etes-vous informe de la personne qui a enseigne les enfants du gouverneur? 8. J'ai oublie de m'en informer. 9. Votre frere ne voudrait-il pas s'informer du monsieur qui lui a enseigne l'allemand? 10. II pourrait s'in- former de lui aujourd'hui ; il en aura l'occasion. 11. N'auriez- vous pas pu vous informer de l'Allemand qui vous a appris a jouer de la flute? 12. Je me serais informe de lui, si. j'y avais pense. 13. Vous occuperez-vous de cela aujourd'hui, quand vous serez en ville? 14. Je m'en occuperai bien volon tiers, si mes affaires me le permettent. 15. Ce monsieur s'est-il apercu de son erreur? 16. II parait qu'il s'en est aperc,u. 17. Vous CINQUAXTE-CIXQUIEME LE£ON. 211 rejouissez-vous de notre succes? 18. ]STous nous en rejouissons. 19. Yotre mere s'est-elle rejouie dn retour de votre frere? 20. Elle s'en rejouira quand elle le verra. 21. Puis-je me servir de cet outil? 22. Servez-vous-en, je n'en ai pas besoin a present. 23. De quoi yous etes-vous servi pour couper ce bois ? 24. Je me suis servi de cette hache. 25. Ou est la plume dont vous vous etes servi pour ecrire ce billet? 26. Je n'ai pas eu de plume ; je me suis servi d'un crayon. 27. Yous etes-vous apercu de V indifference de ce monsieur ? 28. Je m'en suis bien apercu. 29. Quel peut etre le motif de sa conduite singuliere? 30. Je ne m'en informerai pas; nous nous passerons bien de lui. 31. Faites-vous usage de riz ? 32. ISTous en faisons grand usage. 33. Y mettez-vous de la muscade ? 34. Je ne fais pas usage de muscade, j'y mets de la cannelle et du sucre. 35. Faites-vous usage de beurre en ete ? 36. Xous nous en passons en ete ; et ail lieu de beurre, nous faisons usage de miel. 37. Avez-vous remis mes outils a leur place, apres vous en etre servi? 38. Oui, M. ; apres m'etre servi d'une chose, j'ai l'habitude de la remettre a sa place. 39. Si vous voulez, nous remettrons cette lecon a demain. 40. II n'y a pas lieu de la remettre a demain. Theme 55. 1. Ought you not to give notice to those people of your inten- tion? 2. I ought to have done so, but I have had no opportu- nity. 3-. I shall give them notice of it to-night. 4. I give you notice that I shall inform your father of every thing that has ta- ken place. 5. I have already informed him of it. 6. Undoubt- edly, you thought that he might hear it from somebody els± (d'un autre). 7. He might have heard it, and that would have been unpleasant for me (me). 8. What has become of the gov- erness (V institutrice) who taught your children ? 9. I inquired about her the other day, but could not learn what has become of her. 10. My brother would have inquired about the gentleman who taught him French, if you had spoken to him about it. 11. The gentleman who taught you to play on the base-viol, was here to-day, and inquired about you. 12. Has the lawyer oc- 212 CINQUANTE-SIXIEME LE£0N. cupied himself with our business? 13. He will do so as soon as he receives the papers (les pieces) he has sent for [fait de- mander). 14. Did you observe the indifference he showed about (pour) our success? 15. I did; I understand the motive of his conduct. 16. He is in the wrong (erreur); but he will soon perceive it. 17. "What do you rejoice at? 18. I rejoice at the news I have just heard. 19. You would rejoice at it, if I should apprise you of it. 20. We have been informed of our friend's success, and we rejoice at it very much. 21. Do you use that hatchet? 22. I shall not use it to-day. 23. Use it, if you want it ; I can do without it. 24. Where is the tool which you used to do this with ? 25. I put it back in its place, after having used it. 26. I am in the habit of putting back every thing in its place. 27. Do you use honey? 28. Yes, we use a great deal of it in summer, when we do with- out butter. 29. How do you like those rice-cakes ? 30. They are very good; they taste of nutmeg and cinnamon. 31. My friend would like to put that journey off another week (a la se- maine prochaine) ; would that suit you? 32. Do not put off till to-morrow, what you ought to do to-day. 33. You might have dispensed with (se passer) telling me that ; I knew it already. 56. CINQUANTE-SIXIEME LEgON. 213* To recollect To remember. Do you recollect that ? I do. I recollect that gentleman. I recollect having told him, Do you remember that ? I do. I remember having told him. Did you recollect those words ? We did. $ Se rappeler qq. ch. i Se souvenir de qq. ch. Vous rappelez-vous cela ? Je me le rappelle. Je me rappelle ce monsieur. Je me rappelle de lui avoir dit. Vous souvenez-vous de cela ? Je m'en souviens. Je me souviens de lui avoir dit. Vous etes-vous rappele ces mots ? Nous nous les sommes rappeles, CINQUANTE-SIXIEME LE^ON. 213 Did you remember those words? We did. To recollect a person. I do not recollect you. Vous etes-vous souvenus de ces mots? Nous nous en sommes souvenus. Remettre qqn. Je ne vous remets pas. 214. Among, amongst Between him and me, the difference of age is not great. I have no friend among them. Entre. Parrni. Entre lui et moi, la difference d'age n'est pas grande. Je n'ai aucun ami parmi eux. Rem. — Among, used distributi vely, is expressed by entre ; as, Partagez cela entre vous. Partager entre. Partager avec. Divide that among you. To divide among. To share with. Share that with your brothers. To split the difference. To deliver. Deliver this letter into his hands. Partagez cela avec vos freres. Partager le differend. Remettre. Remettez cette lettre entre mains. 215. To mix. To mix water with wine. Why do you mix among those peo- ple? To meddle with something. What are you meddling with? I meddle with my own business. To concern. I do not meddle with things that do not concern me. That concerns nobody. Is that any thing to you? Oh ! no, absolutely nothing. To have an appetite. To have a good memory. To have a good sight. To be short-sighted. To know a person by name, by sight. Meier. Se meler. Meier de l'eau avec du vin. Pourquoi vous melez-vous parmi ces gens ? Se meler de qq. ch. De quoi vous melez-vous ? Je me mele de mes propres affaires. Regarder qqn. Concerner qqn. Je ne me mele pas de ce qui ne me regarde pas. Cela ne regarde personne. Cela vousfait-il quelque chose? Du tout; cela ne me fait absolu- ment rien. Avoir appetit, or de l'appetit. Avoir bonne memoire, la memoire bonne. Avoir bonne vue, la vue bonne. Avoir la vue courte. Connaitre qqn. de nom y de vue. 214 CINQUANTE-SIXIEME LE£0K. The event. The difference. The dispute. The place, The spot. The appetite. The remembrance. The recollection. The bill. The account. To recollect. To remember. VOCABULAIRE 56. L'evenement. The conversation. La conversation. The difference. La difference. !• Le differend. [■ L'endroit. L'appetit. [ Le souvenir. - Le memoire. The part. The share. The digestion. The sight. The memory. The recollection. j- La part. La digestion. La vue. > La memoire. To mix. j Se rappeler. ( Se souvenir, j Meier. ( Se meler. To concern. To meddle with. Se meler de. ( Regarder. ( Concerner. To share ; to divide. Partager. Between, among. Equal. Entre. £gal. To notice. To observe. Among. Equally. >• Remarquer. Parmi. Egalement. Exercice 56. 1. Vous rappelez-vous l'evenement dont nous parlons? 2. Je me le rappelle. 3. Votre frere s'est-il rappele les circonstances de cette affaire ? 4. II se les est rappelees quand je lui en ai parle. 5. Vos soeurs se rappellent-elles d'avoir vu ma tante ? 6. Elles se rappellent de 1' avoir vue, mais elles ne la reconnaitraient pas, si elles la voyaient. 7. Vous souvenez-vous de ce qui a ete convenu % 8. Je m'en souviens ; je me rappelle, mot pour mot, la conversation que nous avons eue ensemble. 9. Ces dames se sont-elles souvenues d'avoir ete dans cet endroit? 10. Elles s'en sont souvenues. 11. Vous souviendrez-vous de ce que je vous ai dit? 12. Je m'en souviendrai. 13. Votre frere se serait-il sou- venu de cela, si vous ne lui en aviez pas parle ? 14. Je crois qu'il s'en serait souvenu ; il a la memoire bonne. 15. Remettez- vous cette dame? 16. Je ne la remets pas; je n'ai aucun sou- venir de l'avoir vue. 17. Quelle est la difference d'age entre vous et votre frere? 18. II y a deux ans de difference entre son age CINQUANTE-SIXIEME LEC0N. 215 et le mien. 19. JSTe pouvez-vous pas convenir du prix avec le rnarchand de chevaux ? 20. Nous ne pouvons pas tomber d'ac- cord. 21. Offrez-lui de partager le differend, pour en finir. 22. Non, M. ; je ne peux pas consentir a faire cela ; il gardera son cheval, s'il ne veut pas me le laisser au prix que je lui en ai offert, 23. Partagerez-vous ces gateaux avec vos freres ? 24. Oui, M. ; je leur donnerai a chacun une part egale a la mienne. 25. Vou- lez-vous partager cette monnaie entre les domestiques ? 26. Je la partager ai egalement entre eux. 27. Les hommes sont-ils egaux ? 28. lis sont egaux devant la loi, mais il y a une grande difference entre eux. 29. Voulez-vous remettre ce memoire en- tre les mains de votre oncle ? 30. Donnez-le-moi, je le lui re- mettrai. 31. Pourquoi vous melez-vous parmi des gens que vous ne connaissez pas ? 32. C'est que je voudrais savoir ce qu'ils disent. 33. Vous melez-vous de leurs affaires? 34. Je ne me mele pas de ce qui ne me regarde pas. 35. Avez-vous bon appetit? 36. Non, M. ; je n'ai presque pas d'appetit. 37. Mangez un peu de cannelle, cela donne de l'appetit. 38. J'aime mieux me promener a cheval pour gagner de l'appetit. 39. Avez-vous bonne vue ? 40. J'ai la vue courte. 41. Portez-vous des lunettes ? 42. Je m'en sers seulement pour lire. 43. Con- naissez- vous ce monsieur de nom ? 44. Je le connais de vue, mais je ne sais pas comment il s'appelle. Theme 56. 1. Do you recollect what I said to you? 2. I recollect it ? word for word. 3. We recollect the event of which you speak, as if it had taken place yesterday. 4. Did your sisters recollect the conversation we had on (en) that occasion ? 5. They did, as soon as I spoke to them about it. 6. Do you recollect having been in this place ? 7.1 have no recollection of having been here. 8. Do you not remember that ? 9. I do not. 10. Did your aunt remember her old friends ? 11. She did ; she inquired about every one of you. 12. Do you not recollect me? 13. I should not have recognized you, if you had not spoken. 14. Is there a great difference of age between you and your cousin ? 216 CINQUANTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. 15. Between him and me, the difference of age is not great. 16. What is the difference between you and the merchant? 17. It is but a trifle. 18. Can you not agree ? 19. I believe we can ; if (the) gentlemen will split the difference, it will be all right (ce sera fait). 20. Was there a book of mine among those I sent you back (r envoy er) ? 21. I noticed that there was one more (de plus) than there ought to have been (qu'il rilen fallait). 22. Did you share with your brothers what I gave you? 23. I di- vided it equally among us all. 24. I gave each an equal share. 25. Men are born equal, nevertheless (cependant) there is a great difference among them. 26. What have you done with the bill which I left with you (vous) ? 27. X delivered it into the cap- tain's hands, and he will pay you as soon as he receives his in- come. 28. Has the captain a good memory? 29. If you promise him any thing, I assure you that he will remember it ; but I don't know whether he remembers, equally well, what he promises others. 30. Does your brother meddle with the busi- ness of those people ? 31. He mixes amoug them, but he does not meddle with their business. 32. He is not in the habit of meddling with things that do not concern him. 33. Have you a good appetite ? 34. I have lost my (£') appetite, but does that concern anybody ? 35. I should like to know why you wear spectacles ; you are not short-sighted ? 36. If I choose to wear them (S'il me plait d'en porter), is that any thing to you ? 37. No, absolutely nothing. 57. CINQUANTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. 216. To sit down, to place one's self. Se mettre. Take a seat near this young lady. Mettez-vous a cote de mademoiselle. To dress well, ill. Se mettre bien, mat. To be well dressed. Etre bien niis. To dress in the fashion. Se mettre a la mode. She is dressed in the English style. Elle est mise a Vanglaise. Her style of dress is elegant. Sa mise est elegante. CXNQUANTE-SEPTIEME LECON. 217 To clothe. Clad. I clothe. "We clothe. How was he dressed? He was dressed in black. To begin, to set about a thing. To begin to sing. Vetir, irr. Vitu. Je vets. Nous vetons. Comment etait-il vetu ? (habille.) II etait vetu de noir, or en noir. Se mettre a. Se mettre a chanter. 21 7 • To bring or draw near. To draw or come near. Draw the table near the window. Will you not come near the fire \ To remove. To withdraw from. Remove the chair from the fire. I go away from the fire ; I am too warm. To resemble some one. That man resembles my brother. "We resemble each other. That liquor looks like water- To pretend, to feign. He pretends to sleep. To look like. To look in good humor. He looks like a doctor. He looks sad, merry, &c. Approcher (de). S'approcher (de). Approchez la table de la fenetre. Ne voulez-vous pas vous approcher du feu ? Eloigner (de\ 8 y eloigner (de). Eloignez la chaise du feu. Je m'eloigne du feu; j'ai trop chaud. Ressembler a qqn. Cet homme ressemble s, mon frere. Nous nous ressemblons. Cette liqueur ressemble a de l'eau, Faire semblant de. II fait semblant de dormir. Avoir Vair. Avoir Pair de bonne humeur. II a Ymv d'un medeciu. Avoir l'air triste, gai, &c 218. In the first person plural of the imperative, the form of the verb is the same as in the first person plural of the indicative present. The subject is not expressed. (126.) Let us sit down to table. Mettons-nous a table. Let us drink to the health of our Buvons a la sante de nos amis, friends. The following four imperatives are irregular. Have. Be. Know. Please. Ayez. Soyez. Sachez. Veuillez, Let us have f . .be, . . know. Ayons. Soyons. Sachons. Have the kindness to do that. Ayez la bonte" de faire cela. Let us be sure of what we say. Soyons surs de <;e que nous disons. 10 218 CINQUANTE-SEPTIEME LE£ON. Let us know bow to be satisfied with our lot. Please hand this, &c. Sachons nous contenter de notor? sort. Veuillez passer ceci a ? &e, To lay the cloth. To remove the cloth, the things. A cover for this gentleman. Shall I help you ? I will trouble you, . „ .. Mettre le couvert. Oter le couvert. Un couvert pour monsieur. Vous servirai-je. . . .? Je vous demanderai. The garment. iL'a The cover. The air. The appearance. The appearance. The pretence. A leg of mutton. JUngigotde mouton* VOCABULAIRE 57. Le vetement Le couvert. The dress ; the ) j style of dress, j The table-cloth. La nappe. L'humeur. ■ Le semblant. 1 The humor. The resemblance. La ressemblaneet A loin of veaL Une longe de veau. To sit down. To dress well. To dress badly. To draw near. To resemble. To pretend, to fe Elegant. Sad. Lightly. Se mettre. Se mettre bien. Se mettre mal. ( Approcher. ( S'approcher. Ressembler (a). jn, Faire semblant. Jllegant. Triste. Legerement. To begin to. To clothe; To withdraw. To pour out. To look. Simple. Merry r cheerfuL Gai. First.. Premieremenk, Se mettre a. Vetir, irr. j Eloigner. ( S'eloigner. Verser. Avoir l'air. Simple. EXERCICE 57. 1. Ou nos amis se sont-ils mis? 2. lis se sont mis la-bas a F ombre. 3. Les dames se mettent-elles bien ici ? 4. Elles se mettent a la mode de Paris. 5. Cette dame-la n'est-elle pas bien mise ? 6. Elle a une mise elegante, mais j'aime encore mieux une mise simple. 7. Votre soeur se met-elle a l'anglaise t CINQUANTE-SEPTIEME LEC/0N. 219 8. Elle se met a la francaise. 9. N'etes-vous pas vetu trop le- gerement? 10. Je vous demande pardon; ce vetement est plur chaud que vous ne peusez. 11. Comment ces dames etaient- elles habillees hier au soir ? 12. Elles etaient habillees en blan& 13. A-t-on chante ? 14. On a d'abord chante, puis on s'est mis ** danser. 15. Vous y etes-vous plu ? 16. Je m'y serais mieux plu s'il y avait eu moins de monde. 17. Faut-il approcher la tabk du feu ? 18. II vaut mieux l'approcher de la fenetre ; je n'ainu? pas a m' approcher du feu. 19. Ces chaises sont trop pres du feu; voulez-vous les en eloigner? 20. Je les en eloignerai. 21. Pourquoi vous eloignez-vous de la fenetre? 22. Je m'en eloigne pour m' approcher du feu. 23. Votre frere vous ressem- ble-t-il ? 24. Nous ne nous ressemblons guere. 25. Wj a-t-il pas quelque ressemblance entre vos deux cousins? 26. II n'y a aucune ressemblance entre eux. 27. Ce jeune homme n'a-t-il pas Fair de nous ecouter ? 28. II fait semblant de lire, mais je crois qu'il fait attention a notre conversation. 29. A-t-on Fair de bonne humeur, quand les affaires vont mal? 30. Non, M. ; on a alors Fair de mauvaise humeur. 31. Ce monsieur a-t-il l'air triste, parce qu'il n'a pas d'argent? 32. Je crois qu'il au- rait l'air gai, s'il en avait. 33. Parlons a present de nos af- faires. 34. Permettez ; le diner est servi ; mangeons d'abord la soupe. 35. Cela vaut mieux. Mettons-nous a table. 36. Jean, il manque un couvert ici. 37. Vous servirai-je un morceau de cette longe de veau ? 38. Je prendrai de preference une cote- letted e mouton. 39. Qu'aurai-je l'honneur de vous servir ? 40. Je vous demanderai une tranche de ce gigot de mouton. 41. Versez du vin a monsieur. 42. Versez-moi d'abord un verre d'eau. 43. Ayez la bonte de me passer 1' ananas. 44. Veuillez passer le fruit a mademoiselle. 45. Soyons prets a partir a qua- tre heures. 46. Sachez, messieurs, qu'il est deja trois heures et demie. 47. Levons-nous de table et partons. 48. Un instant, s'il vous plait ; sachons d'abord si la voiture est prete. 220 CINQUANTE-SEPTIEME LEC.ON. Theme 57. 1. Take this seat near the fire. 2. I do not like to come near the fire. 3. I am going to sit down by (a) the window, to look into the street. 4. I admire the elegant dresses of the ladies that pass. 5. People dress well here. 6. The ladies dress in the Parisian style. 7. I like to see the ladies well dressed, but a simple style of dress pleases me better than an elegant style. 8. Is your cousin dressed in green ? 9. She is dressed in blue. 10. Are those children not clad too lightly? 11. I think not; the garments they wear are of wool. 12. I would begin to write, if I were warm. 13. Shall I draw the table near the fire ? 14. I should not be able to write there ; it is not light enough. 15. Eemove it from the fire, and place it in the middle of the room. 16. Will you come near the window? 17. I went away from the window, because it is too cold there. 18. Leave the table where it is, and I will come near it. 19. You may go down, but do not go away (^ eloigner) ; I shall have occasion (besoin) for you, when I have done writing. 20. Does your cousin resemble your sister? 21. She does not. 22. Do the two sisters resemble each other (se) ? 23. There is no resem- blance between them, either in face or temper (ni de visage ni de caractere). 24. The elder always looks in bad humor, and the younger (la cadette) has a charming disposition, she always looks pleased (content). 25. That boy pretends to be studying, but I believe he is playing (tfamuser). 26. Why do you look so sad? 27. I don't know; I want amusement. 28. Stay, and take some dinner with us. 29. John, are you going to lay the cloth ? 30. Yes, sir; presently. 31. Put a cover for this gentleman. 32. Let us sit down to table. 33. What shall I help you to ? 34. I will trouble you for a piece of that loin of veal. 35. This leg of mutton looks good; shall I help you to some of it. 36. I would prefer a piece of that fowl. 37. Please hand the pine- apple to that young lady. 38. Have the kindness to pour out some wine to your neighbor. 39. Let us be merry. 40. Let us drink to the health of our absent friends. 41. Eemove the things from the table. 42. Let us draw the table near the win- CINQUANTE-HUITIEME LE£0N. 221 dow, and we shall have room to dance. 43. Know, my friends, that it is time to go away. 44. Good-by (Au revoir). 58. CESTQUANTE-HUITIEME LEgOK 219» To depend on. Does it depend on you to do that ? It depends upon circumstances. That is according to circumstances. It depends. To defend; to forbid. His father has forbidden him to go there. He is not in a condition to defend himself. To spill ; to spread. The sun diffuses light, light spreads more rapidly than sound. To spread; to extend; to stretch. She spreads the linen in the sun. He stretches himself along the floor. JDependre de. Depend-il de vous de faire cela ? Cela depend des circonstances. C'est selon les circonstances. C'est selon. Defendre {de). Son pere lui a defendu d'y aller. H n'est pas en etat de se defendre, Repandre. Le soleil repand la lumiere. La lumiere se repand plus vite que le son. Etendre. Elle etend le linge au soleil. II s'etend sur le plancher. 220 • To stop ; to stay. To rest. Let us stop here. Let us rest a moment. To prepare. Make yourself ready to start. To keep one's self ready. To keep one's self straight. To keep standing. To be in a condition, to be able. To be comfortable. To make one's self comfortable. To set out upon a journey. S'arreter. Se reposer. Arretons-nous ici. Reposons-nous un moment. Preparer. Preparez-vous a partir. Se tenir pret. Se tenir droit. Se tenir debout. Etre en etat. Eire a son aise. Se mettre a son aise. Se mettre en voyage. 222 CINQUANTE-HUITIEME LE^ON. 221 # To FLEE. Fled. I flee. We flee. To flee, to run away. To make one's escape. He ran away. He made his escape. Let us be off. To take to flight. To put to flight. To rob somebody. To steal something from somebody. They have stolen his watch from him. They arrested the thief, and put him in prison. To take care, to beware. Take care. Mind your watch ; they will steal it from you. To take care not, (bef. the infinitive.) Take care not to fall. Fuir, irr. Put. Je fuis. Nous fuyons. S'enfuir. Be sauver. II s'est enfui. II s'est sauve. Sauvons-nous. Prendre la fuite. Mettre en fuite. Voter qqn. Voter qq. ch. a qqn. On lui a vole sa montre. On a arrete le voleur, et on l'a mis en prison. Prendre garde (a before a noun). Prenez garde. Prenez garde a, votre montre; on vous la volera. Prendre garde de. Prenez garde de tomber. YOCABULAIRE 58. The repose, the rest. Le repos. Ease, comfort. L'aise. The state. The condition. The thief. The innkeeper. The farmer. The danger. J. L'etat. Le voleur. L'aubergiste. Le fermier. Le danger. The condition. La condition. The prison. La prison. The inn ; the tavern. L'auberge. The farm. La ferme. The flight. La fuite. The gun. Le fusil. The arm. The weapon. [• L'arme. To depend on. Dependre de. To spill; to spread. Repandre To stop ; to stay. To arrest. S'arreter. Arreter. To flee, to run away. S'enfuir. To forbid. To defend. To spread. To extend. To stretch. To rest. To flee. To make off. To run away. j. Defendre (de> [■ £tendre. Se reposer. Fuir, irr. [ Se sauver. CIXQUAXTE-HUITIEME L7XGX. 223 To rob; to steal. To prepare. According to. To be comfortable. Voler. Preparer. Selon. To hang (on). To take care. On condition. Etre a son aise* Standing. Exercice 58. Pendre (a). Prendre s:arde. A condition. Sous condition. Debout. 1. Je voudrais me reposer; asseyons-nous ici sur Fherbe, 2. Prenez-y garde ; Fherbe est mouillee. J'etendrai mon manteau, et nous nous mettrons dessus. 3. Je pendrai mon cbapeau a Farbre. 4. Tenez, pendez-y le mien aussi. 5. Depend-il de vous de faire ce voyage? 6. Cela depend des cir Constances. 7. Votre neveu ira-t-il avec vous? 8. C'est selon. 9. Son pere lui a-t-il defendu d'aller a la foire? 10. II lui a defendu d'y aller seuL 11. Qu'est-ce qui repand cette odeur desagreable? 12. Ce sont les eaux qui se sont repandues dans la campagne. 13. Jusqu'ou cette ferme s'etend-elle ? 14. Elle s'etend jusqu'a Fauberge que vous voyez la-bas. 15. Prenez garde de tomber; il fait glissant ici. 16. Donnez-moi la maim et marchons lentement. 11. A- t-on arrete le voleur qui a vole ce fermier P autre jour? 18. On Fa arrete le lendemain; et il est en prison maintenant. 19. Pre- nez garde a votre manteau; on vous le volera. 20. N'ayez pas peur de cela; j'y prendrai garde. 21. Pourquoi cet homme s'enfuit-il ? 22, Je ne sais pas pourquoi il s'enfuit. 23. Sau- vons-nous d'ici, et allons nous reposer dans cette auberge. 24. Nous nous arreterons a Fautre auberge ; on y est mieux. 25. Je ne puis plus me tenir debout; je veux prendre quelques moments de repos. 26. Vous avez Fair fatigue ; etendez-vous sur ce sofa pendant qu'on prepare le diner. 27. Vous pre- parez-vous a partir? 28. Je suis tout pret a me mettre en voyage. 29. Mettez-vous a votre aise, et tenez-vous chaud. 30. Je suis tout-a-fait a mon aise. Ne prenez pas garde a moi, je vous en prie. 31. Que feriez-vous si les voleurs ve- naient ? 32. Je suis en etat de me defendre, et je me defendrais. 33. Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux se sauver? 34. C'est selon. II ne faut pas fuir le danger, si Fhonneur ordonne de rester. 35. Y aurait-il du danger a voyager ici sans armes? 36. II pourrait y 224 CIXQUAXTE-HUITIEME LEGO^, en avoir. 37. Mettrait-on les voleurs en fuite avec un vieux fu- sil? 38. C'est selon; je crois qu'en general ils aiment mieux prendre la fuite que de se battre. 39. Ah ! monsieur l'auber- giste ; vous voulez vous sauver parce que vous savez que votre gigot est brule. 40. Messieurs, je ne me sauverai pas, a condi- tion que vous ne me gronderez pas. 41. Et nous ne gronderons pas, a condition que vous nous donnerez une bonne bouteille de vin. 42. D'accord, messieurs, je vais vous ehercher une bouteille de mon meilleur. Theme 58. I. Let us stop here for a few minutes; I am not able to go any farther. 2. My uncle's farm is yonder; we shall go there (jusque-la) when we have rested a little. 3. Hang my hat on that nail. 4. Give me your wet cloak, I will spread it over (sur) two chairs before the fire. 5. Does it depend on us to make a fortune ? 6. Not entirely ; it depends rather on circumstances, Y. Will you forbid your nephew to go to the fair (a la foire) I 8. That is according to circumstances. 9. Why do you keep standing? 10. Make yourself comfortable. 11. I am quite comfortable here. 12. Mind my cloak; is it too near the fire? 13. There is no danger. 14. A rumor (Le bruit) has spread (se repandre) that you (on) have been robbed; is it true? 15. It is but too true. 16. It happened at (dans) an inn. 17. I had fallen asleep on the sofa, where I had stretched myself to take a few moments' rest, when a thief approached me and stole my purse. 18. I perceived it soon after, but alas (helas) ! it was too late; the thief had made his escape. 19. They have since arrested him, and he is now in jail. 20. Take care not to fall; this is (c'est ici) a bad place. 21. How far does that field ex- tend? 22. It extends to the river. 23. Is there any danger in travelling here ? 24. There is no clanger, when one has a good gun. 25. Is it not forbidden here to carry arms? 26. Every- body is allowed (II est per mis a chacun) to carry arms in self- defence (pour se defendre). 27. Do you see those men that are coming towards us (de noire cbte)% 28. Do not be afraid; if CINQUANTE-NEUVIEME LECW. 225 they are thieves, I shall put them to flight. 29. And if they do not fly? 30. If they do not take to flight? Well, we shall make off; we are able to run as fast as they. 31. There is no occasion to be afraid of them : the one is my uncle's farmer, and the other is the innkeeper, at whose house we stopped this morn- ing. 32. Well, farmer, will you go to the fair with us? 33. Yes, I will, on condition that you will come first and dine with me. 34. That is agreed upon (C'est convenu). 35. Young la- dies, allow me to remind you of the necessity (de vous faire penser a la necessite) of keeping yourselves straight. 36. You, conva- lescents, keep yourselves warm. 37. You, my children, keep yourselves clean, and prepare your task for to-morrow. 38. And we, grave professors (Et nous auires, graves professeurs), let us keep ourselves ready to march ; we shall have (il nous faudrd) to march some (un) day. 59. CINQUANTE-NEUVI&ME LEQON. 222 • To pull, to draw. i To shoot, to fire. I To fire at some one. I fired twice at that bird. I killed it at the second shot. To attract. Her good looks attract every heart towards her. To get into a bad scrape. To get out of a bad scrape. Did you get out of the scrape ? To look pleased with a person. To look cross at some one. Bad-looking people. To cast an eye upon something. To have a correct eye. 10* Tirer. Tirer un coup de fusil a or sur qqn. J'ai tire deux fois (deux coups) sur cet oiseau. Je l'ai tue du second coup. At tirer. Sa bonne mine lui attire tous les cceurs. S'attirer (se faire) de mauvaises af- faires. Se tirer d affaire. Vous etes-vous tire d'affaire ? Faire bonne mine a qqn. Faire mauvaise mine d qqn. Des gens de mauvaise mine. Jeter un coup docil sur qq. ch- Avoir le coup d'ceil juste. 226 CINQUANTE-NEUVIKME LEgON. 223. To make some one's acquaintance. Faire connaissance avec qqn. To become acquainted with one. Faire la connaissance de qqn. He is an acquaintance of mine. II est de ma connaissance. I have become acquainted with J'ai fait sa connaissance. him. To present Presenter. To introduce, Introduire. C Je vous presenterai a la famille. I will introduce you to the family. -? Je vous introduirai aupres de la fa- ( mille. He has introduced me into that II m'a introduit (presente) dans house. cette maison (chez eux). I introduce to you Mr. B . . . . Je vous presente M. B . . . . I will introduce you to Mrs. B . . . . Je vous presenterai a Mme. B . . . . Rem. 1. — Of two objective pronouns, both representing per- sons, the indirect object, if it is in the third person, is placed with its preposition after the verb. I will introduce you to her. Je vous presenterai a elle. Rem. 2. — The pronouns a moi, a toi, a lui, &c, and not me, te, lui, &c, are always to be used with reflective verbs, and with a few others ; as, I apply to him. Je m'adresse a lui. I go to you. Je vais a vous. He runs (comes) to her. II court (vient) a elle. 224. The compound pronouns, moi-meme, nous-memes, &c, are used to designate persons more expressly ; as, He told me so himself. II me l'a dit lui-meme. He told it to me personally. II me l'a dit a moi-m^me. They themselves did it. lis Font fait eux-memes. Himself, herself, itself. Soi. Rem. 1. — When applied to persons, soi is used only with ref- erence to an indefinite subject. One does not like to natter himself. On n'aime pas a se natter soi-m6me. Everybody thinks of himself. Chacun pense a soi. Each other, of each other. Bun V autre, Vun de V autre. They love each other. lis s'aiment Tun l'autre. They are pleased with each other. lis sont contents Tun de l'autre. CINQUAXTE-NEUVIEME LE£0£T. 227 Rem. 2. — When each other refers to more than two persons, Vun r autre must be in the plural ; as, Men deceive each other. Les hommes se trompent les una les autres. VOCABULAIRE 59. The vicinity. The neighborhood The stay. ) The sojourn. ) An uproar, a noise. The glance. The look. The game. The pistol. The leisure. To pull ; to shoot To kill To present. To cross. To advise, to induce. To wish. Amusing. Just ; correct Just now. Les environs. Le voisinage. Le sejour. Du fracas. Le coup d'oeiL Le gibier. Le pistolet Le loisir. The country-seat ■ I La maison de [ campagne. The acquaintance. La connaissance. The dwelling. The crowd. The look The appearance. The partridge. The fire-arm. The history. The story. Tirer. Tuer. Presenter. Traverser. Engager (a). Souhaiter. Amusant. Juste. Tout-a-1'heure.* To attract. To wound. To introduce. To examine. To interest. To relate. Interesting. Correct. A little while ago. La demeure. La foule. • La mine. La perdrix. L'arme-a-feu, • L'histoire. Attirer. Blesser. Introduire. Examiner. Interesser. Raconter. Interessant Correct. Tant6t* Exercice 59. 1. Y a-t-il beaucoup de gibier dans les environs de la ferme? 2. II n'y en a pas beaucoup ; il y a quelques perdrix. 3. En avez-vous tue ? 4. Non, M. ; j'ai tire sur quelques-unes, mais je les ai manquees. 5. N'avez-vous pas le coup d'ceil juste. 6. Ce n'est pas cela ; mais mon fusil ne vaut rien du tout. 7. Combien de coups de fusil avez-vous tires? 8. J'ai tire peut- 6tre six fois. 9. Qu'est qui attire la foule devant cette maison ? * Tout-a-Vheure and tantot may refer to past or future time, (see Yoc. 24.) 228 CINQUANTE-NEUVIEME LECON. 10. On vient d'y entendre le bruit (Tune arme-a-feu. 11. On shy- est battu ; on dit que deux hommes se sont blesses l'un 1' autre. 12. Oui, M. ; l'un a donne un coup de couteau a 1' autre, et celui- ci lui a tire un coup de pistolet. 13. II y a toujours du fracas dans ce voisinage ; allons-nous-en d'ici. 14. Un instant; je vois quelqu'un de ma connaissance dans la foule ; je vais lui parler. 15. N'allez pas vous rneler parmi ces gens de mauvaise mine; vous vous ferez de mauvaises affaires. 16. Soyez tranquille, je saurai m'en tirer. 17. Qui est le monsieur qui vous a parle tan- tot ? 18. Celui qui m'a parle tout-a-1'heure est M. Lenoir, un negociant d'ici. 19. J'ai entendu parler de lui ; je voudrais bien faire sa connaissance. 20. Je vous presenterai a. lui tantot, quand nous le verrons a la bourse. 21. Voila M. Lenoir qui traverse la place ; allons a lui. 22. Restons ; il va venir par ici. 23. M. L , je vous presente M. S de B 24. M., je suis charme de faire votre connaissance. 25. Comptez-vous faire un long sejour en ville ? 26. Je compte passer 1'hiver ici. 27. J'espere que nous aurons sou vent le plaisir de vous voir; venez passer la soiree chez nous jeudi ; je vous presenterai a ma famille. 28. Je ne manquerai pas l'occasion; je serai charme de faire la connaissance de madame votre epouse. 29. Si vous avez un moment de loisir, je vous engage a jeter un coup d'oeil sur ce livre ; il vous interessera. 30. J'y ai jete un coup d'oeil ; je le trouve tres-interessant. 31. N'est-ce pas que c'est une histoire amusante ? 32. Tres-arnusante, et tres-bien racontee. 33. Le boulanger a-t-il envoy e son memoire ? 34. II est venu le porter lui-meme. 35. A qui l'a-t-il donne? 36. lime l'a donne a moi-meme, et je l'ai examine et trouve juste. 37. N'est-ce pas qu'il faut prendre garde a soi et examiner ses affaires par soi- meme? 38. Cbacun pour soi, et il ne faut compter que sur soi- mekue. 39. Ces deux cousines se font-elles mauvaise mine l'une a l'autre ? 40. Elles seront contentes l'une de 1' autre quand elles se connaitront mieux. 41. Je l'espere. 42. Je le souhaite de tout mon cceur. CINQTJANTE-NEUVIEME LE^ON. 229 Theme 59. 1. Where did you kill that partridge ? 2.1 killed it in the vicinity of our dwelling. 3. Is there much game ? 4. I saw but one covey (une compagnie) of partridges ; I killed this one at the first shot. 5. Did you fire more than once ? 6. I fired sev- eral times at small birds. 7. Does Henry shoot well ? 8. He has a correct eye, but he has no practice (F habitude de tirer). 9. When I passed a little while ago through this neighborhood, there was an uproar in the next street. 10. The report {Le bruit) of a fire-arm had attracted thither a crowd of people. 11. They were saying just now that a man had fired a pistol at an- other, and (that he had) wounded him in the breast. 12. I did not stop to inquire about it. 13. I was afraid (craindre) of get- ting into a bad scrape, for there were many bad-looking men in the crowd. 14. Did your friend get out of the scrape the other day? 15. Oh! yes; he often gets into bad scrapes, but he al- ways gets out of them (again). 16. Where did you make that gentleman's acquaintance? 17. I became acquainted with him in the country. 18. He introduced me to his family, and made me acquainted (m'a fait /aire, dfcc.) with many persons, which (ce qui) made (200, E.) my stay in this city very pleasant. 19. Did Mr. S say himself that he was going to leave the city ? 20. He said so to me personally. 21. Did he examine the bill, and find it correct? 22. He cast an eye upon it, but he did not say any thing; he looked cross at me. 23. He never looks pleased with those that come to ask him for money. 24. How are you pleased with that book? 25. It is very interesting ; the story is amusing, and related in a pleasant manner. 26. I advise you to cast an eye upon it during your leisure moments ; it will in- terest you. 27. Everybody must take care of himself. 28. One should not praise himself. 29. Those two pupils flatter each other. 30. They are pleased with one another. 31. They often complain of one another; and yet (cependanf) they like each other very much. 32. I hope they will continue to like each other. 33. I wish it with all my heart. 230 SOIXANTIEME LE£ON. 60. SOIXANTIEME LEgON. Dimensions. 225 • (a.) How high is that Combien cette eglise a-t-elle de church ? hauteur ?* { Cette eglise a soixante pieds de hauteur. Cette eglise est haute de soixante pieds. (&.) Of what height is that De quelle hauteur est cette e"glise ? church ? (c.) What is the height of that church ? The height of that church is sixty feet. That table is six feet long. A table six feet long. A room sixteen feet long by fifteen broad. The size of the room.f The size of a stone. The size of a man. What is your size ? How tall are you? I am G.ve feet eight inches. My brother is taller than I by two inches. He is two inches taller than I. Quelle est la hauteur de cette eglise ? La hauteur de cette eglise est de soixante pieds. Cette table a six pieds de longueur. Une table de six pieds de longueur. Une chambre de seize pieds de lon- gueur sur quinze de largeur. La grandeur de la chambre. La grosseur d'une pierre. La taille d'un homme. Quelle est votre taille ? J'ai cinq pieds huit pouces. Mon frere est plus grand que moi de deux pouces. II a deux pouces de plus que moi. Rem. — The preposition de is used before an adverb that refers to a preceding noun ; as, I have a dollar too much. J'ai un dollar de trop. 226 1 The relation of two nouns, the latter of which expresses * We generally use the noun of dimension (de hauteur), though the adjective (de haut) would also be correct ; only d'epais for d'epafeseur, and de profond for de pro- fondeur, are not said. Nouns of dimension are formed from the adjectives, by adding ur to their feminine endings. They are of the feminine gender. t The word size is variously expressed, according to the adjective which the object requires : Un grand animal ; la grandeur de Tanimal. Une grosse pierre ; la gros- eeu/r de la pierre. SOIXANTIEME LEQON, 231 the particular use or destination of the former, is indicated by the preposition a, if the use or destination be vague or indefinite ; and by a and the article, if the use or destination be more pre- cise and definite ; as, A wine-bottle. Une bouteille a vin. The wine-cellar. La cave au vin. The steam-mill. Le moulin a vapeur. The letter-box. La boite anx lettres. It is the same with nouns of designation ; as, A man with white hair. Un homme a cheveux blancs. The man with the white hair. L'homme aux cheveux blancs. A four-wheeled vehicle. Une voiture a quatre roues. The house with the green windows. La maison aux fenetres vertes. Formation of the Plural oe Compound Nouns. 227t In compound words, not connected by a preposition, nouns and adjectives take the form of the plural, other parts of speech remain invariable ; as, Un chef -lieu, a chief place ; des chefs-lieux. Une basse-cour, a farm-yard ; des basses-cours. But : Un passe-partout, a master-key ; [passe, verb ; par tout, adverb ;) des passe-partout. When two nouns are connected by a preposition, the first only becomes plural ; as, Un chef-d'oeuvre, a master-piece ; des chefs- d'oeuvre. 228. To SEW. To have sewed. Coudre, irr. Avoir cousu. I sew. We sew. Je couds. Nous cousons. To GRIND. To have ground. Moudre, irr. Avoir moulu. I grind. We grind. Je mouds. Nous moulons. To VANQUISH. To have vanquished. Vaincre, irr. Avoir vaincu. I vanquish. We vanquish. Je vaincs. Nous vainquons. VOCABULAIRE 60. The department. Le departement. The gallery. La galerie. The courier. ) The post-boy. \ Le courrier. The post-office. La poste. The mail. ) 232 SOIXANTIEME LE£ON. The packet. The bundle. The steeple. The sound. The ringing. The chief place. The wall. The park. The mill. The grain. I Le paquet. Le clocher. I Le son. Le chef-lieu. Le mur. Le pare. Le moulin. Le grain. The kind ; the style. Le genre. The rest. j The remainder. j The enemy. L'ennemi. The thumb ; the inch. Le pouce. • Le reste. To build. To grind. To inclose. Thick. Batir. Moudre, irr. Enfermer. Epais, se. The box. The bell. The bell, (small.) j The farm-yard. The wall. The hedge. The wheel. The sort ; the kind. The species. The kind. The generality, Most. The passion. The size ; the figure. La boite. La cloche. La clochette. La sonnette. La basse-cour La muraille. La haie. La roue. La sorte. y L'espece. (• La purpart.* La passion, La taille. To sew. To vanquish. To conquer. To surround. Deep. Coudre, irr. y Vaincre, irr. Entourer. Profond. Exercice 60. 1. Combien ce clocher a-t-il de hauteur? 2. Ce clocher a deux cent pieds de hauteur. 3. Quelle est la hauteur de votre maison ? 4. Notre maison est haute de quarante-deux pieds. 5. Combien de profondeur a-t-elle ? 6. Elle a quarante pieds de profondeur sur vingt-cinq de largeur. 7. De quelle epaisseur sont ces murs? 8. lis ont deux pieds d' epaisseur. 9. Quelle sorte de table vous faut-il? 10. II me faut une table de chene, de six pieds de longueur et de trois de largeur. 1.1. Quelle est la grandeur de la basse-cour de votre ferme? 12. Elle a quatre- vingts pieds sur soixante-douze. 13. Est-elle enfermee d'une haie? 14. Elle est entouree d'une muraille de dix pieds de hau- teur et de dix-huit polices d'epaisseur. 15. De quelle grosseur * La plupart is followed by the preposition de and the article : Most men, la plu- part des liommes. The verb agrees with the noun that conies, or is understood, after la phvpart. SOIXAXTIEME LECW. 233 est l'espece de fruit dont vous parlez? 16. Cette espeee de fruit est de la grosseur d'une orange. 17. Yotre frere est-il de votre taille? 18. II est plus grand que rnoi de deux pouces. 19. Quelle est la taille de votre cousin? 20. II a un pouce de plus que moi. 21. Pourquoi prenez-vous la clef de la cave au vin? 22. Je vais y porter ces bouteilles a vin, et j'en rapporterai une bouteille de vin. 23. Votre frere a-t-il fait batir deux moulins- a-vapeur ? 24. H a fait batir un moulin-a-vapeur et un moulin- a-eau. 25. A-t-on moulu tout le grain que vous avez envoy e au ruoulin? 26. On en a moulu une partie, et Ton moudra le reste demain. 27. Cette petite fille coud-elle bien? 28. Elle coud tres-bien ; elle a cousu ceci. 29. La plupart des hommes ne se laissent-ils pas vainer e par leurs passions ? 30. La plupart s'en laissent vaincre, et n'ont point de plus grands ennemis. 31. Le courrier est-il venu ce matin? 32. Oui, M. ; il a laisse ce paquet de lettres pour vous. 33. Lui avez-vous paye le port (postage). 34. Je lui ai donne par erreur vingt-cinq sous de trop. 35. Avez-vous tire le cordon de la sonnette ? 36. J'ai sonne deux fois, mais personne ne vient. 37. Pouvez-vous me dire ou est la poste aux ehevaux? 38. Voila, M. ; la grande maison aux fenetres vertes, ou il y a une voiture a quatre roues devant la porte. 39. La poste aux lettres est-elle loin d'ici? 40. Non, M. ; e'est la maison a cote ; vous voyez la boite aux lettres d'ici. 41. Vous avez l'air fatigue ; pourquoi n' avez-vous pas pris quelques moments de repos ? 42. J'ai essay e de dormir, mais le son des cloches m'en a empeche. Theme 60. 1. How long is that wall? 2. What is the depth of your well? 3. What is the size of your room? 4. It is eighteen feet by sixteen. 5. I want a table four feet long and three feet wide. 6. My uncle's park is half a mile long, and is inclosed by a hedge eight feet high. 7. Those farm-yards are surrounded by walls nine feet high and eighteen inches thick. 8. There are in France eighty -six chief places of departments. 9. Most of the master-pieces that are (quHl y a) in the gallery of the Louvre, 234 S0IXANTE ET UNI.EME LECON. are of ancient masters. 10. What is your size? 11. I am five feet eleven inches. 12. I am taller than my brother, by two inches. 13. My cousin is an inch taller than I am. 14. I gave you a dollar too much, I believe ? 15. I beg your pardon (Par- donnez-moi), you gave me just what is right (le compte tout juste). 16. Take that wine-bottle to the wine-cellar, and bring a bottle of wine. 17. There are no wind-mills in this district (cette contree); most of them are water-mills. 18. They have built lately a few steam-mills. 19. They will grind the rest of your grain to-morrow. 20. They ground a part of it last week. 21. They are building a steeple, in that village, one hundred and twenty feet high. 22. Can those little girls sew ? 23. They sew every day ; little Mary has sewn this handkerchief. 24. Most men are overcome (se laisser vainer e) by their passions ; they are the enemies of our happiness. 25. We have all kinds (toutes sortes) of fruit at our farm. 26. That kind of pear is of the size of an egg. 27. Who is the man with the white hat ? 28. He is the courier ; he has been for [prendre) the mail (le paquet) to the post-office. 29. He is going to start in that two- wheeled vehicle. 30. Tell the lady of the house that the bell-rope in my room is broken. 31. I do not like to live next to the church; the ringing of the bells wakes me up too early. 32. T do not like to be (189) among (chez) these people; their style of living (vie) does not suit me. 61. SOIXANTE ET UNIEME LEgON. Preterit Tenses. 229. The preterit or past definite has the following termi- nations : In the first conjugation, ai, as, a, dmes, dtes, erent. In the second and fourth, is, is, it, hues, ites, irent. In the third, us, us, ut, times, utes, urent. To form the preterit of a regular verb, remove the final vowel of its past participle, and add the preterit terminations. SOIXAXTE ET UXIEME LECOX. 235 Preterit of the Four Conjugations. Je parlai, I spoke, tuparlas, Uparla, nous parldmes, vous parldtes, ilsparlirent Je finis, I finished, tu finis, ilfinit, nousfinimes, vous finites, Usfinirent. Je regus, I received, tu regus, il regut, nous resumes, vous refutes, ils regurent. Je vendis, I sold, tu vendis, ilvendit, nous vendimes, vous vendues, ils vendirent. Preterit of Avoir and Etre. J^eus, I had, tu eus, il eut, nous eumes, vous eutes, Us eurent. Je /us, I was, tu fus, il fut, nous fumes, vous fates, ils Jurent Preterit of the verbs in enir, such as Venir. Je vins, I came, tu vins, il vint, nous Winnies, vous vintes, ils vinrent. Use of the Preterit. 230t The 'preterit is used to express what occurred in a time entirely past, and of which the present day forms no part. In this case, the perfect or preterit, either may be used ; as, I spoke to him yesterday, last | Je lui parlai U iel . } le moig pags ^ month. ( Je lui ai parle ) I received the letter the day before j Je recus ) la lettre la veille de mon I started. \ J'ai recu ) depart. Rem. 1. — When the time referred to has not entirely elapsed, or does not necessarily exclude the present day, the preterit can- not be used. I received your letter this week, J'ai recu votre lettre cette semaine, this year. cette annee. Rem. 2. — In conversation, the perfect is commonly used, when the preterit would be equally correct ; but when we assume the narrative style, in speaking or writing, we should use the preterit.* * There is this difference between the two tenses, that the preterit has reference to the action, and the perfect, to the result of the action ; the one represents it as an action the other as an accomplished fact. Hence the preterit is used in historical writing, be- cause it represents events as going on before the mind. Therefore, also, the preterit tenses are used after the conjunctive adverbs, aussitot que, &c. (231), because after uissiez, vous sachiez, vous valiez, vous \ Us aillent. aient. Us soient. Us puissent. Us sachent. Us vaillent. veuillent. 248 SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME LECOX. 239. Subjunctive Perfect That I may have spoken, &c. Que j'aie parle, &e. That I may have come, &c. Que je sois venu, &c. That I may have rejoiced, H • F It is astonishing ji succee . -q es t etonnant ; 2d. After all verbs and phrases, after which the action ex- pressed by the dependent verb may be considered uncertain ; as,. (a.) Verbs expressing will, desire, command, consent, doubt r fear, &c. (b.) Impersonal verbs, and verbs used impersonally.f (c.) Interrogative and negative sentences. What do you wish me to do ? J Que voulez-vous que je fasse ? I require you to do your duty. J'exige que vous fassiez votre de- voir. Do you like me to tell him of it ? Aimez-vous que je le lui dise ? * Instead of saying .- Je suis fdche que ^ous ayez fait cela, we may say: Je suis fdche de ce que vous avez fait cela; but the construction with the subjunctive is preferable. t With some exceptions, see 253. X When two verbs come together, both having the same subject, the second verb is put in the infinitive (91); as, I rejoice that I did it, Je me rejouis de V avoir faiL But when each verb has a different subject, the dependent sentence is introduced by the conjunction que, with the verb in the subjunctive, if the preceding verb governs the subjunctive. This it generally does, when in English the objective case precedes the infinitive or present participle; as, Do you wish me to do that? We doubt your 'being able to do it. Voulez-vous que je fasse cela ? N~ous doutons que vous puissiea lefaire. Certain verbs admit of two different constructions ; they either are followed by que and the subjunctive, or govern the second verb, as their direct, and the second subject, as their indirect, object; as, I order you to do that, J'ordonne que vous fas- siez cela, or Je vous ordonne de faire cela, Tke construction with the subj,un.ctiva is more emphatic. SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME LE^ON. 249 I would rather that he should J'aime mieux qu'il le sache, know it. He deserves to be punished. I doubt whether he will come. I fear that he may not come. It is important that I should see him. It is sufficient that you say so. I must go there. It is better for us to go. It is time that we start. Do you believe that he will come ? I do not believe that he has come. II merite qu'on le punisse. Je doute qu'il vienne. Je crains qu'il ne vienne pas. II importe que je le voie. H suffit que vous le disiez. II faut que j'y aille. II vaut mieux que nous y allions, II est temps que nous partions. Croyez-vous qu'il vienne ? Je ne crois pas qu'il soit venu. Rem. — Verbs expressing fear or apprehension, require ne be- fore the verb in the subjunctive, when they are used affirma- tively ; as, I fear lest he come. Je crains qu'il ne vienne. But : Craignez-vous quHl vienne. Je ne crains pas qvJil vienne, jK£P See Remarks on the Subjunctive. (245.) Respect, deference. L'egard. The effect. L'effet. Things, personal ) Le9 effets. property. ) Detriment. t Le domma g e . Damage. ) The remedy. Le remede. Vocabulaire 64. The consideration. La consideration, The energy. L'energie. Property. La propriete. To require. To exact. To regret. It is a pity. It is fit, proper, becoming. [• Exiger. Regretter. C'est dommage. r II est a propos. II convient. II est convena- > ble. It is to be desired. II est a desirer. Sickness, disease. La maladie. The medicine. La medecine. To order. To delay. It is grievous. It matters. It is important. It is indispensa- ble. Ordonner. Retarder. II est facheux. II importe. II est important. \ n est indispen- sable. 11* 250 SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME LECON. Astonishing. Etonnant. Surprised. Surpris. Indolent. Indolent. Careless. Negligent Attentive. Attentif. Assiduous. Assidu. At once. A la fois. Thoroughly. A fond. Even. Meme. From time to time ( De temps en ' ( temps. Remarks on the Subjunctive. • 241 . The subjunctive represents the state or action as viewed un- der the influence of some affection of the mind, which is expressed by the governing verb or phrase. Both sentences, the principal (governing sentence) and the subordinate (subjunctive sentence) are, in sense, inseparably connected. The subordinate sentence expresses the principal idea, the subject of our thought. The principal sentence expresses the manner in which it affects us. The subordinate sentence states thus the cause of the affection. Two cases present themselves : either, the cause is a fact, giving rise to pleasure, pain, wonder, satisfaction ; or, it is a prospective and uncertain state or action, creating desire, uneasiness, doubt, apprehension, fear. In the latter case, the uncertainty with which we view the state or action, is the principle which calls for the use of the subjunctive. It is to be observed, that it is not so much the uncertainty of the act, as the want of confidence with which we look upon it, as expressed by the principal sentence. When we say : / believe, I hope, I expect, I promise, that my brother will come, his com- ing is uncertain ; yet we use the future of the indicative, because we state with confidence our belief in his coming. But when we say : / believe not, hope not, expect not, promise not, that my brother will come, we use the subjunctive ; because these expres- sions denote a want of confidence — an unsettled, hesitating state of mind. Notice also, that the subjunctive sentence, when separated from the principal sentence, expresses no longer the same sense which the whole sentence conveys ; whereas the subordinate sen- tence, in which the indicative is used, when separated from its principal sentence, still retains the same meaning. SOIXANTE-QUATRIEME LEC/ON. 251 Exercice 64. 1. Etes-vous content que Charles parte ? 2. Je suis bien fache qu'il s'en aille. 3. N'est-il pas facheux que ce jeune homme ne veuille pas etudier ? 4. C'est dornmage qu'il ne soit pas plus as- sidu. 5. II est etonnant qu'il soit si indolent. 6. Je suis sur- pris qu'il n'ait pas plus d'energie. 7. N'est-il pas a desirer que la jeunesse ait des egards pour ceux qui s'occupent de son bon- lieur ? 8. II est a regretter qu'elle agisse, en general, avec fort peu de consideration. 9. Voulez-vous que j'instruise votre oncle de ce qui s'est passe? 10. J'airne mieux que Charles Pen in- struise lui-rneme. 11. Le medecin veut-il que je prenne cette medecine? 12. II ordonne que vous la preniez toute. 13. Ex- ige-t-il que je boive toute cette liqueur a la fois? 14. II exige que vous la buviez toute avant de vous coucher. 15. Croyez- vous qu'il soit agreable de boire cette liqueur? 16. Je ne dis pas qu'il soit agreable, mais je dis qu'il est indispensable que vous la preniez. 17. Croyez-vous que ce remede me fasse du bien? 18. Je crois qu'il vous fera du bien. 19. Faut-il que le domestique aille chercher vos effets ? 20. II faut d'abord qu'il finisse ce qu'il fait. 21. Est-il necessaire que cela se fasse ce matin ? 22. II est indispensable que cela soit fait avant midi. 23. Ne vaut-il pas mieux que nous le fassions ? 24. II est im- possible que nous le fassions, il faut que nous sortions. 25. Est-il temps que nous nous en allions ? 26. II est temps que nous nous habillions. 27. Est-il a propos que nous par lions de cela a votre oncle? 28. II ne convient pas que nous lui en parlions. 29. Importe-t-il qu'il le sache ? 30. II est meme tres-important qu'il le sache, mais il n'est pas con ven able qu'il en soit instruit par nous. 31. Croyez-vous qu'il vienne ici ce matin? 32. II est possible qu'il vienne. 33. Pensez-vous que notre associe recoive cette lettre aujourd'hui ? 34. Je doute qu'il la recoive avant de- main. 35. Craignez-vous que la lettre ne lui parvienne pas a temps? 36. En effet je crains qu'elle n'arrive trop tard. 37. Votre pere consent-il que vous alliez au spectacle ? 38. II con- sent que nous y allions de temps en temps. 39. Suffit-il que je 252 S0IXANTE-QUATR1EME LE£ON. lise cette lecon une seule fois ? 40. Non, M. ; cela ne suffit pas ; il faut que vous l'etudiiez a fond. Theme 64. 1. We like you to have pleasure, but we regret that you neg- lect your duties. 2. Do you deserve that we reward you, when you are indolent and careless ? 3. Is it not just that we punish you ? 4. It is a pity that you have not more energy, and that you are not more assiduous in (a) your studies. 5. It is griev- ous that you lose the opportunity of acquiring useful knowledge, and that we are obliged to take measures that are repugnant to (qui repugnent a) our feelings. 6. We are sorry that you act with so little consideration. 7. Indeed, it is astonishing that you do not show (avoir) more respect for those that labor for your welfare (a votre bonheur). 8. It is proper that we should speak to you about it. 9. It is well for you to know that we are apprised of your conduct. 10. It is time that you change it 7 and that you be more attentive to your studies. 11. What do you wish me to do? 12. I require that you do your task. 13. You must learn this lesson by heart, and write this exercise be- fore Monday. 14. It is impossible that I can do all that before Monday. 15. I do not like you to tell me that it is impossible, 16. Must the servant go for your things? 17. It is better that he wait a little ; for he must go at (en) the same time to the post-office, and I doubt whether the mail has arrived. 18. Do you think that the courier has been delayed by the water (les eaux) ? 19.1 fear that he may have been delayed. 20. Do you think it necessary that my brother take this medicine ? 21, It is indispensable that he take it, and he must even take it all at once. 22. Is it not sufficient that he drink a part of it? 23. The doctor orders that he drink it all. 24. I do not believe that this remedy will do him any good. 25. I wonder that you speak in that manner (de la sorte). SOIXANTE-CIXQUIEME LEfON. 253 65. SOIXANTE-CINQUIEME LE^ON. 242. To take charge of a commission. To execute a commission. To do an errand. To go on an errand. Has he executed the commission with which you had intrusted him? Se charger d'une commission. I S'acquitter d'une commission* Aller faire une commission. S'est-il acquitte de la commission dont vous l'aviez charge ? To establish. To settle. He has settled in this city. To restore. To recover. Order has been restored. Business has been revived. To recover one's health. To recover. He has recovered. To improve. This land has much improved. His health improves daily. To improve, to embellish. This city has greatly improved. To improve. The arts have greatly improved. Etablir. S'etablir. II s'est etabli dans cette ville, Retablir. Se r etablir. L'ordre a ete retabli. Les affaires se sont retablies. ) Recouvrer sa sante. J" Se retablir, II s'est retabli, or II est retabli. Ameliorer. S' ameliorer. Cette terre s'est bien amelioree. ( Sa sante s'ameliore de jour en jour, (II va mieux tous les jours. Embellir. S'embellir. Cette ville-ci s'est beaucoup embel- lie. Se perfectionner. Les arts se sont bien perfectionnes, 243 1 To marry a couple. To marry \ to give in marriage. To marry, (to take for husband or wife.) To get married When will you marry ? He married his daughter to Mr. B. His son married my cousin. They were married this morning. The bishop married them. To paint. lb dye. To take likenesses. To have one's likeness taken. To dye red, green, hie) is go- ing to be married shortly ; she is to marry Mr. S. . . . 27. Do you lodge in the front? 28. I occupy the back room, on the second floor ; my window looks into the garden. 29. My sister lodges on the ground-floor, in the room below mine. 30. And my brother occupies the room above mine. 31. My cousin has taken lodgings beyond the river, on this side the barrier, near the causeway. 32. Present my respects to him, when you see him. Good-by. 66. SOIXANTE-SIXIEME LEQON. Remarks on the verb Faire. 245. Rem. 1. — The verb faire may be joined to the infinitive of most verbs ; as, faire sortir, to send out ; faire voir, to show ; faire savoir, to let know ; faire dire, to send word ; faire venir, appeler, demander, to send for, &c. The two verbs are equivalent to one transitive verb, and can have but one direct object. (a.) I make the children read. Je fais lire les enfants. (b.) I make them read the lesson. Je leur fais lire la lecon. (c.) I will make him give up his Je le ferai renoncer a ses folles pre- foolish pretensions. tentions. In the example (a), the person is the direct object; in (6), the 258 SOIXANTE-SIXIEME LECW. person is the indirect, lecon being the direct, object; in (c), the person is the direct, because the verb renoncer takes an indirect, object ; as renoncer a qq. ch. Kem. 2. — Faire, joined to a noun without the article, is equiv- alent to an intransitive verb ; as, /aire mal a qqn. Kem. 3. — Faire is used in the sense of to practise ; as, /aire la cuisine, to cook ; faire des armes, to fence ; faire un cours, to give lectures. Eem. 4. — It is also used in the sense of to play, to affect, to feign ; as, faire le savant, V important, to play the learned man, the important man, &c. Kem. 5. — Faire has the sense of to be, when it is followed by an abstract noun, attributing some quality to the subject ; as, H fait la joie de ses parents, he is the delight of his parents ; cela fait toutes mes delices, that is all my delight. Kem. 6. — Faire is used to avoid repeating a preceding verb ; as, Je lui ai ecrit comme je devais le faire, I wrote to him as I ought to do. Kem. t J. — Ne faire que, means : to do nothing but, and ne faire que de, to have but just. II ne fait que sortir, he is con- stantly going out ; il ne fait que de sortir, he has but just gone out. 246. To give birth to, to raise, to cause. Faire naitre. To raise difficulties, suspicions. Faire naitre des difficultes, des soupcons. Faire valoir. To turn to account. To make the best of. To turn one's talents, one's money Faire valoir ses talents, son argent. to account. To boast, to brag. Se faire valoir. To make one's self understand. Se faire comprendre. To assume airs. Se donner des airs, prendre des airs. To turn some one into ridicule. Tourner qqn. en ridicule. To become ridiculous. Tomber dans le ridicule. To make one's self ridiculous. Se rendre ridicule. By, or in, doing that. En faisant cela, (pres. part., see L. nz.) By, or in, showing him. En lui faisant voir. SOIXANTE-SIXIEME LE^ON. 259 247 • To confide, to intrust one with something. To have confidence in some one. To abuse one's confidence. He does not inspire me with any confidence. To trust to one. To trust to the future. To mistrust ; to distrust. To borrow ; to derive. Confier qq. ch. a qqn. Avoir confiance en qqn. Abuser de la confiance de qqn. II ne m'inspire aucune confiance. Sefier a qqn. Sefier sur Vavenir. Se mefier de; se defier de. Mmprunter a or de. Emprunter, in the sense of to derive, requires de. He borrows money of everybody. II emprunte de l'argent a tout le monde. The moon derives its light from the La lune emprunte sa lumi&re du sun. soleil. To put one's self to inconvenience. Se gener. "Without putting yourself to incon- Sans vous gener. venience. That will cause me no inconveni- Cela ne me causer a aucun inconve- ence. nient. To be in trouble. Etre dans l'embarras. To relieve one from his perplexity. Tirer qqn. d'embarras. VOCABULAIRE 66. The embarrassment. L'embarras. The inconvenience. L'inconvenient. The ridicule. The prejudice. The injury. The detriment. The delight. The suspicion. Le ridicule. Le prejuge. I Le prejudice. Le delice. Le soup5on. The difficulty. The importance. The pretension. The prejudice. The joy ; the mirth. The delight. The exception. La difiiculte. L'importance. La pretention. La prevention. La joie. Les delices. L'exception. To give birth to. To show. Faire naitre. Faire voir. To intrust with. Confier (a). To abuse. Abuser. To trust. Se fier (a). To turn to account. Faire valoir. To renounce. To give up. To inspire with. To borrow. To mistrust. !• Renoncer (a). Inspirer. Emprunter Se mefier (de) 260 SOIXANTE-SIXlfcME LEfON. To embarrass. > j^^^ To inconvenience. ) ^ ner . To perplex. ) To incommode. ) To inconvenience ) Se .^ Tq relate to refer< Se tei , one s self. J Foolish. Fou, fern, folle. Ridiculous. Ridicule. r r 2. \ i> • With the exception ) A l'exception In future. A lavenir. „ r -. of. ) de. On purpose. Expres. Except. Excepte, Exercice 66, 1. Voici notre musicien; voulez-vous que je le fasse chanter? 2. Quant a moi je consens que vous le fassiez danser. 3. Ne voulez-vous pas que je lui fasse chanter ce nouvel air ? 4. J'aime encore mieux que vous le lui fassiez jouer sur son violon. 5. Croyez-vous qu'on guerisse quelqu'un de ses preventions en le tournant en ridicule ? 6. J'essaierai de faire renoncer Charles a ses folles pretentions, en lui faisant voir le ridicule de sa conduite. *1. En quoi se rend-il ridicule ? 8. En faisant le savant, et en se donnant des airs de grand seigneur. 9. Donnez-vous beaucoup de temps a la lecture? 10. L'etude et la lecture font mes de~ lices; j'y donne toutes mes heures de loisir. 11. Ferez-vous ve- nir le peintre pour lui montrer cette peinture ? 12. Je ]ui ai fait dire que je desire le voir. 13. L'avocat vous a-t-il fait savoir quand il sera pret? 14. II m'a fait demander les pieces qui se rapportent a notre affaire. 15. Les lui avez-vous confiees ? 16. Je les lui ai fait remettre, a l'exception de la lettre que vous m'avez ecrite. 17. Ke trouvez-vous pas que ce monsieur fasse l'important? 18. Oui, M. ; et je crois qu'il fait naitre des diffi- cultes expres, pour se donner des airs d'importance. 19. Avez- vous confiance en lui ? 20. II ne m'inspire pas grande confiance. 21. Ne craignez-vous pas qu'il n'abuse de votre confiance? 22. En effet, je ne serai pas etonne qu'il le fasse, car sa conduite a deja fait naitre des soupcons dans mon esprit. 23. On dit qu'il a du talent, et qu'il sait le faire valoir. 24. II est a regretter que beaucoup d'avocats fassent valoir leurs talents au prejudice de leurs clients. 25. Croyez-vous qu'on puisse se fier a tout le monde? 26. Je pense plutot qu'il faut se mefier de tout le SOIXAXTE-SIXIEME LECOX. 261 monde; surtout de ceux qui se font trop valoir. 27. Comment puis-je faire valoir mon argent? 28. Faites le valoir dans les fonds publics. 29. Ce monsieur veut m'emprunter ; croyez-vous que je puisse lui courier quelques milliers de dollars ? 30. II ne fait que demander de l'argent a tout le monde ; il a voulu en emprunter a quelqu'un de mes amis, qui a refuse de lui en pre- ter. 31. Quand etait cela ? 32. Aujourd'hui ; il ne fait . que de le quitter. 33. Me voila bien embarrasse ; je me suis presque engage a lui fournir la somme qu'il m'a demandee. 34. II n'est pas difficile de vous tirer d'embarras ; avec de telles gens, il ne faut pas etre gene. 35. Que voulez-vous que je lui dise ? 36. Dites-lui franchement que vous n'avez pas de confiance, et a l'a- venir, il vous laissera tranquille. 37. Avez-vous beaucoup d' ar- gent a placer? 38. J'ai quelques milliers de dollars dont je pourrais me passer sans me gener. Theme 66. 1. Have you made the children read? 2. I have made them read their lesson. 3. Do you wish me to send them out? 4. I prefer that you make them write their exercises. 5. Do you make those inkspots in your book on purpose ? 6.1 will make you give up those bad habits. 7. Promise me that, in future, you will not do it any more. 8. Charles is a good boy (sujet) ; good children {sages) are the delight of their parents. 9. Our servant understands cooking (savoir faire la cuisine) very well, but he has foolish pretensions, which he will not give up. 10. He likes to play the important man, and assumes airs that ren- der him ridiculous ; with the exception of that (a cela pres), he is an excellent servant (sujet). 11. Will you show me your painting, when you have had it renewed? 12. I will let you know when it is finished. 13. Did that man send for the papers relating (which relate) to our business? 14. He sent for them, but I was not willing to intrust them to him. 15. I sent word to him, that he should come and examine them in my office, 16. Why did you intrust him with your business, if he does not inspire you with confidence? 17. I had entire confidence in 262 SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME LE£ON. him ; only lately his conduct has raised suspicions in my mind. 18. I hope he may not abuse your confidence. 19. He is a good lawyer, who knows how to make good the rights (les droits) of his clients. 20. One does not know whom to trust. 21. Mis- trust the counsels of those that flatter you. 22. Was Mr. B. . . . here to borrow money of you ? 23. He has but just gone out. 24. I did not lend him any, for I know that he is constantly borrowing money of all who are willing to lend him. 25. Do I incommode you ? 26. Not in the least (Pas le moins du monde). 27. I am in (un) great embarrassment for want of a little money. 28. Can you, without putting yourself to incon- venience, lend me a few hundred dollars? 29. I will relieve you from embarrassment this time, on condition that, in future, you will renounce gambling (le jeu) 9 30. I cannot help laughing at this youth, who plays the learned man. 31. His prejudices raise difficulties where (la oil) there are none. 32. You are mistaken, if you believe that you cure (subj.) any one of his prejudices, in turning him into ridicule. 67. SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME LE£ON. 248. To raise ; to rise ; to increase, Hausser. To lower ; to fall. Baisser. To shrug up one's shoulders. Hausser les epaules. To raise (to cast down) one's eyes. Lever (baisser) les yeux. Provisions have risen, fallen. Les denrees ont hausse, baisse. The rate of exchange has not varied. Le change n'a pas varie. The stocks are rising, falling. Les fonds sont en hausse, en baisse. To increase. Augmenter. To diminish. Diminuer. Land increases in value. Les terres augmentent de prix. His salary has been increased. On l'a augmente. To reduce (to lower) the price one Reduire (diminuer) le prix d'un franc. franc. To overcharge. To deduct. Surf aire. Rabattre. I have not asked you too much. Je ne vous ai pas surfait. SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. 263 To add. Add something to it. To advance ; to go too fast. To retard; to go too slow ; to lose. My watch is 10 m. too fast {too slow). I set it (put it) 10 m. forward (bach). To wind up a watch. My watch has stopped ; it stopped at three o'clock. Aj outer (a). Ajoutez-y encore quelque chose. Avancer. Retarder. Ma montre avance (retarde) de 10 m. Je l'ai avancee (retardee) de 10 m. Monter, or remonter une montre. Ma montre est arretee ; elle s'est arretee a trois heures. 249* To express. To pronounce. He expresses himself with facility. That word is pronounced as it is written. To conceive ; to word. To express; to word. "We express with precision what we understand well. That article is well written, well worded. To obtain. To procure. It is difficult to procure money. To convince. To persuade He will be convinced of it by expe- rience. I persuaded (convinced) him of that. I persuaded him of that. Exprimer. Prononcer. II s'exprime avec facilite. Ce mot se prononce comme il s'e- crit. Concevoir. Enoncer. Ce que Ton concoit bien s'enonce clairement. Cet article est bien concu, bien enonce. Obtenir. Procurer. II est difficile de se procurer de l'argent. Convaincre. Persuader qqn. de qq. ch., or qq. ch, d qqn. II s'en convaincra par l'experience. Je l'ai persuade de cela. Je lui ai persuade cela. 250* To be shipwrecked. To be wrecked. To fail, to break. To do honor to. To lay or take in a stock of. To be thoroughly acquainted with. To make one's self well acquainted with. To be skilled or expert in. To be able. To enable. > Faire naufrage. Faire faillite, (manquer, faillir.) Faire honneur a. Faire (sa) provision de. Etre au fait de. Se mettre au fait de. S'entendre a. Etre a meine. Mettre a meme. 264 soxxante-septieme le^on. VOCABULAIRE 67. Les fonds Le change. Le profit. Le taux, Le naufrage. L'engagement. Le froment. Le charbon. L'horloger. Le pendule. A share. The variation. The rise. The fall. The failure. The tendency. The commodity. The provisions. Stock, supply. The clock. The time-piece. Une action. La variation. La hausse. La baisse. La faillite. La tendance. ) La denree. ) Les denrees. La provision. L'horloge. La pendule. The funds, j The stocks. j The exchange. The profit. The rate. The shipwreck. The engagement. The wheat. Coal. The watchmaker. The pendulum. To raise ; to rise. To increase. To bargain for. To overcharge. To advance. j To go too fast. I To gain. J To express. To conceive. To obtain. To convince. To quote. To add. Thoroughly ac- ) quainted with, j At a profit. At par. Exercice 67. 1 . Est-ce que les actions du chemin de fer ont hausse ? 2. Elles sont cotees ici au prix d'hier ; mais j'ai renmrque ce matin qu'il y avait une tendance a la baisse. 3. Voulez-vous vous de- faire des votres a ce prix ? 4. J'ai achete les miennes au pair, et je ne veux pas les vendre a perte. 5. Le change a-t-il varie depuis hier ? 6. Non, M. ; il n'y a pas de variation. 7. Est-ce que les denrees ont augmente de prix ? 8. Les denrees n'ont Hausser. To lower ; to fall. Baisser. Augmenter. To decrease. Diminuer. Marchander. To reduce. Reduire, irr. Surfaire. To deduct. To delay. Rabattre, irr. ) Avancer. To go too slow. To lose. [• Retarder. Exprimer. To pronounce. Prononcer. Concevoir. To utter. Enoncer. Obtenir, irr. To procure. Procurer. Convaincre, irr. To persuade. Persuader. Coter. To vary. Varier. Aj outer. To be expert in. S'entendre a. Au fait. Able. A m6rue A profit At a loss. A perte. Au pair. So that. De sorte que. SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME LE£ON. 265 pas varie de prix depuis huit jours, excepte 1-e froment, qui a eprouve une hausse de 50 centimes par hectolitre. 9. Avez-vous fait votre provision de charbon pour Phiverl 10. Pas encore; on a voulu me persuader de la faire a present, mais je crois que le charbon diminuera de prix. 11. Avez-vous marchande ce drap? 12. Le marchand me le fait trop cher, quatre dollars la verge. 13. Ne veut-il rien rabattre? 14. Je lui en ai of- fert trois dollars et demi. 15. Eh bien, reduirez-vous le prix de votre drap de quelque chose ? 16. M. ; je vous assure que je ne vous ai pas surfait. 17. J'ajouterai bien vingt-cinq sous par verge a. ce que je vous ai offert, si cela peut vous contenter. 18. Ajoutez-y trente-cinq sous, et je vous le laisserai. 19. Est-ce que votre pendule avance ? 20. Elle avance de quinze minutes. 21. Ma montre retarde ; il faut que je l'avance de dix minutes pour la mettre a l'heure. 22. Et la mienne est arretee ; je ne eoncois pas cela ; je l'ai pourtant remontee ce matin. H faut que je passe chez l'horloger. 23. N'est-ce pas que cet horloger s'ex- prime bien en anglais ! 24. II s'exprime avec facilite, mais il prononce mal. 25. Vous etes-vous procure l'argent qu'il vous faut ? 26. Je n'ai pas pu me le procurer. 27. Je crois que vous 1'auriez obtenu de mon banquier, si vous vous etiez adresse a lui. 28. Si j'etais convaincu de cela, j'irais bien le trouver. 29. Le commis de votre oncle est-il au fait des affaires de la bourse ? SO. Oui, M. ; il s'entend tres-bien a tout ce qui se rapporte aux finances; aussi mon oncle va Taugmenter cette annee. 31. On disait a la bourse aujourd'hui que le navire de la maison B. . . . a fait naufrage. 32. Si c'est ainsi je crains que la maison B. . . . ne fasse faillite, car ce navire n'est pas assure (insured). 33. Croyez-vous que cette perte puisse faire manquer une maison aussi bien etablie que celle-la ? 34. Non ; pas cette perte seule, mais ajoutez-y les pertes que M. B . . . . a faites depuis peu dans les fonds publics, et vous concevrez qu'il lui sera bien difficile de faire honneur a ses engagements. Theme 67. 1. Here is good news: the railroad shares are quoted at par 12 266 SOIXANTE-SEPTIEME LECON. this morniDg. 2. I must persuade my brother not to sell hm r 3. He wanted to dispose (se defaire) of them at a loss. 4. Since there is a tendency upward, he may possibly (il est possible que) sell them at a profit. 5. The rate of exchange has risen, and provisions have fallen. 6. But the price of flour has not expe- rienced any variation since last week, and the quantity in the market (sur place) has considerably (-emblement) decreased. (264.) 7. I must lay in my stock of coal, for coal will increase in price when winter comes (a Vapproche de Vhiver). 8. What does the watchmaker ask you for the time-piece you were bargaining for ? 9. He asks forty dollars for it, 10. Will he not deduct any thing? 11. If he would reduce the price a few dollars, I would buy it. 12. I am not in the habit of overcharging. 13. I will give you thirty-six dollars for it. 14. If you will add two dollars to it, I will let you have it. 15. You will easily be convinced (refl.) that it is not dear,, by asking (s* informer) the price of such time-pieces in other stores. 16. My watch is too slow; will you set it right (a Vheure) ? 17. It loses five minutes a day (par jour .) 18. If you will leave it here till to-morrow, I will regulate it (re- gler). 19. I shall not be able to do without it. 20. Set it forward five minutes every time you wind it up. 21. I cannot understand (concevoir) why you do not speak French : you pronounce it very well ? 22. I experience difficulty in (a) expressing my ideas ; I am often at a loss (je suis souvent embarrass e) to find suitable words (covenable). 23. It is because (C f est que) you are not in the habit of speaking it 24. Do you believe that your brother will obtain the permission to go with us? 25. There is no means of pro- curing money at present; I am convinced of that. 26. If my brother would withdraw his money from the stocks (fonds pu- blics), it would enable us to honor our engagements. 27, I must persuade him to do it. 28. Is your clerk expert in business? 29. He has made himself thoroughly acquainted with our busi- ness, in a short (peu de) time, so that we cannot do without him, 30. He wants us to increase his salary, and we shall be obliged to doit (y). 31. If the Neptune was wrecked, as is reported, I fear that the house B. . , . will fail,, for that vessel is not insured {assure). S0IXANTE-HU1TIEME LEgON. 267 68. SOIXANTEdEUITIEME LEQON. Subjunctive Mood — continued. 251. Trie subjunctive is used in a relative clause, limiting a superlative degree, or some exclusive idea, equivalent to a super- lative ; as, le seul, le premier, le dernier, &c. The Gospel is the finest gift that L'Evangile est le plus beau present God has made to men. que Dieu ait fait aux hommes. He was the only one that knew it. C'est le seul qui Yait su. This is the best horse that is in the Yoici le meilleur cheval qui soil stable. dans l'ecurie. Rem. — The verb in the relative sentence must be put in the indicative : 1st. When the relative sentence does not limit the superla- tive ; as, He wants my best horse, which is II veut mon meilleur cheval, qui in the stable. est dans l'ecurie. 2d. "When the superlative is followed by a noun, to which the relative clause relates ; as, He is the youngest of the pupils C'est le plus jeune des eleves qui that are here. sont ici. 3d. When future action is to be expressed ; as, You shall have the best watch that Vous aurez la meilleure montre que I can find. je pourrai trouver. 252. The subjunctive is used in a relative clause, limiting a noun of an indefinite sense, which imparts a character of uncer- tainty to the dependent sentence ; as, I seek a man who can do that. Je cherche un homme qui sache faire cela, I know no one who can do it. Je ne connais personne qui puisse le faire. There is scarcely a man who can do II y a a peine un homme qui puisse it. le faire. 268 SOIXANTE-HUITIEME LECON. Who is the man that can do it ? Quel est l'homme qui puisse le faire ? There is no pleasure which is worth II n'y a aucun plaisir qui vaille ce- that of a good action. • lui d'une bonne action. I know no grief which friendship Je ne connais aucun chagrin que cannot alleviate. l'amitie ne puisse soulager. Rem. — The indicative must be used, when the relative clause expresses something positive ; as, I seek the man who can do that. Je cherche l'homme qui salt faire cela. 253. The impersonal verbs il parait, il arrive, il resulte, il s'ensuit, and il semble, accompanied by an indirect object ; also, il est, followed by an adjective denoting evidence, certainty, prob- ability, govern the indicative when they are used affirmatively, and the subjunctive when they are used negatively or interroga- tively, or when they are preceded by the conjunction si: Ex. : It appears that he is right. II parait qu'il a raison. It does not appear that he is right. II ne parait pas qu'il ait raison. It thence follows that you are in the II s'ensuit de la que vous avez tort, wrong. Does it follow that you are right ? S'ensuit-il que vous ayez raison ? It seems to me that you are wrong. II me semble que vous avez tort. Does it seem to you that I am Vous semble-t-il que j'aie tort ? wrong ? It is probable, clear, evident, cer- II est probable, clair, evident, cer- tain, that it is so. tain, que c'est ainsi. It is not plain that it is so. II n'est pas clair que cela soit ainsi. If it be true, that he knew it. S'il est vrai qu'il Yait su. Rem. — II semble, not accompanied by any indirect object, al- ways governs the subjunctive ; as, It seems that he is right. II semble qu'il ait raison. VOCABULAIRE 68. The hope. L'espoir. Hope. L'esperance. The past. Le passe. Experience. L'expe'rience. The present. Le present. The trial ; the proof. L'epreuve. SOIXANTE-HUITIEME LECON. 269 The future. The prospect. The reproach. The judgment. The example. To foretell. To maintain. To suppose. To infer. To incommode. To attach. To bring up. To reproach with. To dread. To result. Beforehand. p L'avenir. Le reproche. Le jugement. L'exemple. Pre dire.* Maintenir. !• Supposer. Incommoder. Attacher, Clever. Eeprocher. Eedouter. Resulter. j D'avance. ( A l'avance. The issue. The conscience. Adversity. The consolation. To foresee. To assert. To sustain. To presume. To conjecture. To alleviate. To compensate. To take away. To discover. To seem. To follow from. At least L'issue. La conscience. L'adversite. La consolation, Pre voir, f J. Soutenir. t Presumer. Soulager. Dedommager. Enlever. Decouvrir. Sembler. S'ensuivre, iDu moins. Au moins. Exercice 68. 1. Connaissez-vous l'homme le plus age qu'il y ait dans ce village? 2. C'est le vieux medecin, je crois; du moins, c'est l'homme le plus age que je connaisse. 3. Y a-t-il quelque chose qui soit plus doux que l'esperance que donne la religion ? 4. II n'y a rien qui soit plus doux. 5. Quel bien y a-t-il qui soit moins perissable que le souvenir d'une bonne action ? 6. H n'y en a aucun ; c'est le seul qu'on ne puisse nous enlever. 7. Quel est le premier homme qui ait concu l'espoir de decouvrir un nou- veau monde ? 8. Christophe Colombe est le premier homme qui ait concu cet espoir. 9. Quel est l'homme qui n'ait rien a se re- procher ? 10. II n'y en a point auquel le passe n'ait quelques reproches a faire. 11. Connaissez-vous quelqu'un qui puisse pre- dire l'avenir? 12. II n'y a que Dieu seul qui puisse faire cela. 13. Ne semble-t-il pas que la verite ait peur de se montrer aux * Predire is conjugated like dire, except that in the second person of the indicative present, it has predisez. t Prevoir follows the conjugation of voir, except in the future tenses, which are: je prevoirai. prevoirais. 270 SOIXANTE-HUITIEME LEC^ON. hommes? 14. H semble plutot que les hommes aient peur de la verite. 15. Ne vous semble-t-il pas que Dieu veuille mettre l'homme de bien a l'epreuve, puisque tant de gens de bien sont dans l'adversite ? 16. II ine semble que Dieu veut que l'honnete homme souffre dans cette vie. 17. S'ensuit-il que vous ayez rai- son de vous plaindre? 18. II ne s'ensuit pas que nous ayons raison de nous plaindre. 19. Est-il probable qu'un jeune bomme sans experience, et qui suit ses propres conseils, reussisse dans le raonde ? 20. II est meme tres-probable qu'il ne reussira pas. 21. Y a-t-il aucun homme qui prevoie l'avenir? 22. II n'y en a aucun qui le prevoie. 23. Votre frere soutient-il que notre ami ait raison ? 24. II soutient qu'il a raison, et que nous avons tort. 25. Maintenez-vous que cela soit ainsi ? 26. Je presume que c'est comme il le dit. 27. Si vous supposez que cela soit ainsi, vous pensez done qu'il faille dedommager notre ami du tort que nous lui avons fait ? 28. Certainement. Theme 68. 1. The most useful lessons we can receive, are those of expe- rience. 2. Religion is the most beautiful gift that Heaven has made to earth ; it affords (offrir) to the virtuous man the sweet- est consolation in adversity, and the only hope which earth can- not destroy. 3. It seems that hope, in drawing on (en empietant sur) the future, wishes to compensate us for present disappoint- ments (des deboires du present). 4. The recollection of the past and the hope of the future, make us often neglect the present, the only moment which is truly ours (a nous). 5. Choose for a friend some one who may be able to give you good advice and a good example. 6. There are few men that are proof against (d Vepreuve de) adversity. 7. Most men dread public judgment (du public) , but there are few that care about the reproaches of their own consciences. 8. Of all evils, death is the only one the presence of which has never incommoded anybody 9. Divine Providence always places (mettre) the remedy beside the evil : there is not one duty to which it has not attached a good ; not one affliction for which virtue has not found a remedy. 10. Does SOIXANTE-NEUVIEME LE£0N. 27 1 it seem to you that my brother was wrong in undertaking that ? 11. It seems to me that he was wrong, since he has not been able to succeed. 12. Does it follow from that, that he was wrong? 13. It follows that he was wrong, if he knew before- hand what would result from his proceedings (ses demarches). 14. Do you suppose that any one can foresee the future? 15, I maintain that he could have foreseen the issue of that affair. 16. If you assert that he is wrong, I assert that he is right. 17. Is it true that your brother foretold this event? 18. It is not ; at least, I never heard him say so (je ne le lui az jamais ou'i dire). 19. It is true that he was brought up in Paris, but it does not follow from that, that he is a Frenchman. 20. It seems that our prospects in life (notre avenir) depend more on our character than on our talents. 69. SOIXANTE-NEUVIEME LEgON. Conjunctions governing the Subjunctive. 254. The following conjunctions always govern the subjunc- tive : afin que* pour que, that, in order that ; a moins que, un- less ; avant que, before ; Men que, quoique, though, although ; de crainte que, de peur que, for fear, lest ; en cas que, au cos que, in case of; jusqu'a ce que, till, until; loin que, bien loin que, far from ; nonobstant que, notwithstanding ; non que, non pas que, not that ; pourvu que, provided ; sans que, without ; si peu que, however little ; soit que, whether ; suppose que, suppose that. Rem. — A moins que, de crainte que and de peur que, require ne before the verb. I write to you that you may be in- Je vous ecris afin que vous soyez formed of the affair before he instruit de l'affaire avant qu'il comes. vienne. * The prepositions afin de, pour, d moins de, avant de, de crainte de, de peur de, loin de, nans, have the same meaning as the corresponding conjunctions. They gov- ern the infinitive, and are used when there is no change of subject; 2&,Jemesuis adresse au prince afin cTobteair voire pardon. 272 SOIXANTE-NEUVIEME LECGN. He will not do it, unless yon speak II ne le fera pas, a moms que vous to him about it. ne lui en parliez. Speak to him about it, for fear that Parlez-lui-en, de crainte qu'un autre somebody else may do it. ne le fasse. He withdraws, lest some one should II se retire, de peur qu ? on ne lui en speak to him about it. parle. He will be punished, although he is II sera puni, quoiqu'il soit innocent. innocent. In case he has started, come and En cas qu'il soit parti, venez me le tell me of it. dire. "Wait for me, until I have done. Attendez-moi jusqu ? a ce que j'aie fini. Far from repenting it, his conduct Loin qu'il s'en repente, sa conduite is worse than ever. est pire que jamais. Provided you do it without his Pourvu que vous le fassiez sans knowing it* qu'il le sache. Remarks on the conjunction Que. 255. Rem. 1. — Que is used to avoid the repetition of a pre- ceding conjunction, and governs the verb in the same manner as the leading conjunction does ; as, When I shall be tall and have Quand je serai grand et que j'aurai money. de l'argent. Unless you are diligent and take A moins que vous ne soyez diligent,. pains, you will not succeed. et que vous ne preniez de la pei- ne, vous ne reussirez pas. Whether I read or write. Soit que je lise ou que j'ecrive. Rem. 2. — "When que is used to avoid the repetition of si, it governs the subjunctive ; as, If you come and I am not in. Si vous venez et que je ne sois pas au logis. Rem. 3. — Que may be used in the place of many other con- junctions; as, Come near that I may tell you that. Approchez que (afin que) je vous dise cela. Wait until the weather is fine. Attendez qifil (jusqu'd ce qu?) fasse beau temps. I shall not be satisfied, unless I Je ne serai point content que (a know it, moins que), je ne le sache- SOIXANTE-KEUVIEME LEC/OK. 2lB Rem. 4. — Que, after Jest, is used for parce que ; as, If he does not come, it is because S'il ne yient pas, c'est qu'il ne peut he cannot. pas. Rem. 5. — Que, after an interrogation, is used for puis que ; as, What is the matter with you, that Qu'avez-vous done, que vous ne you do not eat ? mangez pas ? Rem. 6.— ^Que is used for comme ; as, Sick as he is, he cannot go out. Malade qu'il est, il ne peut pas sor- tir. Rem. 7. — In the same manner, que, with tout before the ad- jective, is used for quoique ; as, Sick as he is, he will not remain Tout malade qu'il est, il ne veut here. pas rester ici. Rem. 8. — Que, at the head* of a negative sentence, is used for pourquoi, and then pas is suppressed ; as, Why does he not come ? Que ne vient-il ? Rem. 9. — Que is used for combien, in exclamatory sentences; as, How kind you are ! Que vous etes bon ! How much kindness you have for Que de bonte vous avez pour moi ! me! How foolish he is not to do it ! Qu'il est sot de ne pas le faire ! 256. The subjunctive is used after quelque. . . .que, quel que 7 quoi que ; as, However rich they may be. Quelque riches qu'ils soient * Whatever riches you may have. Quelques richesses que vous ayez. Whatever may be the pains which Quelles que soient les peines que you take. vous preniez. Whatever you may do. Quoi que (quelque chose que) vous fassiez.f Of whomsoever you may speak. De qui que ce soit que vous parliez, * Quelque, before an adjective, is an adverb, and remains invariable. Quelque, before a noun, is an adjective, and takes the 8 in the plural. When followed by a verb, it is written in two words: quel que; and then quel is an adjective, and agrees in gender and number with the subject of the verb. t Quelque chose {quoi que), any thing whatsoever, is feminine; quelque chose, something, is masculine. 12* 274 SOIXANTE-NEUVIEME LEC.ON. 257« De fa$on que, de maniere que, de sorte que, en sorte que, so that, in such a manner that ; sinon que, except that ; govern the subjunctive, when the result is doubtful, and the indicative, when it is not. Behave in such a manner that you may obtain his friendship. He behaved in such a manner that he obtained our esteem. Conduisez-vous de maniere que vous obteniez son amitie*. II s'est conduit de maniere qu'il a obtenu notre estime. VOCABULAIRE Ennui. Leisure. Amusement. The artist. L'ennui. Le loisir. L'amusernent. L'artiste. The lot; the share. Le partage. The occupation. The recreation. Sweetness. The sweets. The favor. L'occupation. La recreation. La douceur. Les douceurs. La faveur. To communicate. To turn away. To be at leisure. At leisure. Inconstant; fickle. Actual; present. Communiquer. Detourner. Avoir du loisir. A loisir. Inconstant. Actuel. To commit. Commettre, irr, To pardon. ) Pardonner qq. To forgive. ) ch. a qqn. To feel inclined to. Etre dispose a. Accordingly. En consequence. Frivolous. Frivole. Actually ; now. Actuellement. Exercice 69. 1. ICcrirez-vous a votre associe avant que ce monsieur aille le voir ? 2. Je l'instruirai de ce qui s'est passe, afin qu'il agisse en consequence. 3. Croyez-vous que Dieu nous donne les biens pour que nous les gardions ? 4. Je crois qu'il nous les donne pour que nous secourions ceux qui sont dans le besoin. 5. Bien que ce jeune homme ait du talent, croyez-vous qu'il reussisse sans qu'il prenne de peine ? 6. Quelques talents qu'il ait, il ne reussira pas a moins qu'il ne se donne beaucoup de peine. 7. Votre mere ne veut-elle pas consentir que vous fassiez ce voyage, de crainte qu'il ne vous arrive quelque malheur ? 8. Ma mere consent que je le fasse ; mais je ne veux pas le faire avant qu'elle soit retablie, de crainte qu'on n'ait pas bien soin d'elle dans mon SOIXANTE-XEUVIEME LEC/ON. 2*75 absence. 9. Votre oncle ne consent-il pas que ses filles aillent au spectacle, de peur qu'elles ne prennent froid? 10. lis ne con- sent pas qu'elles y aillent, de peur que le gout des plaisirs ne les detourne de leurs devoirs. 11. En cas que ce monsieur ne vienne pas, irez-vous le trouver? 12. J'irai, pourvu que vous vouliez m'accompagner. 13. Attendrez-vous jusqu'a ce que j'aie fini ma lettre? 14. J'attendrai jusqu'a ce que vous l'ayez finie. 15. Si vous etes chez vous ce soir, et que vous y soyez dispose, examinez a loisir le contenu de ce document, et dites-m'en demain votre opinion. 16. Donnez-le moi; je l'examinerai pourvu que je sois seul, et que je ne sois pas trop fatigue. 17. Que faites-vous done, que vous ne jouez pas ? 18. Attendez que je hausse (screw up) les cordes de mon instrument. 19. Qu'a votre frere, qu'il ne prend pas sa flute ? 20. C'est qu'il est enrhume. 21. Que ne reste-t-il chez lui, s'il est enrhume ? 22. Tout enrhume qu'il est, il ne veut pas rester a la maison. 23. Savant qu'il est, ne peut- il pas gagner sa vie sans travailler ? 24. Quelque savant qu'on soit, on n'en est pas moins oblige de travailler pour gagner sa vie. 25. Que d' obligations je vous ai! Comment pourrai-je jamais m'acquitter enversvous? 26. Quels que soient lesser- vices que je vous aie rendus, il suffit de votre amitie pour me de- dommager de mes peines. 27. Quoi que vous fassiez, agissez de maniere qu'on soit content de vous. 28. Je ferai de mon mieux, de sorte que personne ne se plaigne de moi. 29. Quelles que soient les peines que vous preniez, pensez-vous yreussir? 30. Soit que j'y reussisse ou non, je ferai toujours de facon que ma conscience n'ait rien a me reprocher. Theme 69. 1. If you see my brother before he goes to the exchange, will you communicate to him the contents of this letter, that he may act accordingly. 2. In case you do not see him, I shall go to the exchange myself, for fear that my brother may sell those rail- road shares below their present value. 3. Though you are rich and have talents, do not rely too much on those advantages. 4. For time is too fickle, that we should rely on its favors. 5. How- 276 SOIXANTE-DIXIEME LECON. ever rich you may be, whatever talents you may have, the world will not esteem you, unless you behave well. 6. Although the sweets of life are often the fruits of art, they are not always the lot of the artist. 7. How many days pass by, without our trying to become better ! 8. We avoid those men, not that we fear them, but lest they turn us away from our occupations. 9. Ad- versity, far from being an evil, is often a remedy. 10. Many people care little (s'embarr assent pen) about the road, provided it leads to wealth. 11. Suppose he has committed that fault, shall we not pardon him ; we, who like that others (on) should forgive us our faults? 12. When you are at leisure, and feel in- clined to it, examine this and tell me your opinion of it. 13. If I am at home, and am not too tired, I shall do it to-night. 14. Whatever you study, unless you set to it {s'y mettre) with a good heart, and apply to it with ardor, you will not make much pro- gress. 15. If ennui comes over you (vous gagne), it is because you do not like reading, and do not take sufficient recreation. 16. Why do you not choose some useful occupation, which may turn away your mind from frivolous amusements. 17. Come near, that I may show you this. 18. Wait until I finish what I am doing. 19. What is the matter with your brother, that he does not dance? 20. Sick as he is, he cannot dance. 21. Why did lie not stay at home, if he was sick ? 22. Sick as he was, he was not willing to stay at home. 23. How foolish he was, not to stay at home, since he was sick ! 24. Whatever you wish to say, say it in such a manner that your words may not hurt any one's feelings (blesser V amour propre de qqn.). 70. SOIXANTE-DIXIEME LE£ON. Subjunctive — Imperfect and Pluperfect. 258. (a.) The imperfect of the subjunctive is obtained by add- ing the endings sse 1 sses, t, ssions, ssiez y ssent, to the first person of the preterit, after dropping its final letter ; as, SOIXAXTE-DIXIEME LEfOJf. 277 Je parlai. Je parlasse. Tu parlasses. 11 parldt. Nous parlassions, Vous parlassiez. lis parlassent. Je finis. Je finisse. Tufinisses. Ilfinit. Nous finissions. Vous finissiez. lis Jinissent. Je recus. Je recusse, Tu regusses. 11 regut. Nous regussions. Vous regussiez. lis regussent. Je vexdis. Je vendisse. Tu vendisses. 11 vendit. Nous vendissions, Vous vendissiez, lis vendissent. (b.) The pluperfect is formed from the imperfect of the auxili- ary and the past participle of the verb ; as, That I might have spoken, • sh it, ) Ts"ier. Disconvenir. Obeir a qqn. Yenir a bout d'une chose. Econome. Menager. Exigeant. To persist in. To amass. To preserve ; to guard against. To husband. To save. To despair. To disobey. To do things by halves. Prodigal. Wasteful. "With impunity. P'ersister dans, a* Amasser. y Preserver. y Menagen Desesperer. Desobeir a qqn. ) Faire les choses a ) demi >• Prodigue. Impunement Exercice YO. 1. Fallait-il que vous parlassiez frangais lorsque vous etiez a la pension de Mme. B . . . . ? 2. II fallait que je parlasse francais et que j'etudiasse beaucoup. 3. Yotre maitre de francais exi- geait-il que vous ecrivissiez les themes? 4. II exigeait que nous ecrivissions les themes et que nous apprissions les lecons par cceur. 5. A-t-il fallu que votre frere restat a la maison hier au soir? 6. Mon pere ne voulait pas qu'il sortit, de peur qu'il ne prit frokl. 7. Si Ton batissait cette maison, ne faudrait : il pas que vos voisins coupassent leur vigne ? 8. II le faudrait ; mais ce serait dommage qu'il fallut la couper avant que les raisins fussent murs. 9. Ne fallait-il pas que ces marchauds vendissent leurs marchandises a profit, pour qu'ils pussent continuer leur * The first preposition before a noun, the second before the infinitive. 280 SOIXANTE-DIXIEME LE£ON. commerce? 10. II fallait qu'ils eussent du profit. 11. Que voudriez-vous que je fisse de cet habit a demi-use ? 12. Je vou- drais que vous le missiez de temps a autre pour menager votre habit neuf. 13. Monsieur votre pere aimerait-il que vous fissiez les ehoses a demi, et que vous fussiez prodigue? 14. II n'aime point qu'on fasse les cboses a demi, ni qu'on soit prodigue. 15. Bien que ce marchand eut du bonheur, croyez-vous qu'il eut amasse de si grands biens, s'il n'avait pas ete econome? 16. Je ne pense pas qu'il eut amasse de si grands biens, s'il n'avait pas vecu avec economie. 17. N'est-il a propos qu'on soit econome quand on est jeune, et qu'on epargne quelque chose pour la vieillesse? 18. II faut etre menager quand on est jeune, et con- server quelque chose pour ses vie ux jours. 19. Croyez-vous que notre entreprise eut reussi sans que nous eussions fait de grands efforts pour en venir a bout ? 20. Je ne crois pas qu'elle eut reussi, si nous n'avions pas fait de grands efforts, et que nous n'y eussions pas persevere. 21. Yotre beau-frere persista-t-il dans sa resolution de faire ce voyage ? 22. Oui, M. ; et son epouse persista a l'accompagner. 23. Que le bon Dieu les preserve! 24. Plut au Ciel qu'ils fussent deja de retour. 25. Si le general avait commande de faire feu sur les citoyens, doutez-vous que les soldats n'eussent obei a ses ordres? 26. Je ne doute pas qu'il n'y eussent desobei. 27. Niez-vous qu'il n'ait donne de tels or- dres? 28. Je ne disconviens pas que cela ne soit ainsi. 29. Ce monsieur desesperait-il que nous ne vinssions a bout de notre entreprise ? 30. II desesperait que vous en vinssiez a bout. Theme 70. 1. When we were at Mrs. B . . . . 's boarding-school, we had to speak French. 2. Our French teacher was very exacting {des plus exigeants) ; he wanted us to learn the exercises by heart. 3. He required that we should write French compositions. 4. Although we would gladly have dispensed (bien volontiers) with that part of our task, he insisted on it, so that (si bien que) we were obliged to obey him. 5. I do not think that we should have learned to speak this beautiful language, if our teacl : had SOIXANTE-ONZIEME LECON. 281 been less exacting, and if he had not persisted (perseverer) in his efforts to (pour) make us speak it, in spite of ourselves (malgre que* nous en eussions). 6. Whatever you do, do it well, and do not accustom yourselves to do things by halves. 7. Husband well your time, and be saving of your money, for the loss of time is an irreparable loss, and prodigal youth leads to needy old age (jeunesse prodigue amine vieillesse necessiteuse). 8. Heaven has granted (donner) you wealth, not that you should squander it away (dissiper), but that (pour que) you should make a good use of it (212). 9. God has granted (accorder) sleep to the wicked, that the good might have a few moments of quiet (tranquillite). 10. I doubt whether our neighbors would have amassed such great wealth, if they had not lived with economy. 11. I wish you would be more economical. 12. Would you wish us to preserve a part of these grapes? 13. Would to God my brother would give up the idea of going to the war ! 14. If he persists in his resolution, I will pray that Heaven may pre- serve him in the midst of danger. 15. Do you despair of his coming back? 16. I do not ; but I wish something would occur (survenir) which would prevent him from starting. 17. Take care that he does not hear you say so. 18. I would myself pre- vent his starting, if I had it in my power. 19. Did you doubt my being opposed (oppose) to this expedition ? 20. I never doubted war being a great calamity (malheur) for a country. 21. I doubt whether our friends would have carried through their enterprise without our assistance. 71. SOIXANTE-ONZIEME LEQOK Imperative — 2d and 3d Pers. Sing., and 2d Plur. 262 # (a.) In the second person singular of the imperative, the form of the verb is the same as in the first person singular of the present of the indicative ; as, Speak. Come. See. Take. Parle. Viens. Vois. Prends. * The conjunction malgre que is used only with the verb avoir, preceded by en, 282 soixante-onzieme le£on, Exceptions : Go. Have. Be. Know. Go and call him. Come and see me. Va. Aie. Sois. Sache. Ya l'appeler. Viens me voir. Eem. — When the second person singular of the imperative ends with a vowel, s is added before y, and before en, the pronoun. Go there. Offer some to those ladies. Yas-y. Offres-en a ces dames. (b.) The third person, singular and plural, of the imperative, is the same as the third person, singular and plural, of the sub- junctive present ; as, Let him have. Let them have. QuHl ait. Qu'ils aient. Let him say so. Let him do it. QuHl le dise. Qu'il lefasse. 263. TO BOIL. Boiled. Bouillir, irr. Bouilli. I boil. We boil. Je bous. Nous bouillons. To MOVE. Moved. Mouvoir, irr. Mu. I move. We move. Je meus. Nous mouvons. They move. lis meuvent. To CONCLUDE. Concluded. Conclure, irr. Conclu. I conclude. We conclude. Je conclus. Nous concluons. To RESOLVE. Resolved. Resoudre. Resolit. I resolve. We resolve. Je re sous. Nous resolvons. To GROW. Grown. Croitre. Cru. I grow. We grow. Je crois. Nous croissons. 264 • Rem. 1. — To grow and an adjective are generally ex- pressed in French by a verb of the second conjugation, formed from the adjective ; as, grandir, to grow tall ; grossir, to grow larger, to swell ; rajeunir, to grow young again ; vieillir, to grow old ; blanchir, to grow white ; verdir, to grow green. These, and generally all other inceptive verbs, are construed with avoir, when they express action, and with etre, when they express the state at which any thing has arrived ; as, You have grown much in a short Yous avez bien grandi en peu de time. temps. You have grown very tall. Yous etes bien grandi SOIXANTE-ONZIEME LE£ON. 283 Kem. 2. — The verb /aire is necessary before all verbs that ex- press action which supposes an agent different from the subject : Boil some water. Faites bouillir de l'eau. Cook the meat. Faites cuire la viande. Koast it. Faites-la rotir. And as we say : f observe, je remarque cela, I observe that ; we must also sav : I will observe to you that . . . I called his attention to that. Je vous ferai remarquer que . Je lui ai fait observer cela. 265* Under shelter. To be sheltered from the storm. To shelter one's self. Let us seek shelter somewhere. Along. All along this walk. All the year round. Opposite. In front of, over the way. On account of. He lives opposite the theatre. "We lodge over the way. For what reason ? To keep house. To break up housekeeping. The keeping of a family comes high. To board, to live in a boarding-house. To go to board. To board, to receive boarders. A Vabri {de). A convert (de). Etre a l'abri de l'orage. Se mettre a l'abri. Cherchons a nous mettre a l'abri quelque part. Le long de. Tout le long de cette allee. Tout le long de l'annee. Vis a vis, (adv.) Vis-d-vis de, (prep.) En face, (adv.) En face de, (prep.) A cause de. II demeure vis-a-vis du theatre. Nous logeons ici en face. A cause de quoi. Tenir maison, or menage. Rompre son menage. L'entretien d'une famille coute cher. Etre en pension. Se mettre en pension. Prendre en pension. VOCABULAIRE Yl. The Creator. Le Createur. The forget-me-not. La germandree. The language. Le langage. Poetry. La poesie. The emblem. L'embl6me. The rose. La rose. The lily. Le lis. The tulip. La tulipe. The pink. L'oeillet. The daisy. La marguerite. Mignonnette. Le reseda. Gilliflower. La giroflee. 284 SOIXANTE-ONZIEME LE£ON. The maintenance. The sweetmeat. A shed. A shelter. L'entretien. Le bonbon. Un hangar. Un abri. The hyacinth. The violet. A green -house. A walk. My Yis-a-via,(danc.) Mon vis-a-vis. The face. L'hyacinthe La violette. Une serre. Une allee. La face. To boil. To cook. To move. To conclude. To grow. To fly away. To break. To break up. Kapidly. Opposite. Along. Bouillir, irr. Cuire, irr. Mouvoir, irr. Conclure, irr. Croitre, irr. S'envoler. - Rompre. Kapidement Vis-a-vis. Le long de. To fry. To roast. To stir. To resolve. To grow tall. To escape. To subject. Very fast, visibly. In front o£ ^ Over the way. ) On account of. Frire, irr. R6tir. Bouger. Resoudre (de), irr. Grandir. S'e'chapper (a). Assujettir (a). A vue d'ceil. En face. A cause de. Exercice 71. 1. Viens voir, Henri, ce que ma tante m'a donne. 2. Quelle jolie corbeille ! laisse-moi la voir. 3. Tiens, la voila ; aie soin de ne pas la casser. 4. N'aie pas peur que je la casse. 5. Va eueillir des fleurs au jar din. 6. Viens-y done avec moi. 7. Voila des hyacinthes le long de cette allee. 8. Ob, qu'elles sont belles ! 9. Et voici, tout le long du mur, des ceillets et des mar- guerites. 10. Cueilles-en pour remplir ta corbeille. 11. Wen cueille pas sans demander permission a maman. 12. Maman est dans la cour ; vas-y lui demander si nous pouvons en eueillir. 13. II va pleuvoir; sauvons-nous. 14. Ce ne sera qu'une on- dee ; restons ici sous cet arbre ; nous y serons a l'abri de la pluie. 15. Ou le jardinier va-t-il mettre les tulipes? 16. II va les met- tre a couvert dans la serre. 17. N'est-ce pas que tout croitra rapidement apres la pluie? 18. Certainement : mes jeunes ar- bres grandiront a. vue d'oeil, et dans quelques jours nous aurons des roses, du reseda et de la giroflee. 19. Tiens, voila ce bel oiseau qui vient se mettre a Tabri sous notre hangar. 20. Sois tran quille ; ne bouge pas; si tu te meus, il s'envolera. 21. Voi- SOIXANTE-OKZIEME LECOX. 285 la qu'il entre dans la serre ; prends garde qu'il n'en sorte. 22. J'einpecherai bien qu'il ne s'en aille ; je fermerai la porte. 23. Mets-toi en face de la fenetre pour empecher qu'il ne s'echappe par le carreau casse. 24. La fenetre vis-a-vis est ouverte ; il s'echappera par la. 25. C'est dommage ;. il est si beau ! 26. Qu'il s'en aille, le pauvre petit ; il aime mieux la liberte qu'une cage doree et nos bonbons. — 27. Faut-il que la cuisiniere fasse bouillir le gigot? 28. Je l'aime mieux roti; qu'elle le porte chez le boulanger, pour le faire cuire au four (oven). 29. Qu'a- vez-vous resolu de faire ? 30. J'ai resolu de rompre mon me- nage et de me mettre en pension. 31. Et a cause de quoi vou- lez-vous faire cela? 32. Parce que l'entretien d'une famille coute clier. 33. Vous croyez done qu'il coute moins cher d'etre en pension que de tenir menage ? 34. Oui ; ma femme m'a fait observer cela depuis long-temps. 35. Ou voulez-vous vous met- tre en pension? 36. Chez la dame francaise qui demeure vis-a- vis d'ici. 37. Que concluez-vous du discours de ce monsieur? 38. J'en conclus que madame n'aime pas a etre assujettie aux soins du menage tout le long de l'annee. Theme 71. (In the following Exercise, use the second person singular in the sentences which are marked with an asterisk.) 1. * Stop a moment, Henry, behold these tulips, with their colors (au teint) so fresh and bright .(si eclatant). 2. * See yon- der, pinks and daisies all along that walk. 3. * Go and gather some, and take some to your sisters. 4. How beautiful those hyacinths are ! 5. * Do not gather any of them, without asking permission of the gardener. 6. * He is yonder, go thither and ask him, if you may gather a few. 7. In another month (dans un mois d'ici) we shall have roses, mignonnette and gillyflower ; shall we not, uncle ? 8. * Certainly : you are fond of flowers, Hen- ry ? 9. I am, uncle (Oui, mon oncle) ; I often think, when looking at them (en les regardant) in silence, that they are telling me, with a secret voice (d^une voix secrete), things from Heaven. 10. And how sorry I am, when some one comes, who breaks the silence 286 SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME LE^ON. and disturbs my dream (et me tire de ma reverie). 11. All na- ture speaks of its Creator : the language of flowers is the language of poetry v which is a daughter of Heaven. 12. The rose, the queen of flowers, is the emblem of beauty ; the white lily resem- bles innocence; the violet indicates {marque) gentleness; and the modest forget-me-not teaches us not to despise what is hum- ble and lowly {humble et has). 13. I believe we are going to have a storm ; there, it thunders already (voila deja le tonnerre qui gronde). 14. Let us take shelter under that shed, or in the green-house. 15. Be not afraid of the thunder; it is but anoth- er sound (une variation de ton) of that same voice that speaks to you in the flowers. 16. There is not a breath (un souffle) of wind; the leaves on the trees do not move. 17. After this rain the grass will grow rapidly. 18. My corn (mats) has grown very fast. 19. It has grown so much, that I can hide in it (m?y cacher). 20. Tell the cook to fry (subj.) the fish. 21. Boil some water. 22. Have you resolved upon breaking up house- keeping? 23. We have concluded on going to board, on account of the bad health (du peu de sante) of my wife. 24. I will also remark to you, that it is less expensive (coiiteux) to board than to keep house. 25. I am glad that my wife has escaped, at least for some time, the cares of a house (menage), to which she was subjected all the year round. 26. We board over the way. 27. We lodge in the front ; our windows are opposite yours. 28. Let that man wait until I am ready. 29. Let those men say what they like ; what does that matter to us ? 72. SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME LEgON. Remarks on the pronoun Ce. 266t The infinitive is sometimes used as the subject of a sen- tence; as, To speak too much is imprudent. Parler trop est imprudent. soixa:s,te-douzieme lec/on. 287 Rem. 1. — Etre, placed between two infinitives, must be pre- ceded by the pronoun ce ; as, To do good to men, is to do homage Faire du bien aux hommes, c'est to God. rendre hommage a Dieu. Rem. 2. — Ce is used after two or more infinitives, and after an attributive clause of some length. Eating, drinking and sleeping, is all Boire, manger, dormir, c'est tout ce he does. qu'il fait. The surest means of having friends, Le plus sur moyen d'avoir des amis, is to be good and obliging. c'est d'etre bon et obligeant. Rem. 3. — When ce, followed by a relative pronoun, begins a sentence, it is to be repeated before the verb of the second prop- osition, if that verb is etre ; as, What is certain, is that the world Ce qui est certain, c'est que le is wrong. monde est de travers. Rem. 4. — When, in this case, Ure is followed by a noun, ce may be omitted, if the noun is in the singular.* What we seek is truth. Ce que nous cherchons, est, or c'est, la verite. Rem. 5. — Eire, preceded by ce, is put in the plural only, when it is followed by the third person plural ; as, Vice is what degrades man. Ce sont les vices qui degradent 1'homme. Rem. 6. — Etre, preceded by ce and introducing a conjunctive sentence, either remains in the present, or corresponds in tense with the time it refers to ; as, It was in Paris that I saw him. C'est a Paris que je l'ai vu. It was at the moment when I was C'etait au moment ou j'allais partir. going to start. Rem. 7. — Ce and que are sometimes separated by etre and some quality that refers to the noun following que, for the purpose of expressing a simple proposition with greater energy. Csesar was a great captain. C'etait un grand capitaine que Ce- sar. Paris is a fine place to live in. C'est un beau sejour que Paris. * When ttre is followed by an adjective, ce is not used. 288 SOIXANTE-BOUZIEME LE£ON. Rem. 8. — When que is followed by an infinitive, de must pre- cede the infinitive ; as, It is a misfortune to be without C'est un malheur que d'etre sans friends. amis.* Eem. 9. — Cest a vous a. . , bespeaks turn; c'est a vous de. . duty or right ; as, It is your turn to speak. C'est a vous a parler. It is your duty (or your right) to C'est a vous de parler. speak. 267« To be of use. Of what use is that knife to gardener ? He uses it to prune his vine. To be of no use. To be of no use, (worthless.) To avail nothing. That cloak is of no use to me never wear it. What avails it to weep ? It avails nothing. To stand instead of. I use this cloak as a cover for horse. To be as a father to any one. To escort a lady. To live like a Christian. To behave like a blunderhead. Servir a. the A quoi ce couteau sert-il au jardi- nier ? JI1 lui sert a tailler sa vigne. II s'en sert pour tailler sa vigne. Servir a rien. t Servir de rien. ; I Ce manteau ne me sert a rien; je ne le mets jamais. A quoi sert-il de pleurer? Cela ne sert de rien. Servir de. my Ce manteau sert de couverture au cheval. ( Servir de pere a qqn. ( Tenir lieu de pere a qqn. Servir de cavalier a une dame. Vivre en chretien. Se comporter en etourdi. 268. Let us have pity on our fellow- creatures, and lend a helping hand to the unfortunate. Religion commands us to do it; moreover, humanity obliges us to it ; besides, the interests of socie- ty require it. Ayons pitie de nos semblables, et tendons la main aux malheureux. La religion nous Fordonne ; outre cela, l'humanite nous y oblige. D'ailleurs, l'interet de la societe" le demande. * In such sentences, que may be omitted ; as, Cest un devoir d'obliger see amis ; or, C 'fet un devoir que d'obliger ses amis. SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME LE^ON. 289 To bestow alms. To practise virtue. To practise speaking. To exercise one another in conver- sation. To keep up a conversation. To be the first to propose a thing. To expatiate on the subject. To do justice. To render, or administer justice. Faire la charite, or l'aam6ne. Pratiquer la vertu. S'exercer a parler. S'exercer les uns les autres a la con- versation. Soutenk uoe conversation. Prendre ^initiative. S'etendre sur un sujet. Rendre justice. Rendre la justice. The Christian. Love. Our fellow-crea- ture. Our neighbor. The unfortunate. The dream. The gentleman. The cavalier. The use. Pasteboard. The band-box. VOCABULAIRE 12. Le chretien. Oharity. La charity. L'amour. Friendship. L'amitie. Notre semblable. Humanity. L'humanite. Le prochain. Justice. La justice. Les malheureux. Compassion. La compassion. Le reve, le songe. Pity. La pitie. Le cavalier. The meeting. [•La reunion. The company. L'emploi. The rule, the ruler. La regie. Le carton. The cover. [• La couverture. The blanket. ihize. ) ssion- r To be of use. To sympath: To compassion- ate. To split, to cleave. To practise. To exercise. To sustain. ) To keep up. ) Commendable. Paternal Thoughtless. Furthermore. Besides, moreover. At all events. Servir a. Compatir. Fendre. Pratiquer. Exercer. Soutenir. Louable. Paterae! fitourdi. De plus. D'ailleurs. Quoiqu'il en soit. To be as. To take pity on. To pity. To hold out. To converse (on). To jest. Charitable. Brotherly. Advanced, Besides. Moreover. Like, (equal to.) 13 Servir de. [■ Avoir pitie de. Tendre. S'entretenir (de), Converser. Plaisanter. Charitable. Fraternel. Avance". Outre cela. En outre. En. 29G SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME LECOtf. EXERGICE 72. 1. Dites-moi quel est le premier devoir du chretien. 2. Ai- mer le bon Dieu avant tout, et le prochain comme soi-merne, c'est le premier devoir du chretien. 3. Serions-nous heureux, si nous vivions eu bons chretiens ? 4. Oui, M. ; vivre en chretien, c'est vivre heureux. 5. Que faut-il faire pour v T ivre en bon chre- tien I 6. Outre ce que je viens de dire, il faut compatir aux maux de ses semblables ; de plus, il faut tendre la main aux mal- heureux. 7. Ne faut-il pas faire des charites ? 8. La religion nous l'ordonne ; outre cela, l'humanite nous y oblige ; d'ailleurs, Fetat serait en danger, si les riches ne secouraient pas les pauvres, 9. N'est-ce pas un beau present du ciel que la religion chretien- ne? 10. De tous les presents que le ciel nous a faits, c'est le plus beau. 11. Aimez-vous a converser avec vos amis? 12. C'est un bien doux plaisir pour moi que de m'entretenir avec eux. 13. De quoi vous entretenez-vous ? 14. Nous nous entre- nons de nos etudes. 15. Conversez-vous en francais avec eux ? 16. Pas sou vent; nous le trouvons difficile de soutenir la con- versation en francais. 17. Yous devriez vous exercer a la con- versation les uns les autres ; on est moins g6ne entre amis qu'a- vec des etrangers. 18. C'est vrai ; mais il est si difficile de sou- tenir une conversation dans une langue etrangere ; d'ailleurs, il faudrait que quelqu'un prit l'initiative, et introduisit la coutume de parler francais dans nos reunions, et personne n'y parait dis- pose. 19. C'est a vous de prendre cette initiative; vous etes le plus avance. 20. Yous plaisantez ; je ne suis pas plus avance que les autres. 21. Quoi qu'il en soit, je vous conseille de cher- cher les occasions de vous exercer a parler. 22. Yoici ce que j'ai resolu de faire : je veux me mettre en pension dans une mai- son, ou presque tous les pensionnaires {boarders) sont francais. 23. Je vais vous faire quelques questions sur les difficultes que presente l'emploi du verbe servir ; y repondez-vous ? 24. Nous y repondrons bien volontiers, 25. A quoi cette hache sert-elle au cuisinier? 26. II s'en sert pour fendre son bois. 27. A quoi ces cartons servent-ils a votre frere ? 28. lis lui servent a y mettre ses papiers. 29. Cet outil vous sert-il a quelque chose? SOIXANTE-DOUZIEME LE£ON. 291 30. II ne me sert a rien. 31. Ce cMle vous sert-il de rnanteau? 32. II me sert de rnanteau, et quelquefois il me sert de couver- ture, la nuit. 33. Est-ce a vous a repondre, M. Henri? 34. Non, c'est a M. Charles. 35. Eh bien, M. Charles, a quoi sert-il de se plaindre, quand on est malade? 36. Cela ne sert de rien. 37. Voila dix heures qui sonnent, c'est le temps de m'en aller. 38. Cette pendule avance d'un quart d'heure. 39. Je vous de- mande pardon ; je crois plutot qu'elle retarde de quelques mi- nutes. 40. Pardonnez-moi, l'horloger est venu la remonter ce matin, et il Fa reglee en meme temps. Theme 72. 1. To do good to those that have offended us, is a commend- able action ; but what is far (bien) more difficult, is to do justice to those who have not offended us. 2. Of all the virtues, the one we are most concerned (quHl nous importe le plus) in prac- tising, is charity. 3. To bestow alms is to render ourselves agreeable to God ; moreover, what would become of that crowd of unfortunate beings (tous ces malheureux) that want our succor, if we did not lend them a helping hand. 4. Humanity obliges us to it ; besides, society would be in danger, if the rich should withdraw [refuser a) their assistance from the poor. 5. Let us, therefore, pity our fellow-creatures ; our own interest commands us to do it ; furthermore, our duty binds us to it. 6. Let us be charitable ; and when the poor {sing,) stretch out their hands (sing.) to us, let us not turn away our eyes ; the sight of misery does good to the heart of the Christian ; it stirs up (excite?*) compassion, which extends the sphere (f) of brotherly love. 7. But why should I expatiate on this subject, since words avail nothing. 8. What we want, are good actions, good examples. 9. The earth would be (266, E. 7) a blessed abode (un heureux sejour), if men lived here like true Christians! 10. And life would be a beautiful dream, if every hand that is held out to us, were the hand of a brother! 11. Do you converse with your friends in the French language (en francais)^ 12. I am not sufficiently advanced to keep up a conversation in French. 13. 292 SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME LE£ON. In hearing you speak, one would not suppose it (A vous entendre parler on ne dirait pas cela). 14. You are jesting; I assure you that I am at a loss* how to speak (de dire) two words in succes- sion (de suite). 15. It is not for want of knowledge (savoir), I believe; you should practise speaking. 16. We propose, my friends and I, forming a society, for the purpose of exercising one another in conversation. I hope you will come to our meetings. 17. It will be a pleasure to me (pour moi) to go and spend the evening among you ; and I will do all I can to sustain your ef- forts. 18. Of what use are those band-boxes to you? 19. They are of no use to me. 20. Is that too] of any use to you? 21. The servant uses it to split the fire-wood (le hois a bruler). 22. Of what use is that cane to you? 23. I use it as a ruler. 24. Who was your escort at the fair, Miss Mary? 25. My cousin Charles, but I will never have him any more as my escort (de lui pour cavalier) ; he behaved like a blunderhead. 73. SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME LEQON. Present Participle. 269. The present participle of all verbs ends in ant. It has the same stem as the first person plural of the indicative present, f Allons. Venous. Voyons. Ecrivons. Allant. Venant. Voyant. Ecrivant. With the exception of the verbs, avoir , etre, savoir, echoir, seoir ; whose present participles are ayant, etant, sachant, echeant, seant. 270. The present participle is invariable. It is sometimes preceded by the preposition en, and sometimes not. * Je stcis emharrasse. t The present participle is a primitive part of the verb ; from it are formed the three persons plural of the present, the whole of the imperfect, indicative, and also the present subjunctive. SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME LECOF. 293 (a.) The present participle, preceded by en, can be used only with reference to the subject of the sentence : 1st. To express the most enduring of two actions, performed at the same time ; as, She sings while working. Elle chante en travaillant. I read while warming myself. Je lis en me chauffant. 2d. To denote the manner or means by which we attain an end; as, It is not in listening to our passions Ce n'est pas en ecoutant ses pas- that we live contentedly, but in sions qu'on vit content, mais en regulating them. les reglant. (b.) The present participle, without en, is used : 1st. To introduce an incidental proposition ; as, A scholar who knows his interests, Un eleve connaissant ses interets, will not neglect to study his les- ne negligera pas d'etudier ses sons. leeons. 2d. At the head of a sentence, to express a permanent state or habitual action ; as, Always suffering, how can I be Souffrant toujours, comment puis-je cheerful? etre gai. 3d. In an absolute manner, denoting a circumstance ; as, Peace being concluded, the troops La paix etant conclue, les troupes withdrew. se retirerent. Should such be the case, I shall Le cas echeant, je saurai me tirer know how to manage. d' affaire. Rem. — The present participle, without en, may refer to the ob- ject of the verb, when it expresses an explanatory idea which forms part of that object; as, I saw him walking in the garden. Je l'ai vu se promenant dans le jar- din. But: I saw him, while I was walking in Je Pai vu, en me promenant dans le the garden. jardin. 294 SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME LECON. 271 • There are verbal adjectives, formed from trie verb, and having the same ending (ant) as the present participle. These are variable, and express a permanent state or manner of being, whereas the present participle expresses action. The latter may govern an object, like a verb ; the former can have no object ; as, An obliging person. A person obliging his friends. Those provident men perceived the danger. Those men foreseeing the danger. Une personne obligeante, (v. adj.) Une personne obligeant ses amis, (pr.p.) Ces hommes prevoyants ont apercu le danger, (v. adj.) Ces hommes prevoyant le danger, (pr. p.) Rem. — In English, the verbal adjective generally precedes the nonn, and the present participle follows it. 272. The tenses of etre, followed by a and the infinitive, are sometimes used; and are equivalent to the present participle, preceded by the tenses of to be ; as, He is writing. They are playing in the yard. She was sewing. We were talking. II est a ecrire. lis sont a jouer dans la cour. Elle etait a coudre. Nous etions a causer. VOCABULAIRE 13. To go or run over. To look over. To peruse. To bloom. To blossom. To flourish. To grow young again. To manage. r Parcourir. r Fleurir.* j-Raje To grow larger. ) Grossir To swell. ) To grow green. Verdir. To grow old. Vieillir. Faire en sorte de. To visit. Visiter. * In the sense of to flourish, the present participle of fleurir, is florissant, and the imperfect, florissais. SmXANTE-TREIZIEME LE£ON. 295 To take care of. To look after. To attend to. To refresh, • Soigner. Rafraiehir. To decide. "\ To determine. (Decider* To prevail upon. [Determiner. To induce. J To talk, to chat. Causer. Smiling. Che erf uL Pleasant. Newly born. Budding. Undecided. r Riant. y Naiss&nt. Indecis. • En attendant. Meanwhile. In the mean time. At all events. En tout cas. In the first place. En premier lieu. To direct. To take refresh- ments. To decide. To be decided. To make up o:ne's mind. To interrupt. Delightful. Waving. Diriger. - Se rafraiehir. Se decider (a). ► Se determiner (a). Interrompre. Ravissant. Ondoyant. i En passant. Going along. By the way. Meanwhile; and > Q daEt yet, however. ) Very fast, visibly. A vue d'ceil. In the second place. En second lieu. Exekcice 73* 1. Je jetterai un coup d'oeil sur ces papiers en me chauffant, que ferez-vous en attendant ? 2. Je parcourrai le journal en me promenant. 3. Cette demoiselle n'a-t-elle pas beaucoup grandi en peu de temps ? 4. Elle grandit rapidement et s'embellit en grandissant. 5. N'est-ce pas en vivant qtfon apprend avivre? 6. On acquiert de Pexperience en vieillissant et en souffrant. 7. Croyez-vous qu'un jeune homme ne sachant jamais ses lecons, fasse cles progres ? 8. Je crois tout le contraire ; mais je ne croirais pas qu'un jeune homme connaissant ses interets, negli- gent d'etudier ses lecons. 9. Avez-vu Charles en venant? 10. * The verbs decider, determiner, resoudre, used actively, and having a verb in the infinitive for their direct object, require de; as, I have decided to do it, fai decide db lefaire. "When they have a person for their direct object, they require the preposition d; as, I prevailed upon him to do \t,je Vai decide k lefaire; also when they are used passively or reflectively ; as, Je suis decide, je me suis decide, k lefaire. 296 SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME LEgOJT. Je Pai rencontre allant a son bureau. 11. Fera-t-il en sort© 1 d'etre ici ce soir ? 12. II m'a dit^ en passant, qu'il tacherait de venir. 13. N'est-ce pas un beau spectacle que cette campagne riante, verdissant de jour en jour ? et ces herbes mouvantes, crois- sant a vue d'ceil ; toute cette nature charmante y rajeunissant au retour du printemps? 14. Je ne eonnais rien de plus charmant que ces fleurs naissantes, couvrant la campagne ? et ces plaines ondoyantes, rafraichissant les airs, et des petits oiseaux les voix ravissantes,* cbantant le retour du printemps. 15. Ferons-nous* rafrafcbir nos chevaux dans ce village? 16. Faisons eela; nous nous rafraicbirons en meme temps. 17. Qu'avez-vous decide de faire a l'egard de cette affaire? 18. *Pai decide d r avoir recour& a la loi. 19. Qu'est-ee qui vous determine a faire cela? 20. La justice de ina cause rr/y determine. 21. Croyez-vous y ga- gner quelque cbose? 22. En tout cas, je ne pourrai rien y per- dre. 23. Avez-vous determine votre frere a $tre des notres dans< eette partie de cbasse I 24. II est encore indeeis, .mais je crois; qu r il se deeidera a partir avec nous. 25. Ou sont les enfants? 26. lis sont a jouer dans la cour. 2*1. Que faisait votre frere quand vous etes entre ? 28. II etait a ecrire. 20. Que faisiez- vous quand je suis entre? 30. Nous etions a causer. 31. Je suis facbe de vous avoir interrompus. 32. II n*y a pas lieu;, nous pouvons reprendre notre conversation. Theme 'IS. 2. I will look over tbese papers wbile I breakfast. 2. Will you meanwbile glance over tbe newspaper ? 3. Did you call on Mr. S . . . . in coming ? 4. I met bim going to tbe country. 5. He told me f in passing, tbat be would manage to be back bere by Tuesday next. 6. Has your friend decided to go witb us ? 1. He is yet undecided ; be cannot come to a determination be- fore be bears from bis cousin. 8. Wbat bave you determined to do ? 9. We bave determined to apply to tbe king's minister. 10. What bas determined you to take tbat step? 11. In tbe * This inversion, of placing the indirect objeet before the noun on which it depends^ does not properly belong to- prose composition, but is very common in poetry. SOIXANTE-TREIZIEME LEgON. 297 first place, the embarrassment in which we find ourselves ; and in the second place, the hope that we shall be able to pre- vail upon the minister to do us justice. 12. At all events, we shall know better what course to adopt [quel parti prendre) when we have received his answer. 13. Having resolved upon visiting Spa, we started very early (de grand matin), and arrived at noon in the village of B . . . . , where we stopped to take re- freshments. 14. In the mean time, we were informed that the rain of the previous day had swelled the rivers, and that, the waters having spread over (dans) the country, the communica- tion with Spa was interrupted. 15. This mischance (Ce contre- temps) was very embarrassing. 16. We had no desire whatever (aucune envie) to retrace our steps (de retourner sur nos pas) ; and yet, the idea of waiting in a wretched (miserable) inn, until the waters had receded (se retirer), was by no means cheering (rfavait rien d'attrayant). 17. Finally, we concluded to pay a visit to Mr. A .... , whose residence (demeure) is not far from there. 18. We found Mr. A. . . . in his garden, looking after his flowers, and directing the labors (les travaux) of his garden- ers. 19. I was astonished to see, when I came near him (pr.p.) how much he has changed. 20. He has grown much older since he retired (quitter) from business. 21. As to Mrs. A. . . ., the country air appears to agree with her. 22. She seems (on dirait) to have grown young again. 23. We spent the evening pleasantly, under the hospitable roof (toit hospitalier) of our old (anciens) friends. 24. Next morning (Le lendemain), the waters having receded, we proceeded on our journey, and arrived at the hotel at Spa, just in time for dinner (au moment oil Von se mettait a table). 25. How did the country look in that neighborhood (Comment etait la campagne dans ces environs) ? 26. The coun- try looked beautiful, the trees blossoming, and the corn (les bles) growing visibly. 13* 298 soixante-quatorziSme le^on. 74. SOIXANTE-QUATORZIEME LEQON. Remarks on the Agreement of the Verb with its Subject. 273. Rem. 1. — A verb having for its subject two or more nouns or pronouns in the singular, not connected by ou, must be put in the plural ; and when the nouns or pronouns are of differ- ent persons, it agrees with the first in preference to the second, and with the second in preference to the third ; as, My brother and I will come to see Mon frere et moi, nous viendrons you. vous voir. Rem. 2. — When the words, connected by ow, are of different persons, the verb is put in the plural ; as, He or I will come. Lui ou moi viendrons. Rem. 3. — After two subjects, connected by ni, the verb must be put in the plural, when the affirmation of the state or action is possible with regard to both ; as, Neither has arrived. Ni Tun ni Pautre ne sont arrives. Neither is my father. Ni Tun ni l'autre n'est mon pere. Rem. 4. — When the words forming the subject are synony- mous, or when they are placed as a climax, the verb agrees with the last word ; as, His courage, his boldness astonishes Son courage, son intrepidite nous us. etonne. Time, property, life, every thing Le temps, les biens, la vie, tout est belongs to one's country. a la patrie. Rem. 5. — When two subjects are connected by comme, ainsi que, • Porter a. To induce. To tempt. To plunge. Plonger. To prove. Prouver. * Bonne foi> good faith, honesty ; mauvaise foi, bad faith, dishonesty, 306 SOIXANTE-QUINZIEME LE§ON. To envy. To reveal. To betray. To betray. To avenge. To excuse. To palliate. To light. To enlighten. To clear up. To elucidate. To clear up. To get clear. In vain. Within reach of. Worthy (of). Sensible (to). Private. ( Envier. (trans.) ( Porter envie.(245. [ Reveler. Trahir. Venger. Excuser. PaUier. [• Eclair er. >• Eclair cir. y S'eclaircir. En vain. A la porte*e de. Digne (de). Sensible (a). Particulier. To conceal ; to hide. Cacher. r.2)To conceal. To reveal. To disclose. To injure. To be revenged. To excuse one's self. To apologize. To mislead. To mislay. To darken. To get dark Whence comes. In emulation. Unworthy (of). Taire. t Deceler. Nuire. Se venger (de), > S'excuser. t £garer. Obscurcir. S'obscurcir. D'oii vient. A l'envi. Indigne (de). Heedless, imprudent. Imprudent. Public. Public, -que. ExERCICE 75. 1. A quoi attribuez-vous le mauvais sueces de cette affaire ? 2. Je l'attribue a la trahison d'un des notres. 3. Comment avez- vous pu vous confier a quelqu'un qui vous a trahi ? 4. Telle avait ete la conduite de cet homme qu'il m'inspirait une entiere confiance. 5. Quel motif a pu le determine a reveler les secrets que vous lui aviez confies ? 6. C'est l'interet et l'envie qui Font porte a le faire ; aussi lui ai-je reprocher sa mauvaise foi. 7. Cherchait-il a s'excuser quand vous lui avez fait des reproches ? 8. En vain cherchait-il a pallier son crime ; il ne pouvait cacher la confusion que decelait son front coupable. 9. Enviez-vous au mechant l'avantage que lui procure sa mauvaise foi? 10. Je n'envie point a cet homme le fruit de son crime ; il se presentera bientot une occasion qui me vengera de lui. 11. D'ou vient qu'il y a si peu cle bonne foi dans le monde ? 12. Cela vient de ce que les hommes se portent en vie les uns aux autres. 13. N'est-ce pas le premier devoir de la justice de ne pas nuire a son prochain \ 14. Oui, M. ; cependant on dirait que les plus eclai- . res memes. travaillent a l'envi a se nuire les uns aux autres. 15. SOIXAXTE-QUINZIEME LEgON. 30 7 Ne serious-nous pas plus heureux, si chacun travaillait a assurer le bonheur de son prochain? 16. Certainement : en contribuant au bonheur general, on augmenterait la somme du bonheur par- ticulier. 17. Avez-vous lu la lettre du consul? 18. Je l'ai lue; elle eclaircit en partie la conduite ambigue de ce monsieur. 19. Irons-nous faire un tour a cheval, si le temps s'eclaircit ? 20. Oui, mais au lieu de s'eclaircir, il s'obscurcit. 21. Ou est votre ecurie? 22. Elle est a une portee de fusil d'ici. 23. Vos le- cons sont-elles a la portee de tout le monde ? 24. Je crois qu'elles sont a la portee de la purpart de mes eleves. Theme 75. 1. We often attribute to our skill the success that fortune grants (donner) us, in the same manner as (de meme que) we as- cribe to ill luck the misery into which (ou) our (une) heedless conduct plunges us. 2. Those who have once betrayed us, ought no longer to inspire us with any confidence. 3. He who betrays (reveler) the secrets with which he has been intrusted, proves that he is unworthy of the confidence which was placed in him (qu'on avait en lui). 4. Crime speaks in the breast (cozur) of the guilty ; in vain he seeks to hide it withiu (y), his brow betrays (deceler) what his mouth conceals. 5. Such are the ways of Prov- idence. 6. Does it become you (266, R. 9) to reproach me with this step, into which my friendship for you has betrayed me (en- trainer) ? 7. Perhaps I am wrong to speak of it, but I do not wish to upbraid you. 8. A good man seeks to be revenged of an injury, in returning good for evil. 9. A thought occurred to me, which I wished to communicate to you, but scarcely had I descended the stairs, when a man came in, who asked to speak to me. 10. I do not envy kings their wealth nor their glory ; I envy them the power of doing good. 11. The wise man envies nobody. 12. Whence comes it that men strive in this world to injure one another? 13. It is because private interest prevails over (Vemporte sur) public good. 14. And yet the best means of insuring our own happiness, is to contribute as much as we can to the happiness of all. 15. That idea does not appear to 308 SOIXANTE-SEIZIEME LE£ON. 'be within the comprehension of everybody. 16. When will men be sufficiently enlightened to abjure (renoncer a) vice ! 17. Good children love and obey their parents. 18. Take and use my book, but do not mislay it, as you did the other day. 19. Kead this letter ; it clears up the mystery of his conduct. 20. This exceeds (passe) my comprehension. 21. A good man does ' not associate with, nor listen to the counsels of, the wicked. 22. My friend, he said, is worthy of, and very sensible to, your praises. 23. I do not advise you to start at present, the sky (le del) dark- ens, and every thing announces (annoncer) a storm. 24. We will start as soon as the weather clears up. 76. SOIXANTE-SEIZIEME LEgON. Remarks on the Pronouns. 279 • Rem. 1. — Pronouns stand in the place of nouns, with the exception of ce, ceci, cela, the relative en, and the invariable pro- noun le, which may stand in the place of a sentence. Rem. 2. — A pronoun must not be used to represent a noun closely connected with a verb or a preposition, so as to express but one idea with the verb or the preposition ; as, /aire grace, /aire peur, equivalent to pardonner, effrayer ; and avec politesse, avec amitie, equivalent to poliment, amicalement. It is incorrect to say : Je vous fats grace, quoique vous ne la meritiez pas ; II m'a recu avec politesse, qui rri'a charme ; because the pronouns la and qui have no antecedents. We may say : Je vous fais grace, quoique vous ne le meritiez pas, the invariable pronoun le having reference to the preceding proposition ; and : II rrUa recu avec une politesse, qui rri'a charme, the relative qui having for its antecedent politesse, which, by the use of the determinative ad- jective une, has become an independent noun. Rem. 3. — When a relative clause refers to a preceding sen- tence, the demonstrative pronoun ce must be used as the ante- cedent of the relative pronoun ; as, SOIXAXTE-SEIZIEME LECOX. 309 He received me with kindness, II me recut avec bonte, ce qui m'en- which encouraged me to tell him couragea a lui confier mon secret. my secret. Rem. 4. — Lui, elle, eux, elles, preceded by a preposition, are used only with reference to persons (65) ; in speaking of things, the preposition and pronoun must be expressed by an adverb, implying the meaning of both ; as, dessus, dessous, for upon it, under it (143). If no adverb can be found to supply the place, a different turn must be given to the sentence, by which the preposition will disappear. Thus for : He came with it, say : He brought it ; il Va apporte. Remarks ox Son axd En. 280. Rem. 1. — Son, sa, ses, leur, leurs, may relate to persons or things ; when they relate to things, they must refer to the sub- ject of the proposition in which they stand ; as, Study has its charms. L'etude a ses charmes. Rem. 2. — The relation of result or consequence, between a de- pendent proposition and an object referred to in a preceding proposition, is expressed by en, equivalent to of it, of them ; as, That city is beautiful, I admire its Cette ville est belle, j'en admire les walks. promenades. That business is delicate, its success Cette affaire est delicate, le succes is doubtful. en est douteux. Rem. 3. — Observe, however, that the pronoun en must neces- sarily be the indirect object of a verb. In the sentence : Paris est une ville remarquable, les etrangers admirent la beaute de ses edifices, en could not be substituted for ses, because edifices is the indirect object of a noun. 281. To witness, to testify ; to show. Temoigner. To show discontent. Temoigner du mecontentment. He has shown me much friendship. II m'a temoigne beaucoup d'amitte. 810 SOIXANTE-SEIZIEME LE^ON. To be pleased with one for some thing. To thank him for it. To take it ill or unkindly of one. To play a trick upon one. To laugh in a person's face. To ridicule, to deride somebody. To laugh at. To attack. To seize something. To seize upon. To make one's self master of. To take possession of. To approve. To disapprove. I disapprove very much your rid- iculing that man. He deserves to be ridiculed. Savoir bon gre a qqn. de qq. ch. Savoir mauvais gre a qqn. de qq. ch. Jouer un tour a qqn. Hire au nez de qqn. Se moquer de qqn. Se rire de qqn. Attaquer qq. ch. or qqn. Saisir qq. ch. Se saisir de. S'emparer de. Approuver. Trouver bon. Desapprouver. Trouver mauvais. Je trouve bien mauvais que vous vous moquiez de cet homme. II merit e qu'on se moque de lui. 282. To understand one another. They have a private understanding to impose upon us. To be skilful in a thing. He understands business. He knows nothing about business. To be a judge of. Are you a judge of cloth ? I am not a good judge. To lose sight of. To make a sign, to beckon. To think much of one, to esteem him. To imagine ; to invent. To fancy ; to believe. He fancies he knows it. To yield ; to give up ; to part with. Will you let me have some of that paper ? (Will you part with, (fee?) Appearances are deceitful. That is against the rules of good- breeding. The diamond. Obscurity. Talking of that. Unreasonable. Painful. S'entendre. lis s'entendent ensemble pour nous en imposer. S'entendre a qq. ch. II s'entend aux affaires. II n'entend rien aux affaires. Se connaitre en. Vous connaissez-vous en drap ? Je ne m'y connais pas beaucoup. Perdre de vue. Faire signe a. Faire cas de qqn. Imaginer. S'imaginer. II s'imagine le savoir. Ceder. Voulez-vous me ceder une partie de ce papier. Les apparences sont trompeuses. C'est contre les regies de la bien* seance. Le diamant. L'obscurite'. A propos de cela. Deraisonnable. Penible. SOIXANTE-SEIZIEME LE£OIT. 311 Exercice 76. 1. Me savez-vous bon gre* de vous avoir dit cela? 2. Je vous en sais bon gre. 3. Ce jeune homme nous sait-il mauvais gre de lui avoir indique ses fautes ? 4. II parait vous en savoir mau- vais gre. 5. S'imagine-t-il que cela soit inutile ? 6. Je ne sais pas s'il s'imagine cela, mais il parait en temoigner du mecontente- ment. 7. Pouvez-vous imaginer quelque chose de plus derai- sonnable ? 8. II faut etre bien deraisonnable pour temoigner du mecontentement de cela. 9. Avez-vous joue un tour a Charles? 10. Au contraire, c'est Charles qui s'est entendu avec Jules pour m'en jouer un. 11. Que vous ont-ils fait? 12. Hier a la foire, Jules me fit signe de venir aupres de lui ; aussitot que j'eus quitte ma place, Charles s'en empara. 13. C'etait bien mal de sa part. 14. Et quand je voulus la reprendre, il me rit au nez. 15. Et que fites-vous alors ? 16. J'allais le saisir par le bras pour l'en faire sortir, mais mon oncle, qui etait a cote de lui, me ceda la sienne. 17. A propos de votre oncle, ne parait-il pas avoir perdu de vue l'affaire dont nous lui avons parle ! 1 8. II ne Fa pas perdue de vue ; il a donne ordre a son commis de s'en occuper. 19. Et son commis la soignera-t-il comme ilfaut? 20. Vous pouvez etre tranquille la-dessus ; son commis s'entend aux affaires; mon oncle fait grand cas de lui. 21. Se connait-il en instruments de musique ? 22. II s'y connait beau coup ; il a ete dans ce commerce. Theme 76. 1. They received him with kindness, which rendered his situa- tion less painful. 2. His parents are thankful to them for the friendship they have shown him. 3. Politeness requires that one should pay attention to what is told him. 4. To replace (pour remplacer) kindness, we have invented politeness, which has all its appearances. 5. Virtue resembles the diamond ; dark- ness cannot hide its worth (merite). 6. It is against the rules of good-breeding to ridicule people ; we disapprove very much of your doing so. 7. When one fancies that he knows better than 312 SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTIEME LE£ON. others, and seizes every opportunity to show his knowledge, it seems to me that he deserves to be ridiculed. 8. I do not think much of persons who like to put themselves forward (se /aire valoir) on all occasions ; however, it is not becoming (bienseant) to laugh them in the face, or (ni) to mock them. 9. Why do you look displeased? 10. I disapprove very much of your brother having taken possession of my seat next to that young lady. 11. He thought that you had given it up to him ; if you wish to resume it, I will make him a sign to come here, and he will understand that it was a mistake on his part. 12. If you fancy that we have a private understanding in order to impose upon you, you are mistaken, 13. Are you a judge of fire-arms? 14. No, sir ; I am not. 15. I wish you would accompany me to the shooting-gallery (uu tir), a few steps from here (a quelques pas cPici), in order to examine a brace (une paire) of pistols. 16. If you wish to play a trick upon me, you ought to tell me of it beforehand (d'avance). 17. Having defeated the enemy, our general attacked, and took possession of, the city, which put an end to the war (mettre fin a qq. ch.). 11. SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTlfiME LEQOK 283 • To suspect. Se douter de. I suspected that Je me doutais de cela. To put by or away. Serrer. To drag; to lie about. Trainer. Put by your papers, instead of Serrez vos papiers, au lieu de les letting them lie about in that laisser trainer comme cela. way. To procrastinate, to go slowly about. Trainer les choses en longueur. To take it into one's head. S'aviser de. He took it into his head, the other II s'avisa Fautre jour de me jouer day, to play that trick upon me. ce tour-la. To manage, to set about. S'y prendre. He manages it skilfully. II s'y prend adroitement. SO IX AK TE-DLX-SEPTIEME LE'£ O JS T . 313 In the right way. To find fault with. What fault do you find with that. I find much fault with it. To be close, to be particular. That man is too particular. You are to blame for it. To be useless, in vain, to no purpose. You may say what you please, no- body will believe you, In vain I do my best, I cannot do any thing to his liking. Where are we with it? Where did we leave off! He does not know what he is about. De la "bonne maniere. Trouver a redire a. Que trouvez-vous a redire a celaf J'y trouve beaucoup a redire. Y regarder de pres. Cet homme y regarde de trop pres. La faute en est a vous. Avoir beau. Vous avez beau dire, on ne vous croira pas. J'ai beau, faire de mon mieux, je ne peux rien faire a son gre. Ou en sommes-nous ? Ou en etions-nous I II ne sait pas ou il en ^est, 284. To have a grudge against one. | To bear him ill will. j Whom do you aim at? To disentangle; to unravel. What have you to do with that man? To disagree ; to fall out. To be at variance. To reconcile, to make friends again. To make it up. They were at variance, but they have made it up again. To end. To chatter ; to talk. The matter was soon arranged. To torment, to annoy, to pester. Cavilling, mischief-making. An arbitrator. An impartial judge. To exhaust a person's patience. My patience is at an end; I will tell him my way of thinking. To leave it to one, to refer it to one. To abide by a thing. To appeal to. To protest against. To put up with, to submit to. 14 En vouloir a qqn. A qui en voulez-vous! Demeler. Qu' avez- vous a demeler avec cet homme ? Se brouiller. Etre brouille. Raceommoder, Se raccommoder. Us ont ete brouilles, mais ils se sont raccommodes. Terminer. Jaser. L'affaire fut bientot terminee. Tracasser. Tracassier. Un arbitre. Un juge impartial. Mettre la patience d'un homme a bout. Ma patience est a bout; je lui dirai ma facon de penser. S'en rapporter a qqn. S'en tenir a qq, ch. En appeler a. Reclamer. En passer par. 314 SOIXANTE-DIX-SEPTIEME LECON. He abides by what has been agreed II se tient a ce qui a ete convenu. upon. It will be in vain for you Vous aurez beau reclamer, il to protest, you will have to sub- faudra bien que vous en passiez mit to it. par la. To satisfy; to gratify. Satisfaire. To satisfy ; to discharge. Satisfaire a. To gratify one's vanity. Satisfaire sa vanite. To satisfy the law. Satisfaire a la loi. Exercice 77. 1. Comment vous y prenez-vous pour avoir toujours fini votre besogne de si bonne heure ? 2. Je m'y prends de la bonne ma- niere ; je travaille pendant que les autres jasent et s'amusent. 3. Ne serrez-vous pas vos papiers avant de sortir ? 4. Je vais les mettre sous clef; je ne laisse jamais trainer mes papiers dans ma chambre, quand je n'y suis pas. 5. Vous avez Fair mecon- tent ; y a-t-il quelque chose qui vous tracasse ? 6. II y a des gens bien tracassiers dans ce monde, qui mettraient la patience d'un homme a bout en cinq minutes de temps. 7. A qui en voulez-vous? 8. J'en veux a M. Lebrun. 9. JSTe faites-vous plus d'affaires avec lui? 10. Non, M. ; c'est un homme qui y regarde de trop pres ; puis, il a une maniere de trainer les choses en longueur, de faQon qu'on ne sait jamais ou Ton en est avec lui. 11. Je me doutais bien que vous etiez brouilles; qu'avez- vous eu a demeler ensemble? 12. Un differend sur quelques gourdes. Je voulais m'en rapporter a la decision d'un arbitre, il y consentait. Lorsque l'affaire etait decidee contre lui, il voulait en appeler a un autre. Vous seriez-vous doute de cela? 13. Non ; certainement pas. Et comment l'affaire a-t-elle ete termi- nee? 14. Monsieur, lui ai-je dit, je m'en tiens a ce qui a ete convenu. II avait beau reclamer, il lui a bien fallu en passer par la. 15. L'idee que vous me donnez de cet homme, s'accorde avec ce que mon associe dit de lui ; il le frequent-ait autrefois, mais il ne le voit plus. 16. Eh bien, que dit-il de lui, votre as- socie ? 17. II dit que c'est un homme qui trouve a redire a tout ce qu'il voit et a tout ce qu'on fait. 18. Ma foi, votre associe a bien raison. On a beau tout faire pour contenter ce monsieur, SOIXANTE-DIX SEPTIEME LE£ON. 315 II trouve toujours son mais et son si a placer. 19. Voila de ces hommes que je ne puis souffrir ; ils sont decourageants. 20. N'est-ce pas qu'on dirait qu'ils en veulent a tout le monde. Theme 77. 1. Do you let your clothes lie about in this manner in your room ? 2. I always put my things away, but people have come to torment me all the morning ; I have not had a moment to myself (a moi). 3. I must write to my agent (homme d'affaires)] he is in the habit of procrastinating matters, which just now (en ce moment) vexes me exceedingly (desoler). 4. My patience is exhausted, and that of my creditors too. 5. I am at a loss (Je ne sais plus) how to manage to get rid of them. 6. You are to blame for it ; nothing of the kind ever disturbs my peace (ne vient troubler mon repos), 7. How do you manage ? 8. I set about it in the right way ; I never buy on credit. 9. Have you fallen out with the painter, who lives over the way? 10. We are no longer friends together ; he took it into his head, the other day, to cheat me. 11. I suspected that you were at variance; what have you had to do with him ? 12. I had consented to take a picture of him, in payment of a debt ; as we could not agree about the price, we were going to leave it to an artist of his ac- quaintance. 13. But seeing that they made signs to one anoth- er, I suspected that they had a private understanding, in order to impose upon me. 14. I therefore concluded not to abide by the decision of the arbitrator, and accordingly protested against it, wishing to appeal to a more impartial judge. 15. But it was in vain for me to protest, I had to submit to their will (par ou ils voulaient). 16. Have you a grudge against this young man? 17. I bear him no ill will, but I do not like him ; he is too par- ticular. 18. What fault do you find with the conduct of these young people? 19. I find much fault with it. 20. I cannot approve of any one's seizing, at table, upon any thing he likes, without regard (egard) to other persons, and laughing in the face of those who show discontent at the sight of such selfish conduct (egoism). 21. I disapprove likewise of (Je trouve egale- 316 SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEME LE£ON. ment mauvais que) a young man's seizing every opportunity to gratify his vanity, at the expense of good sense and decorum. 22. If the former are to be despised, the latter deserve to be ridi- culed. 23. I have a great mind to tell them my way of think- ing. 24. If you do, they will not thank you for it. 25. Your tutoring them will be to no purpose ( Vous aurez beau les mori- gener) ; they will laugh you in the face. 26. Believe me (Cro- yez-rrten), you will never have friends, if you are so particular. IS. SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEME LEQON. Remarks on the Past Participle. 285. The rules regulating the agreement of the past participle, have been given (135), (140), (145, a), (147, a). The application of these rules presents, in some cases, difficul- ties which require further explanation. Rem. 1. — When the past participle is followed by an infinitive, the preceding object may belong to the participle or to the infin- itive; as, (a.) I heard her sing, (a lady.) (6.) I heard it sung, (a song.) When the object can be made the subject of the second verb, then it is governed by the first, as in Ex. (a.), / heard her, who was singing ; in this case, the participle agrees with it : Je Vai entendue chanter. But in Ex. (6.), the object is governed by the second verb : / heard somebody sing the song ; in this case there is no agreement : Je Vai entendu chanter. Therefore we say, with agreement of the past participle : I allowed them to start. Je les ai laisses partir. I heard thern blame your impru- Je les ai entendus blame r votre dence. imprudence. I saw them drive back the enemy. Je les ai vus repousser les ennemis. SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEME LE£ON. 31*7 And without agreement : They suffered themselves to be sur- lis se sont laisse surprendre. prised. I heard them blamed, on account Je les ai entendu blamer, a cause of their imprudence. de leur imprudence. I saw them driven back by the en- Je les ai vu repousser par les enne- emy. mis. Rem. 2.— The infinitive is sometimes understood, after the par- ticiples pu, du, voulu, in which case, there is no agreement; as, I did him all the service I could, Je lui ai rendu tous les services que ought, would. j'ai pu, du, voulu, (lui rendre.) Rem. 3. — When the participle is followed by an infinitive, pre- ceded by a preposition, we must observe which is the direct, and which the indirect, object of the participle. We say : Frier qqn. de /aire une chose, with the person for the direct object of the verb ; and therefore we must say, with agreement of the participle, He asked us to write to him. II nous a pries de lui ecrire. But we say : recommander qq. ch. a qqn., or recommander a qqn. de /aire qq. ch., with the person for the indirect object of the verb ; and therefore we say, without agreement, He recommended us to write to H nous a recommande de lui e'crire. him. Rem. 4. — The participles excepts, suppose, passe, when they are placed before the noun which they modify, remain invaria- ble ; after the noun they agree with it. We say : excepte mes amis, suppose ces faits, pass£ cette heure ; but : mes amis ex- ceptes, ces faits supposes, cette heure passee. Rem. 5. — It is the same with regard to the participles, ap- prouve, certifie, vu {considering). Rem. 6. — The adjective nu, placed before cou, tete, bras, pied, is also invariable ; as nu-pieds, barefooted ; but, pieds nus. 286. The more I study, the more I learn. Plus j'etudie, plus j'apprends. The richer he is, the less he is satis- Plus il est riche i moins il est con- ned, tent. 318 SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEME LE£ON. The more, . . .as. The less. . . .as. I esteem him the more, because he is poor. I like him so much the better for it. He is so much the less entitled to your kindness, as he appears to attach little value to it. Across, through. Across the fields. Through the body. To speak at random. D'autant plus. . . .que. D'autant moins. . . .que. Je l'estime d'autant plus qu'il est pauvre. Je Ten aime d'autant mieux. II merite d'autant moins vos bonte's qu'il par ait en faire peu de cas. A travers. Au travers de. A travers les champs. Au travers du corps. Parler a tort et a travers. Kem. — Voici, voilA — voici refers to what follows; voila, to what precedes ; as, This is what he said : " I have lost my money ; this is a sad accident for my creditors." Voici ce qu'il dit: " J'ai perdu mon argent ; voild un facheux accident pour mes creanciers." 287. To implicate ; to compromise. His health is impaired. To squander. To use somebody well. To use somebody ill. Notwithstanding that ; for all that. Although he did not treat me well, for all that I like him. Although that man is not rich, he is notwithstanding very kind to- wards the poor. To excite curiosity. To stir up compassion. To burst out laughing. You have exposed yourself to pub- lic laughter. I see nothing laughable in that. To make a great show. To have one's own way. To lose one's wits. Not to know what one is about. The house took fire. Compromettre. Sa sante est compromise. Dissiper. En user bien avec qqn. En user mal avec qqn. Ne laisser pas de. Quoiqu'il n'en ait pas bien use avec moi, je ne laisse pas de l'aimer. Quoique cet homme ne soit pas ri- che, il ne laisse pas d'etre chari- table envers les pauvres. Exciter la curiosite. Exciter la compassion. ( Eclater de rire. | Faire un eclat de rire. Vous vous etes expose a la risee publique, Je ne vois rien de risible en cela. Faire de l'eclat. Faire a sa tete. Perdre la tete. Ne savoir que faire. Le feu a pris a la maison. SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEME LEC/ON. 319 To set the house on fire. Mettre le feu a la maison. An increase. Un surcroit. For more bad luck, he dislocated Pour surcroit de malheur, il s'est his shoulder. demis l'epaule. It is not so. It is not the case. II n'en est rien. He escaped with a fright. II en a ete quitte pour la peur. To escape with. En etre quitte pour. To be dislocated. Se demettre. To resign one's office. Se demettre de sa place. The surgeon has set his arm. Le chirurgien lui a remis le bras. To be in a fever. Avoir la fievre. To have an attack of fever. Avoir un acces de fievre. Her fever has returned. La fievre l'a reprise. To put one in a fever. Donner la fievre a qqn. To give way. Se laisser aller. To abandon one's self. S'abandonner. To suffer one's self to be led away. Se laisser entrainer. You are welcome. Vous etes le bienvenu. I bid you farewell. Je vous fais mes adieux. Theme 78. 1. Soldiers, you are welcome under the roofs (toit) which you have so bravely (yaillamment) defended. 2. We have seen you drive back the enemy (pi) who had come to surprise you. 3. You did not allow yourselves to be surprised. 4. You have not allowed them to trample on [fouler) the soil in which (oil) your fathers sleep (reposer). 5. You have rendered to your country all the services which you could. 6. Come and enjoy the blessings (bonheur) of peace under the shade of those trees which you have seen grow up. 7. The more I read the life ot Washington, the more I admire the great virtues of that hero (heros). 8. I love him the more, as he was modest and disin- terested (desinteresse). 9. Although he had reached the pinna- cle of human grandeur (au faite des grandeurs humaines), he was, nevertheless, courteous towards all (affable envers tout h monde). 10. He is so much the more entitled to our admi- ration, as he appeared to value it little. 11. In the winter of 1776, the soldiers of the republic marched barefooted through fields covered with snow; they often suffered for necessaries 820 SOIXAXTE-DIX-KUITIEME LEfJOKV (manquer <$u necessaire) 7 but, for all that, they had ©oaf deuce m? their general. 12. A young officer, feeling himself mortally (a mort) wounded by a bullet (une balh), which had passed through his body, exclaimed i " This is a sad accident for my creditors.'^ 13. Young men, you have suffered yourselves to be fed away by bad examples. 14. You have given way to the charms of an idle life, and behold the consequences 1 15. The golden (pre- cieux) opportunities you have had to improve your minds, you have suffered (them)* to escape. 16. Those who used you well^. your friends and relatives, you have offended (them)* by your conduct. 17. Your health is impaired and your fortunes are squandered. 18. This is what might be said to many young men who have listened to the voice of pleasure^ instead of follow- ing the path of their duty. 19. My neighbor's house took fire,, and for more bad luck, he fell and dislocated his shoulder. 2CL His wife appeared to have lost her wits, for she spoke at random^ and did not know what she was about.. 21. Why do you burst out laughing? Is there any thing laughable in that? 22. In- deed (Au fait) 7 he thought he had dislocated his arm ; but it is mot so ; and now (et voila) his wife (qui) has gone for the surgeon t© have it set. 23. If he escaped with a fright, so much the bet- ter (tant mieux). Theme Supplementaire sto le Partioipe Present et i/Adjectie Verbal. ( F. Zee. 74,) Now as 1 we grow old 2 and our strength 3 grows less, 4 the noisy- city life 5 offers us few attractions. 6 We quit it without regret lor the peaceful country life. 7 A rural retreat 8 has always been the goal 9 of our ambition. We love to see the bellowing 10 bulls 11 roaming 12 in peace over 13 the vast prairies ; 14 the bleating 15 sheep caressing 16 their tender lambs, lT skipping 18 on the grass beside them ; the capricious goats climbing 19 on the steep 20 rocks, brows- ing 21 the plants, blossoming among the bushes, 22 or the newly * In inversions of this kind, when, for the sake of emphasis, the principal sentence is preceded by a relative clause, introducing its object, this object must be represented,, in the principal sentence, by a pronoun. SOIXASTE-DIX-HUITIEilE LECON. 321 formed 23 buds 24 of the creeping 25 brier. 26 We love to hear the delightful 27 voices of the little birds, singing among the verdant 28 foliage. 29 We delight in 30 listening to the noise of some clear brook, falling from the height 31 of a rock, and flowing, 32 with gentle murmur, 33 across the meadows. 34 These are the scenes among which we shall spend the remainder 35 of our days, com- muning 36 with the Author of nature, and seeking the quietest and most peaceful path that leads to the tomb. 37 1 Now as, maintenant que. 19 To climb, grimper. 2 To grow old, vieillir. 20 Steep, escarpe. 3 Our strength, nos forces. 21 To browse, brouter. 4 To grow less, ioffaiblir. 22 The bushes, les buissons. 6 City life, la vie des miles. 23 Newly formed , naissant. 6 Attraction, charme. 24 The bud, le bourgeon. 7 Peaceful coun- la vie paisible des 25 To creep, ramper. try life, champs. 26 The brier, la ronce. 8 A rural retreat, une retraite cham- 27 Delightful, ravissant. petre. 28 Verdant, verdoyant. 9 The goal, Vobjct. 29 Foliage, le feuillage. 10 To beUow, mugir. 30 To delight in, se plaire a. 11 Bull, taureau. 31 The height, le haut. 12 To roam, errer. 32 To flow, couler. 13 Over, sur. 83 With gentle avec un doux mur- 34 The prairie, la prairie. murmur, mure. 15 To bleat, beler. 34 The meadow, le pre. 16 To caress, caresser. 35 The remainder, le reste. 17 A lamb, un agneau. 36 To commune, s'entretenir. M To skip, bondir. 37 The tomb, la tombe. Theme Supplementaire sur le Participe Passe. ( V. Lee. 18.) (In the following piece, the verbs relating the principal action, are put in the present. This construction, which enlivens the narration, is admissible in both languages, but much more frequently resorted to in French than in English.) An immense multitude, which curiosity had attracted, thronged 1 in the inclosure 2 of the forum. Terror 3 had struck 4 all hearts, and those Romans who had shown themselves so untractable 5 H* §22 soixante-dix-htjitieme LE£ON. tinder the yoke, 6 and who had been seen so many times to brave 7 death, shamefully 8 bowed 9 their heads before the tyranny 10 of the decemviri. 11 Appius and his satellites have extended 12 the limits 13 of their authority, 14 and have used it, or rather abused it, to sub- stitute 15 the most excessive 16 violence 17 for the laws (211). They have given way to the fury 18 of their passions, or to speak more correctly, 19 they have suffered themselves to be led into all the dissoluteness 20 which (2*76) the most inordinate 21 passions pro- duce. 22 Among the victims 23 which the cruelty 24 of Appius has marked out, 25 is 26 Virginia, 27 the daughter (63*) of a Roman centurion. Her beauty, her innocence, did not touch 28 the cruel decemvir. Nothing can stir 29 up in his heart a generous movement ; neither the services which the father of that unfor- tunate maiden 30 has rendered to Rome, nor the enemies he has conquered, nor the wounds 31 he has received, nor the combats in which his bravery 32 has signalized 33 itself, nor, in fine, the honor- able rewards which his deeds 34 have won for him. 35 Virginia, standing and trembling, 36 is expecting, in the an- guish 37 of death, the fate 38 which is reserved 39 for her. Mean- while, a cry of joy escapes her : she has heard the voice of her father. Scarcely had he been apprised of the resolution which Appius had formed of reducing his daughter to slavery, 40 when (que) he left the army to hasten 41 to her succor. How shall I describe 42 the uneasiness that had seized upon his mind, 43 and the fortitude 44 he had required not to succumb 45 to the grief 46 that rent 47 his heart ! At last, he arrives, and immediately 48 the crowd eagerly withdraws to let him pass. 49 At the sight of him (A sa vue), the tyrant 50 shudders ; 51 his eyes are cast down ; he himself is astonished 52 at the shame which he has felt glowing on 53 his criminal forehead ; but soon an apparent tranquillity has succeeded 54 to the fear which, for a moment, had shown itself on his countenance. 55 "What dost thou want?" he says, with a bold look. 56 " My daughter," replies the unfortunate father ; " her whom the gods made the sole support 57 of my old age." At these words, he approaches Virginia, and father and daughter are lost in 58 embraces 59 and sobs. 60 "Lictors," 61 exclaims the decemvir ; " let that slave be given up 62 to her master." Virginia, SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEME LECON. 323 distracted 63 with grief, has sunk (est tombee) almost inanimate 64 into the arms of Virginius. The unfortunate father draws 65 his daughter far from the crowd, under pretext 66 of bidding 67 her a last farewell, and plunges into her heart a murderous 68 weapon that chance 69 had thrown into 70 his hands, (sing.) 1 To throng, se presser. 29 To stir up, /aire naitre. 2 Inclosure, enceinte, f. 30 That unfortu- 3 Terror, terreur, f. nate maiden , cette infortunee. 4 To strike, glacer. 31 Wound, blessure, f. 5 Untr act able 32 Bravery, v alliance, f. under, indocile a. 83 To signalize, signaler. 6 Yoke, joug, m. 34 Deed,' exploit, m. 7 To brave, braver. 35 To win for him. , lui valoir.* 8 Shamefully, honteusement. 36 To tremble, trembler. 9 To bow, courber. 37 The anguish, les angoisses. 10 Tyranny, tyrannie, f. 38 Fate, destin, m. 11 Decemvir, decemvir, m. 39 To reserve, reserver. 12 To extend, reenter. 40 Slavery, esclavage, m. 13 Limit, borne, f. 41 To hasten (to 14 Authority, autorite, f. %), pour voter. 15 To substitute 42 How shall I for, substituer a. describe, comment peindre. 36 Excessive, excessif. 48 Mind, esprits, pi. 17 Violence, violence, f. 44 Fortitude, la force d'dme. 18 Fury, fougue, f. 45 To succumb, succomber. 19 To speak more 46 Grief, douleur, f. correctly, pour mieux dire 47 To rend, dechirer. 20 The dissolute- 48 Immediately, immediatement. ness, les desordres. 49 To withdraw 21 Inordinate, deregle. eagerly to s'empresser de lai& 22 To produce, produire. let pass, ser passer. 23 Victim, victime, £ 60 The tyrant, le tyran. 24 Cruelty, cruaute, f. 61 To shudder, frissonner. 25 To mark out, designer. 62 He himself is etonne lui-meme 26 To be, se trouver. astonished at , de. 27 Virginia, Virginie. 63 To glow on, rougir. 28 To touch, flechir. 64 To succeed, succeder a. * Valoir, in the sense of to he worth, is intransitive ; but in the sense of to procv/re, to gain, it is transitive ; and in this sense, its past participle is subject to agreement. 324 SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITlllME LE£ON, 66 Countenance, visage, m. 62 To give up, livrer. M With a bold 63 Distracted, eperdu de. look, d'un air assure. 6i Inanimate, inanime. 67 The sole sup- 05 To draw or drag, entrainer. port, Vunique soutien. 66 Pretext, pretexte, m. 68 To be lost in, etre confondu 67 To bid, adresser. dans. 68 Murderousy meurtrier. 69 Embrace. embrassement, m. 69 Chance, kasard, m. 60 Sob, sanglot, m. 70 To throw into. /aire tomber 61 Lictor, licteur, m. SOU9. SUPPLEMENT. The principal rules of Grammar have been embodied in the preceding lessons. To avoid repetition, we shall here only refer to them, and supply such exceptional rules as are wanting to complete the grammar part of the work. Nouns. I. — A noun can be used in a definite, general, indefinite, or partitive sense, (75). H.— Gender, (1). (1.) Amour, delice, orgue, are masculine in the singular, and feminine in the plural ; amour only when it signifies sexual pas- sion. (2.) The feminine nouns couleur and foudre become mascu- line — the first when it is followed by de and a noun denoting the kind of color ; as, le couleur de feu ; the second when it is used in a figurative sense ; as, un foudre de guerre. (3.) Gens, (204, Rem.). (4.) Quelque chose, (page 273, note f). (5.) Hymne, for the church, is feminine, otherwise masculine. (6.) There are a number of nouns which, in one sense, are masculine, and in another feminine. The most common are : Masculine. Feminine. Aide. Helper. Assistance. Aigle. Eagle, (the bird.) Eagle, (Roman ensign.) Couple. Two beings intimately connected. Two of a sort. Zivre. Book. Pound. Manche. Handle. Sleeve. 326 SUPPLEMENT. Masculine. Feminine* Memoire. Memoir; account. Memory. Mode. Mood. Fashion. Mousse. Cabin-boy. Foam; moss. Page. Page of a prince. Page of a book. Poele. Stove. Frying-pan. Poste. Post; station; employment. Letter-post. JSouris. Smile. Mouse. Tour. Turn. Tower. Voile. Veil. Sail. III. — Number. Formation of the Plural — General Rule, (16.) Exceptions. (1.) Nouns ending in s, x, z, (17, a). (2.) Nouns ending in au, eu, (17, b). (3.) Nouns ending in al, (17, c). Bal, cal, pal, regal, cama- val, chacal, nopal, take s in the plural. (4.) Nouns ending in nt, (17, d). (5.) Nouns ending in ail, (page 49, note J). (6.) Nouns ending in ou, (page 156, note f). (7.) Ciel, heaven, plural deux ; del, tester of a bed, or sky in painting, plural dels. (8.) Aieul, ancestor, plural a-ieux ; dieul, grandfather, plural a'ieuls. (9.) CEil, eye, plural yeux ; ceil, a term of art, plural mils. (10.) Ail, garlic, plural aulx. (11.) For the plural of compound nouns, see (227). (12.) Proper names remain unchanged in the plural, except when they are used as common nouns ; as, La France a eu ses The Article. I.— (1.) Its form, le, la, (2), les, (16). (2.) Elision, (6). (3.) Contraction, (44). II— Use of the article, (34), (69), (75), (104), (115), (116), (149). SUPPLEMENT. 327 HI.— Omission of the article, (63), (74), (p. 49, n. f), (123). The article is further omitted : (1.) Before names, of persons or things, which we address ; as, Soldats, vous defendez les toits qui vous out vus naitre. (2.) Before nouns emphatically used in a series, in titles of books, in proverbial sentences, before ordinal numbers that are placed after their nouD, and before cardinal numbers used in the. same manner for ordinal ; as, Citoyens, etr angers, ennemis, rois, empereurs, le plaignent et le reverent Contentement passe richesse. Histoire de France.' Chapitre premier. Page vingt. Henri quatre. (3.) Before nouns preceded by a preposition, with which they form an adverbial phrase ; as, Avec prudence. (4.) After jamais placed at the head of a sentence, and after soit repeated; also before plus, moins, beginning a sentence, (285); as, Jamais nomme ne fut plus tourmente que moL Soit crainte, soit prudence. (5.) Before the names of countries, when they are preceded by en ; also, when they are preceded by de, unless they are ac- companied by an adjective, or used with reference to their whole extent ; as, Les deserts de la brulante Afrique. Les limites de la France. (6.) A few names of countries always retain the article ; as, Le Canada. Le Mexique. Le Brezil. Le Perou. La Chine. La Jamaique. (7.) And a few never take it : those which bear the names of their capitals ; as, Naples est un delicieux pays. IY.— Repetition, (12). The article is also repeated before the adverb forming the su- perlative degree, when it stands after the noun ; as, L'homme le plus industrieux. 328 SUPPLEMENT. V.— Le plus, le mieux, le moins, are invariable when they modify a verb or adverb ; also, when they express the highest degree, in an absolute manner, without comparison ; as, Elle chante le mieux. Votre soeur ne pleure pas, lors meme quelle est le plus affligee. But: Be toutes ces dames, votre soeur est la plus affligee. ^ _ Adjectives. I.— Adjectives are of two binds : qualifying (2) and determi- native, (5). Agreement, (2). See IV. II. — Gender. Formation of the feminine. General rules, (3), (5). Exceptions. (1.) Adjectives ending in x, (61, a). (2.) Adjectives ending in/, (61, b). (3.) Adjectives ending in el, eil, ien, en, et, (61, c). (4.) Nul, gentil, bellot, sot, vieillot, paysan ; has, gras, las, epais,gros, expres, profes, also double the final consonant in the feminine ; as, nulle, gentille, &c. ; basse, grasse, &c. (5.) Beau, nouveau, vieux, (37); and mou, mol ; fou, fol ; fern. molle,folle ; jumeau, jumelle. (6.) Doux, faux, prefix, roux, have the fern, douce, fausse prefixe, rousse. (7.) Blanc, franc, secjrais, fern, blanche, franche, seche,fraiche. (8.) Ammoniac, public, caduc, turc, grec, fern, ammoniaque, pubhque, caduque, turque, grecque. (9.) Bong, oblong, fern, longue, oblongue. (10.) Benin, malin, fern, benigne, maligne. (11.) Coi, fern, coite ; favori, fern, favorite ; tiers, fern, tierce. (12.) Aigu, ambigu, begu, contigu, exigu, fern, aigue, &c. H!-— Number. Formation of the plural. General rule, (16). SUPPLEMENT. 329 Exceptions. (1.) Adjectives ending in 5, x, and the masculine of those end- ing in au, follow the same rales as the nouns, (1*7, a, 6). (2.) Of the adjectives ending in al, the majority form the plu- ral by changing al into aux ; as, egal, egaux ; those that do not, follow the general rule ; as, amical, fatal, final, frugal, naval, thedtral, &c. : des instants fatal 's. IY. — Agreement. General rules, (3), (15), (61, d). Exceptions. (1.) An adjective placed after two nouns that are synonymous, agrees with the last ; as, un travail, une occupation continuelle ; also, when the nouns are connected by the conjunction ou ; as, un courage ou une prudence etonnante. (2.) Tout, (56), demi, (56), nu, (285, Eem. 6). (3.) Feu, late, when separated from its noun, does not agree with it; as, feu voire mere ; but: lafeuereine. (4.) In compound words, adjectives are varied, except mi, demi, semi. The first of two adjectives is also invariable, when it is used adverbially ; as, court-vetu ; except, however, in frais- cueilli and tout-puissant, which have the feminine fraiche-cueillie and toute-puissante. (5.) Two adjectives, joined together, the former being quali- fied by the latter, remain invariable, because the former is used substantively ; as, des cheveux chdtain clair, that is, d'un chdtain clair. V.— Place of the adjective, (65), (116), (136, a). (See also XL) VI— Repetition, (12), (136, a). VIL— Comparison, (110), (112), (201). VIII. — Nouns used as adjectives, (63). IX. — Adjectives used as nouns, (64). X. — Government of adjectives, (190, a, b), (277, Rem. 4). (1.) Most adjectives which are followed in English by of, from, with, by, require the preposition de ; those that are followed by 330 SUPPLEMENT. to or /or, require the preposition a. There are a few exceptions ; for instance : A slave to, esclave de ; eager for, avide de. (2.) Adjectives expressive of kindness are generally followed by envers; as, affable, poll, civil envers tout le monde. Bon pour, indulgent pour, insolent avec, necessaire a, pour. XL — The following adjectives have one meaning when they precede, and another when they follow, the noun : Un bon homme, a simple man. Un brave homme, sl worthy man. Un certain conte, sl certain story. Mon cher ami, my dear friend. If une commune voix, unanimously. Un cruel enfant, a teasing child. La dernier e annee, the last year (of a series). Unefausse clef, a false key. Un furieux menteur, an excessive liar. Un galant homme, a gentleman. Un grand homme, a great man. Le haut ton, a haughty tone. Un honnete homme, an honest man. Un mechant livre, a worthless book. JDu mort bois, worthless wood. Le nouveau vin, the fresh wine. Un pauvre homme, a man of little merit. Un plaisant homme, a ridiculous man. Un petit homme, a small man. Mes propres mains, my own hands. Un seul enfant, a single child. Un simple soldat, a private soldier. Un triste homme, sl pitiful man. Un unique tableau, a single picture. Un vilain homme, an ugly man. Un-e vraie histoire, a mere story. Un homme bon, a kind man. Un homme brave, a brave man. Une nouvelle certaine, authentic news. Une robe chere, an expensive dress. Une voix commune, an ordinary voice. Un enfant cruel, a cruel child. E annee dernier e, last year. Une cleffausse, the wrong key. Un animal furieux, a furious ani- mal. Um homme galant, a gallant. Un homme grand, a tall man. Le ton haut, a loud tone. Un homme honnete, a polite man. Un livre mechant, a caustic book. Du bois mort, dead wood. Le vin nouveau, the newly made wine. Un homme pauvre, a poor man. Un homme plaisant, an agreeable man. Un homme petit, a mean man. Les mains propres, clean hands. Un enfant seul, a child alone. Un soldat simple, a foolish soldier. Un homme triste, a sorrowful man. Un tableau unique, a matchless pic- ture. Un homme vilain, a sordid man. Une histoire vraie, a true history. supplement. 331 Determinative Adjectives, (5). XII. — Possessive, (5). Mon, (5), (6, b), (16). Notre, (19). Ton, (18). Votre, (5), (16). Son, (10), (6, b), (16), (280). Leur, (20), (280). XIII. — Demonstrative, (5). Ce, (11), (16). In connection with this adjective, are used the suffixes, ci and la, (29). XIV.- —Indefinite, (5). (See also XVI.) Chaque, (165). Quelque, (121), (XVI.) Nul, (204), (XVI.) Plusieurs, (121). Aucun, (204), (XVI.) Tel, (204). Meme, (XVI.) Quel, (5), (XVI.) Tout, (56), (XVI.) XV.- Quelconque (whatever), (XVI.) -Numeral, (5), (38). CARDINAL NUMBERS. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 1. Un («.), une (/.) 1st. Premier (m), premiere (/.) 2. Deux. 2d. Second (m.), seconde (/.), deuxieme. 3. Trois. 3d. Troisieme. 4. Quatre. 4th. Quatrieme. 5. Cinq. 5th. Cinquieme. 6. Six. 6th. Sixieme. 1. Sept. 7th. Septieme. 8. Huit.* 8th. Huitieme.* 9. Neuf. 9th. Neuvieme. 10. Dix. 10th. Dixieme. 11. Onze* 11th. Onzieme.* 12. Douze. 12th. Douzieme. 13. Treize. 13th. Treizieme. 14. Quatorze. 14th. Quatorzieme. * See note, p. 29. 332 SUP CARDINAL NUMBERS. PLEMENT. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 15. Quinze. 15 th. Quinzieme. 16. Seize. 16th. Seizieme. 17. Dix-sept. 17th. Dix-septi&me. 18. Dix-huit. 18th. Dix-huitieme. 19. Dix-neuf. 19th. Dix-neuvieme. 20. Vingt.* 20th. Vingtierne.. 21. Vingt et un. 21st. Vingt et unieme. 22. Vingt-deux. 22d. Vingt-deuxieme. 23. Vingt-trois. 23 d. Vingt-troisieme. 30. Trente. 30th. Trentieme. 31. Trente et un. 31st. Trente et unieme. 32. Trente-deux. 3 2d. Trente-deuxieme. 40. Quarante. 40th. Quarantieme. 50. Cinquante. 50th. Cinquantieme. 60. Soixante. 60th. Soixantieme. 10. Soixante-dix. 10th. Soixante-dixieme. 11. Soixante et onze. 11 st. Soixante et onzieme. 80. Quatre-vingts. 80th. Quatre-vingtieme. 81. Quatre-vingt-un. 81st. Quatre-vingt-unieme. 90. Quatre-vingt-dix. ,90th. Quatre-vingt-dixieme. 91. Quatre-vingt-onze. 91st. Quatre-vingt-onzieme. 100. Cent* 100th. Centieme. 101. Cent-un, 101st. Cent-unieme. 200. Deux cents. 200th. Deux centieme. 210. Deux cent-dix. 210th. Deux cent-dixi&me. 1,000. Mille.f 1,000th. Millieme. 1,001. Mille-un. 1,001st. Mille-uni^me. 2,500. Deux mille-cinq cents. 2, 500th. Deux mille-cinq centieme 1,000,000. Un million. 1,000,000th. Millionieme. XVI. — Remarks on some Indefinite Adjectives. Aucun and nul, can be used in the plural, only with nouns that have no singular; as, aucunes funerailles. Meme is sometimes an adjective and sometimes an adverb. It is an adverb when it modifies a verb, and when it has the meaning of also ; as, II ne l'a pas mime vu. Les animaux, les plantes meme etaient au nombre des divinit6s egyptiennes. * Vingt and cent, see note §, p. 143. t MUe, see 171, Rem. 2. SUPPLEMENT. 333 Quelque is sometimes an adjective, and sometimes an adverb, (256, note *). Quel is used with the conjunction que, in which case it is sep- arated from its noun, (256, note *). The noun is sometimes understood with quel; as, Quel est done votrepere? Quelconque is always placed after its noun ; as, Deux points quelconques etant donnes, any two points being given. Tout is sometimes a noun, sometimes an adjective, and some- times an adverb. Le tout est plus grand que sa partie. Voila tout Tout l'homme, (the whole man) Tout homme, (every man.) Tous les honimes, (all men.) Tout, adverb, sometimes agrees with the noun, (see note, p. 107.) XVII. — Remarks on the Numeral Adjectives. The cardinal numbers are used, instead of the ordinal, for the days of the month (171, Rem. 1), and in speaking of sovereigns, except for the first. George quatre ; but : Henri premier. We say: Charles-quint, for Charles the Fifth of Germany; and Sixte-quint, for Sixtus the Fifth. A or one, used before hundred and thousand, is not expressed ; as, cent dollars, one hundred dollars ; mille hommes, a thousand men. But when cent and mille are used substantively, the nu- meral un may precede them ; as, un cent d'huitres ; un mille de briques. Numeral Nouns. — Collective. Uunite, the unit. line trentaine, thirty. line demi-douzaine, a half dozen. line quarantaine, forty. line huitaine, a week, (8 days.) line cinquantaine, fifty. line neuvaine, nine days. line soixantainc, sixty. line dixaine, half a score. line quatre-vingtaine, eighty. line douzaine, a dozen. line centaine, a hundred. line quinzaine, a fortnight, (15 days.) Un millier, a thousand. Une vingtaine, a score. Un million, a million. 334 SUPPLEMENT. Fractional. La moitie, the half. Le cinquieme, t"he fifth. Le tiers, one-third. Le sixieme, the sixth. Les deux tiers, two -thirds. Le tiers de huit, one-third of eight. Le quart, one-fourth. Le quart d'un quart, a \ of a \. Bem. — In saying " one-third of two" the French say, le tiers de deux, because the sense of the noun tiers is determinate. Double, double. Triple, treble. Proportional. Quadruple, quadruple. Centuple, hundred-fold, Pronouns. There are personal, possessive, demonstrative, relative, and in- definite pronouns. L— (1.) Personal Pronouns. Subject. Direct Object. Indirect Object. Disjunctive.* 1st. pees. 2d. pees. 3d. p. masc. " fern. Of both gen- ders and numbers. Sing. Plur. je (4), nous (19) tu (18), vous (4) il (9), ils (20) elle (9), elles (20) \ Sing-. Plur. me (57), nous (57) te (57), vous (57) se (132) The invariable le (62) Sing. Plur. me (57), nous (57) te (57), vous (57) lui (53), leur (53) se (133) en (75) Sing-. Plur. moi (65), f nous (65)t toi (65),t vous (65)t lui (65),t eux (65)t elle (65),f elles (65)t soi (224) (2.) Compound Personal Pronouns. Moi-meme, toi-meme, vous-meme, lui-meme, elle-meme, soi- meme, nous-memes, vous-mernes, eux-memes, elles-memes, (224). II.- Le mien, (11), (16), (47). Le tien, (18), (47). Le sien, (11), (16), (47). Possessive Pronouns. Le notre, (19), (47). Le votre, (11), (16), (47). Le leur, (20), (47). * These pronouns are called disjunctive, because they are not immediately joined to a verb. t See also 223, Rem. 1 and 2. SUPPLEMENT. 335 III. — Demonstrative Pronouns, Ce, (89), (124), (L. 72). Celui-ci, (30), (85). Celui, (46), (88, Rem. 3). Celui-la, (30), (85). Ceci, (84). Cela, (84), (187, Rem. 1). IV. — Relative Pronouns. (1.) Qui, (87), (88). Lequel, (87), (IX.) Que, (87), (88). Ou, (IX.) Quoi, (IX.) En, (66), (280, Rem. 2 & 3). Dont, (87), (88). (2.) The following relative pronouns are also used absolutely ; that is, without an antecedent. Qui, (8), (48), (52). Quoi, (48). Que, (8), (48). Lequel, (11), (16), (47). V. — Indefinite Pronouns. On, (107), (X.) Autrui, (204). Quiconque, (whosoever). L'un l'autre, (224). Quelqu'un, (49), (50, Rem. 1), (121). IAm et l'autre, (40). Chacun, (165). Personne, (50). The following indefinite adjectives become pronouns, when they do not accompany a noun. Aucun, (204). Tel, (204). Nul, (204). Certain. Plusieurs, (121). VI. — Place of the Pronouns. (1.) As subject, (4). (2.) In interrogative sentences, (4, Rem. 2), (13), (125). (3.) As direct objects, (33), (54), (57), (58), (74), (128, Rem. 1 and 2), (139). (4.) As indirect objects, (53), (54), (57), (58), (74), (81), (139). (5.) When the verb is in the imperative mood, (126). 336 SUPPLEMENT. Rem, — When two imperatives are connected by et or ou, the objective pronouns may be placed before or after the second ; as, donnez-le-lui, ou le lui pretez, or ou pretez-le-luL VII. — Repetition of the personal pronouns, (136), (2*77, Rem, h and 6). VIII. — Remarks on the pronouns, (279). IX. — Remarks on some Relative Pronouns. A verb having a relative pronoun for its subject, agrees, in person and number, with the antecedent of the relative pronoun ; as, Nous etions deux qui etions du meme avis. When the relative pronoun refers to an adjective which is pre- ceded by the article, the adjective is the antecedent of the rela- tive pronoun ; as, Vous etes le seul qui ait (not, qui ayez) reussL Lequel, duquel, Imperfect, (197). Pluperfect, (202). Past Definite, or Preterit, (229). Past Anterior, (231). Future, (166), (167). Future Perfect. The Conditional, two : Present, (205, a). Past, (205, b). The Imperative, one : Present, (126), (218), (262), expressing also future action. 15 338 SUPPLEMENT. The Subjunctive, four: Present, (238). Perfect, (239). Imperfect, (258, a). Pluperfect, (258, b). The Infinitive, two : Present, (23), (83), (91). Past, (152). And, also, the Participles: Present, (269), Past, (134), (142), and Compound, (270, b, 3d). There are two auxiliary verbs : avoir and etre. Use of avoir, (138), (146), (183, Rem.), (264). Use of etre, (135), (145), (146), (147), (264). Remarks on the agreement of the verb with its subject, (273), (274), (266, Rem. 5). Remarks on the accidental place of the subject, (276). Remarks on the direct and indirect objects, (277). Remarks on the verb /aire, (245). Adverbs. Place of the adverb, (51), (139). Formation of adverbs of manner, (137). Prepositions. Prepositions govern the verb in the infinitive, except the prep- osition en, (94). Conjunctions. Conjunctions that govern the subjunctive, (254, &c). Remarks on the conjunction que, (255). Interjections. SUPPLEMENT. 339 CONJUGATION OF TEE AUXILIARY VERB AVOIE. Avoir, Ayant, Present. INFINITIVE MOOD. to have. Avoir eu, PAETICIPLES. having. Eu, m. ; eue, /., Past. Past to have had. had. Compound. Ayant eu, having had. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Past Indefinite. J'ai, Tu as, 11 a, Nous avons, Vous avez, lis ont, Imperfect. I have, thou hast. he has. we have. you have. they have. J'ai eu, Tu as eu, 11 a eu, Nous avons en, Vous avez eu, lis ont eu, I have had. thou hast had. he has had. we have had. you have had. they have had. Pluperfect. J'avais, Tu avais, 11 avait, Nous avions, Vous aviez, lis avaient, I had. thou hadst. he had. we had. you had. they had. J'avais eu, Tu avais eu, 11 avait eu, Nous avions eu, Vous aviez eu, lis avaient eu, I had had. thou hadst had. he had had. we had had. you had had. they had had. Past Definite. Past Anterior. J'eus, Tu eus, 11 eut, Nous etimes, Vous elites, lis eurent, I had. thou hadst. he had. we had. you had. they had. J'eus eu, Tu eus eu, 11 eut eu, Nous etimes eu, Vous etites eu, lis eurent eu, I had had. thou hadst had. he had had. we had had. you had had. they had had. Future. Future Perfect. J'aurai, Tu auras, 11 aura, Nous aurons, Vous aurez, lis auront, I shall have, them wilt have, he will have, we shall have, you will have, they will have. J'aurai eu, Tu auras eu, 11 aura eu, Nous aurons eu, Vous aurez eu, lis auront eu, I shall have had. thou icili have had. he will have Txad. toe shall have had. you will have had. they will have ho/A* CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. Past. J'aurais, Tu aurais, 11 aurait, Nous aurions, Vous auriez, lis auraient, I should have. thou wouldst have. he xcould have. we should have. you would have. they xcould have. J'aurais eu, Tu aurais eu, 11 aurait eu, Nous* aurions eu, Vous auriez eu, lis auraient eu, I should have had. thou wouldst have had. he would have had. i we should have had. you would have had. they would have had. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Aie, Qu'il ait, have (thou), let Mm have. Ayons, Ayez, Qu'ils aient, let us have. have (you). let them have. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Que j'aie, that I may have. Que tu aies, that thou mat/si have. Qu'il ait, that he may have. Que nous ayons, that ice may have. Que vous ayez, thai you may have. Qu'ils aient, that they may have. Imperfect. that I might have. Que j'aie eu, Que tu aies eu, Qu'il ait eu, Que nous ayons eu, Que vous ayez eu, Qu'ils aient eu, Que j'eusse, Que tu eusses, Qu'il eut, Que nous eussions, Que vous eussiez, Qu'ils eussent, that thou mightat have. that he might have. that we might have. that you might hone. that they might have. Perfect. that I may that thou may at that lie may that ice mai/ that you may that (hey may Pluperfect. Que j'eusse eu, that I might Que tu eusses eu, that thou mightst Qu'il eut eu, that he might Que nous eussions eu, tJiat we might Que vous eussiez eu, that you might Qu'ils eussent eu, that they might have had. have had. have had. have Jiad. have had. have had. have had. have had. have had. Jtave Jiad. have had. have had. 340 SUPPLEMENT. CONJUGATION OF TEE A UXILIAB Y VEBB E T E E . INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. Past. fitre, to be. Avoir ete\ to have been. PARTICIPLES. fltant, Present. being. £te, Past. Compound. Ayant §te, having been. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Past Indefinite. Je suis, Tues, 11 est, Nous sommes, Vous etes, lis sont, lam. thou art. he is. we are. you are. they are. J'ai ete\ Tu as ete, 11 a ete, Nous avons et6, Vous avez §te, lis ont ete, I have been. thou hast been. he has been. we have been. you have been. they have been. Imperfect. Pluperfect. J'etais, Tu etais, 11 etait, Nous etions, Vous etiez, lis etaient, I was. thou wast. he was. we were. you were. they were. J'avais et§, Tu avais 6t6, 11 avait ete, Nous avions 6te, Vous aviez ete, lis avaient 6te\ I had been. thou hadst been. he had been. we had been. you had been. they had been. Past Definite. Past Anterior. Je fus, Tu fus, 11 fut, Nous ftimes, Vous futes, lis furent, I was. thou icast. he wae. we were. you were. they were. J'eus ete, Tu eus ete\ 11 eut ete, Nous etimes ete, Vous etites 6te, lis eurent ete, I had been. thou hadst been. he had been. we had been. you had been. they had been. Future. Future Perfect. Je serai, Tu seras, 11 sera, Nous serons, Vous serez, lis seront, I shall be. thou icilt be. he will be. we shall be. you icill be. they will be. J'aurai ete, Tu auras ete, 11 aura ete, Nous aurons ete, Vous aurez ete, lis auront ete, I shall have been, thou wilt have been. he will have been, we shall have been, you will have been, they will have been. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. Past. Je serais, Tu serais, 11 serait, Nous serions, Vous seriez, lis seraient, I should be. thou wouldst be. he would be. we should be. you icoidd be. they icould be. J'aurais ete, Tu aurais ete, 11 aurait ete, Nous aurions ete, Vous auriez ete, Us auraient ete, I should have been. thou wouldst have been. he icould have been. we sliould have been. you icould have been. they would have been. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sois, Qu'il soit, be (thou), let him be. Soyons, Soyez, Qu'ils soiem\ " let us be. be (you). let them be. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Perfect. Que je sois, Que tu sois, Qu'il soit, Que nous soyons, Que vous soyez, Qu'ils soient, that I may be. that thou mayst be. that he may be. that roe may be. that you may be. that they may be. Que j'aie ete, that I may have been. Que tu aies 6t6, that thou mayst have been. Qu'il ait ete, that he may have been. Que nous ayons 6te, that xce may hare been. Que vous ayez et6, that you may have been. Qu'ils aient 6t6, that they may have been. Imperfect Pluperfect. Que je fusse, that I might he. Que tu fusses, that thou mig'htst be. Qu'il fut, that he riiiqht be. Que nous fussions, that we might be. Que vous fussiez, that you might be. Qu'ils fussent, that they might be. Que j'eusse 6t6, that I might have been. Que tu eusses et6, that thou mightst have Itsen. Qu'il eut 6te\ that he might have been. Que nous eussions 6t6, that ice might have been. Que vous eussiez 6te, that you might hare been. Qu'ils eussent ete, that they might have bt*n. SUPPLEMENT. 341 FIRST CONJUGATION- in EE. Parler, Present. Present. INFINITIVE MOOD. to speak. Avoir parle, PARTICIPLES. speaking. Parle, Past. Past. to have spoken. spoken. Ayant parle, Compound. having spoken. Je parle, Tu paries, II parle, Nous parlons, Vous parlez, lis parlent, Je parlais, Tu parlais, II parlait, Nous parlions, Vous parliez, lis parlaient, Je parlai, Tu parlas, II parla, Nous parlames, Vous parlates, lis parlerent, Je parlerai, Tu parleras, II parlera, Nous parlerons, Vous parlerez, lis parleront, Present. INDICATIVE MOOD. Imperfect. thou speakest. he speaks. we speak. you speak. they speak. J'ai parle, Tu as parle, II a parle, Nous avons parle Vous avez parle, lis ont parle, Past Indefinite. I have thou hast he has we have you have Past Definite. I was speaking. thou wast speaking. he teas speaking. we were speaking. you were speaking. they were speaking. they have Pluperfect. I had thou hadst he had we had Future. I s-poke. thou spokest. he spoke. we spoke. you spoke. they spoke. I shall sp>eak. thou wilt speak. he will speak, we shall speak. you will speak, they icill speak. J'avais parle, Tu avais parle, 11 avait parle, Nous avions parl§ Vous aviez parle, lis avaient parle, Past Anterior. I had thou hadst he had we had spoken, spoken, spoken, spoken, spoken, spoken. spoken, spoken, spoken. J'eus parle, Tu eus parle, II eut parle, Nous eumes parle, Vous eutes parle, lis eurent parle, •ou had spoken, ey had spoken. spoken, ipoken. you had spoken, hey had spoken. Future Perfect. J'aurai parle, Tu auras parle, II aura parle, Nous aurons parle, Vous aurez parle, lis auront parle, I shall have thou wilt have he will have we shall have you will have they will have spoken, spoken. spoken, spoken, spoken. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. Je parlerais, Tu parlerais, II parlerait, Nous parlerions, Vous parleriez, lis parleraient, I should speak. thou wouldst speak. he would speak. we shiould speak. you would speak. they would speak. J'aurais parle, Tu aurais parle, II a'urait parle, Nous aurions parle, Vous auriez parle, lis auraient parle, Past. I should have spoken. thou wouldst have spoken. he would have spoken. we should have spoken. you would have spoken. they would have spoken. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Parle, Qu'il parle, speak {thou), or do (thou) speak, let him speak. Parlons, Parlez, Qu'ils parlent, let us speak. speak (you), or do (you) speak, let them speak. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Que je parle, Que tu paries, Qu'il parle, Que nous parlions, Que vous parliez, Qu'ils parlent, Present. that I may that thou rnayst that h< mill/ that ui may that you may that they may speak, speak. apeak. speak. Que je parlasse, Que tu parlasse, Qu'il parlat, Que nous parlassions, Que vous parlassiez, Qu'ils parlassent, Imperfect. that I might that thou mightat that he might that im might that you might apeak, apeak. spink. that they might speak. Perfect. Que j'aie parl§, that I may have] Que tu aies parle 1 , that thou rnayst have Qu'il ait parl6, that he may have I Que nous ayons parle, that we may have f Que vous ayez parle, that you may have Qu'ils aient parle, that they may Jiavej Pluperfect. Que j'eusse parle, that I might have} Que tu eusses parl§, that thou mightst have J Qu'il eut parle, that he might have I Que nous eussions parl6, that we might have f Que vous eussiez parle, tlcatyou might have I Qu'ils eussent parle, that they might have) 342 SUPPLEMENT. SECOND CONJUGATION- in IE. Finir, Present. INFINITIVE MOOD. to finish. Avoir fini, Past. to have finished. PAETICIPLES. Present. Past. Finissant, finishing. Fini, finished. Compound. Ayant fini, having finished. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Past Indefinite. Je finis, I finish. J'ai fini, I have finished. Tu finis, thou finishest. Tu as fini, thou hast finished. 11 finit, he finishes. 11 a fini, he has finished. Nous finissons, we finish. Nous avons fini, we have finished. Vous finissez, you finish. Vous avez fini, you have finished, they have finished. lis finissent, they finish. lis ont fini, Imperfect. Pluperfect. Je finissais, I was finishing. J'avais fini, I had finished. Tu finissais, thou wast finishing. Tu avais fini, thou hadst finished. 11 finissait, he was finishing. 11 avait fini, he had finished. Nous finissions, we were finishing. Nous avions fini, we had finished. Vous finissiez, you were finishing, they were finishing. Vous aviez fini, you had finished. lis finissaient, lis avaient fini, they had finished. Past Definite. Past Anterior. Je finis, I finished. J'eus fini, I had finished. Tu finis, thou finishedst. Tu eus fini, thou hadst finished. 11 finit, he finished. 11 eut fini, he had finished. Nous finimes, we finished. Nous eumes fini, we had finished. Vous finltes, you finished, they finished. Vous eutes fini, you had finished, they had finished. lis finirent, lis eurent fini, Future. Future Perfect. Je finirai, I shall finish. J'aurai fini, I shall have finished. Tu finiras, thou wilt finish. Tu auras fini, thou wilt have finished. 11 finira, he will finish. 11 aura fini, he will have finished. Nous finirons, we shall finish. Nous aurons fini, we shall have finished. Vous finirez, you will finish. Vous aurez fini, you will have finished, they will have finished. lis finiront, they will finish. lis auront fini, CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present, Past. Je fiuirais, I should finish. J 'aurais fini, J should have finished. Tu finirais, thou wouldst finish. Tu aurais fini, thou wouldst have finished. 11 finirait, he would finish. 11 aurait fini, he would have finished. Nous finirions, we should finish. Nous aurions fini, we should have finished. Vous finiriez, you would finish, they would finish. Vous auriez fini, you would have finished, they would have finished. lis finiraient, lis auraient fini, IMPERATIVE MOOD. Finissons, let us finish. Finis, finish {thou). Finissez, finish (you). > Qu'il finisse, let him finish. Qu'ils finissent, let them finish. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Perfect. Que je finisse, that I may finish. Que j'aie fini, that I may have] Que tu finisses, that thou may st finish. Que tu aies fini, that thou mayst have I |»» Qu'il finisse, that he may finish. Qu'il ait fini, that he may have 1 g. Que nous finissiojis, that we may finish. Que nous ayons fini, that we may have [ \ Que vous finissiez, that you may finish. Que vous ayez fini, that you may have \ a. Qu'ils finissent, that they may finish. Qu'ils aient fini, that they may have} Imperfect. Pluperfect. Que je finisse, that I might finish. Que j'eusse fini, that I might have" Que tu finisses, that thou mightst finish. Que tu eusses fini, that thou mightst have ^ Qu'il finit, that he might finish. Qu'il eut fini, that he might have Que nous finissions, that we might finish. Que nous eussions fini, that we might have • g, Que vous finissiez, that you miqht finish. Que vous eussiez fini, that you might have & Qu'ils finissent, that they might finish. Qu'ils eussent fini, that they might have SUPPLEMENT. 343 THIRD CONJUGATION- -in OIK. Recevoir, iRecevant, Je recois, Tu recois, II recoit, Nous recevons, Vous recevez, lis recoivent, Je recevais, Tu recevais, II recevait, Nous recevions, Vous receviez, Us recevaient, 'Je regus, Tu recus, II recut, Nous resumes, Yous recutes, lis regurent, Present. Present. INFINITIVE MOOD. to receive. Avoir recu, PARTICIPLES. receiving. Regu, Past. to have received. Ayant recu, Compound. having received. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I receive. thou receivest. he receives. we receive. you receive. they receive. Imperfect. I was receiving. thou wast receiving. he was receiving. we were receiving. you were receiving. they were receiving. Past Definite. I received. thou receivedest. he received. we received. you received. they received. J'ai re$u, Tu as recu, 11 a recu, Nous avons recu, Yous avez recu, lis ont recu, Past Indefinite. I have received. thou hast received. he has received. we have received. tou have received. ih / have received. Future. Je recevrai, Tu recevras, II recevra, Nous recevrons, Vous recevrez, lis recevront, Je recevrais, Tu recevrais, II recevrait, Nous recevrions, Yous recevriez, lis recevraient, Recois, Qu'il recoive, I shall receive. thou wilt receive. he will receive, we shall receive. you will receive. they will receive. Pluperfect. J'avais recu, I had received. Tu avais regit, thou hadst received. II avait regu, he had received. Nous avions recu, we had received. Vous aviez recu, you had received. lis avaient regu, they had received. Past Anterior. J'eus recu, I had received. Tu eus recu, thou hadst received. II eut recu, he had received. Nous eumes regu, we had received. Yous eutes regu, you had received. lis eurent regu, they had received. Future Perfect. I shall have received, thou, wilt have received. J'aurai regu, Tu auras recu, II aura recu, Nous aurons regu, Vous aurez recu, lis auront regu, he will have received. toe shall have received. >ou will have received. ■ey will have received. y<- tin Present. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Past. I should receive. thou wouldst receive. he would receive. we should receive. you would receive. they would receive. J'aurais recu, I should have received. Tu aurais recu, thou wouldst have received. II aurait regu, he would have received. Nous auriom recu, ice should have received. Vous auriez recu, you would have received. lis auraieut regu, they would have received. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Recevons, receive (thou). Recevez, let him receive. Qu'ils recoivent, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. let us receive. receive (you). let them receive. Present. that I may receive. that thou mayst receive, that he may receive, that we may receive, that you may receive, that they may receive. Imperfect. Que je recusse, that I might receive. Que tu recusse, that thou mightst receive. Qu'il recut, that he might receive. Que nous recessions, that we might receive. Que vous recussiez, that you might receive. Qu'ils recussent, that they might receive. Que je recoive, Que tu recoives, Qu'il recoive, Que nous recevions. Que vous receviez, Qu'ils recoivent, Perfect. Que j'aie recu, that I may have"] Que tu aies recu, that thou mayst have Qu'il ait recu, that he may have I Que nous ayons recu, that we may have f Que vous ayez regu, that you may have Qu'ils aient recu, that they may have) Pluperfect. Oue j'eusse recu, that I might have Que tu eusses rucu, that thou mightst have Qu'il eut recu, that he might have Que nous eussions recu, that we might have Que vous eussiez regu, that you might have Qu'ils eussent recu, that they might have) 344 SUPPLEMENT. FOURTH CONJUGATION-™ RE. Present. INFINITIVE MOOD. Fast: Vendre, t& seM. Avoir vend% ■Ho Have soM. PARTICIPLES. Present. Past, Vendant, selling. Vendu, sold. Compound. Ayant vendu, having soW, INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Past Indefinite. Je vends, Tu vends, 11 vend, Nous vendons, Vous vendez, lis vendent, I sell. thou sellest. he sells. we selL you sell. they sell. J'ai vendu, Tu as vendu, 11 a vendu, Nous avons vend'rt, Vous avez vendu r lis ont vendu, I have sold, thou hast sold. he has sold, we have sold, you have sold. they have sold, Imperfect Pluperfect. Je vendais, Tu vendais, 11 vendait, Nous vendions, Vous vendiez, lis vendaient, I was selling. thou wast selling. he was selling. ice were selling. you were selling. they were selling. J'avais vendu, Tu avais vendis, 11 avait vendu, Nous avions vendu, Vous aviez vendu, lis avaient vendu, I had sold, thou hadst sold, he had sold. we had sold, you had sold, they had sold'. Past Definite. Past Anterior. Je vendis, Tu vendis, 11 vendit, Nous vendimes, Vous vendltes, lis vendirent, I sold. thou soldest. he sold. we sold. you sold. they sold. J'eus vendu, Tu eus vender, II eut vendu, Nous eumes vendu, Vous elites vendu, lis eurent vendu, I had sold, thou hadst sold. he had sold, we had sold, you had sold, tlhey had sold, Future. Future Perfect. Je vendrai, Tu vendras, H vendi-a, Nous vendrons, Vous vendrez, lis vendront, I shall sett. thou wilt sell. he will selh we shall sell, you will seU. they will sell. J^aurai vendu, Tu auras vendu, 11 aura vendu, Nous aurons vendu, Vous aurez vendu, lis auront vendu, I shall have sold, thou wilt have sold, he will have sold, we shall have sold, you will have sold, they will have sold. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present. Past. Je vendrais, Tu vendrais, 11 vendrait, Nous vendrions, Vous vendriez, lis vendraient, I should sett. thou wouldst selL he would sell. we should sell. you would sell. they would sell. J 'aurais vendu, Tu aurais vendu, D aurait vendu, Nous aurions vendu Vous auriez vendu, lis auraient vends, I should have sold. thou icouldst have sold. he would have sold. ice should have sold. you would have sold. they would have sold. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Vends, Qu'il vendfe-, sell (thou}, let him sell. Vendons, Vendez, Qu'ils vendent, let us sell. sell (you). let them sell. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Que je vcnde, that I may sell. Que tu vendes, that thou mayst sell,. Qu'il vende, thai he may. sell. Que nous vendions, that we may sell. Que vous vendiez, that you may sell. Qu'ils vendent, that they may sell. Imperfect. Que je vendisse, that I might sell. Que tu vendisses, that thou mightst sell. Qu'il vendit, that he might sell. Que nous vendissions, that we might sell. Que vous vendissiez, Qu'ils vendissent, thai you might s.. .. that they might sell Perfect. Que j'aie vendu, that I may Que tu aies vendu, that thou mayst Qu'il ait vendu, that he may Que nous ayons vendu, that we may Que vous ayez vendu, that you may Qulls aient vendu, that they may Pluperfect. Que j'eusse vendu, that I in igh t Que tu eusses vendu, that thou mightst Qu'il eut vendu, that he might Que nous eussions vendu, that tee might Que vous eussiez vendu, that you might Qu'ils eussent vendu, that they might have"\ have 1 have I ©^ have \ al have | have) have^i have [ have I o^ have f ?u have \ ' iave i supple::: 345 CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTIVE VERB. Se lever, Se levant, Pbesent. Pbesent. INFINITIVE MOOD. to rise. S'etre leve, PAKTICIPLES. rising. Leve, Past. Past. to have risen. risen. Compound. "Stant leve, having risen. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Past Indefinite. Je me leve, I rise. Je me suis leve, I have risen. Tu te leves, thou risest. Tu t'es leve, thou hast risen. 11 se leve, he rises. 11 s'est leve, he has risen. Nous nous levons, ue rise. Nous nous sommes leves, we have risen. Vous vous levez, you rise. Vous vous etes leves, you have risen, they have risen. lis se levent, they rise. lis se sont leves, Impeefect. Plupebfect. Je me levais, I icas rising. Je m'Stais lev§, I had risen. Tu te levais, thou wast rising. Tu t'etais leve, thou hadst risen. 11 se levait, he was rising. 11 s'etait leve, he had risen. Nous nous levions, we were rising. Nous nous etions leves, we had risen. Vous vous leviez, you were rising. Vous vous etiez leves, you had risen, they had risen. lis se levaient, they were rising. lis s'etaient leves, Past Definite. Past Anteeioe. Je me levai, I rose. Je me fus leve, I had risen. Tu te levas, thou rosest. v Tu te fas leve, thou hadst risen. 11 se leva, he rose. 11 se fut leve, he had risen. Nous nous levames, we rose. Nous nous fumes leves, we had risen. Vous vous levates, you rose. they rose. Vous vous futes leves, you had risen, they had risen. lis se leverent, lis se furent leves, FUTURE. FUTUEE PEEFECT. Je me leverai, I shall rise. Je me serai leve, I shall have risen. Tu te leveras, thou wilt rise. Tu te seras leve, thou wilt have risen. II se levera, he will rise. 11 se sera leve, he will have risen. Nous nous leverons, we shall rise. Nous nous serons leves, we shall have risen. Vous vous leverez, you will rise, they will rise. Vous vous serez leves, you will have risen. lis se leveront, lis se seront leves, they will have risen. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Peesent. Past. Je me leverais, Tu te leverais, II se leverait, Nous nous leverions, Vous vous leveriez, lis se leveraient, I should rise. Je me serais lev6, I should have risen. thou wouldst rise. Tu te serais leve, thou icouldst have risen. he icould rise. II se serait leve, he icould have risen. we should rise. Nous nous serions leves, we should have risen. you would rise. Vous vous seriez leves, you would have risen. they ivould rise. lis se seraient leves, they would have risen. Leve-toi, Qu'il se leve, IMPERATIVE MOOD. Levons-nous, rise (thou). Levez-vous, let him rise. Qu'ils se levent, let us rise. rise (i/ou). let them rise. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. that I may rise. that thou mayst rise. that he may rise. that ice may rise. that you nun/ ri.-e. that they may rise. Que je me leve, Que tu te leves, Qu'il se leve, Que nous nous levions, Que vous vous leviez, Qu'ils se levent, Impeefect. Que je me levasse, that I might rise. Que tu te levasses, that thou mightsi rise. Qu'il se levat, that he might rise. Que nous nous levassions, that we might rise. Que vous vous levassiez, that you might rise. Qu'ils se levassent, that they might rise. Peefect. Que je me sois lev§, that I may} ^* Que tu te sois lev6, that thou mayst 1 § Qu'il se soit lev6, that he may ( » Que nous nous soyons lev£s, that ice may f 2. Que vous vous soyez leves, that you may a Qu'ils se soient leves, that they may J ~ Plupebfect. Que je me fusse lev§, that I might") & Que tu te fusses lev§, that thou mightet J 3 Qu'il se ftit leve\ that he might I * Que nous nous fussions lev6s, that we might \ 3. Que vous vous fussiez leves, that you might Qu'ils se fussent lev§s, that they might 15* 346 SUPPLEMENT. CONJUGATION OP THE Primitive Tenses. FIRST INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. INDICATIVE. Present. Present. allant, Past. alle, Present. > — 4-Aller, J to go. je vais, tu vas, ilva, nous allons, vous allez, ils vont, Envoyer, to send. envoyant, envoye, j'envoie, SECOND ACQTTERIR, to acquire. acquerant, acquis, j'acquiers, tu acquiers, il acquiert, nous acquerons, vous acquerez, ils acquierent, BOTJILLIR, to boU. bouillant, bouilli, je bous, tu bous, il bout, nous bouillons, vous bouillez, ils bouillent, L COUEIR, ' to run. courant, couru, je cours, tu cours, il court, nous courons, vous courez, ils courent, Ctjeillik, to gather. cueillant, cueilli, je cueillo, tu cueilles, il cueille, nous cueillons, vous cueillez, ils cueillent, Dormtr, to sleep. dormant, dormi, je dors, tu dors, ildort, nous dormons, vous dormez, ils dorment, Fuir, tojtee. fuyant, fui, je fuis, tu fuis, ilfuit, nous fuyons, vous fuyez, ils fuient, '* MOURER, to die. mourant, mort. je meurs, tu meurs, il meurt, nous mourons, vous mourez, ils meurent, Offrir, to offer. offrant, offert, jWre, tu offres, il offre, nous ofrrons, vous oflrez, ils offrent, Partie, to set out. partant, parti, je pars, tu pars, il part, nous partons, vous partez, ils partent, % Venir, to come. venant, venu, je viens, tu viens, il vient, nous venona, vous venez, ils viennent, V&TIR, to clothe. vetant, vetu, je v£ts, tu vets, il vet, nous v6tons, vous vetez, ils vetent, * The persons and tenses which are regularly derived, are not given in this table. (pages 837 and 838,) the SUPPLEMENT. 347 IKKEGULAK YEEBS. Derived Tenses.* CONJUGATION. IMPERATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Past Definite. Futtjee. Pkesent. j'allai, j'irai, allons, que j'aille, que nous allions, va, allez, que tu ailles, que yous alliez, qu'il aille. qu'ils aillent j'envoyai, j'enverrai, CONJUGATION j'acquis, j'acquerrai, je bouillis, je courus, je courrai, je cueillis, je cueillerai, jedormis, je fuis, je mourus, je mourrai, j'offris, je partis, je vins, Je vtendral, je vfitis, The mode of forming them has been indicated in the Lessons. See, for each tense, •e forences which accompany it. 348 SUPPLEMENT. INFINITIVE, Present. 4 k " \ Falloie, to be necessary. MOTJVOIR, to move. \ Pleuvoir, to rain. ■ POTTVOIR, to be able. -j S'asseoir, ' to sit down. Savoir, to know. Valoir, to be worth. n VOIR, to see. VOTTLOIR, to be willing. PARTICIPLES. Present. Past. pleuvant, plu, pouvant, pu, sachant, su, valant, valu, voyant, vu, voulant, voulu 7 THIRD INDICATIVE. Present. ilfaut, je meus, tu mens, il meut, il pleut, je peux, or puis, tu peux T il peut, je rn'assieds, tu t'assiedSj il s'assied, je sais, tu sais, il sait, je vaux, tu vaux, il vaut, je vois, tu vols, il voit, je veux, tu veux, il veut, nous mouvons, vous mouvez, ils meuvent, sous pouvons, vous pouvez, ils peuvent, nous nous asseyons, vous vous asseyez, ils s'asseyent, nous savons, vous savez, ils savent, nous valons, vous valez, ils valent, nous voyons, vous voyez, ils voient, nous voulons, vous voulez, ils veulent, FOURTH Battre, to beat. . Boire, to drink. CONOLTJRE, to conclude. COTTDRE, to sew. Croire, to believe. CroItre, to grow. ClTIRfl, X to cook. battant, battu ? buvant, bu, concluant, conchy cousant, cousu, croyant, era, croissant, cru, cuisant, cuit, je bats, tu bats, il bat, je bois, tu bois, 11 boit, je conclus, tu conclus, il conclut, je couds, tu couds, il coud, je crois, tu crois, il croit, je crois, tu crois, il croit, je cuis, tu cuis, ilcuit, nous battons, vous battez, ils battent, nous buvons, vous buvez, ils boivent, nous concluons, vous concluez, ils concluent, nous cousons, vous cousez, ils cousent, nous croyons, vous croyez, ils croient, nous croissons, vous croissez, ils croissent, nous cuisons, vous cuisez, ils cuisent, SUPPLEMENT. 849 CONJUGATION. IMPEEATIYE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Past Definite. Fttttteb. Peesent. ilfallut, ilfaudra, qu'il faille, je mus, il pint, je pus, je pourrai, que je puisse, que nous puissions, je m'assis, je m'assierai, je sus, je saurai, je valus, je vaudrai, je vis, je verrai, je voulus, je voudrai, CONJUGATION. je battis, jebus, je conclus, que tu puisses, que vous puissiez, qu'il puisse, qu'ils puissent. sachons, que je sache, que nous saehions, sache, sachez, que tu saches, que vous sachiez, qu'il sache, qu'ils sachent. que je vaille, que nous valions, que tu vailles, que vous valiez, qu'il vaille, qu'ils vaillent. que je veuille, que nous voulions, veuillez, que tu veuilles, que vous vouliez, qu'il veuille, qu'ils veuillent. je cousis, jecrus, je crus, je cuisis, 350 SUPPLEMENT. INFINITIVE. Present. PAETICIPLES. Present. Past. INDICATIVE. Present. ' Dire, to say. Ecrire, to write. Faire, to do, to make. JOINDRE, to join. Lire, to read. Mettre, to put. MOUDRE, to grind. NaItre, to be born. Plaire, to please. Prendre, to take. Eesotjdre, to resolve. Eire, to laugh. Suivre, to follow. Traire, to milk. Vatnore, to conquer. .VlVRE, * to live. disant, ecrivant, faisant, joignant, lisant, mettant, moulant, naissant, plaisant, prenant, resolvant, riant, dit, ecrit, fait, joint, lu, mis, moulu, ne, plu, pris, jedis, tu dis, il dit, j'ecris, tn ecris, il ecrit, je fais, tu fais, il fait, je joins, tu joins, il joint, je lis, tu lis, il lit, je mets, tu mets, il met, je mouds, tu mouds, il moud, je nais, tunais, il nait, je plais, tu plais, il plait, je prends, tu prends, il prend, T&soluand je resous, resous, tu resous, il resout, ri, suivant, suivi, trayant, trait, vainquant, vaincu, vivant, v6cu, je ris, tu ris, ilrit, jesuis, tu suis, il suit, je trais, tu trais, il trait, je vaincs, tu vaincs, il vainc, je vis, tu vis, ilvit, nous disons, vous dites, ils disent, nous ecrivons, vous ecrivez, ils ecrivent, nous faisons, vous faites, ils font, nous joignons, vous joignez, ils joignent, nous lisons, vous lisez, ils lisent, nous mettons, vous mettez, ils mettent, nous moulons, vous moulez, ils moulent, nous naissons, vous naissez, ils naissent, nous plaisons, vous plaisez, ils plaisent, nous prenons, vous prenez, ils prennent, nous resolvons, vous resolvez, ils resolvent, nous rions, vous riez, ils rient, nous suivons, vous suivez, ils suivent, nous trayons, vous trayez, ils traient, nous vainquons, vous vainquez, ils vainquent* nous vivons, vous vivez, ils vivent, ■ SUPPLEMENT. 351 IMPERATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. PAST DEFINITE FUTUEE. Pbesent. je dis, j'ecrivis, jefls, je feral, faisons, que je fasse, que nous fassions. fais, faites, que tu fasses, que vous fassiez, qu'il fasse, qu'ils fassent. jejoignis, jelus, jemis, * je moulus, jenaquis, jeplus, je pris, je resolus, jeris, je suivis, je yalnquls, je vecus, 352 supplement. Defective, or slightly irregular, Verbs. Second Conjugation. Benir has two Past Participles : beni, blessed ; benit, consecrated ; other- wise regular. Defaillir, to fail, is used only in the plural of the Indicative Present, nous defaillons ; Imperfect, je defaillais ; Past Definite, je defaillis, and the Infinitive. Faillir, to fail. Faillant. Failli. Je faux, tufaux, ilfaut, nous faillons, vous faillez, Us faillent. Je faillais. Je faillis. Je faudrai. It is used principally in the Infinitive, the Past Definite and the Compound tenses. Ferir, to strike, is used only in sans coup ferir. Fleurir, to blossom, is regular: in the sense of to flourish, it has the Im- perfect, florissait, and the Present Participle, florissant. Gesir, to lie (ill or dead), has only: il git, nous gisons, vous gisez, Us gisent ; Imperfect, je gisais ; Present Participle, gisant. Hair, to hate, has no diaeresis on the i in the singular of the Present In- dicative and Imperative. Oui'R, to hear. Of this verb, are only used the Infinitive, and Past Parti- ciple, out. Qtjerir, to fetch, is used only in the Infinitive. Saillir, to project, to jut out, conjugated like cueillir ; the third person and the Present Participle only are used. Surgir, to arrive at, is used only in the Infinitive. Third Conjugation. Choir, to fall ; Past Participle, chu ; no other part is used. Dechoir, to fall away, follows the model of voir, except in the Past Defi- nite, je dechus. Present Participle, Imperfect, and Imperative are wanting. E choir, to chance to be, to become due, only used in the third person ; follows dechoir, except Present Participle, echeant. Pourvoir, to provide, follows voir, except Past Definite, je pourvus ; Fu- ture, je pourvoirai. Prevoir, to foresee, follows voir, except Future, je prevoirai. Seoir, to become, is used only in the third person Present, il sied, Us sieent ; Imperfect, il seyait ; Future, il siera. Seoir, to be seated, has only Present Participle, seant ; Past Part., sis. Souloir, to be accustomed, used only in the Imperfect,^ soulais. Surseoir, to suspend, follows voir, except Future, je mrseoirai ; Past Participle, sursis. SUPPLEMENT. 353 Fourth Conjugation. Absoudre, to absolve, see resoudre ; has no Past Definite; Past Parti- ciple, absous, fern, absoute. Accroire is only used with faire. Faire accroire, to make believe. Br aire, to bray; Present, il brait, Us braient ; Future, il braira. Bruire, to roar ; Present Participle, bruyant ; Present, il bruit ; Imper- fect, il bruyait. Circonctre, to circumcise, follows dire, except second person of the Present, vous circoncisez ; Past Participle, circoncis. Clore, to close; Present, je clos, tu clos, il clot; Future, je clorai ; Past Participle, clos. Contredire and the following compounds of dire, viz. dedire, to unsay ; interdire, to forbid ; medire, to slander ; predire, to foretell, have, in the second person of the Present, disez instead of dites. Decoxfire, to discomfort ; Past Participle, deconfit. Eclore, to be hatched, follows clore, is used only in the third person. Frire, to fry; Present, jefris, tu fris, il frit ; Future, jefrirai; Impera- tive, fris ; Past Participle, frit. Maudire, to curse; Present Participle, maudissant; the double s is re- tained in the parts derived from the present participle ; in other re- spects, it follows dire. Suffire, to suffice; Present Participle, suffisant ; Past Participle, suffi ; the derived tenses are formed regularly. Tistre, to weave ; Past Participle, tissu. 354 SUPPLEMENT. List of Irregular Verbs.* Abattre, conjugated as Bat- tre. Absoudre. S'Abstenir, as Yenir. Abstraire, as Traire. Accourir, as Courir. Accroitre, as Croitre. Accueillir, as Oueillir. Acquerir. Admettre, as Mettre. Aller. Apparaitre, as Croitre. Apparoir. Appartenir, as Yenir. Apprendre, as Prendre. Assaillir. Asseoir, as S'Asseoir. S'Asseoir. Astreindre, as Joindre. Atteindre, as Joindre. Attraire, as Traire. Avenir, as Yenir. Avoir. Battre. Benir. Boire. Bouillir. Braire. Bruire. Ceindre, as Joindre. Choir. Circoncire. Circonvenir, as Yenir. Clore. Combattre, as Battre. Commettre, as Mettre. Comparaitre, as Croitre. Complaire, as Plaire. Comprendre, as Prendre. Compromettre, as Mettre. Conclure. Concourir, as Courir. Se Condouloir. Conduire, as Cuire. Confire, as Circoncire. Conjoindre, as Joindre. Connaitre, as Croitre. Conquerir, as Acquerir. Consentir, as Partir. Construire, as Cuire. Contenir, as Yenir. Contraindre, as Joindre. Contredire. Contrefaire, as Faire. Contrevenir, as Yenir. Convaincre, as Yaincre. Convenir, as Yenir. Corrompre, as Rompre. Coudre. Courir. Couvrir, as Ofirir. Craindre, as Joindre. Croire. Croitre. Cueillir. Cuire. Debattre, as Battre. Dechoir. Declore, as Clore. D6confire, as Circoncire. Decoudre, as Coudre. Decouvrir, as Onrir. D6crire, as Ecrire. Decroitre, as Croitre. Se Dedire, as Contredire. Deduire, as Cuire. Defaillir. Defaire, as Faire. Dejoindre, as Joindre. D6mentir, as Partir. Deplaire, as Plaire. Desapprendre, as Prendre. Desservir, as Partir. Deteindre, as Joindre. Detenir, as Yenir. D6truire, as Cuire. De venir, as Yenir. Se Devetir, as Y§tir. Dire. Disconvenir, as Yenir. Discourir, as Courir. Disparaitre, as Croitre. Dissoudre, as Absoudre. Distraire, as Traire. Dormir. Ebattre, as Battre. Ebouillir, as Bouillir. Echoir. Eclore. Ecrire. Elire, as Lire. Emboire, as Boire. Emoudre, as Moudre. Emouvoir, as Mouvoir. Empreindre, as Joindre. Enceindre, as Joindre. Enclore, as Clore. Encourir, as Courir. Endormir, as Dormir. Enduire, as Cuire. Enfreindre, as Joindre. Enfuir, as Fuir. Enjoindre, as Joindre. S'Enquerir, as Acquerir. S'Ensuivre, as Suivre. S'Entremettre, as Mettre. Entr'ouvrir, as Ofirir. Entreprendre, as Prendre. Entretenir, as Yenir. Entrevoir, as Yoir. Envoyer. Equivaloir, as Yaloir. Eteindre, as Joindre. Etre. Exclure, as Conclure. Extraire, as Traire. Faillir. Faire. Falloir. Feindre, as Joindre. Ferir. Fleurir. Forclore. Frire. Fuir. Gesir. Hair. Induire, as Quire. Inscrire, as Ecrire. Instruire, as Cuire. Interdire, as Contredire. Interrompre, as Rompre. Intervenir, as Yenir. Introduire, as Cuire. Joindre. Lire. Luire, as Cuire. Maintenir, as Yenir. Maudire. Meconnaitre, as Croitre. Medire, as Contredire. Mentir, as Partir. Se Meprendre, as Prendre. Mesavenir, as Yenir. Messeoir, as Seoir. Mettre. Moudre. * The verbs in this list which are not referred to a model-verb, will be found in the lists of irregular or defective verbs, pp. 346-353. SUPPLEMENT. 355 Mourir. Mouvoir. Naitre. Nuire, as Cuire. Obtenir, as Venir. Offrir. Oindre, as Joindre. Omettre, as Mettre. Ouir. Ouvrir, as Offrir. Paitre. Paraitre, as Croitre. Parcourir, as Courir. Partir. Parvenir, as Yenir. Peindre, as Joindre. Permettre, as Mettre. Plaindre, as Joindre. Plaire. Pleuvoir. Poindre, as Joindre. Poursuivre, as Suivre. Pourvoir. Pouvoir. Predire, as Contredire. Prendre. , Prescrire, as Ecrire. Pressentir, as Partir. Prevaloir, as Yaloir. Prevenir, as Yenir. Prevoir. Produire, as Cuire. Promettre, as Mettre. Promouvoir, as Mouvoir. Proscrire, as Ecrire. Provenir, as Yenir. Querir, as Acquerir. Eabattre, as Battre. Eapprendre, as Prendre. Easseoir, as S'Asseoir. Eebattre, as Battre. Eeboire, as Boire. Bebouillir, as Bonillir. Eeconduire, as Cnire. Eeconnaitre, as Croitre. | Eeconquerir, as Acquerir. 'Becoudre, as Condre. Eecourir, as Conrir. Eecouvrir, as Offrir. E ecrire, as Ecrire. Eecroitre, as Croitre. I Eecueillir, as Cueillir. (Becuire, as Cuire. I Bedefaire, as Faire. lEedevenir, as Yenir. i Eedire, as Dire. i Bedormir, as Dormir. jBeduire, as Cuire. ;Eeelire, as Lire. : Eefieurir, as Fleurir. lEeluire, as Cuire. JEemettre, as Mettre. Eemoudre, as Moudre. jEenaitre, as Xaitre. ! Se Eendormir, as Dormir. Eentraire, as Traire. Eepaitre, as Paitre. Eepartir, as Partir. Se Eepentir, as Partir. Eeprendre, as Prendre. Eequerir, as Acquerir. Eesoudre, as Absoudre. Eessentir, as Partir. Eessouvenir, as Yenir. Eestreindre, as Joindre. Eetenir, as Yenir. Eetraire, as Traire. Eevaloir, as Yaloir. Eevenir, as Yenir. Eevetir,' as Yetir. Eevivre, as Yivre. Eevoir, as Yoir. Eire. Eompre. Eouvrir, as Offrir. Saillir. Satisfaire, as Faire. Savoir. Secourir, as Courir. Seduire, as Cuire. Sentir, as Partir. Seoir. Servir, as Partir. Sortir, as Partir. Souffrir, as Offrir. Souloir. Soumettre, as Mettre. Sourdre. Sourire, as Eire. Souscrire, as Ecrire. Soustraire, as Traire. Soutenir, as Yenir. Souvenir, as Yenir. Subvenir, as Yenir. Suffire. Suivre. Surgir. Surfaire, as Faire. Surprendre, as Prendre. Surseoir. Survenir, as Yenir. Survivre, as Yivre. Se Taire, as Plaire.. Teindre, as Joindre. Tenir, as Yenir. Tistre. Traduire, as Cuire. Traire. „ Transcrire, as Ecrire. Transmettre, as Mettre. Tressaillir, as Assaillir. Yaincre. Yaloir. Yenir. Yetir. Yivre. Yoir. Youloir. 356 SUPPLEMENT. Government of Verbs. List of verbs that require no preposition before the following infinitive. Affirmer. Aimer mieux. AUer. Apercevoir. Assurer. Avoir beau. Avouer. Compter. Confesser. Considered Courir. Croire. Daigner. Declarer. Deposer. Desirer. Devoir. Ecouter. Entendre. Envojer. Esperer. Faire. Falloir. S'Imaginer. Laisser. Mener. Wier. Observer. Oser. Oui'r. Paraitre. Penser. Pretendre. Pouvoir. Publier. Rapporter. Reconnaitre. Regarder. Retourner. Revenir. Savoir. Sembler. Sentir. Souhaiter. Soutenir. Temoigner. Se Trouver. Valoir mieux. Venir. Voir. Vouloir. List of verbs that require the preposition a before the following infinitive. Abaisser. Aboutir. Acceder. S'Accorder. Accoutumer. S'Accoutumer. S'Acharner. Adherer. Admettre. S'Aguerrir. Aider. Aimer. Amuser. S'Amuser. S'Appliquer. Apprendre. Appreter. S'Appreter. S'Arr6ter. Arriver. Aspirer. Assigner. S'Assujetir. S'Astreindre. S'Attacher. Attendre. S'Attendre. Autoriser. S'Avilir. Avoir. Balancer. Borner. Se Borner. Chercher. Commencer, (or de.) Se Complaire. Concourir. Condamner. Condescendre. Consentir, (or de.) Consister. Conspirer. Continuer, (or de.) Contraindre, (or de.) Contribuer. Convier, (or de.) Couter. Decider, (or de). Se Decider. Defier, (or de.) Demander,(or de.) Demeurer. Depenser. Deplaire. Se Deplaire. Desapprendre. Desobeir. Destiner. Determiner, (or de.) Se Determiner. Disposer. Se Disposer. Donner. Dresser. Eclairer. S'Efforcer, (or de.) Embarrasser. Employer. S'Empresser, (or de.) Encourager. S'Endurcir. Engager. S'Engager. Enbardir. Enseigner. S'Entendre. Essay er, (or de.) Etre, (or de.) S'Etudier. Exceller. Exciter. Exercer. S'Exercer. Exhorter. S'Exposer. Se Fatiguer. Se Fier. Forcer, (or de.) Gagner. Habituer. S'Habituer. Hair. Se Hasarder. Hesiter. Inciter. Incliner. Instruire. S'Interesser. Inviter. Lasser, (or de.) Se Lasser. Limiter. Se Livrer. Manquer, (or de.) SUPPLEMENT. 357 Mettre. Se Mettre. Montrer. Nuire. Obeir. Obliger, (or de.) S'Obstiner. Obvier. S'Occuper, (or de.) S'Onrir. S'Opiniatrer. Parvenir. Passer son temps. Avoir peine. Pencher. Penser. Perdre. Perseverer. Persister. Plaire, (or de.) Se Plaire. Se Plier. Porter. Pourvoir. Pousser. Prendre plaisir. Preparer. Se Preparer. Presenter. Pretendre. Se Preter. Proceder. Provoquer. Eeduire. Se Eeduire. Eenoncer. Eepugner, (or de, Se Eesigner. Eesister. Eester. Se Eesoudre. Eetrancher. Eeussir. Eevenir. Eever, (or de.) Eisquer, (or de.) Servir, (or de.) Songer. Subvenir. Sufiire, (or de.) Surprendre. ) Tacher, (or de.) Tarder, (or de.) Tendre. Tenir. Travailler. Trembler. Trouver. Venir, (or de.) Viser. List of verbs that require the preposition de before the following infinitive. Abstenir. S'Abstenir. Abuser. S'Accommoder. Accuser. Etre accuse. SAccuser. Achever. S'Acquitter. Affecter. Affliger. S'Affliger. Etre alarme. Ambitionner. SAmouracher. Appartenir. S'Apercevoir. SApplaudir. Approuver. Apprehender. Arreter. Attendre, (or a.) Attendrir. Attrister. S' Attrister. Avertir. SAviser. liiamer. Bruler. Conjurer. Cesser. Chagrin er. Se Chagrin er. Charger. Se Charger. Choisir. Commander. Commencer,(or a.) Commode. Complaisance. Conclure. Conjurer. Conseiller. Consentir, (or a.) Consoler. Se Contenter. Continuer, (or a.) Contraindre, (or a.) Convaincre. Convier, (or a.) Convenir. Courage. Craindre. Dec] larger. Decider, (or a.) Decourager. 1 >edaigner. Defendre. Defier, (or a.) Se Defier. Degouter. Deliberer. Demander, (or a.) Se Demettre. Se Depecher. Dependre, (imp.) Deplaire. Desaccoutumer. Desesperer. Se Desesperer. Se Deshabituer. Desirer, (or with- out.) Se Desister. Desoler. Se Desoler. Determiner, (or a.) Detourner. Se Devoir. Differer. Dire. Discontinuer. Disconvenir. Se Disculper. Dispenser. Se Dispenser. Disposer. Dissuader. Divertir. Dommage. Ecrire. Edifier. S'Edifier. S'Efforcer, (or a.) Effrayer. S'Effrayer. S'Emanciper. S'Emparer. Empecher. S'empresser,(or a.) Enjoindre. S'Ennuyer. S'Enorgueillir. Enrager. Entre prendre. Epouvanter. Esperer, (or with- out.) Es^ayer, (or a.) S'Etonner. Etre, (or a.) Eviter. Excuser. S' Excuser. Exempter. S'Exempter. Exiger. Se Facher. Faiblesse. 358 SUPPLEMENT. Faillir, (or a.) Faire bien. Faire mine. Faire plaisir. Faire signe. Faire semblant. Feindre. Felieiter. Se Felieiter. Finir. *Se Flatter. A force. Forcer, (or a.) Se Garder. Avoir garde. Prendre garde. Gemir. Generosite. Gener. Se Glorifier. Rendre grace. Gronder. Se Hasarder, (or a.) Se Hater. Honnetete. Honneur. Impossible. Imprudence. Imputer. S'Indigner. S'Informer. S'Ingerer. Injustice. S'Inquieter. Inspirer. Intention. Interdire. Inutile. Jouir. Jurer. Juste. Justifier. Laisser, (or a.) Louer. Mander. Faire mal. Malheur. Manquer, (or a.) Medire. Mediter. Se Meier. Menacer. Meriter. Se Moquer. ISTegliger. Nier. Notifier. Obliger, (or a.) S'Occuper, (or a.) Offrir. Omettre. Ordonner. Oublier. Pardonner. Parler. Se Passer. Patience. Permettre. Persuader. Se Piquer. Plaindre. Se Plaindre. Plaire, (or a). Politesse. Possible. Preferer, (or with- out.) Prendre sur soi. Prescrire. Presser. Se Presser. Presumer. Prier. Priver. Professer. Profiter. Promettre. Se Promettre. Proposer. Se Proposer. Protester. Punir. Se Rappeler. Etre rassasie. Se Rebuter. Recommander. Refuser, (or a.) Regretter. Rejouir. Se Rejouir. Remercier. Se Repentir. Reprendre. Reprimander. Reprocher. Se Reprocher. Repugner, (or a.) Resoudre. Se Ressouvenir. Retenir. Rire. Risquer, (or a.) Rougir. Se Saisir. Se Scandaliser. Servir, (or a.) Sommer. Se Soucier. Souffrir. Souhaiter, (or without.) Soupgonner. Se Souvenir. Suffire, (or a.) Suggerer. Supplier. Tacher, (or a.) Tarder, (or a.) Tenter. Trembler. Se Trouver. User. Se Vanter. Venir, (or a.) Venir a bout. List of verbs that require sometimes a and sometimes de before the following infinitive. Commencer, (130 and 131, *). Consentir a, takes de when it means not to oppose. Continuer a, without interruption ; continuer de, to express repeated ac- tion ; as, il continue d'y alter. Gontraindre «, to force into action ; contraindre de, to constrain from ac- tion. Decider, Determiner, (p. 295, *). Defier a, to challenge ; defier de, to defy. Demander a, (130 and 131, *). S'Efforcer, to strive, (130 and 131, *). SUPPLEMENT. 359 S'Empresser, to be eager, to hurry, (130 and 131, *). JEssayer, to try, (130 and 131, *). Etre, (266, Rem. 9), (272). Laisser a, to leave ; laisser de, to fail, with a negative. Je vous laisse a penser. H ne laisse pas d'etre honnete. Manquer a, to be wanting in one's duty ; manquer de, to fail (to omit). Obliger a, to impose necessity; obliger de, to oblige. Voire devoir vous oblige a lefaire. Vous in! obliger ez de lefaire. Je suis oblige de lefaire. S'Occuper a, to be occupied, to be engaged in; s'occuper de, to occupy one's self with. Oublier a, to forget how (to lose the habit of ) ; oublier de, to forget (to omit). J'ai oublie a danser. J'ai oublie oVy aller. Plaire a, personal; plaire de, impersonal, (189). Risquer a, transitive ; risquer de, intransitive. Servir, (267). Suffire, (235). Tdcher a, when the action passes from the subject ; tocher de, when it does not. 11 tdche d me nuire. Je tdcher ai de lefaire. Tarder, (235). Venir a, to happen ; venir de, to have just. SHI vient a mourir. Je viens de le voir. Je viens travailler. He/user de, (Voc. 33) ; this verb takes a before manger, boire, &c, de quoi being understood. II lui refuse a manger. Desirer, esperer, souhaiter, are used with or without de before the infini- tive ; better with de, when a strong desire is to be expressed, or un- certainty is implied. Preferer takes de before an infinitive with an accessory. Je prefere de partir avec vous ; but: je prefere partir. 060 SUPPLEMENT. INDEX. In this Index, all the words contained in the Lessons are arranged in alphabetical or- der, each word with a reference : the mere figures refer to the Yocabularies ; the figures in parentheses, to the Sections of the Lessons ; a figure preceded by E, to the Exercise; one, preceded by T, to the Theme. A, 11. Abandon, (278). Abide by a thing, (284). Abjure, T. 74. Able, 26, 67. About, 37, 40. Above, 46, 65. Above all, 40. Absence, 38. Absolutely, 53. Abuse, 66. Accept, 37- Accompany, 37. Accomplish, 70. According to, 58. Accordingly, 69. Account, 58. On account of, 71. To turn to account, 66. Accustom, 63. Acquaint with, 55. Acquaintance, 59. To make acquaint- ance, (123). Acquainted with, 27. Acquainted with a thing, 67. To become acquaint- ed with, (223). Acquire, 52. Acquit one's self, 65. Act, 63. Active, 17. Actual, 69. Actually, 69. Add, 67- Adjust, 50. Admirably, 45. Admire, 23. Advance, 67- Advanced, 72. Advantage, 41. Adversity, 68. Advice, 49, 53. Advise, 33, 59. Afar, 39. Affair, 29. Affect, (245, R. 4). Afraid, (115). After, 27- Afternoon, 19. Afterwards, 25. Again, 65. Against, 49. Age, 40. Aged, 40. Agent, T. 53. Ago, 38. Agree, 50. Agreeable, 47. Agreed upon, T. 58. Agreement, To come to an agree- ment, 50. Aim, 65. Air, 17, 57. To air, (97). To assume airs, (246). Alas, T. 58. Alive, 40. All, 15. At all, 26. Alleviate, 68. Allow, 54. Ally, 62. Almost, 37. Alone, 24. Along, 71. Already, 19. Also, 3. Although, (254). Always, (14). Amass, (70). Ambassador, 42-1. Ambassadress, 42-1. America, 37. American, 37. Amiable, 10. To take amiss, (234). Among, 56. Amount, 61. Amuse, 45. Amusement, 69. To want amusement, 45. Amusing, 59. An, 11. Ancient, 27. And, 3. Anew, 65. Angry, 49. To get angry, 49. To make angry, 49. Animal, 40. Announce, T. 75. Annoy, (284). Answer, 53. To answer, 28. Any, 20. Any thing, 7- Anywhere, 21. Apartment, 11. Apologize, 75. Apothecary, 14. Appeal, (284). Appear, 47. Appearance, 57, 59, (282). Appetite, 56. Apple, 1. Apply, 53. Apply for, T. 53. Appoint, 53. To be appointed, 53. Approve, (281). Apron, 36. Arbitrator, (284). Ardor, 53. Arm, 30. Arm (weapon), 58. Arm-chair, 31. Army, 43. Around, 49. Arrange, 34. Arrest, 58. Arrival, 29. Arrive, 31. Art, 65. Article, 52. New article, 22. Artist, 69. As, 29, 31. As far as, 37. As for, 63. As to, 63. Ascribe, 75. Ashamed, (115). Ask, 7. Ask for, 7- A si ft6T> To fa'll asleep, 53. As long as, 43. As much, 29. As many, 29. Assert, 68. Assiduous, 64. Assist, 61. Assistance, 61. Associate with, 21. As soon as, 38. Assure, 54. Astonish, 41. To be astonished, 41. Astonishing, 64. At, 12, 15. At the house, 18. At last, 41. At least, 68. At most, 44. At once, 64. Attach, 68. Attack, (281). Attend, 73. Attention, 42-1. Attentive, 64. Attract, 59. Attraction, 48. Attribute, 75. Auction, 31. Aunt, 6. Author, 42-2. Authoress, 42-2. Autumn, (153). Avail, (267). Avenge, 75. Awake, 53, T. 5a Axe, 55. Back, 42, (244). Back-room, (244). Bad, 5, 17. Badly, 17. Bag, 51. Baker, 14. Bandbox, 72. Bank, 18. Barber, 49. Bargain, 29, 52, 67. Bark (to), 52. Barrel, 15. Barrier, 65. Base, 45. Base-viol, 45. Basin, 52. Basket, 23. Bass, 45. Battle, 61. To battle with, 74. Be, (35), 54. To be right, wrong, Ac, (115). To be there, 31. To be (of health), 41. To be (Jaire), (245. R. 5). To be in want of, 21. To be as, 72. Bear (to), 23, 63. Beat, 52. Beautiful, (37). Beauty, 48. Because, 17. Beckon, (282). Become, 48, 50. Becoming, 64. Bed, 19. In bed, T. 53. Beef, 6. Beer, 8. Before, 27, (254). Beforehand, 68. Beg, 37. Begin, 23, 57, 62. Beginning, 38. Behave, 44. Behind, 27. Believe, 28. Bell, 60, SUPPLEMENT. 361 Belong, 51. Below, 46, 65. There below, 31. Belt, 50. Bench, 11. Besides, 72. Best, 8, 22. Betray, 75. Better, 8, 22. Between, 58. Beyond, 65. Big, 6. Bill, 56. Bird, 40. Birth, To give birth, 66. Biscuit, 28. Bit, 11. Bite, 52. Bitter, 28. Black, 20. Blacksmith, 14. Blanket, 72. Blind, 17, 35. Bloom, 73. Blossom, 73. Blue, 23. Blunderhead, (267). Board, (265). On board, 29. Boarding-school, 70. Boast, (246). Boil, 71. Body, 41. Bonnet, 2. Book, 1. Bookseller, 10. Boot, 8. Bootmaker, 42-2. Border, 29. Born, To be born, 40. Borrow, 66. Bottle, 12, Bottom, 46. Box, 15, 60. Boy, 4. Brag, (246). Brain, 39. Brains, 39. Bread, 1. Breadth, (225). Break, 13, 71. Breakfast (rtdjeuner). To breakfast, 25. Breast, 39. Breeding (good), (282). Brewer, 42-2. Bridge, 74. Bridle, 6. Bright, T. 71. Bring, 25. To bring near, (217). To bring up, 68. Broad, 29. Brook, 16. Broom, 36. Broth, 10. Brother, 2. Brother-in-law, 32. Brotherly, 72. Brown, 27. Brush, 52. Buckle, 27. Budding, 73. Build, 60. Building, T. 65. Bundle, 60. Bureau, 16. Burden, 51. Burn, 34. Burner, 27. Burst out laughing, (289). Bushel, 24. Business, 29. But, 8. But little, 21. Butter, 7. Button, 27. Buy, 8. By, 26. Good by, <244). By (pas've verbs), (175, Rem.). By and by, 24. By dint of, 50. By the side of, 39. Cage, 40. Calf, 16. Call, 16. Call on, 42-1. Can, 26. Candle, 27. Candlestick, 27. Cake, 9. Cane, 6. Capacity, 74. Card, 45. Care, 42-1. To take care, 42-1,58. To take care of, 73. To care about, 63. Careless, 64. Carpenter, 14. Carpet, 35. Carriage, 6, 42-1. Carry, 15. Carry a th. through, 70. Cart, 51. Cart-load, 51. Carve, 9. Case, 15. In case of, (254). Cask, 24, 29. Cast an eye, (222). Catch a cold, 62. Cause, 54. To cause, 41, (246). Causeway, 65. Cavalier, 72. Cavilling, (284). Cease, 33. Ceasing, Without ceasing, 74, Cellar, 15. Cent, 11. Century, T. 65. Certain {certain). Certainly, 30. Chair, 11. Change (money), 2. Change, T. 65. To change, 49. Character, 34. Charge, To take charge, 65. Charitable, 72. Charity, 72. Charm, 48. Charming, 48. Chase, 21. Chat, 73. Chatter, (284). 16 Cheap, 29. Cheat, 41. Cheerful, 57, 73. Cheerfully, 50. Cheese, 16. Cherry, 23. Cherry-tree, 23. Chest, 33, 39. Chest of drawers, 31. Chicken, 9. Chief place, 60. Child, 5. Chimney, 11. Chimney-piece, T. 11. China, 20. Chocolate, 10. Choice, 22. Choose, 22. Chop, 16. Christian, 72. Christmas, 38. Church, 18. Cider, 28. Cinnamon, 28. Circumstance, 54. City, 18. Clap, 35. Clap of thunder, 47. Clean, 34. To clean, 36. Clear, 47. To clear up, 75. To get clear, 75. Cleave, 72. Clerk, 24. Climate, 48. Climb, 46. Cloak, 20. Clock, 67. What o'clock, (73). Close, 39. Closely, 40. Cloth, 8. Clothe, 57. Cloud, 47. Cloudy, 47. Coach, 6, 42-1. Coach-house, 42-1. Coach-maker, 42-2. Coachman, 6. Coal, 67. Coarse, 6, 28. Coat, 2. Codfish, 20. Coffee, 7- Coffee-pot, 7. Coin, 2. Cold, 25, 30. To be cold, (115). To have a cold, 39, 62, Color, 48, T. 71. Coloring, 65. Comb, 52. Come, 25. Come in, out, 25. Come back, 29. Come in again, 37. Come up, 46. Come down, 46. Come near, (217). Comedy, 35. Comfort, 58. Comfortable, 58. Commendable, 72. Commerce, 29. Commission, 65. Commit, 69. Commodity, 67. Common, 28. Communicate, 69, (233). Compassion, 72. Compassionate, 72. Compensate, 68. Complain, 54. Company, 21. Competition, 51. Completely, 61. Complexion, 31. Composition, 36. Comprehend, 28. Compromise, (287). Conceal, 75. Conceive, 67. Concern, 56, 63. Concert, 18. Conclude, 71. Conduct, 44. To conduct, 27. To conduct one's self, 44. Condition, 58. On condition, 58. Confidence, 65. Congratulate, 74. Conjecture, 68. Conquer, 60, 61. Conscience, 54, 68. Consent, 60. Considerable, T. 67. Consideration, 64. Consist, 74. Consolation, 68. Contain, 51. Contempt, 44. Contented, 17. Contents, 62. Continue, 43. Contrary, On the contrary, 30. Contribute, 75. Conversation, 56. Converse, 72. Convince, 67. Cook, 16. To cook, (245, R. 3), 71. Cooked, 40. Cooking, To understand cook- ing. T. 66. Cool Cfrais). Coolness, 74. Copper, 13. Copy-book, 36. Corner, 26. Correct, 59. Cottage, 46. Cotton, 12. Cough, 39. Counsel, 53. Count, 23. Counterfeit, 32. Country, 18. Countryman, 6. Countrywoman, 6. Country-seat, 59. Courier, 60. Cousin, 6. Cover, 57- To cover, 47. Under cover, 72. Cow, 6. Cravat, 3. Cream, 7. Creation, 11. Creator, 7L 362 SUPPLEMENT. Creature (fellow-), 72. Credit, 29. Crew, 74. Crime, 75. Cross, 59. Crowd, 59. Cruet, 7. Cry, 61. Crystal, 12. Culpable, 54. Cup r 1. Cupboard, 24. Cure, 65. Custom-house, 24. Cut, 9. Cut off, 9. Cutlet, 16. Dainty, 74. Daisy, 71. Damaged, 50, 64. Damp, 34. Dance, 17. Dancing, 17. Dancing-school, T. 37. Danger, 68. Dare, 32. Dark, 47. Dark (of color), 48. To get dark, 75. Darken, 75. Daughter, 4. Daughter-in-law, 32. Day, 19, 60. To-day, 14. Day before, 50. Next day, 60. Day before yesterday, 35. Day of the month, (171). Dead, 40. Deal, A great deal, 20. Dear, 10, 29. Debt, 29. Decanter, 12. Deceitful, (282). Deceive, 41. Decide, 73. Decided, 73. Deck (ship), 74. Decline, 46. Decrease, 67. Deduct, 67. Deep, 48, 60. Defeat, 61. Defect, 63. Defend, 58. Deference, 64. Delay, 63, 64, 67. Delight, 66. Delightful, 73. Deny, 70. Department, 60. Departure, 38. Depend on, 58. Deprive, 74. Depth, (225, *). Derange, 34. Deride, (281). Desert, 74. Deserve, 44. Design, 70. Desire (ddsir). To have a desire, 24. To desire, 7. Despair, 70. Despise, 44. Destroy, 61. Determine, 73. Detriment, 64, 66. Diamond, (282). Die, 40. Difference, 56. Different, 41. Difficult (difficile). Difficulty, 49, 66. Digestion, 56. Diligent, 44. Dine, 19. Dining-room, 31. Dinner (diner). Directly, 53. Dirty, 34. Disagree, (284). Disagreeable, 47. Disapprove, (281). Discharge, (284). Disclose, 75. Discontented, 17. Discourse, 36. Discover, 68. Disease, 64. Disentangle, (284). Dish, 2, 74. Side-dish, 74. Dislocate, (287). Disobey, 70. Disobliging, 44. Dispense with, T. 55. Dispose of, 36. Disposition, 34. Dispute, 56. To dispute, 74. Distance, 39. Disturb, 34. Divide, 56. Do, 26. Do (of health), 41. Do without, 55. Doctor, 14. Dog, 21. Dollar, 11. Door, 25. Door-keeper, 25. Drop, 47. Doubt, 29. Down stairs, 46. Drag, (283). Draw, (222). Draw near, 57. Drawer, 24. Dread, 68. Dream, 72. Dress, 2. To dress, 43, 57. Drink, 28. Drive, 16. Drive back, 25. Dry, 34. To dry, 33. Dry -goods store, 25. Dumb, 17. During, 35. Dust, 36. Duty, 26. Dwell, 18. Dwelling, 59, 62. Dye, 75. Each, 41. Ear, 34. Early, 25. Earn, 40. Earth, 29. Easily, 40. Easy, 51. Eat, 20. Eat supper, 25. Economical, 70. Economy, 70. Edifice, T. 65. Effect, 64. Effort, 70. Egg, 8. Eight, (38). Either, Nor I either, (237). Elder, 40. Eldest, 40. Elegant, 57. Eleven, (38). EH, 51. Else, 26. Elsewhere, 26. Embark, 74. Embarrass, 66. Embarrassment, 66. Embassy, 53. Embellish, (242). Emblem,. 71. Emperor, 43. Empire, 43. Employ, 54. Empress, 43. Emulation, In emulation, 75. Encourage, 74. Encumber, 74. End, 37. To end, (284). Endeavor, 54. Endure, 43, (236). Enemy, 60. Energy, 64. Engagement, 67. England, 29. English, 29. Englishman, 29. Engraver, 39. Engraving, 39. Enjoy, 41. Enjoy one's self, 45. Enlighten, 75. Ennui, 69. Enough, 21. Enrich one's self, 54. Enter, 25. Entirely, 31. Envy, 75. Equal, 56. Equally, 56. Errand, 65. Error, 55, 63. ape, 71. Especially, 40. Establish, 65. Esteem, 44. To esteem, (282). Europe, 37- European, 37- Eve, 50. Even, 64. Evening, 19. Event, 55. At all events, 72, 73. Ever, 19. Every, 15, 41. Everywhere, 26. Everywhere else, 26. Evil, 30. Ewe, 16. Exact, 64. Exacting, 70. Exactly, 44. Examine, 59. Example, 68. Excellent, 8. Except, 66. Except that, (257.) Exception, 66. Execute, 65. Exercise, 72. Exchange, 18. To exchange, 67. Excite, (287). Exclaim, 61. Excuse, 75. Excuse one's self, 75* Exhaust, 74. Expect, 24, 28, 53. Expedient, 41. Expense, 63. Experience, 63, 65. Expert in, 67. Express, 67. Extend, 58. Extinguish, 27. Eye, 30. Face, 30, 71. Fail, 48. Failure, 67. Fair, T. 58. Faith, 75. Fall, 47, 67. Fall out, (284). Fall asleep, 53. False, 32. Fame, 50. Family, 32. Fan, 31. Fancy, (282). Far, 39. Far from, 74, (254). Fare, 74. Farewell, (287). To bid farewell, (234). Farm, 58. Farmer, 58. Farm-yard, 60. Fashion, 22. Fast, 26. Very fast, 71. Fat, 40. Fate, 53. Father, 4. Father-in-law, 32. Fatigue, 74. Fault, 63. It is not my fault, (237). To find fault, (283). Favor, 69. Fear, 32. To fear, 54. For fear, 62, (254). Feast, 38. Feather, 2. Feel, 32. Feel inclined, 69. Feeling, 63. To hurt one's feelings, (233). Feign, 57. Fellow-creature, 72. Fence, (245, R. 3). Few, 21, 31. SUPPLEMENT. 363 Fickle, 69. Field, 18. Fight, 61. To fight, 52. Figure, 60. Fill, 23. Finally, 41. Find, 7. Fine, 10, 28. Finger, 30. Finger -ring, 31. Finish, 22. Fire, 27. Fire-arm, 59. First, 1, 25, 57. Fish, 20. Fisherman, 21. Fishing, 21. Fit, 48. It is fit, 64. Five, (38). Flagon, 12. Flash, 47. Flatter, 44. Flee, 58. Flesh, 66. Flight, 58. Flock, 16. Floor, 1L Flour, 9. Flourish, 73 Flower, 15. Flute, 45. Fly, 71. Fog, 47. Folks, 53. Follow, 40. Follow from, 68. Folly, 54. Food, 74. Foolish, 66. Foot, 34, 46. On foot, (157). For, (prep.), 19, 35. For, (conj.), 25. For all that^ (287). Forbid, 58. Forehead, 30. Foreigner, 22. Foresee, 68. Forest, 5. Foretell, 68. Forget, 53. Forgive, 69. Forget-me-not, 71. Fork, 3. Formerly, 51. Forthwith, 15, 24. Fortune, 53. Fountain, 26. Four, (38). Fowl, 9. Fragrancy, 48. Franee, 18. Frank, 34. Frankly, 34. Freeze, 47. Freight, 74. French, 17. Frenchman., 17. Frenchwoman, 17. Frequent, 23. Fresh, 34. Freshness, 65. Friday, (149). Friend, 7. Friendship, 72. Frighten, 62, (233). To be frightened, 62. Frivolous, 69. Frock-coat, 7. From, 11, 62. From where, 25. From there, 25. From time to time, 64. Front, (244). Front-room, (244). In front of, 71. Fruit, 1. Funds, 67. Furnish, 23. Furniture, 36. Furthermore, 72. Future, 68. In future, 66 Fry, 71. Gain, 40, 67. Gait, 39. Gallery, 60. Game, 45, 59. Garden, 10, 15. Gardener, 23. Garment, 57. Garret, 15. Gather, 52. Gas, 27. General, 10. Generality, 60. Gentleman, 3, (41), 72. German, 37. Germany, 37. Get, Get wet, 36. Get angry, 49. Get rid of, 50. Gift (present, don). New-year's gift, 38. Gilliflower, 7L Girdle, 50. Girl, 4. Give, 12. Give back, 22. Give birth, 66. Give notice, 55. Give up, 66, (282). Give way, (287). Glad, 49. Glance, 59. Glass, 1, 42-L Glazier, 42-2. Glory, 75. Glove, 8. Go, 18. Go in, 25. Go out, 25. Go away, 46. Go for, 24. Go to, 24. Go back, 29. Go on a journey, (157). Go to bed, 41. Go up, 46. Go down, 46. Go too fast, 67- Go too slow, 67. Go over, 73. Go slow about a thing, (283). Going along, 73. Goat, 21. Goblet, 9. God, 54. Gold, 13. Good, 6, 30. Goodness, 21. Good-for-nothing fel- low, 44. Goose, 40. Governess, T. 55. Gown, 2. Grain, 60. Granary, 15. Grand -daughter, 32. Grandfather, 32. Grandmother, 32. Grandson, 32. Grape, 70. Grape-vine, 70. Grass, 46. Gratify, (284). Gray, 27. Great, 1. Green, 23. Green-house, 71. Grief, 63. Grind, 60. Grievous, 64. Grocer, 49. Ground, 29. Ground-floor, 65. Grow, 71. Grow tall, 71. Grow larger, 73. Grow green, 73. Grow young, 73. Grow old, 73. Grudge, To have a grudge, (284). Guard against, 70. Guilty, 54. Gun, 58. Habit, 55. Hail, 47. To hail, 47. Hair, 30. Hair-dresser, 48. Half, 15, 74. To do things by half, 70. Ham, 11, 20. Hand, 30. To hand, 32. Handkerchief, 11. Handsome, 10. Hang, 58. Happen, 48, 50. Happiness, 41. Harbor, 74. Hard, 28, 47. Harp, 45. Has, 3. Haste (to make), 46. Hasten, 46, 61. Hat, 3. Hatchet, 55. Hate, 34. Hatter, 14. Have, (21). Have just, 33. Have (before infin.), 33. Hay, 51. He, 3. Head, 30. To take it into one's head, (283). Head-dress, 48. Heal, 65. Health, 41. Hear, 28. Hear of, (109). Hear from, (109). Hear news, (109). Hear a thing, (109). Heart, 21. Heart-rending, 1i. Heat, 30. Heaven, 29. Heavy, 51. Hedge, 60. Heedless, 75. Height, (225, *). Help, 61. I cannot help. (237). Her, 3, 4, 9, 15. Here, 10, 32. High, 31. Hill, 46. Him, 9, 15. Hinder, 54. His, 3, 4. History, 59. Hold, 25. To hold out, 72. Holiday, 38. Honest, 4. Honey, 55. Honor, 54, T. 67. Hope, 68. Horse, 6. On horseback, (157). Hospitable, T. 73. Hour, 19. House, 15, 18. House-keeping, 70. How, 9. How far, 37- How long, 37. How much, 20. How many, 20. However, 43, 73. However little, (254). Humanity, 72. Humor, 57. Hundred, 39. Hunger, 30. Hunter, 21. Hunting, 21. Hurry, 46. Hurt, 48. Hurt one's feelings, T. 69, (233). Husband 32. To husband, 70. Hyacinth, 71. 1,1. Idle, 44. Idleness, 44. If, 25. If you please, 11. Ignorance, 44. Ignorant, 44. Imagine, (282). Immediately, 15, 24. Impaired, (287). Impart, 62. Impartial, (284). Implicate, (287). Impolite, 44. Importance, 66. Important, 64. Impose, 51. Impose upon, (282). Improve, 52, 65, T. 65. Improve one's self, 53. Imprudent, 75. 364 SUPPLEMENT. Impunity, 70; In, 10, 15, 18, (157). In it, 31. Inch, 60. Inclined, 69. Inclose, 60. Income, 53. Incommode, 66, 68. Inconstant, 69. Inconvenience, 66. Increase, 67, (287). Indebted, 74-. Indeed, 34, 61. Indefatigable, 74. Indian, 40. Indian woman, 40. Indifference, 55. Indispensable, 64. Indolent, 64. Induce, 59, 73, 75. Industrious, 17. Infer, 68. Infinitely, 38. Inform, 53, 55. Inhabitant, 62. Injure, 75. Injury, 66, 75. Ink, 20. Inkstand, 20. Inn v 18, 58. Innkeeper, 58. Innocent, 54. Inquire, 7, 55. Insist on, 70. Inspire with, 66. Instantly, 15. Instead of, 31. Instrument, 45. Instruct, 53, 55. Insure (assurer). Intend, 24, 62. Intelligence, 25. Interest, 63. To interest, 59. To take an interest,62, Interesting, 59. Interrupt, 73. Introduce, 59. Intrust with, 66. Invent, (282). Invite, 62. Involve one's self, 62. Iron, 13. Issue, 68. It, 9, 23. It is, (of weather), 19. Italian, 17. Italian woman, 17- Jest, 72. Jewel, 42-1. Jeweller, 42-2. Jewelry, 42-1. Joiner, 14. Joke, E. 32. Journal, 28. Journey, 39. Joy, 66. Judge, (284). To be a judge of, (282). Judgment, 68. Just, 29, 31, 59. To have just, 33. Just now, 59. Justice, 72. Keep, 25, 45, 70. Keep back, 61. Keep from, 54. Keep up, 72. Key, 12. Kill, 59. Kind, 60. Kindness, 2,1. Kindle, 27. King, 43. Kingdom, 43. Kitchen, 15. Knife, 3. Knob, 27. Knock, 35. To knock, 35. Knot, 50. . Know, 26, 27. Knowledge, 52. Labor, 17. To labor, 19. Lace, 22. Lady, 3. Young lady, 10. Ladies, (41). Lame, 27. Lamp, 27, Land, 29. On land, 29. To land, 74. Language, (102), 71. Large, 1, 6. Last, 1, 24. To last, 43. Late, 25. Lately, 38 Laugh, 52. Laugh one in the face, (281). Laughable, (287). Laughing, (287). Laughter, (287). Law, 41. Lay, 41. Lay waste, 61. Lazy, 44. Lead, 20. Lead-pencil,. 2. To lead, 16, 25. To lead away, 74. To lead back, 25. Leaf, 23. League, 39. Lean, 40. Learn, 27. Learning, 52. Least, 22. Leather, 12. . Leave, 22, 37, 62. Leave off, 33. To take leave, (234). To leave it to one, (284). Lectures (to give), (245, R. 3). Left, 30. To the left, 32. To have left, 63. Leg of mutton, 57- Leisure, 59, 69. Lemon, 28. Lemonade, 28. Lend, 14. Length, (225, *). Less, 19, 22. Lesson, Lest, (254). Let, 22, 49. To let fall, 47. Let us, (218). Letter, 2. Liable, 41. Lie, 41. Lie down, 41. Lie about, (283>. Life, 40. Lift up, 41. Light, 27, 47, 48, 51. To light, 27, 75. Lighten, 47. Lightly, 57. Lightning, 47. Like, 31, 41, 72. To like, 8. To like better, 22. Likeness, (243) Liking, 49. Lily, 71. Linen, 33. Lining, 20. Liquor, 28. Lip, 31. Listen, 16. Little, 1, 21. Live, 18, 40. Living, 40, 74. Load, 51. Loaf, 1. Lodge, 65. Lodgings, 65. Loin of veal, 51. Long, 29, 35. Long time, 35. No longer, 19. To long, 63. Look, 59. To look, 16, 57, 59. Look after, 73. Look cross, (222). Look for, 7. Look over, 73. Look pleased, (222). Look upon, (244). Looking (good), (222). Looking (bad), (222). Looking-glass, 26. Looks (to improve), T. 65. Lose, 43. To lose time, 67. To lose sight of, (282), Loss, 53. At a loss, 67. To be at a loss, T. 72, Lot, 53, 69. Loud, 31. Love, 8, 72. Low, 31. Lower, 67. Lower part, 46. Lucky, 17. Madam, 1, (41). Mahogany, 13. Maid, 4. Mail, 60. Maintain, 68. Maintenance, 71. Make, 26, 41, (200, R.) Make again, 65. Make good (/aire va- loir), T. 66. Make off, 58. Make one's self master of, (281). Make the best of, (246). Make up one's mind, 73= Man, 3. Man of war, 29, *. Old man, 40. Good man, 75. Manage, 73, (283). Manner, 41. In such a manner, (257). Many, 20, 29. Marble, 12. March, (171, R. 3). To march, 26. Mark, 65. Market, 15. Marriage, 50. Married, 65. Marry, 65. Mason, 14. Master, 33. Match, 27, 62. Matter, (114). A small matter, 22. To matter, 63. What matter, 63. No matter, 63. It matters, 64. Me, 16, (65). Meal, 9. Mean, 33. Means, 41, 75. Meanwhile, 73. Measure, 24, 51. Meat, 1, 74. Meddle with, 56. Medicine, 64. Meet, 38. Go to meet, 74. Meet with, 38, 63. Meeting, 54, 72, 74.. Memory, 56. xMend, 33. Merchandise, 15. Merchant, 15, 51. Merchantman, 29, *.. Merit, 44. Merry, 57. Meter, 51. Middle, 26. Mignonnette, 71. Mile, 39. Milk, 7. Mill, 60. Miller, 14. Mind, 32, 4L To have a mind, 24. To make up one's mind, (234). Presence of mind, 74* Mine, 4. Minister, 14. Minute, 19. Mirth, 66. Mischance, T. 73. Mischief-making, (284X Misery, 41. Misfortune, 41, 63. Mislead, 75. Mislay, 75. Miss, (41). To miss, 48. Mistake, 63. To be mistaken, 41. Mister, (41). Mistress, 1, (41). SUPPLEMENT. 365 Mistrust, 66. Mix, 66. Mystery, 75. Modern, 27. Modest, 32. Modesty, 32. Monday, (149). Money, 2. Month, 24. Moon, 41. More, 19, 21, 22, 44. Moreover, 72. Morning, 19, (60). Morrow, 24. Morsel, 11. Most, 22, 6G. Mother, 4. Motion, 62. Motive, 55. Mount, 46. Mountain, 46. Mouth, 30. Mouthful, 74. Movement, 62. Much, 9, 20, 29. Mud, 47. Mug, 9. Music, 17. Musician, 17. Muslin, 20. Must, 24, (173). Mustard, 5. Mute, 17. Mutton, 16. My, 2. Myself, (224). Nail, 5. Finger-nail, 34. Name, 50. To name, 53. Napkin, 36. Narrow, 29. • Nation, 43. Nature, 48. Naval officer, 29, *. Navy, 29. Near, 39. To he near, 74. Nearly, 37, 39, 40. Necessary, 44, 49. Need, Needle, 5. Neglect, 33. Neighbor, 9, 72. Neighborhood, 59. Neither, 4, 11. Nephew, 4. Nest, 40. Never, 19. Nevertheless, (287). New, 10, 21, 24. Newly born, 73. News, 28. Newspaper, 28. New-year's day, 38. New-year's gift, 38. Next, 24. Next day, 50. Niece, 4. Night, 19. Nine, 11. No, 1, 53. Nobody, 14. No longer, 19. No more, 19. No one, 53. Nowhere, 21. Noise, 28, 51. Noisy, 74. None, Noon, 19. Noontide, 19. Nor, 4. Nose, 31. Nosegay, 15. Not, 2, 19. Not much, 22, Not only, 63. Not that, (254). Not yet, 19. Note, 28. Nothing, 7. Nothing but, 8. Notice, 56. To give notice, 55. To take notice, 55. Notwithstanding. (254), (287). Novelty, 22. Now, 69. Number, 24. Nursery -maid, 5. Nutmeg, 55. Oak, 13. Oats, 51. Obey, 70. Obligation, 38. Oblige, 38. Obliged (to be), 24. Obliging, 38, (271). Obscure, 49. Obscurity, (282). Observe, 56. Obtain, 67. Occasion, 54. To have occasion, 54. Occupied (to be), 51. Occupy one's self, 55. Of, 11. Of it, of them, 18. Offer, 37, 38. Offence (to take), 49. Offend, 49. Office, 16. Often, 14. Oil, 7. Oil-cloth, 35. Old, 10, 21, 40. Old age, 40. Old man, 40. Omelet, 16. On, 10. On it, 36. Once, 35. One, 11, 28. One-eyed, 27. Only, 8, 38. Only a little, 21. Open, 25. To open, 25. Opera-glass, 31. Opinion, 49. Opportunity, 54. Opposite, 71. Oppress, 43. Or, 4. Orange, 28. Order, 65. To order, 64. In order that, (254). Other, 11. Others, 53. Otherwise, 41. Our, 6. Ours, 6. Overcast, 47. Overcharge, 67. Overlook, (244). Owe, 22, Ox, 6. Oyster, 20. Pace, 39. Packet, 60. Pain, (117), 44, 63. Painful, (282). Paint, 65. Painter, 42-2. Painting, 31, 65. Pair, 12. Palliate, 75. Pane, 42-1. Paper, 1. Par (at), 67. Parasol, 31. Pardon, 69. Parents, 32. Park, 60. Parlor, 31. Part, 22, 56, 62. To take one's part, (234). To take part in, 62. To take in good part, (234). To part with, (282),50. Partner, 48. Participate, (234). Particular (to be), (283). Partridge, 59. Party, 62. Pass, 26. Passenger, 74. Passion, 60. Past, 68. Pasteboard, 72. Paternal, 72. Patience, To exhaust one's pa- tience, (284). Pattern, 22. Pay, 39. Pay attention, 42-1. Peace, 41. Peaceful (paisible). Peach, 23. Peach-tree, 23. Pear, 23. Pear-tree, 23. Pen, 2. Pencil, 2. Pencil-case, T. 14. Pendulum, 67. Penknife, 36. Pepper, 5. Perceive, 32, 55. Perfume, 48. Perhaps, 54. People, 22, 28, 43, 53. Perfect, 53. Perfectly, 53. Permit, 54. Perplex, 66. Perplexity, (247). Persevere, 70. Persist, 70. Person, 53. Persuade, 67. Pester, (284). Peruse, 73. Pewter, 13. Philosopher, 42-2. Phrase, 33. Physician, 14. Piano, 45. Pick up, 13. Picture, 31, 65. Piece, 11. Pier-table, 26. Pin, 5. Pine-apple, 23. Pinch, 45. Pink, 71. Pistol, 59. Pity, 72. To pity, 37. To take pity, 72. It is a pity, 64. Place, 21, 26, 56. To place, 26. In the first place, 73. Plan, 70. Plant, 23. Plate, 2. Play, 35, 45. To play, 31, 45, (246, R. 4). Pleasant, 47, 73. Please, 43, 48, 49. Pleased, 17, 48. Pleasure, if. Pluck, 52. Plum, 23. Plum-tree, 23. Plunge, 75. Pocket, 11. Poet, 42-2. Poetess, 42-2. Poetry, 72. Polite, 38. Poor, 12. Porridge, 20. Port, 74. Porter, 25. Portrait, 65. Post, 74. Post-office, 60. Post-boy, 60. Potato, 6. Poultry, 9. Pound, 24. Pour out, 57. Poverty, 30. Power, 43. Praise, 75. Pray, 37. Prefer, 22. Preference, 22. In preference, 54. Prejudice, 66. Prepare, 58. Presence (prdsence). Presence of mind, 74. Present, 12, 38, 68, 69. To present, 59. Presently, 24. Preserve, 9. To preserve, 70. Press, 48. Presume, 68. Pretend, 57. Pretention, 66. Pretty, 2, 28. Prevail upon, 73, T. 75. Prevent, 54. Print, 31. Prison, 58. S66 Private, 75. Proceed, 43. Procrastinate, (283). Procure, 67. Prodigal, 70. Profit, 67. At a profit, 67. Progress, 52. Project, 50. Promise, 38. To promise, 37. Promptly, 65. Pronounce, 67. Proof, 68, 74. Proper (it is), 64. Properly, 44. Property, 52, 64. Propose, 62. Prospect, 68. Protest against, (284). Proud, 44. Prove, 75. Provided, (254). Providence, 54. Provident, (271). Provision, 67. Prudence, 63. Prussia, 43. Prussian, 43. Public, 75. Pull, 59. Punctually, 65. Punish, 44. Purchase, 52. To purchase, 52. Purpose, 65. On purpose, 66. To be to no purpose, (283). Pursue, 62. Put, put on, 27. Put back, 55. Put by or away, (283). Put off, 55. Put up with, (284). Quantity, 22. Quarrel, 74. Quarter, 19. Quay, 74. Queen, 43. Question, To be the question, (235). Quiet, 44. Quit, 37. Quite, 29, 31. Quote, 67. Rain, 22. It rains, 19. Raise, 41, (246). Rapidly, 71. Rare, 10. Rather, 28, 45. Rate, 67. Raw, 40. Reach, 50. Within reach, 75. Read, 28. Ready, 41. Reason, 30, 54. Reasonable, 63. Reassured (to be), 62. Receive, 22. Recollect, 56. SUPPLEMENT. [Recollection, 56. Recognize, 37. Reconcile, (284). Recover, 65. Recreation, 49, 69. Red, 23. Reduce, 67. Re-enter, 37. Refer, 66. To refer it to one, x, , (284 >- Refresh, 73. Refreshments, 73. Refuse, 46. Regard to (with), 65. Rejoice, 55. Relate, 59. To relate, 66. Relative, 32. Relieve, (247). Rely upon, 38. Remain, 19. Remainder, 60. Remark, 62. Remedy, 64. Remember, 56. Remembrance, 56. Remind, T. 58. Remove, (217). Renew, (243). Renounce, 66. Rent (loyer). To rent, 49. Repair, 54, 65. Repose, 58. Reproach, 68, 75. Republic, 43. Republican, 43. Repugnant, T. 64. Reputation, 34. Require, 64. Resemblance, 57. Resemble, 57. Reside, 18. Resign, (287). Resolution, 62, 70. Resolve, 71. Respect, 44, 64. To respect, 44. My respects to, (244). Rest, 58, 60. To rest, 58. Restore, 65. Result, 68. Resume, 61. Retain, 61. Return, 22, 29. Reveal, 75. Reverse, 63. Reward, 44. Ribbon, 22. Rice, 55. Rich, 17. Riches, 52. Rid of (to get), 50. Ridicule, 66, (281). Ridiculous, 66. Right, 30, T. 66. On the right, 32. Ring, 35. Ringing, 60. Ripe, 23. Rise, 41, 67. River, 16. Road, 29. Roadstead, 74. Roar, 47. Roasted, 40. Rob, 58. Room, 11, 28. Rope, 29. Rose, 71. Rosy, 31. Round, 30, 49. Rule, 72. Ruler, 72. Rumor, 28. Run, 38. Run away, 58. Run over, 73. Russia, 43. Russian, 43. Sad, 57. Saddle, 4. Saddler, 42-2. Sadness, 63. Safety, 62. Sail, 29. To sail, 74. Under full sail, 74 Sailing-vessel, 29. Sailor, 74. Salad, 6. Sale, 31. Salt, 5. Salt-cellar, 5. Salted, 40. Salute, 38. Sand (sable): Sandbank, 74. Satin, 8. Satisfaction, 65. Satisfied (to be), 53. Satisfy, 49, (284). Saturday, (149). Sauce, 11, 20. Save, 70. Saving, 70. Say, 26. Scale, 52. Scarce, 10. Scarcely, 39. Science, 52. Scholar, 33. School, 33. Scissors, 35. Scold, 47. Score, (164). Scrape (to get into a), (222). Scrape (to get out of s (222). Sea, 29. Seamstress, 12. Season, 38. Seasonably, 61. Seat, 26, 46. Secret, 45. Secretary, 53. See, 26. See again, 61. See here, (113, *). Seek, 7. Seem, 68. Seize, (281). Seldom, 14. Self (my-), (224). Select, 22. Sell, 22. Send, 15. Send back, T. 56. Send for, 24. Sense, 33. Sensible, 75. Sentence, 331 Servant, 4. Serve, 38. Service, 38. Set about, (283). Set in order, 34. Set it again, (287). Set out 37. Settle, 65. Seven, 11. Several, 31. Sea, 60. Shade, 46. Shame, 30. Shape, 30. Share, 56, 69. Shave, 49. Shaved (to get), 49". She, 3. Shed, 16. Sheep, 71. Shell, 52. Shelter, 71. Shepherd, 16. Shepherdess, 16. Shine, 47. Ship, 29. Shipwreck, 67. Shoe, 8. Shoemaker, 14. Shoot, 59. Shop, 49. Shore, 29, 67. Short, 29. Shoulder, 34. Show, 22, 66, (281). Show how, 55. To make a show, (287). Shower, 47. Shun, 33. Shut, 25. Shutter, 25. Sick, 17. Sickness, 64. Side, 39, 62. On this side, 65. On the other side, 65 Side-dish, 74. Sight, 56. At the sight of, 62. Sign (to make a), (282) Silence, 62. Silent, 62. Silk, 8. Silk goods, 25. Silver, 2, 13. Similar, 31. Simple, 57. Since, 38, 51. Sincere, 34. Sincerely, 34. Sing, 17. Singing, 48. Sir, 1, (41). Sister, 3. Sister-in-law, 32. Sit down, 46, 57. Sitting, 46. Situation, 62. Six, 11. Size, 60, (225). Skilful, 17, (282). Skill (talent). Skin, 12. Sky, 29. Slate, 36. I Sleep, 30. SUPPLEMENT. 367 To sleep, 38, 41. Sleigh, 47. Slice, 11. Slippery, 47. Slowly, 26. Small, 1. Smell, 48. To smell, 32. Smiling, 73. Snuff, 35. Snuff-box, 35. Snuffers, 36. Snow, 47. So, 29, 30, 41. So so, 41. So that, 67, (257). Soap, 52. Society, 48. Sofa, 10. Soil (to), 34. Sojourn, 59. Soldier, 43. Some, 20, 31. Somebody, 14. Something, 7. Sometimes, 14. Somewhere, 21. Somewhere else, 26. Soon, 24. Sooner, 45. Sorrow, 63. Sorry, 49. Sort, 60. Soul, 41. Sound, 60. Soup, 10, 20. Spare, 70. Speak, 12. Species, 60. Spectacles, 35. Speech, 36. Spend, 40, 45. Spill, 58. Split, 72. Spoil, 34. Sponge, 36. Spoon, 9. Spot, 36, 56. Spread, 58. Spring, (153), 46. Squander, (287). Square, 26, 30, 42-2. Squeeze, 43. Stable, 16. Stage-coach, 39. Stairs, 46. Stand, 63. Stand instead of, 72. Standing, 58. State, 58. Stay, 19, 58, 59. Steal, 58. Steam, 29. Steamer, 29, *. Steel, 13. Steeple, 60. Step, 39. Stick, 6. Strike, 35. Still, 19, 44. Stir, 71. Stir up, (287). Stock, 67- Stocking, 12. Stocks, 67. Stone, 13. Stop, 58, (113, *). Store, 15. Storm, 47. Story, 59. Story (of a house), 65. Straight, 32. Strand, 74. Strange (stranger). Stranger, 22. Strawberry, 23. Street. 15. Stretch, 58. String, 29. Study, 17. To study, 19. Style, 60. Subject to, 41. To subject to, 71. Submit, (284). Succeed, 50. Success, 55. Succession (in), 72. Succor, 61. Such, 53. Suffer, 43. Suffice, 63. Sufficient (to be), 63. Sugar, 9. Suit, 48. Suitable, T. 67. Summer, (153). Sun, 41. Sunday, (149). Supper (souper). To take supper, 25. Supply, 67. Suppose, 68. Suppose that, (254). Surgeon, (287). Surprised, 64. Surround, 60. Suspect, (283). Suspicion, 66. Sustain, 68, 72. 71. Sweet, 28. Sweetmeat, Sweetness, 69. Sweets, 69. Swell, 72. Sympathize, 72. Syrup, 28. Table, 10. Table-cloth, 57. Tailor, 12. Take, 15, 27. Take a turn, (178). Take away, 27, 38, 68. Take back, 61. Take care, 42. Take it unkindly, (281). Take off, 27. Take place, 31, 50. Take possession of, (281). Talent, 52. Talk, 73, (284). Tall, 1. Tarry, 63. Task, 26. Taste, 22. To taste, 28. Tavern, 58. Tea, 7. Teapot, 7. Teach, 55. Tear, 34. Tell, 26. Tempest, 74. Tempt, 75. Ten, 11. Tendency, 67. Testify, (281). Than, 22. Than (before the infin.), (174, R.). Thank, 11, 21. Thank for a thing, (281). That, 3, 8, 13, 22, 23, (254). That is to say, 43. Thaw, 47. The, L. 1. The one, 13. Their, 6. Theirs, 6. Them, 9, 15. Then, 43, 25. Then (.puis), T. 62. There, 10, 15. There below, 31. There is, 32. These, 6, 8. They, 6. Thick, 60. Thickness, (225, *). Thief, 58. Thimble, 12. Thin {mince). Thine, 6. Thiug, 20. Things, 64. Think, 14, 29. Third (one-), 74. Thirst, 30. This, 3, 8, 22. Thoroughly, 64. Those, 6, 8. Though, (254). Thoughtless, 72. Thousand, (172, R. 2). Thread, 5. Three, 11. Throat, 30. Through, 26. Thumb, 60. Thunder, 47- Thunderbolt, 47. Thursday, (149). Thus, 41. Thy, 6. Ticket, 28. Tight, 29. Till, 37, (254). Time, 19. From time to time, 64. In time, 54. In the mean time, 73. Timely, 61. Time-piece, 67- Tin, 42-1. Tinman, 42-2. Tired, 38. To, 12. To-day, 14. To it, 15. Tobacco, 35. Toilet, 52. Too, 3, 21. Too much, many, 21. Tool, 55. Tooth, 30. Top, 46. Torment, (284). Touch, 30, 45. Tow (in), 74. Towards, 49, T. 58. Towel, 36. Tranquil (to become), 63. Tranquillity, 74. Tranquillize, 74. Translate, 37. Travel, 20. Travel a mile, (157). Traveller, 39. Treachery, 75. Treason, 75. Treasure, 41. Tree, 23. Trial, 68. Trick (to play a), (281). Triumph, 75. Troops, 62. Trouble, 44. To be in trouble, (247). True, 32. Truly, 34. Trunk, 33. Trust, 66. Truth, 33. Try, 28, 54. Tuesday, (149). Tulip, 71. Turf, 46. Turn, 45. To turn, 30. Turn away, 69. Turn into ridicule, (246). Turn to account, 66. Turn upon, 63. Turnpike, 65. Twenty, (174, *). Twice, 35. Two, 11. Ugly, 2. Umbrella, 22. Uncle, 6. Undecided, 73. Under, 10. Under it, 36. Understand, 28. Understand one anoth- er, (282). Understanding, To have an under- standing, (282). Undertake, 37. Undertaking, 50. Undo, 50. Undoubtedly, 54. Uneasy, 63. To grow uneasy, 63. To make uneasy, 63. Unfortunate, 72. Unhappy, 17. Unless, (254), Unlucky, 17. Unpleasant, 47. Unravel, (284). Unreasonable, (282). Unripe, 23. Unworthy, 75. Until, 37, (254). Upbraid (J'aire des re- proches), T. 75. Upon, 10. Upon it, 36. Uproar, 59. Upstairs, 46. Us, 16. Usage, 55. 368 SUPPLEMENT. Use, 55, 72. To be of use, 72. To make use, 55. To use one ill, (287). To use one well, (287) Useless (to be), (283). Usual, 32. Usually, 31, 74. Utter, 67. Vain (in), 75, (283). Valley, 45. Vanquish, 60. Variance (to be at), (284). Variation, 67. Vary, 67. Vegetable, 6. Velvet, 20. Very, 10, 28. Very much, 9. Very soon, 24. Vessel, 28. Vest, 8. Vex, T. 77. Vexed (to be), 49. Viands, 74. Village, 18. Vinegar, 7. Violet, 71. Violin, 45. Virtue (vertu). Virtuous, 17. Vis-a-vis, 71. Visibly, 71. Visit, 62, 73. Voice, 31. Wail, 28. Waiter, 4. Wake, 53. Walk, 26, 45, 71. Walk a mile, (157). Wall, 60. Want, 21. Wanting (to be), 74. War, 10. Warm, 25, 34. Wash, 33. Wash-basin, 52. Wash-stand, 52. Waste (to lay), 61. Wasteful, 70. Watch, 8. Watchmaker, 67. Water, 10. Waving, 73. Way, 29, 71, 75. By the way, 73. This, that way, 26. Way (manner), 41. Wealth, 52. Weapon, 58. Wear, 15, 43. Weary, 45. Weather, 19. Wednesday, (149). Week, 24. Weep, 52. Weigh, 51. Weight, 51. Welcome, (287). Well, (n.), 46. Well, {adv.), 17. Well ! 43. Well and good, 43. Wet, 34, 36. Wharf, 74. What, 2, 3, (48), (165). What, (re?, pron.), 23. Whatever, (256). Wheat, 67. Wheel, 60. When, 51. Where, 10. Wherewith to live, (160). Whether, 25, (254). Which, 2, 4, 23. While, 57. A little while ago, 59. Whip, 6. White, 20. Who, 3, 28. Whole, 17. Whom, 3, 23. Whomsoever, (256). Whose, 14, 23. Why, 17. Wicked, 5. Wide, 29. Widow, 50. Wife, 3, 32. Will, 43. Will you have, 11. Willing (to be), 24. Willingly, 25. Wind, 29. Window, 25. Windows, 42-1. Wine, 8. Winter, (153). Wipe, 36. Wipe off, 36. Wish, 7, 24, 59. Wit, 32. With, 19. Withdraw, 57, 61. Within, 31. Without, 31, 49, (254). To do without, 55. Witness, (281). Wits (to lose one's), (287). Witty, 32. Woman, 3. Wonderfully well, 48. Wood, 5. Wool, 12. Word, 33, 36. Work, 19, 20. Workman, 20. Workwoman, 20. World, 22. Worn, 21. Worth (rich), (174). To be worth, 44. Worthless, 5. Worthy, 75. Wound, 59, Write, 28. Wrong, 30. Yard, 10. Yard (measure), 51. Year, 20. Yellow, 23. Yes, 1. Yesterday, 35. Yesterday morning, Q, Yet, 19. And yet, 73. Yield, (282). Yonder, 31. You, 2, 16. Young, 4. Young lady, 10. Your, 2. Yours, 4. Youth, 40. Zeal, 53. THE END. The attention of School Committees, Superintendents, principals jf Aeademies, HIgnaenooia and Teachers, is invited to the following valuable Sclwol Books, embracing some of the best and most reliable in the United States. NORMAL SERIES OF SCHOOL BOOKS PUBLISHED BY SHELDON, BLAKEMAN & CO., 115 NASSAU STREET, NEW YORK. STODDARD'S ARITHMETICAL SERIES, By John F. Stoddard, A. M., President of the University of Northern Pennsylvania COMPRISING THE JUVENILE MENTAL ARITHMETIC, 12* cents, 72 pp., for Pri- mary Schools, to precede THE AMERICAN INTELLECTUAL ARITHMETIC, 164 pp., an ex- tended work, designed for Common Schools, Seminaries, and Academies, 20 cents. STODDARD'S PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC, half-bound, which embraces every variety of exercises appropriate to written Arithmetic, 40 cents. STODDARD'S PHILOSOPHICAL ARITHMETIC, a higher work for Colleges and advanced Classes in Union Schools, Seminaries and Academies, 60 cents. jgS» This Arithmetic has neither Rules, Answers, nor Key. The first two numbers of the series constitute a complete treatise on the subject of Men- tal or Analytic Arithmetic. The last two are no less thorough in their treatment of Practical or Written Arithmetic. The series, as a whole, by a truly progeessive arrangement and classification of examples, including the various kinds and combinations in compound and complex ratios, or " Double Position," original methods of computing interest discount and percentage in all their variations, together with a variety of Algebraic exercises, is carefully designed to conduct the learner from initiatory steps, by an easy and gradually progressive system, to the moro advanced attainments in Mathematical Science. The arrangement of " The Philosophical Arithmetic," without " Rules, Answers or Key," in which the examples are met with in the same manner as in practical business life, is adapted to the use of advanced classes 1n ail Schools where there is a desire to take an inde peDdent course, and prove the scholars master of the subject. jfe§- Such a work has long been solicited by the most able and prominent Teacher* throughout the country. A whole volume of the most exalted recommendations of this series of Arithmetics, from the best Educators in all sections of the country, who have used them, can be shown. Tha foflawinar will be sufficient for the ©resent purpose. Books Published by Sheldon, Blakeman Sf Co. Messes. Sheldon, Blakeman& Co.: Nw York, April 8d, 1S56, ( Ar?Wt^'^t th ™}7° u f0 F ? avln g called our attention to Professor Stoddard's W ™ * % S ' **&* examin ™g the copies with which you furnished us Si J q1 v S2f/ ^ mendati0 . 11 - ., Jt is much more ^™^, and m^mo^^JrSJ TducaC ofyoutn! C ° mm6n M '°?-; ^ JuT vr h n aU Xt a^sss tojr* * •"* 8nd ™ t,5r better th>n most — Tours respectfully, ' A. S. BKIGHAM. Books Published by Sheldon, Blakeman <$r Co. TESTIMONIALS FROM THE STATE OP NEW YORK, NEW YORK CITY SCHOOLS. I hare examined with much pleasure a work entitled " Stoddard's American Intellectual Arithmetic." It closely resembles in the nature of the exercises Colburn's Mental Arith- metic, a work that has met with the unbounded approbation of the ablest teachers in the country I observe that Stoddard's contains many decided improvements on Colburn's ; it is more systematic in its arrangement, passing from what is easy, more gradually to what is difficult ; some very important omissions are supplied, and very considerable additions in Interest, Discount, Percentage, etc. I see that it is also adapted to Federal Money. It seems to me to be the best book on Intellectual Arithmetic now in use, and I hope for the good of education it will be used in every school where Arithmetic is taught. DAVID PATTERSON, M. D., Principal of Public School No. 3, and one of the Teachers of the Male Normal Scho«i New York, July 26, 1853. Concurred in by HENRY KIDDLE, Principal P. S. No. 2. P. D. DEMTLT, Principal W. S. No. 34. H. FANNING, « No. 13. N. P. BEERS, " No. 15. C. W. PEEKS, " No. 4. E. McELROY, " No. 32. A. MURPHY, " No. 17. SAML. ST. JOHN, " No. 26. New York, July 13, 1853. After a careful examination of " Stoddard's Practical Arithmetic." I have no hesitation m pronouncing it a work of very superior merit. The brevity and clearness of its definition: and rules, its lucid analysis of every operation, and the great variety of its examples com prising almost every possible combination of arithmetical principles, render it one of the beet bookf to discipline the mind of the scholar, in mathematical reasoning, I have ever seen. HENRY KIDDLE, Prin. P. S. No. 2. I entirely concur with Mr. Kiddle in his opinion of "Stoddard's Practical Arithmetic." H. FANNING, July 15, 1853. Principal P. S. 13. I also concur with Mr. Kiddle in his opinion of " Stoddard'3 Arithmetic." DAYDD PATTERSON, Prin. P. S. 3. I coneur in the above. GEO. MOORE, W. S. 10. BROOKLYN SCHOOLS. Having submitted " Stoddard's Intellectual Arithmetic " to the practical test of the school room, we have no hesitation in expressing a strong preference for it over all Text-books on the subject. The author has taken a decided step in advance of those who have preceded him ; and his labors are likely to do much towards popularizing a study, the importance of which as a mental discipline can hardly be over-estimated. The works formerly in use were deficient of systematic arrangement, were neitber gradual enough in their transitions, nor sufficiently comprehensive and varied as regards their examples. Stoddard's on the other hand, is an eminently practical book ; philosophical in its arrangement, natural an 1 lucid in its analysis, original in its design, adapted at the commencement to the compre- hension of beginners and carrying the pupil by easy inductive steps through the most com plicated operations : it seems invulnerable to criticism, and leaves little or nothing to b accomplished by future authors on this subject. The examples are numerous and varied, embracing all cases likely to arise in business ; and there are not less than fifty pages of questions capable of Algebraic solution. The Chapters on Percentage, Interest and Discount, are worthy of special commendation. In these the author has an entirely original plan, which enables the pupil to solve mentally, with perfect ease, questions which, without this drilling, few are able to manage even on the slate. In view of these striking and excellent features, we warmly commend Prof. Stoddard' j work to all who are interested in the education of youth. S. C. BARNES, Principal P S. No. 4. GEO. H. STEBBLNS, Principal P. S. No. 12. JOSIAH REEVE, " No. 8. F. D. CLARKE, « No. 3. J. T. CONKLTNG, " No. 6. CHAS. H. OLIVER, * No. 11 . DAVID SYME, «« No. 6. PETER ROUGET, " »o. 10. A. B, CLARKE, j No, 13. E, C. SEYMOUR, * No. X. B / ^IS%^ Books Published by Sheldon, Blakeman 5f Co. ^f *f WEBBS SEMES OF NORMAL READERS. & % O 9' NORMAL PRIMER, Beautifully Illustrated, 12mo. 24 pp. Paper covers 5 cents, stiff covers 6 cents. PRIMARY LESSONS, a Series of Cards to be used in connection with No. 1. Price one dollar per set. NORMAL READER, No. 1. 12mo. 90 pp. 12* cents. NORMAL READER, No. 2. 12mo. 168 pp. 25 cents. NORMAL READER, No. 3. 12mo. 216 pp. 37* cents, NORMAL READER, No. 4. 12mo. 312 pp. 50 cents. NORMAL READER, No. 5. 12mo. 490 pp. 75 cents. These Readers are used in the principal cities and Tillages throughout the United State*, and are rapidly coming into use in the smaller towns of the country. Their merits have been fairly tested, and they have universally been pronounced superior to any series of Rea- ders extant, not only for the improvement in the system of teaching, which is the word method ; but also in the high moral tone and inspiriting character of the pieces selected. The author, Mr. Webb, was recently from the State Normal School, at Albany. They are the best Practical Readers that have come under my notice ; they are all and evert thdtg they should be. Hon. S. S. RANDALL, Deputy State Supt. Com. Schools. Webb's Readers are the best books of their kind for our schools. D. M. CAMP, Ex-Governor of Vermont. I am happy to command Webb's Readers to the favorable regard of all Educators. J. R. BOYD, Author of Rhetoric, Moral Philosophy, &c. We have used " Webb's Normal Readers," land believe them superior to any with which we are acquainted, and would cheerfully recommend their general adoption to all of our tchools. ROSMAN INGALLS and E. S. INGALLS. teachers of Select School. Having examined " Webb's Normal Readers," we believe them to possess many advanta • ges over any other series of Readers which has come under our notice, and would therefore recommend their introduction into the schools of Binghampton. A. D. STOCKWELL, A. W. JACKSON, Trustees of District No. 2. GEORGE PARK, R. S. BARTLETT, Trustees of District No. 1. T. R. MORGAN, WM. E. ABBOTT, Trustees of District No. 4. Dear Sir — I have examined " Webb's Normal Readers," and consider the system superior to any now in use. Respectfully yours, H: G. PRINDLE, Town Supt. Common Schools, Norwich. Sir— I have examined, with considerable care " Webb's Series of Readers," and can cheer- ftlly recommend them, as in my opinion, superior to any others with which I am acquainted. Yours, &c, MARSENA STONE, Pastor Baptist Church, Norwich. At a meeting of the Town Superintendents of the County of Chenango, held in the village of Norwich, on the 16th of August, the following Resolution was adopted :— Resolved, That we consider the uniformity of text books a matter of infinite importance to our common schools ; and believing " Webb's Normal Readers," to be superior in many re- spects to any extant, for teaching the principles of reading and instilling sound moral prin- ciples in the mind of the scholars, we therefore recommend their general adoption in the pcliools of the county. FROM THE CITY SUPERINTENDENT OF SCHOOLS, UTICA, N. Y. Dear Sir — Having somewhat carefully examined " Webb's Normal Readers, " I have no hesitation in saying I consider them to rank high among the best Practical Readers that have come under my notice. We have lately introduced two numbers into some of our public schools of this olty, which have thus far given good satisfaction D. S. EEFFRQN". C Deacidified using the Bookkeeper procJ Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide | Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 PreservationTechnologies A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive Cranberry Township, PA 16066 (724)779-2111 LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 003 122 464